68P02901W37

For:cll
Printed on:Mon, Jun 24, 2002 07:41:32

From book:68P02901W37-A-UK-01
Document:tabs
Last saved on:Mon, Jun 24, 2002 07:41:18
Document:GSR-GMR front
Document:cover
Document:spine
Document:spine2
Document:insidecover-legal
Document:toc
Document:Introduction
Document:Warnings and Cautions
Document:Manual information
Document:tabs
( ...)
CATEGORY 121 CATEGORY 323 CATEGORY 423 CATEGORY 523 INDEX
SYSTEM INFORMATION TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
GSM-100-020
Manual Revision
GMR-01
68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
Motorola manual
affected
Incorporate this GMR only in the manual number and version listed below:
68P02901W37-A Service Manual: BTS
Problem reports
This revision provides a fix to the following problem reports:
SR 48373.
SR 37402.
SR 44799.
SR 43431.
SR 1004346.
Reason for
revision
This revision provides additional and updated information as follows:
Category 121, Chapter 2, Power consumption note.
Category 323, Chapter 3, DRIX3 compatibility.
Category 323, Chapter 3, GDP, CRC-4 error checking.
Category 323, Chapter 4, DAB, switch settings for use with BBBX.
Category 423, Chapter 1, Optical fibre handling.
Category 423, Chapter 2, Optical fibre installation.
Category 523, Chapter 3, Air filter replacement.
Category 523, Chapter 3, Optical fibre maintenance.
Category 523, Chapter 4, Optical fibre replacement.
Action
Remove and replace pages in the Manual as follows:
Remove Insert
All pages between the clear acetate All pages of the GMR between the
front sheet and the blank backing front sheet and the blank backing
sheet, remove from binder. sheet, insert into binder.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A GMR Page 1
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Obsolete pages
Destroy all obsolete pages. Do not destroy this page.
Completion
On completion of the Manual Revision, insert this Manual Revision sheet in the front or
back of the manual, for future reference.
Service Manual: BTS

GMR Page 2 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
Cellular Infrastructure Group
GSM-100-020
SERVICE MANUAL
BTS
GMR-01
68P02901W37-A
GSM-100-020
SERVICE MANUAL
BTS
GMR-01
68P02901W37-A
SERVICE MANUAL
BTS
GSM-100-020
Service Manual
BTS
Motorola 19932001
All Rights Reserved
Printed in the U.K.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A i
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Copyrights, notices and trademarks
Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other
countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the
exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any
copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document
may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license
agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by
law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any
means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use
of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products
described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this
document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any
person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application
or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent
rights of others.
Trademarks
and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.

M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.
All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Service Manual: BTS

ii 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Contents
Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Resolution of Service Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Important notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Beryllium health and safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Motorola GSM manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
GMR amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
GMR amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Category 121
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
External features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cabinet description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Door and internal labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Labelling table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 2
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DRAM battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Frequency band characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Transceiver transmit output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A iii
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Category 323
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Base station unit shelf assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
BSU numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Power distribution unit components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
BTS6 (48/60 V) cabinet cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Service Manual: BTS

iv 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
BTS4 differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
DRCU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
BTS5 differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
DRCU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Chapter 2
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BTS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Receive frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Internal RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
External RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A v
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
BTS transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transmit frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Receiver front end shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DPP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DPP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Low noise amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Original LNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
High sensitivity LNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Passive splitter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
6 way splitter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Receiver matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Receiver matrix module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Transmit combiner shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Hybrid combiners with Tx BPFs in BTS4 or BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Hybrid combiners with Tx BPFs in BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Hybrid combiners with a Tx BPF in BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
End view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tx BPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
RTC fitted in TC shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Service Manual: BTS

vi 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
CCB 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CCB combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
DRCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
View of DRCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DRCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
DCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
DCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
DCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DEQB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DRCUII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
View of DRCUII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
DRCUII front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
RCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Four equalization blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Baseband signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
V RSSI indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
AGC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A vii
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
DRCU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
View of DRCU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
DRCU3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
SCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
AGC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SCU900 and SCU1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
View of an SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
SCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SCU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DRIM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Clock recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DPC on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DPC on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
DPC firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Equalisation blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Signal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Service Manual: BTS

viii 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Transceiver control unit (TCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Transceiver carrier frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
TCU circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
View of a TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Front panel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
TCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
TCU input/output diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
TCU receiver board detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Traffic and control channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Digital processing and control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
TCU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Data specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Downlink (Tx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Uplink (Rx) digital processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
DPC firmware tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Processing and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Transceiver station manager (TSM) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
TSM functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Transmitter details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Transmitter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Control driver board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Power amplifier board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
External equipment cabinet or rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Quadraplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Receiver multicoupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Large multicoupler extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Multicoupler extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Distributed multicoupler extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
2-way (6dB) splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6 dB attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Receiver extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Chapter 3
Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A ix
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
BSU and RXU shelf diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Module front panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Full size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
BTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DRIM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Brief description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Reference oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Reference dividers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Reference encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Reference fail detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Clock control/alarm logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Buffered test ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
GCLK diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
GPROC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Troubleshooting and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
BTS and BSC GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
RXCDR GPROC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Flash EPROM daughter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
GPROC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Service Manual: BTS

x 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
GPROC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
GPROC2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
BTS and BSC GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
RXCDR GPROC2 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
GPROC2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
KSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Timing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Switchbound TDM interface structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Expansion switchbound highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Timeslot interchange (TSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Connection RAM control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Three-party conference (TPC) memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fixed/dynamic pattern registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Outbound selection MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Highway monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Serial interface logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Interconnected KSWs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
General features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Transcoded environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
MSI diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
MSI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
MSI2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Transcoded environment (E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Transcoded environment (T1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
MSI2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xi
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
TSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Switchbound TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
The DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Outbound selection multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Highway monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
TSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
TSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
TSW extension between cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
XCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
XCDR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Subrate multiplexer modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
XCDR diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
E1/T1 Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
CRC-4 Error checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Digital crosspoint switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
GDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Half size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
BBBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
BBBX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
BBBX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Service Manual: BTS

xii 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
CLKX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
DRIX3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
DRIX compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
DRIX3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
DRIX3 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
KSWX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Local LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Extended LAN data switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Bus arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Redundant LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Shelf ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
LANX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PIX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Chapter 4
Power, fans & interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Cabinet power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xiii
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
IPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
IPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Power converter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Power converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
PCU description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
PCU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
PC module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
DAB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Fuses and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Switch settings (BTS6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fuses and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Fuse protected circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Serial bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
48/60 V status inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
BTS4 (+27 V) status inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
PDB and AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
AIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
AIB view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PDB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PDB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BSSC with PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Service Manual: BTS

xiv 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
BTS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Type 43 interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
T43 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
T43 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Balanced line interconnect board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
BIB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
BIB connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Category 423
Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tool kit one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tool kit two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cabinet dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Storage environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Positive earth BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Negative earth BTS cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Backup power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Handling optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Protection of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cleaning of fibres and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fibre connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Minimum bend radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xv
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Before the visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Arriving at the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rubbish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Safety on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
BTS4 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Key to BTS4 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BTS5 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Key to BTS5 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
BTS6 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Key to BTS6 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Chapter 2
Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Lifting cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transient/ lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Anchoring the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installing the cabinet air deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BTS4 and BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
BTS6 interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Service Manual: BTS

xvi 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Power and earth cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Power cables for ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Power cables for +ve earth cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Installing power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Connecting RF cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Separate transmit antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Separate receive antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Common antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Installing DRCU3s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Installing TCU modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Installing a preselector with a 6-way splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Installing the dual path preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Installing the passive splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Installing the diversity receive extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xvii
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Installing the hybrid combiner and power load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Installing the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Five-cavity RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Four-cavity RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Installing the cavity combining block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Introduction to CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Preparation for fitting CCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Omni configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Sector configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Installing the transmit bandpass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Installing the transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Installing digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Factory installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Installing DRIX3 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Installing BBBX modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Optical fibre installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Polymer fibre optic cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Glass fibre optic cable installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Installing the control signal cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Inter-cabinet fibre optic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
E1/T1 line connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
End user I/O device cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
PIX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
PIX connector details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
T43 to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Service Manual: BTS

xviii 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
BIB to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Chapter 3
Decommissioning the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Decommissioning a BTS cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BTS checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Category 523
Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 2
General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
General procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Test and repair equipment lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Test equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Repair equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
General repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Man machine interface (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
MMI uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Locating faulty cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xix
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Required tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Connecting the LMT to a GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Setting up the MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Changing the security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Identifying the faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Equipment safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Checking the status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Resetting and re-initializing a site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Chapter 3
Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Air filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Air filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cleaning cabinet air filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cleaning of fibre optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 4
Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using the MMI to change device status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Taking a device out of service (OOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Unlocking a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Swapping devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Replacing the air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Interface board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Replacing an interface board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Service Manual: BTS

xx 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Removing a Tx BPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installing a Tx BPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Initializing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Replacing CLKXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Replacing CLKXB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Non-redundant CLKX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Replacing the CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Dual path preselector replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Removing a dual path preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Installing a dual path preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Low noise amplifier replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Removing a low noise amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Installing a low noise amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Radio unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Disconnecting the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Removing the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Replacing the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Powering up the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Resetting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Replacing the DRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Replacing the DRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
DRIX board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Replacing the DRIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Disconnection at DRIX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Connection procedure at the DRIX board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Disconnection at the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Connection at the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
General fibre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fibre optic cable replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Replacing fibre optic cables in BTS 4/5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Return to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Replacing fibre optic cables in a BTS6 cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xxi
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Removing the duplexer or quadraplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Installing the duplexer or quadraplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Replacing a fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Removing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Installing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Redundant GCLK module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Replacing a redundant GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Non-redundant GCLK replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Replacing a single shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Replacing a multi-shelf configuration GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
GPROC/GPROC2 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Redundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Nonredundant GPROC considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Before going to the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Locating the faulty GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Removing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Installing the GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Hybrid combiner and power load replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Removing the hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Removing the power load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Installing the power load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Installing the hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Redundant KSW or TSW replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Nonredundant KSW or TSW module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Redundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Replacing KSWX A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Service Manual: BTS

xxii 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Nonredundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Illustration and indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Redundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Nonredundant LANX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
MSI replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Nonredundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Redundant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
PIX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Replacing the PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Power supply module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Replacing a nonredundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Replacing a redundant power supply module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
XCDR replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Nonredundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
GDP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Non-redundant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Locating the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Removing the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Installing a RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Replacing a single cavity in an RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Procedure criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Removing the cavity filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Installing the cavity filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xxiii
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Replacing the RTC control processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Removing the control processor board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Replacing a cavity combining block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Preparation for CCB removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Removing a CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Refitting a CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Removing and replacing a receiver matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Before beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Removing a receiver matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Installing a receiver matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Replacing a power converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Removing a power converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Installing a power converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Chapter 5
Miscellaneous repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Miscellaneous repair procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Obtaining replacement authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Removing and replacing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Removing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Installing a circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Procedure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Removing the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Installing a new board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Replacing the BSU digital cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Removing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Installing the cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Service Manual: BTS

xxiv 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
DRAM battery backup fuse failure alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Alarm level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
OMC actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
RFI finger gasket replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Removing the old gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Installing the new gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Fan replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I1
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A xxv
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Service Manual: BTS

xxvi 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 Issue status of this manual
Issue status of this manual
Introduction
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.
Version
information
The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue:
Manual Date of Remarks

issue issue
O 29th Aug 97 Original issue
A 3rd Aug 98 Issue A
Resolution of
Service Requests
The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:
Service GMR Remarks

Request Number
SR33249 N/A RTC to CCB upgrade
SR36710 N/A DRCU, DRCUII & DRCU3 power output changes
SR33712 N/A Removal of equip_device command
SR48373 GMR-01 Inclusion of power cosumption note
SR37402 GMR-01 GDP, CRC-4 error checking
SR44799 GMR-01 Air filter replacement
SR43431 GMR-01 Supplementary fibre optic information
SR1004346 GMR-01 DAB, switch settings for use with BBBX
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 1
GMR-01
General information GSM-100-020
General information
Important notice
If this manual was obtained when you attended a Motorola training course, it will not be
updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it
was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software
release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of
General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) manuals are intended to
instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the
Motorola GSM equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel
engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.
WARNING
Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance
instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by
Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained
through such training.
About this
manual
This manual contains the general system information; technical description of the
hardware elements; maintenance procedures for field engineers or technicians to follow;
and installation and decommissioning information for the BTS4, BTS5 and BTS6
equipment in Motorola GSM900 and DCS1800 systems.
The objectives are:
To convey the features and operation of all components.
To understand installation, commissioning, base site integration and repair
procedures.
The procedures presume that operators at the Operations and Maintenance Centre
(OMC) have been able to diagnose a problem, and have despatched the engineer or
technician to the site to try and fix the problem from there.
Many chapters in this manual are also used within courses.
Service Manual: BTS

2 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 General information
Cross references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and section
names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text.
This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are
divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of
each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola GSM manuals to represent keyboard
input text, screen output text and special key sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental
variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:
CTRL-c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT-f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.
| Press the pipe symbol key.
CR or RETURN Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is
identified with the symbol on both the X terminal and
the SPARCstation keyboards. The SPARCstation
keyboard Return key is also identified with the word
Return.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 3
GMR-01
First aid in case of electric shock GSM-100-020
First aid in case of electric shock
Warning
WARNING
Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is
broken.
Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating
material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.
Artificial
respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration.
Send for medical assistance immediately.
Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration,
carry out the following:
1. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn.
2. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, cover
the wound with a dry dressing.
3. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.
Service Manual: BTS

4 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 Reporting safety issues
Reporting safety issues
Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances.
Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises:
1. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.
2. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.
3. Report the problem directly to GSM Customer Network Resolution Centre
+44 (0)1793 565444 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax
+44 (0)1793 430987 (fax).
4. Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network
Resolution Centre.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 5
GMR-01
Warnings and cautions GSM-100-020
Warnings and cautions
Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all
manuals of the Motorola GSM manual set.
Warnings
Definition
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life,
physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for
example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.
Example and format
WARNING
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.
Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or
unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Cautions
Definition
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, or individual items of
equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.
Example and format
CAUTION
Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing
Motorola base stations.
Service Manual: BTS

6 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 General warnings
General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and
maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to
comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola GSM
manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the
equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these
requirements.
Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning
labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or
obscured in any way.
Specific
warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment and
within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when
working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrations
and on the equipment.
High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac single
phase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areas
where the ac supply power is present must not be approached until the warnings and
cautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with.
To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolator must be
set to off and locked.
Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the
Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislation
which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.
RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipment
when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna
connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated
cavities or feeders.
Refer to the following standards:
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.
CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High
Frequency (10kHz to 300GHz).
Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser
radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic
cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 7
GMR-01
General warnings GSM-100-020
Lifting
equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent
responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where
provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be
manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations
1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which
the equipment is used.
Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment.
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or
perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt to
ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.
Toxic material
Certain Motorola equipment incorporates components containing the highly toxic material
Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if:
Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, or
a wound.
The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled.
Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.
See the Beryllium health and safety precautions section for further information.
Service Manual: BTS

8 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

Introduction
This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. It
should be installed and maintained only by trained technicians. Licensees of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) using this equipment are responsible for insuring
that its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations designed to limit human
exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the American National Standards Institute
IEEE Standard C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.
Definitions
This standard establishes two sets of maximum permitted exposure limits, one for
controlled environments and another, that allows less exposure, for uncontrolled
environments. These terms are defined by the standard, as follows:
Uncontrolled environment
Uncontrolled environments are locations where there is the exposure of individuals who
have no knowledge or control of their exposure. The exposures may occur in living
quarters or workplaces where there are no expectations that the exposure levels may
exceed those shown for uncontrolled environments in the table of maximum permitted
exposure ceilings.
Controlled environment
Controlled environments are locations where there is exposure that may be incurred by
persons who are aware of the potential for exposure as a concomitant of employment, by
other cognizant persons, or as the incidental result of transient passage through areas
where analysis shows the exposure levels may be above those shown for uncontrolled
environments but do not exceed the values shown for controlled environments in the
table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.
Maximum
permitted
exposures
The maximum permitted exposures prescribed by the standard are set in terms of
different parameters of effects, depending on the frequency generated by the equipment
in question. At the frequency range of this Personal Communication System equipment,
1930-1970MHz, the maximum permitted exposure levels are set in terms of power
density, whose definition and relationship to electric field and magnetic field strengths are
described by the standard as follows:
Power density (S)

Power per unit area normal to the direction of propagation, usually expressed in units of
watts per square metre (W/m2) or, for convenience, units such as milliwatts per square
centimetre (mW/cm2). For plane waves, power density, electric field strength (E) and
magnetic field strength (H) are related by the impedance of free space, 377 ohms. In
particular,

where E and H are expressed in units of V/m and A/m, respectively, and S in units of
W/m 2. Although many survey instruments indicate power density units, the actual
quantities measured are E or E2 or H or H2.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 9
GMR-01
Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) GSM-100-020
Maximum
permitted
exposure
ceilings
Within the frequency range, the maximum permitted exposure ceiling for uncontrolled
environments is a power density (mW/cm2) that equals f/1500, where f is the frequency
expressed in MHz, and measurements are averaged over a period of 30 minutes. The
maximum permitted exposure ceiling for controlled environments, also expressed in
mW/cm 2, is f/300 where measurements are averaged over 6 minutes. Applying these
principles to the minimum and maximum frequencies for which this equipment is intended
to be used yields the following maximum permitted exposure levels:
Uncontrolled Environment Controlled Environment

1930MHz 1970MHz 1930MHz 1970MHz
Ceiling 1.287mW/cm 2 1.313mW/cm 2 6.433mW/cm 2 6.567mW/cm 2
If you plan to operate the equipment at more than one frequency, compliance should be
assured at the frequency which produces the lowest exposure ceiling (among the
frequencies at which operation will occur).
Licensees must be able to certify to the FCC that their facilities meet the above ceilings.
Some lower power PCS devices, 100 milliwatts or less, are excluded from demonstrating
compliance, but this equipment operates at power levels orders of magnitude higher, and
the exclusion is not applicable.
Whether a given installation meets the maximum permitted exposure ceilings depends, in
part, upon antenna type, antenna placement and the output power to which this
equipment is adjusted. The following example sets forth the distances from the antenna
to which access should be prevented in order to comply with the uncontrolled and
controlled environment exposure limits as set forth in the ANSI IEEE standards and
computed above.
Service Manual: BTS

10 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)
Example
calculation
For a base station with the following characteristics, what is the minimum distance from
the antenna necessary to meet the requirements of an uncontrolled environment?
Transmit frequency: 1930 MHz
Base station cabinet output power, P: +39.0 dBm (8 watts)
Antenna feeder cable loss, CL: 2.0 dB
Antenna input power Pin: PCL = +39.02.0 = +37.0 dB (5watts)
Antenna gain, G: 16.4 dBi (43.65)
Using the following relationship:

Where W is the maximum permissible power density in W/m2 and r is the safe distance
from the antenna in metres, the desired distance can be calculated as follows:

where W = 12.87 W/m2 was obtained from table listed above and converting from
mW/cm 2 to W/m2.
NOTE
The above result applies only in the direction of maximum radiation of the
antenna. Actual installations may employ antennas that have defined radiation
patterns and gains that differ from the example set forth above. The distances
calculated can vary depending on the actual antenna pattern and gain.
Power density
measurements
While installation calculations such as the above are useful and essential in planning and
design, validation that the operating facility using this equipment actually complies will
require making power density measurements. For information on measuring RF fields for
determining compliance with ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, see IEEE Recommended Practice
for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave,
IEEE Std C95.3-1991. Copies of IEEE C95.1-1991 and IEEE C95.3-1991 may be
purchased from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., Attn:
Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331,
(800) 678-IEEE or from ANSI, (212) 642-4900. Persons responsible for installation of this
equipment are urged to consult these standards in determining whether a given
installation complies with the applicable limits.
Other equipment
Whether a given installation meets ANSI standards for human exposure to radio
frequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether the
environments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from other
equipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overall
exposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time
the licensees equipment is being installed or even by equipment installed later.
Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and in
determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 11
GMR-01
Beryllium health and safety precautions GSM-100-020
Beryllium health and safety precautions
Introduction
Beryllium (Be), is a hard silver/white metal. It is stable in air, but burns brilliantly in
Oxygen.
With the exception of the naturally occurring Beryl ore (Beryllium Silicate), all Beryllium
compounds and Beryllium metal are potentially highly toxic.
Health issues
Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive within
the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component should
be broken open and the Beryllium Oxide, which is in the form of dust, released, there
exists the potential for harm.
Inhalation
Inhalation of Beryllium Oxide can lead to a condition known as Berylliosis, the symptoms
of Berylliosis are similar to Pneumonia and may be identified by all or any of the
following:
Mild poisoning causes fever, shortness of breath, and a cough that produces
yellow/green sputum, or occasionally bloodstained sputum. Inflammation of the mucous
membranes of the nose, throat, and chest with discomfort, possibly pain, and difficulty
with swallowing and breathing.
Severe poisoning causes chest pain and wheezing which may progress to severe
shortness of breath due to congestion of the lungs. Incubation period for lung symptoms
is 2-20 days.
Exposure to moderately high concentrations of Beryllium in air may produce a very
serious condition of the lungs. The injured person may become blue, feverish with rapid
breathing and raised pulse rate. Recovery is usual but may take several months. There
have been deaths in the acute stage.
Chronic response. This condition is more truly a general one although the lungs are
mainly affected. There may be lesions in the kidneys and the skin. Certain features
support the view that the condition is allergic. There is no relationship between the
degree of exposure and the severity of response and there is usually a time lag of up to
10 years between exposure and the onset of the illness. Both sexes are equally
susceptible. The onset of the illness is insidious but only a small number of exposed
persons develop this reaction.
First aid
Seek immediate medical assistance. The casualty should be removed immediately from
the exposure area and placed in a fresh air environment with breathing supported with
Oxygen where required. Any contaminated clothing should be removed. The casualty
should be kept warm and at rest until medical aid arrives.
Service Manual: BTS

12 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 Beryllium health and safety precautions
Skin contact
Possible irritation and redness at the contact area. Persistent itching and blister
formations can occur which usually resolve on removal from exposure.
First aid
Wash area thoroughly with soap and water. If skin is broken seek immediate medical
assistance.
Eye contact
May cause severe irritation, redness and swelling of eyelid(s) and inflammation of the
mucous membranes of the eyes.
First aid
Flush eyes with running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical assistance as soon
as possible.
Handling
procedures
Removal of components from printed circuit boards (PCBs) is to take place only at
Motorola approved repair centres.
The removal station will be equipped with extraction equipment and all other protective
equipment necessary for the safe removal of components containing Beryllium Oxide.
If during removal a component is accidently opened, the Beryllium Oxide dust is to be
wetted into a paste and put into a container with a spatula or similar tool. The spatula/tool
used to collect the paste is also to be placed in the container. The container is then to be
sealed and labelled. A suitable respirator is to be worn at all times during this operation.
Components which are successfully removed are to be placed in a separate bag, sealed
and labelled.
Disposal
methods
Beryllium Oxide or components containing Beryllium Oxide are to be treated as
hazardous waste. All components must be removed where possible from boards and put
into sealed bags labelled Beryllium Oxide components. These bags must be given to the
safety and environmental adviser for disposal.
Under no circumstances are boards or components containing Beryllium Oxide to be put
into the general waste skips or incinerated.
Product life cycle

implications
Motorola GSM and analogue equipment includes components containing Beryllium Oxide
(identified in text as appropriate and indicated by warning labels on the equipment).
These components require specific disposal measures as indicated in the preceding
(Disposal methods) paragraph. Motorola will arrange for the disposal of all such
hazardous waste as part of its Total Customer Satisfaction philosophy and will arrange
for the most environmentally friendly disposal available at that time.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 13
GMR-01
General cautions GSM-100-020
General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the
equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these
cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals may result in
damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to
comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution
labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or
obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this
manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the
equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the
equipment.
Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.
Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static discharge.
Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent,
CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused by
mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards.
See Devices sensitive to static for further information.
Service Manual: BTS

14 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 Devices sensitive to static
Devices sensitive to static
Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of
insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied
to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.
These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into
high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons.
MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted
together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into
conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.
Special handling
techniques
In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced observe the following
precautions when handling the replacement:
Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point
(ESP) on the equipment.
Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to
replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted.
Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton
overall is preferable.
If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces
with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.
All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an
earthed surface.
Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive
devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less
susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care,
preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred
directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left
exposed on the workbench.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 15
GMR-01
Motorola GSM manual set GSM-100-020
Motorola GSM manual set
Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the
Motorola GSM and GSM Packet Radio Service (GPRS) equipment.
Generic GSM
manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are
release dependent:
Classification
number Name Order number
GSM-100-101 System Information: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W01
GSM-100-201 Operating Information: GSM System Operation . . . 68P02901W14
GSM-100-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W19
GSM-100-311 Technical Description: OMC-R in a GSM System . . 68P02901W31
GSM-100-313 Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema . 68P02901W34
GSM-100-320 Technical Description: BSS Implementation . . . . . . . 68P02901W36
GSM-100-321 Technical Description: BSS Command Reference . 68P02901W23
GSM-100-403 Installation & Configuration: GSM System
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W17
GSM-100-423 Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization . . . . 68P02901W43
GSM-100-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install . . 68P02901W47
GSM-100-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at
the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W26
GSM-100-520 Maintenance Information: BSS Timers . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W58
GSM-100-521 Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions 68P02901W57
GSM-100-523 Maintenance Information: BSS Field
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W51
GSM-100-503 Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W56
GSM-100-721 Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W72
GSM-100-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R System . . . . . . . . 68P02901W74
Service Manual: BTS

16 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 Motorola GSM manual set
Related GSM
manuals
The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:
Classification
GSM-001-103 System Information: BSS Equipment Planning . . . . 68P02900W21
GSM-002-103 System Information: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W22
GSM-002-703 Software Release Notes: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W76
GSM-005-103 System Information: GSM Advance Operational
Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W25
GSM-008-103 System Information: Network Health Analyst . . . . . . 68P02900W36
GSM-008-703 Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst . 68P02900W77
GSM-TOOLS-001 System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) . . . . . 68P02900W90
GSM-TOOLS-002 System Information: Motorola Analysis and
Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W94
GSM-TOOLS-701 Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) . 68P02900W69
GSM-TOOLS-702 Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and
Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W68
GSM-006-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System
Administration (OSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W10
GSM-006-413 Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install . . . . . 68P02901W39
GSM-006-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System . . . . 68P02901W70
Generic GPRS
manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manuals are
release dependent:
Classification
GPRS-300-101 System Information: GPRS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W01
GPRS-300-202 Operating Information: OMC-G System
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W03
GPRS-300-222 Operating Information: GSN System Administration 68P02903W37
GPRS-300-311 Technical Description: OMC-G in a GPRS System . 68P02903W29
GPRS-300-313 Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema . 68P02903W46
GPRS-300-321 Technical Description: GSN Command Reference . 68P02903W18
GPRS-300-423 Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install . . . . 68P02903W47
GPRS-300-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install . 68P02903W04
GPRS-300-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at
the OMC-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W19
GPRS-300-503 Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W20
GPRS-300-722 Software Release Notes: GSN System . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W76
GPRS-300-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-G System . . . . . . . . 68P02903W70
Related GPRS
manuals
The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals:
GPRS-001-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning . . 68P02903W02
GPRS-005-103 System Information: GSN Advance Operational
Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W38
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 17
GMR-01
Motorola GSM manual set GSM-100-020
BSS service
manuals
The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manuals are not
release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets may
vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be ordered
using the overall catalogue number shown below:
Classification
GSM-100-020 Service Manual: BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W37
GSM-100-030 Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W38
GSM-105-020 Service Manual: M-Cell2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W75
GSM-106-020 Service Manual: M-Cell6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W85
GSM-201-020 Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . 68P02901W95
GSM-202-020 Service Manual: M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W65
GSM-203-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W36
GSM-206-020 Service Manual: Horizoncompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W15
GSM-205-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W06
GSM-204-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W12
GSM-207-020 Service Manual: Horizonoffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W46
GSM-209-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 . 68P02902W61
GSM-208-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor 68P02902W66
GSM-101-SERIES ExCell4 Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W50
GSM-103-SERIES ExCell6 Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W70
GSM-102-SERIES TopCell Documentation Set (GSM900) . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W80
GSM-104-SERIES TopCell Documentation Set (DCS1800) . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W80
GSM-200-SERIES M-Cellmicro Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W90
GPRS service
manuals
The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals include the
Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSS for GPRS:
Classification
GPRS-301-020 Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) . . . . . 68P02903W05
GPRS-302-020 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) . . . . . . . 68P02903W10
Classification
number
The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example,
manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.
Order number
The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.
Ordering
manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or
Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number. Remember,
specify the manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter.
Service Manual: BTS

18 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020 GMR amendment
GMR amendment
Introduction to
GMRs
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the manual
using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct Motorola manuals
as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the target manual. Each GMR is
identified by a number in a sequence that starts at 01 for each manual at each issue.
GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf pages, with a pink instruction sheet on the
front.
GMR procedure
When a GMR is received, check on the GMR amendment record page of this manual
that previous GMRs, if any, have been incorporated. If not, contact your administrator or
Motorola Local Office to obtain the missing GMRs. Remove and replace pages in this
manual, as detailed on the GMR pink instruction sheet.
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A 19
GMR-01
GMR amendment record GSM-100-020
GMR amendment record
Instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below must be filled in to
record the insertion. Retain the pink instruction sheet that accompanies each GMR and
insert it in a suitable place in this manual for future reference.
Amendment
record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:
GMR number Incorporated by (signature) Date

01 Incorporated (this GMR) 16 Feb 01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Service Manual: BTS

20 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 5
INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATION
Category 121
System Information
1st Jun 01 System Information: BTS i

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
ii 1st Jun 01
System Information: BTS
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
Category 121
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Labelling table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 2
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1st Jun 01 System Information: BTS iii

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
Chapter 1
Introduction

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Internal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Labelling table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121 Introduction
Introduction
Overview
The Base Transceiver Station (BTS) provides the gateway between the mobile stations
and the cellular network. There are three versions of the InCell BTS, the BTS4, BTS5
and BTS6, the main difference between the versions are the number of transceivers,
which is denoted by the number.
External features
The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet, and has four air vents with
grilles:
Intake vents have air filters.
Exhaust vents have exhaust fans fitted behind the vents.
All connections to a cabinet are at the interconnect panel, which is on top of the cabinet.
This panel also has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet cables in and
out of the cabinet. All cabinets are RF/EMI shielded.
1st Jun 01 System Information: BTS 11

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
Cabinet description GSM-100-121
Cabinet description
Introduction
This section describes the appearance of a typical BTS cabinet.
Diagram
The diagram shows a typical BTS cabinet:
INTERCONNECT PANEL
POWER AND DISTRIBUTION

UNIT
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
POWER AND ALARM BOARD
RECEIVE FRONT END SHELF
TRANSMIT
COMBINER
SHELF

BSU SHELF
BLANKING PLATE
POWER
SUPPLY
MODULE

12 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121 Cabinet description
Dimensions
The cabinet has the following dimensions:
Height 2100 mm excluding lifting eyelets
Width 711 mm excluding isolation strips
Depth 416 mm excluding isolation strips
Internal units
As shown, the BTS contains a base station unit (BSU) in a card cage in the lower half of
the cabinet. The BSU is equipped with digital modules according to the required function,
and is described in more detail in Base station unit shelf assembly in this manual.
The upper portion of the cabinet houses RF hardware:
Transceiver shelf.
Transmitter combiners and bandpass filters.
Receiver front end (RFE).
Transceiver shelf
The transceiver shelf assembly consists of a tray that can mount transceivers. The
number of transceivers that can be fitted to a cabinet depends on the cabinet type and
the type of transceiver, generally the number of the cabinet denotes the maximum
number of transceivers that can be fitted. For example a BTS6 cabinet can
accommodate six transceivers.
Transmit combiner shelf
The transmit combiner shelf is directly above the upper bank of fans. The shelf holds
transmit combiners and bandpass filters. Transmit combiners are discrete hybrid
combiners. Transmit RF signals to be combined inside a BTS cabinet can either come
from transceivers within the cabinet or from an external source, usually a second BTS
cabinet.
Receiver front end shelf
The receiver front end (RFE) shelf is directly above the transmit combiner shelf. The
RFE shelf contains:
Receiver preselector and eight-way splitter modules.
Dual path preselectors (DPPs).
There must be one preselector module for each antenna input.
A shelf can contain up to three DPPs. A DPP module consists of a bandpass filter, a
preamplifier, and two eight-way splitters. This module allows two antennas to feed up to
five transceivers.
PDU
The cabinet power distribution unit (PDU) is in the top shelf. The PDU contains circuit
breakers and fuses and distributes power in the cabinet.
Fan cooling system
The lower bank of fans draws air downward from the upper intake, through the RFE shelf
and the transmit combiner shelf, then through a channel behind the transceiver shelf, and
down through the BSU shelf. Blanking panels are installed in the front of empty slots to
maintain the correct airflow.
The upper bank of fans draws air from below the transceiver shelf through openings in
the tray, the transceiver and the deflectors. Blanking plates are installed to close the
openings in the tray when the transceiver slot is empty, to prevent air from flowing
through empty slots.

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
Cabinet labels GSM-100-121
Cabinet labels
Door and internal

labelling
The diagram shows the location of warning and advisory labels on a typical BTS cabinet
and transceiver:
6 7
5 8
4 9
10
3

1 2

11
29

12
28

13
27
26

14
17

15

25
24
23

16
18
FRONT OF DOOR 12
22 19
21
20
14 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121 Cabinet labels
Labelling table
The table explains the label numbers on the previous diagram:
Key Description
1 Warning, live terminals
2 Safety glasses
3 Fuse and circuit breaker map
4 Circuit breaker
5 Serial number
6 T43 connection label
7 Caution, non-ionizing radiation
8 Rating label
9 Warning, live terminals
10 Earth symbol
11 Alarm label
12 Warning, disconnect fuse
13 Panel must be in place
15 ESP
16 Caution, isolate
18 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard
19 Warranty
20 Antitip warning
21 Warning, possible laser radiation
23 ESD and card map
24 Warning, possible laser radiation
26 Safety glasses
27 Do not obstruct
38 Hazard
29 Frequency designation label

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
16 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
Chapter 2
Specification

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
Chapter 2
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121 Specifications
Specifications
Overview
The BTS cabinet specifications, including frequency band characteristics, are tabulated in
this chapter.
Environment
The environmental limits are shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Environmental limits

Environment Temperature Humidity
Operating 0 C to +30 C 5% to 95% non-condensing
Storage 45 C to +70 C 8% to 100% non-condensing
Dimensions
The dimensions are shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Dimensions

Height Width Depth
BTS 2100 mm 711 mm 416 mm (with door)
400 mm (without door)
Power
requirements
Positive earth BTS cabinets operate from a 48 V or 60 V dc supply. The maximum
power requirements are:
GSM900
BTS4 (48 V) = 45 A.
BTS4 (60 V) = 35 A.
BTS6 (48 V) = 60 A.
BTS6 (60 V) = 50 A.
DCS1800
BTS6 (48 V) = 55 A.
BTS6 (60 V) = 45 A.
Negative earth BTS cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, 5 V dc) supply.
The maximum power requirements are:
GSM900
BTS5 (+27 V) = 85 A.
BTS6 (+27 V) = 95 A.

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
Specifications GSM-100-121
DCS1800
BTS6 (+27 V) = 85 A.
DRAM Backup 4A at +27 V dc.
DRAM battery
backup
BTS cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input power
backup for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices.
The DRAM backup maximum power requirement for each cabinet is:
4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc.
Frequency band
characteristics
GSM900 radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with the
characteristics listed in Table 2-3:
Table 2-3 Frequency band characteristics

GSM900
Transmit frequency band (MHz) 935 to 960
Receive frequency band (MHz) 890 to 915
Transmit/receive duplex separation (MHz) 45
Channel width (kHz) 200
Number of channels 124
Transmit frequency guard bands (MHz) 935.0 to 935.1
959.9 to 960.0
Receive frequency guard bands (MHz) 890.0 to 890.1
914.9 to 915.0
Transmit channel centre frequency (MHz) Even 10ths of a MHz from 935.2 to 959.8
Receive channel centre frequency (MHz) Even 10ths of a MHz from 890.2 to 914.8
DCS1800 radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with the
characteristics listed in Table 2-4:
Table 2-4 Frequency band characteristics

DCS1800
Transmit frequency band (MHz) 1805 to 1880
Receive frequency band (MHz) 1710 to 1785
Transmit/receive duplex separation (MHz) 95
Channel width (kHz) 200
Number of channels 374
Transmit frequency guard bands (MHz) 1805 to 1805.1
1879.9 to 1880.0
Receive frequency guard bands (MHz) 1710.0 to 1710.1
1784.9 to 1785.0
22 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-121 Specifications
Transceiver
transmit output
power
Table 2-5 outlines achievable transceiver output power on the top of the cabinet with a
twin band pass filter (TBPF), or with or without combining. These values can be used
along with the power consumption values specified within this section, in order to
calculate heat dissipation figures.
Table 2-5 Transceiver achievable values

Transceiver Maximum specified output power
type
Twin band pass No combining One stage
filter, no duplexer combining
GSM900 40 W (46 dBm) N/A 20 W (43 dBm)
DCS1800 N/A 16 W (42.05 dBm) 8 W (39.05 dBm)
PCS1900
DCS1800 N/A 32 W (45.05 dBm) 16 W (42.05 dBm)
PCS1900
(High Power)
All Or the customer-specified value at the top of the cabinet, taking
cable losses into account.
NOTE
Table 2-5 shows that with transceivers placed on full power, the output values
indicated should be achieved on the top of the cabinet. In fact the actual
outputs on the top of the cabinet could exceed these values.
N/A = Not applicable.

68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
Specifications GSM-100-121
Power
consumption
NOTE
Maximum power consumption figures are theoretical values derived under
extreme conditions and are affected by variables such as temperature,
component tolerances, transmission power and supply voltage. Although these
figures must be considered when planning site power requirements, typical
measured consumption values will be lower.
Table 2-6 outlines the maximum power consumption of a BTS6 cabinet with six carrier.
In these calculations:
All Transceivers are call processing.
Output power is 100%.
There is digital redundancy.
Table 2-6 outlines the power consumption with six carrier.
Table 2-6 Power consumption (kW)

Cabinet 25 C
type
GSM900 DCS1800
or PCS1900
DCS1800/PCS1900
(High power)
+27 2.166 1.772
48 1.991 1.629
NOTE
The power input for each GSM900 transceiver is approximately 250 watts.
The figures quoted in Table 2-6 are for a six carrier with several dependent
units inputs added. With equipments of less than six carrier, the input would
decrease correspondingly by 250 watts (for each transceiver) plus the
proportionate value reduced from the inputs of the other dependent units.
24 1st Jun 01
68P02901W02-A
GMR-01
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4
GENERAL INFORMATION RF MODULES DIGITAL MODULES POWER, FANS AND
INTERCONNECTIONS
Category 323
Technical Description
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS i

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
ii 1st Jun 01
Technical Description: BTS
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
Category 323
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
BSU numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS iii

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
BTS4 differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
DRCU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
BTS5 differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
DRCU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Chapter 2
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BTS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
BTS transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DPP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DPP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Original LNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Receiver matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
End view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tx BPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS v

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
CCB 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CCB combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
DRCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
View of DRCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DRCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
DCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
DCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
DCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DEQB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DRCUII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
View of DRCUII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
RCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
AGC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
vi 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
DRCU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
View of DRCU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
DRCU3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
SCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
AGC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SCU900 and SCU1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
View of an SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
SCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SCU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DRIM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Clock recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DPC on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DPC on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
DPC firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Signal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS vii

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
TCU circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
View of a TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
TCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
TCU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TSM functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Quadraplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2-way (6dB) splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6 dB attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Chapter 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
viii 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
BTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DRIM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GCLK diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
GPROC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
GPROC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS ix

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
GPROC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
GPROC2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
GPROC2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
KSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Highway monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
MSI diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
MSI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
MSI2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
MSI2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
x 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
TSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
The DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
TSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
TSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
XCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
XCDR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
XCDR diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
GDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
BBBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
BBBX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
BBBX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS xi

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
CLKX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
DRIX3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
DRIX3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
DRIX3 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
KSWX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Bus arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Redundant LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Shelf ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
LANX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PIX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Chapter 4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
xii 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
IPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
IPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
PCU description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
PCU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
DAB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Fuses and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fuses and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Serial bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
48/60 V status inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
PDB and AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
AIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
AIB view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PDB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PDB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BSSC with PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS xiii

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
BTS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
T43 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
T43 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
BIB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
BIB connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
xiv 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Chapter 1
General Information

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
Chapter 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
BSU numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Shelf module fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
BTS4 differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
DRCU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Diagram 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Diagram 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Diagram 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
BTS5 differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
DRCU capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Diagram 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Diagram 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagram 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Diagram 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Diagram 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Diagram 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Diagram 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Overview
Overview
Introduction
This manual describes the base transceiver station (BTS) cabinet which houses the radio
frequency (RF) equipment that provides the BSS air interface.
Cabinet types
There are three cabinets:
BTS4
BTS5
BTS6
The BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets are the same as the BTS6 except in their capacity for
transceivers and their handling of power distribution and alarms.
Terminology
The term transceiver is used generically for the DRCU, DRCUII, DRCU3, SCU900,
SCU1800 and TCU units, which are themselves described in chapter 2.
1st Jun 01 Technical Description: BTS 11

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Base station unit shelf assembly GSM-100-323
Base station unit shelf assembly
Overview
A base station unit (BSU) shelf assembly consists of:
A backplane.
Two vertical-slot module shelves containing the required digital modules:
The upper shelf holds half size digital modules.
The lower shelf holds full size digital modules.
A three-compartment shelf for the power supply modules.
Every cabinet must be fitted with the following digital cards:
Two bus termination cards (BTCs).
One local area network extender (LANX) module.
All other digital modules are optional, and their inclusion depends upon the cabinet
configuration.
BSU numbering
In a BTS, BSUs are numbered from F backward using the sixteen position
(0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module. This rotary switch sets the BSU LAN
address.
12 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Base station unit shelf assembly
BSU shelf
The diagram shows a base station unit shelf:
PART OF BSU BACKPLANE
KS0
AI0 MS0
AI1
DR5
AI2 DR4
MS1
DR3
DR2
MS2
HALF SIZE
MODULES DR1
DR0
MS3
KS1
GK0
FULL SIZE
MODULES
BLANKING
PLATE
DPSM, EPSM or IPSMs

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Base station unit shelf assembly GSM-100-323
Shelf module fit

The table shows the module positions in a fully-equipped BSU shelf assembly:
Slot Half size modules Slot Full size modules

U0 KSWX L L0 BTC
U1 KSWX L L1 TSW
U2 KSWX R or CLKX L2
U3 KSWX R or CLKX L3 GCLK
U4 KSWX R or CLKX L4
U5 KSWX R or CLKX L5 GCLK
U6 KSWX R or CLKX L6 MSI
U7 KSWX E or CLKX L7 MSI or DRIM
U8 KSWX E L8 MSI
U9 KSWX E L9 MSI or DRIM
U10 DRIX L10 MSI
U11 DRIX L11 MSI or DRIM
U12 DRIX L12 MSI
U14 DRIX L14 MSI
U16 PIX or BBBX L16 MSI
U17 PIX or BBBX L17 MSI or DRIM
U18 PIX or BBBX L18 GPROC
U19 LANX L19 GPROC
U20 LANX L20 GPROC
U21 KSWX E L21 GPROC
U24 KSWX R L24 GPROC
U25 KSWX R L25 GPROC
U26 KSWX R L26 Spare
U27 KSWX R L27 TSW
U28 KSWX R L28 BTC
14 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Base station unit shelf assembly
Ventilation
Blanking plates are inserted in all unused full size and power supply module slots to
assist with the correct airflow and ventilation.
Backplane
connectors
The table shows the function of each connector fitted at the top of the BSU backplane:
Connector Function
AI0 Serial bus primary, to DAB
AI1 Serial bus redundant, to DAB
AI2 +5 V DRAM power, from BBBX
KS0 TTY test connector, to TSW in slot L27
KS1 TTY test connector, to TSW in slot L1
GK0 GPS receiver connector, to interconnect panel on top of
cabinet
MS1 MSI connector, to interconnect panel on top of cabinet
MS3 MSI connector, to interconnect panel on top of cabinet
DR0 TTY test connector for the DRI(M) or MSI in slot L7

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Power distribution unit components GSM-100-323
Power distribution unit components
Introduction
This section describes the cabinet dc power distribution arrangements.
Overview
The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and:
Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet.
Provides an alarm interface.
It consists of:
A distribution alarm board (DAB), as described in chapter 4.
A circuit breaker panel containing a maximum of ten dc circuit breakers, as
described in chapter 4.
Input power
DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routed
to:
The VIN bus bar.
The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.
A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from:
The Integrated Power Supply Modules (IPSMs) in the lower BSU in positive earth
(48/60 V) cabinets.
The VIN and GND busbars, via busbar links, in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.
Circuit breakers
Seven of the ten circuit breakers distribute power to units within the cabinet.
CB1 (30 A) provides +27 V to the DAB.
CB2 to CB7 (20 A) provide +27 V to (D)RCUs 0 to 5.
CB8 to CB10 (60 A) provide 48/60 V to the IPSMs.
16 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Fan cooling system
Fan cooling system
Overview
Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans. Cabinet baffling divides the cabinet
cooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling sub-systems.
The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow deflectors,
provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment.
Each fan has a fan stall sensor which is connected to alarm circuits in the DAB through
connector PC5.
Location
The fan cooling systems are mounted directly below the BSU shelf assembly and above
the transceivers.
Requirements
Power for the fans is derived from the +27 V busbar and is routed to the +27 V terminal
on the DAB, then from connector PC9 on the DAB to the fans.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Interconnect panel GSM-100-323
Interconnect panel
Overview
The interconnect panel is mounted on the top of the cabinet and provides connections
for:
Transmit and receive antenna signals.
DC input power.
E1/T1 line interconnect modules.
Customer defined alarm equipment input/output.
+27 V power/alarm for external receiver multicoupler and external remotely
tuneable combiner.
+27 V battery back-up input for DRAM.
The interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routeing fibre optic inter-cabinet
cables into and out of the cabinet.
NOTE
Feed through tubes operate below their waveguide cut-off frequency and do
not compromise the cabinets EMC screening.
The E1/T1 line interconnection modules are:

Type 43 (T43) Interconnect Boards.
Balanced-line Interconnect Boards (BIB).
Panel layout
The diagram shows a BTS6 interconnect panel:
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES

FEED-THROUGH TUBES
RX3B RX3A RX2B RX2A RX1B RX1A
PHASE 1 PHASE 0
TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 EARTH

TX1 TX0
STUD
PIX1
MS3 VIN
PIX0
T43 T43
or or
BIB BIB 0V
EXT C & M + VSWR GK0 BAT. BACKUP
18 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Interconnect panel
Connectors
The table shows the interconnect panel connector functions:

#55'3: $#%,61 $#%,61 $#55'3: %0//'%503 #%,61 $#55'3:
9 9
#/& '%'+7' #/5'//# /165 50 &6#- 1#5* 9 #/5'//#

9 4+)/#-4 13'4'-'%5034
#/& #/& 03 1035 0(
4*'-( &61-'9'3 03
9 9
#/& +7'34+5: 3'%'+7' +7'34+5: +/165 50 &6#- 1#5* +7'34+5: 9 #/5'//#
9 #/5'//# 4+)/#-4 13'4'-'%5034
#/&
#/&
4*'-(
9 9 9
9 3#/4.+5 #/5'//# '('3 50 +/5'3%0//'%5+0/ '('3 50 4+5';41'%+(+%
9 #/& 9 4+)/#- .#53+94+5' 41'%+(+% &0%6.'/5#5+0/
&0%6.'/5#5+0/
" ! 95'3/#- 3'.05'-: %0//'%503 95'3/#- 3'.05'-:
56/'#$-' %0.$+/'3 &% 56/'#$-' %0.$+/'3
108'3 #/& '95'3/#- #/& '95'3/#-
3'%'+7'3 .6-5+%061-'3 3'%'+7'3
&% 108'34'/4' .6-5+%061-'3 &%
108'3 %0//'%503
#/& 10354 61 50 #/& %0//'%5034 %+3%6+54
4+9 %+3%6+54 #5 0/ $#%,1-#/' 4063%' 03
'#%* %0//'%503 4+9 9 5'3.+/#5+0/
#/& 4+9 9 %+3%6+54 '26+1.'/5 7+# #
03
" #/& " 6450.'3 #-#3. 30/5 '&)' %0//'%503 0( 6450.'3 #-#3.
+/165065165 10354 " .0&6-'4 '26+1.'/5
05 64'& +/ 5*+4 %0//'%503 0/
%0/(+)63#5+0/ $#%,1-#/'
*#4' #/& 1*#4' #$+/'5 1*#4+/) 3#/4.+5 %0.$+/'3 4*'-( 9 1*#4+/) *#3/'44
95'3/#- .6-5+%061-'3 95'3/#- 3'%'+7'3 %0//'%503 95'3/#- 3'%'+7'3
.6-5+%061-'3 &% .6-5+%061-'3 &%
108'34'/4' 108'3 %0//'%503

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS6 (48/60 V) cabinet cabling GSM-100-323
BTS6 (48/60 V) cabinet cabling
Overview
This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a 48/60 V BTS6:
Diagram 1
BTS6 (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).
Diagram 2
BTS6 (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half).
Diagram 3
BTS6 (48/60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling.
Diagram 4
BTS6 (48/60 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling.
Diagram 5
BTS6 (48/60 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling.
Diagram 6
BTS6 (48/60 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling.
Diagram 7
BTS6 (48/60 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling.
Diagram 8
BTS6 (48/60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling.
Diagram 9
BTS6 (48/60 V) fibre optic ((D)RCU to DRIX3) cabling.
Diagram 10
BTS6 (48/60 V) receiver extender cabling.
110 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BTS6 (48/60 V) cabinet cabling
Diagram 1
BTS6 (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):
! % % % % % % !

! !
! % ! % ! % ! %
! % ! %

%

%
! !
%! "
# $

#
#
"
#"
&#"
#

"

"!

#


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 2
BTS6 (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half):

BBBX
PC1
PC2

112 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 3
BTS6 (48/60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling:

NOTE:
PIX CABLES ARE ROUTED FROM THE TOP OF THE CABINET INTERCONNECT PANEL TO THE SHELF BACKPLANE.
THESE CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO THE PIX MODULE BY A FRONT PANEL CONNECTOR.
IF THERE ARE NO PIX MODULES ON A SHELF, THESE CABLES ARE TIEWRAPPED TO THE SHELF.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 4
BTS6 (48/60 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!
!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

!

114 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 5
BTS6 (48/60 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!

!

SINGLE PATH

PRESELECTORS

!


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 6
BTS6 (48/60 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!
!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

!

116 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 7
BTS6 (48/60 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!
!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

! !


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 8
BTS6 (48/60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!
!

! !

118 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 9
BTS6 (48/60 V) fibre optic ((D)RCU to DRIX3) cabling:


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 10
BTS6 (48/60 V) receiver extender cabling:

NOTE:
THE ABOVE ILLUSTRATES THE INTERCABLING BETWEEN THREE CABINETS, AND SHOWS THAT
DUAL PATH PRESELECTORS (DPP2) CAN BE INTERCONNECTED, USING A PASSIVE SPLITTER,
TO CONNECT 18 (D)RCUs TO ONE PAIR OF ANTENNAS.
120 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling
BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling
Overview
This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a +27 V BTS6:
Diagram 1
BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).
Diagram 2
BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half).
Diagram 3
BTS6 (+27 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling.
Diagram 4
BTS6 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling.
Diagram 5
BTS6 (+27 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling.
Diagram 6
BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling.
Diagram 7
BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling.
Diagram 8
BTS6 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling.
Diagram 9
BTS6 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX3) cabling.
Diagram 10
BTS6 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS6 (+27 V) cabinet cabling GSM-100-323
Diagram 1
BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):
! % % % % % % !

! !
! % ! % ! % ! %
! % ! %

%

%
! !
%! "
# $

#
#
"
#"
&#"
#

"

"!

#

%

%

!

122 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 2
BTS6 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half):

BBBX
PC1
PC2


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 3
BTS6 (+27 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling:

NOTE:
124 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 4
BTS6 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!
!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

!


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 5
BTS6 (+27 V) with preselectors and RTC RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!

!

SINGLE PATH

PRESELECTORS

!

126 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 6
BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselector and CCB Omni 6 RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!
!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

!


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 7
BTS6 (+27 V) with dual path preselectors and CCB Sector 3-3 RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!
!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

! !

128 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 8
BTS6 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:
! ! ! ! ! !

! ! ! !
! !

!

!

!

! !


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 9
BTS6 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX3) cabling:

130 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 10
BTS6 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling:

NOTE:
THE ABOVE ILLUSTRATES THE INTERCABLING BETWEEN THREE CABINETS, AND SHOWS THAT
DUAL PATH PRESELECTORS (DPP2) CAN BE INTERCONNECTED, USING A PASSIVE SPLITTER,
TO CONNECT 18 (D)RCUs TO ONE PAIR OF ANTENNAS.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS4 differences GSM-100-323
BTS4 differences
Introduction
NOTE
This section does not apply to DCS1800 systems.
The BTS4 cabinet is the same as the BTS6 except in terms of its transceiver capacity,
and its power distribution and alarm handling arrangements. This section describes these
differences; it must be read with reference to the rest of this chapter.
Power
The BTS4 can be powered from +27 V or 48/60 V supplies. If a 48/60 V supply is
used, power converters must be installed to produce +27 V for the cabinet PSMs.
DRCU capacity
The +27 V BTS4 transceiver shelf can actually house up to five transceivers, although
one slot is occupied by power converters in 48/60 V versions, which reduces the
capacity to four. The transceivers are described in chapter 2, and the power converters in
chapter 4.
PDU
The BTS4 power distribution unit (PDU) contains a power alarm board (PAB). The PAB
distributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 30 fuses, monitors alarm lines,
passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2 and provides a signal for the cabinet
alarm LED. The PAB is described in chapter 4.
Circuit breakers
Power from the VIN bus bar is distributed to power supplies within the cabinet via the
circuit breaker panel. The panel is described in chapter 4.
132 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS4 (48/60 V) cabinet cabling
Overview
This section contains the following cabinet cabling diagrams for a 48/60 V BTS4:
Diagram 1
BTS4 (48/60 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).
Diagram 2
BTS4 (48/60 V) with preselectors and receiver matrices dc power and alarm cabling
(upper half).
Diagram 3
BTS4 (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half).
Diagram 4
BTS4 (48/60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling.
Diagram 5
BTS4 (48/60 V) with DPP and RTC RF cabling.
Diagram 6
BTS4 (48/60 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling.
Diagram 7
BTS4 (48/60 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling.
Diagram 8
BTS4 (48/60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling.
Diagram 9
BTS4 (48/60 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling.
Diagram 10
BTS4 (48/60 V) receiver extender cabling.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 1
BTS4 (48/60 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):

# # # # # #

# ! # # # # # $"
!

#

# ! !
#

"
"

"!
$"!
"
!

!

"

" "

# #

" "

134 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 2
(upper half):

# # # # # #

# ! # # # # # $"
!

#

! !
#
#

"
"

"!
$"!
"
!

!

"

REMOTELY TUNED CHANNEL COMBINER

(WHEN INSTALLED)


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 3
BTS4 (48/60 V) dc power and alarm cabling (lower half):

" " "

"

"
$#! "!
"

136 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 4
BTS4 (48/60 V) PIX, MS and GK0 cabling:

NOTE:

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 5
BTS4 (48/60 V) with DPP and RTC RF cabling:

!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

138 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 6
BTS4 (48/60 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling:

6-WAY SPLITTER 6-WAY SPLITTER


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 7
BTS4 (48/60 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling:

!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR

140 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 8
BTS4 (48/60 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 9
BTS4 (48/60 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling:

142 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 10
BTS4 (48/60 V) receiver extender cabling:

6-WAY SPLITTER 6-WAY SPLITTER 6-WAY SPLITTER 6-WAY SPLITTER
6dB ATTENUATOR 6dB ATTENUATOR
ATTENUATOR
BRACKET

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Overview
Diagram 1
BTS4 (+27 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).
Diagram 2
BTS4 (+27 V) with preselectors and receiver matrices dc power and alarm cabling (upper
half).
Diagram 3
Diagram 4
Diagram 5
BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling.
Diagram 6
BTS4 (+27 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling.
Diagram 7
BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling.
Diagram 8
Diagram 9
BTS4 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling.
Diagram 10
BTS4 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling.
144 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 1
BTS4 (+27 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):

$ $ $ $ $ $ !
!
! !
$! "! ! $ ! $ ! $ ! $ ! $ %# !
"

$!

"! "
$
$
!

#
#
!
#"
%#"

#
"

"!

#

# #

! $ ! $

# # #


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 2
(upper half):

! $ $ $ $ $ $ !
! !
$! "! ! $ ! $ ! $ ! $ ! $ %# !
"

$!

"! "
$
$
!

#
#
!
#"
#"

#
"

"!

#

! !

! !

REMOTELY TUNED
CHANNEL COMBINER

146 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 3


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 4

NOTE:
148 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 5
BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and hybrid combiner RF cabling:

!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 6
BTS4 (+27 V) with 6-way splitter and RTC RF cabling:


150 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 7
BTS4 (+27 V) with DPP and CCB Omni 4 RF cabling:

!

DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 8
BTS4 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiner RF cabling:

152 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 9
BTS4 (+27 V) fibre optic (DRCU to DRIX) cabling:


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 10
BTS4 (+27 V) receiver extender cabling:

ATTENUATOR
BRACKET
154 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BTS5 differences
BTS5 differences
Introduction
NOTE
This section does not apply to DCS1800 systems.
The BTS5 cabinet is the same as the BTS6 except in terms of its DRCU capacity and its
power distribution and alarm handling arrangements. This section describes these
differences; it must be read with reference to the rest of this chapter.
The BTS5 can be powered only by a +27 V supply.
DRCU capacity
The BTS5 transceiver shelf can house up to five transceivers. These are described in
chapter 2.
PDU
The BTS5 power distribution unit (PDU) contains a power distribution board (PDB) and
an alarm interface board (AIB).
PDB
The power distribution board distributes +27 V and +5 V to units in the cabinet via 25
fuses. The PDB is described in chapter 4.
AIB
The alarm interface board monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC
and provides a signal for the cabinet alarm LED. The AIB is described in chapter 4.
Circuit breakers
Power from the VIN bus bar is distributed to power supplies within the cabinet via the
circuit breaker panel. The panel is described in chapter 4.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Overview
Diagram 1
BTS5 (+27 V) dc power and alarm cabling (upper half).
Diagram 2
Diagram 3
Diagram 4
BTS5 (+27 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling.
Diagram 5
Diagram 6
BTS5 (+27 V) fibre optic cabling.
Diagram 7
BTS5 (+ 27 V) receive extender cabling.
156 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 1
BTS5 (+27 V) with DPPs and RTC dc power and alarm cabling (upper half):
# # # SURGE

CAPACITOR
# # # !
# # #

$" #
#
!
#

" "

!

"

!

" "

# #

" " "


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 2

158 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 3

SURGE
CAPACITOR

NOTE:
PIX CABLES ARE ROUTED FROM THE TOP OF THE CABINET INTERCONNECT PANEL TO THE SHELF BACK-
PLANE.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 4
BTS5 (+27 V) with 6-way splitters and RTC RF cabling:


160 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 5
BTS5 (+27 V) with receiver matrices and hybrid combiners RF cabling:


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 6
BTS5 (+27 V) fibre optic cabling:

162 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram 7
BTS5 (+ 27 V) receive extender cabling:

ATTENUATOR
BRACKET

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
164 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Chapter 2
RF modules

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
Chapter 2
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BTS receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
BTS transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
DPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DPP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DPP modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Original LNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Receiver matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Hybrid combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
End view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
Tx BPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CCB 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CCB combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
DRCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
View of DRCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
DRCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
DCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
DCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
DCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
DEQB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
DRCUII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
View of DRCUII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
RCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
RCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
AGC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
DRCU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
View of DRCU3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
DRCU3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
SCB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SCB firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
AGC data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
DRI(M) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SCU900 and SCU1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
View of an SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
SCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SCU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
DPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DRIM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Clock recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DPC on downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DPC on uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
DPC firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Signal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
TCU circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
View of a TCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
TCU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
TCU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TSM functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Quadraplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
2-way (6dB) splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
6 dB attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
vi 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the radio frequency (RF) modules fitted in BTS cabinets.
The following BTS cabinet shelves are described:
Receiver front end (RFE) shelf.
Transmit combiner shelf.
Transceiver shelf.
Also see the BTS receiver and BTS transmitter sections of this chapter for overviews of
the respective systems.
In this chapter
All information given is valid for GSM, extended GSM (EGSM) and DCS1800 systems
unless indicated otherwise.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS receiver GSM-100-323
BTS receiver
Introduction
This section is a brief overview of the functions and capabilities of the BTS receiver
equipment. Each item is described in more detail later in this chapter.
Receive
frequencies
The receiver RF operating frequency band and channels are as follows:
GSM EGSM DCS1800

Receive frequency band (MHz) 890 to 915 880 to 915 1710 to 1785
Transmit/receive duplex separation 45 45 95
(MHz)
Channel width (kHz) 200 200 200
Number of channels 124 174 374
Receive frequency guard bands 890.0 to 890.1 880.0 to 880.1 1710.0 to 1710.1
(MHz) 914.9 to 915.0 914.0 to 915.0 1784.9 to 1785.0
Receive channel centre frequency Even 10ths of Even 10ths of Even 10ths of a
(MHz) a MHz from a MHz from MHz from
890.2 to 914.8 880.2 to 914.8 1710.2 to 1784.8
Internal RF
hardware
The following equipment is housed in the BTS cabinet:
Receiver front end (RFE)

The BTS RFE consists of one or more of the following:
Preselector module; amplifies single channel receive antenna signals in the GSM
or EGSM receive frequency band.
6-way splitter module; routes a single preselector output to the appropriate
transceiver.
Receiver matrix module; routes up to three preselector outputs to the appropriate
transceiver.
Dual path preselector (DPP) module; amplifies diversity receive antenna signals in
the GSM or EGSM receive frequency band, and routes two preselector outputs to
the appropriate transceiver.
Diversity radio channel unit (DRCU)

The DRCU performs all the transceiver receive functions and:
Can handle a second receive path from a second antenna input.
Compares the two received signals.
Slim channel unit 900 (SCU900)

The SCU900 performs all the transceiver receive functions, and can receive Extended
GSM (EGSM) as well as GSM channel frequencies.
22 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BTS receiver

The SCU1800 performs all the transceiver receive functions in DCS1800.
Transceiver control unit (TCU900)

The TCU900 performs all the transceiver receive functions of the SCU900, when the
front panel mode switch is set to SCU.

The TCU1800 performs all the transceiver receive functions of the SCU1800, when the
NOTE
The front panel mode switch on a TCU must be set to SCU for the transceiver
to function in an InCell BTS cabinet.
External RF
hardware
The following receive antenna equipment is external to the BTS cabinet:
Duplexer/quadraplexer
Allows a single antenna to be used for transmit and receive operations. The
duplexer/quadraplexer modules provide operation on GSM, Total Access
Communications System (TACS), or Extended TACS (ETACS) receive frequency bands.
Receiver multicoupler
With preselector modules which provide operation on GSM, TACS, or ETACS receive
frequency bands. The output of each multicoupler preselector module is applied to a
6-way splitter module providing six output signals from a single receive antenna input
signal.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS transmitter GSM-100-323
BTS transmitter
Introduction
This section is a brief overview of the functions and capabilities of the BTS transmitter
equipment. Each item is described in more detail later in this chapter.
Transmit
frequencies
The transmitter operating frequency band and channels are as follows:
GSM EGSM DCS1800

Transmit frequency band (MHz) 935 to 960 925 to 960 1805 to 1880
Transmit/receive duplex separation 45 45 95
(MHz)
Channel width (kHz) 200 200 200
Number of channels 124 174 374
Transmit frequency guard bands 935.0 to 935.1 925.0 to 925.1 1805.0 to 1805.1
(MHz) 959.9 to 960.0 959.9 to 960.0 1879.9 to 1880.0
Transmit channel centre frequency Even 10ths of Even 10ths of Even 10ths of a
(MHz) a MHz from a MHz from MHz from
935.2 to 959.8 925.2 to 959.8 1805.2 to 1879.8
Internal RF
hardware
The following equipment is housed in the BTS cabinet:
Diversity radio channel unit (DRCU)

The DRCU performs the following transmit functions:
Tunes (on a timeslot basis) to any GSM transmit channel RF frequency.
Encodes transmit data input from the DRI or DRIM module.
Modulates transmit data onto the transmit radio channel signal.
Amplifies and controls the level of the transmit radio channel RF signal.
Outputs control data, via coaxial cable, to the remotely tuneable combiners.

The SCU900 performs all the transceiver transmit functions, and can transmit Extended
GSM (EGSM) as well as GSM frequencies.

The SCU1800 performs all the transceiver transmit functions in DCS1800.

The TCU900 performs all the transceiver transmit functions of the SCU900, when the
24 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BTS transmitter

The TCU1800 performs all the transceiver transmit functions of the SCU1800, when the
NOTE
The front panel mode switch on a TCU must be set to SCU for the transceiver
to function in an InCell BTS cabinet.
Combining
Combiners can be used to combine the transmit output signals from multiple transceivers
into one transmit antenna signal output. The types of combiners available are:
Hybrid combiner.
Remote tuning combiner (900 Mhz only).
Cavity combining block.
Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF)

Reduces emissions of out-of-band spurious signals. The Tx BPF is connected between
the final combined transmit channel output signal and the transmit antenna equipment.
External RF
hardware
The RTC and Tx BPF modules can be located outside the BTS cabinet. The modules are
the same as those mounted internally.
The following transmitter antenna equipment is also external to the BTS cabinet:
Duplexer/quadraplexer
The duplexer and quadraplexer modules allow a single antenna to be used for transmit
and receive operation.
They provide operation on GSM, TACS, or ETACS transmit frequency bands and are
equipped with a frequency-dependent transmit input for each of the three bands.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Receiver front end shelf GSM-100-323
Description
The receiver front end (RFE) shelf is a slide-in tray mounted directly above the transmit
combiner shelf at the top of the cabinet.
The table shows the possible combinations of RFE modules in each cabinet:
Equipment GSM 900 DCS1800

Item Additions BTS4 BTS5 BTS6 BTS6
Preselector 6-way splitter Yes Yes No No
Passive splitter No No Yes No
Receiver
Yes Yes Yes No
matrix
Dual path
Yes No Yes
preselector
Dual path
Yes No Yes
preselector 2
Low noise
Yes
amplifier
High
sensitivity Yes
LNA
NOTE
A dual path preselector (DPP) and a low noise amplifier (LNA) provide similar
functions, a DPP is for GSM 900 and a LNA is for DCS1800.
26 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DPP
DPP
Description
The dual path preselector (DPP) allows one pair of antennas to feed up to six
transceivers. The DPP module consists of:
Two receive bandpass filters (Rx BPFs) to attenuate out-of-band receive signal
frequencies.
Two RF preamplifiers to amplify the bandpass filtered received signals to a level
sufficient to compensate for splitter, receiver matrix and cable losses, to provide
the proper receive signal level to the transceiver receiver input(s).
In a Mk2 DPP (DPP2) module a pair of outputs (fitted on the rear) are used for the
receiver extender function or test purposes.
Limitations
One DPP module is required for each pair of receive antenna signals coming into the top
of the cabinet.
Each cabinet can contain up to three DPP modules.
Any unused output connectors must be terminated with 50 ohm loads.
DPP diagram
The diagram is a schematic of the DPP module:
PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 1 6-WAY
Rx IN SPLITTER RF
OUT
Rx BPF
PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 2 6-WAY RF
Rx IN SPLITTER OUT
Rx BPF

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DPP GSM-100-323
DPP modules
The diagram shows DPP modules installed in the RFE shelf:
RF INPUT
(FROM RX ANTENNA OR
DUPLEXER RX PORT)
DUAL PATH
PRESELECTOR
MODULE
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUTS 0 TO 4 OUTPUT 1
(TO CORRESPONDING DRCU) OUTPUT 0
AUX/TEST OUTPUT PORT

(NORMALLY TERMINATED)
28 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Low noise amplifier
Low noise amplifier
Overview
The low noise amplifier (LNA) allows one pair of antennas to feed up to six transceivers.
Location
The LNA modules are fitted on the top panel of DCS1800/PCS 1900 cabinets.
Requirements
There is no requirement to terminate unused output connectors with 50 ohm loads.
Module view
The following shows an LNA module:
RF INPUT
(FROM RX ANTENNA OR
DUPLEXER RX PORT)
OUTPUT 5
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER MODULE
OUTPUT 2
OUTPUTS 0 TO 5
(TO CORRESPONDING TCU) OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 0

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Low noise amplifier GSM-100-323
Functional
description
The low noise amplifier (LNA) consists of two receive bandpass filters (Rx BPFs) to
attenuate out-of-band receive signal frequencies, two RF pre-amplifiers to amplify the
bandpass filtered received signals and dual six way splitter modules allow one pair of
antennas to feed up to six transceivers. The module only transfers received signals that
are in the BTSs receive frequency band.
There are now two LNAs, the original and a high sensitivity version.
Original LNA
Operation
The original LNA comprises two Rx channels, each consisting of an input bandpass filter,
a preselector and an 8-way splitter. The input BPF provides out of band attenuation, and
the preselector provides two stages of amplification and additional filtering. The 8-way
splitter then divides the output, and six of the outputs are distributed to transceivers for
further processing. Outputs J3 and J4 enable BTS cabinets to be daisy chained
together, and provide the input path for the 27 V dc required to power the amplifiers.
The LNA provides a Rx input gain of 8.5 15.5 dB.
Block diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the LNA module:
PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 1 SPLITTER RF
Rx IN OUT
Rx BPF Rx BPF
J3 J4
EXTENDERS
PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 2
SPLITTER RF
Rx IN
Rx BPF Rx BPF OUT
J3 J4
EXTENDERS
210 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Low noise amplifier
High sensitivity
LNA
Operation
The high sensitivity LNA comprises two Rx channels, each consisting of an input
bandpass filter, preselector and an 8-way splitter. The input BPF provides out of band
attenuation, and the preselector provides three stages of amplification and a switched
attenuator. The 8-way splitter then divides the output, and six of the outputs are
distributed to transceivers for further processing. Outputs J3 and J4 enable BTS
cabinets to be daisy chained together, and provide the input path for the 27 V required to
power the amplifiers. Additional filtering is provided by BPFs on the outputs of the
splitter, including the additional outputs (J3 and J4, see below) for when these outputs
are used to drive transceivers directly (eg. in the 8/8/8 configuration).
The high sensitivity LNA has two gain modes, High Gain and Low Gain. Mode selection
is by an externally accessible switch, with the attenuator switched into the RF path in the
low gain mode. High gain is selected for normal high sensitivity operation. Low gain is
selected where there is to be another source of gain in front of the LNA, ie. if a masthead
amplifier is to be used or in the case of daisy chaining receivers.
The high sensitivity LNA provides a Rx input gain of 8.5 14.5 dB in low gain mode and
19.0 25.5 dB in high gain mode.
Block diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the high sensitivity LNA module:
PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 1 dB RF
Rx IN SPLITTER
OUT
Rx BPF
REAR PANEL
SWITCH J3 J4
EXTENDERS
PRESELECTOR
ANTENNA 1 dB RF
Rx IN SPLITTER
OUT
Rx BPF
REAR PANEL
SWITCH J3 J4
EXTENDERS

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Low noise amplifier GSM-100-323
Module view
The following diagram shows a view of the rear view of a high sensitivity LNA.
RF INPUT
(FROM RX ANTENNA OR
DUPLEXER RX PORT)
LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER MODULE
J3 J4
PATH A HIGH LOW

LOW HIGH GAIN GAIN
GAIN GAIN
PATH B
J4 J3
212 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Splitters
Splitters
Description
6-way splitter
The 6-way splitter module splits the preselector module RF output signal into six signals
to provide a receive antenna signal to each transceiver.
Passive splitter
A passive splitter module consists of dual six-way splitter modules. It is coupled to a DPP
or DPP2 module using the receiver extender connectors, and allows one pair of antennas
to feed up to 18 transceivers.
Limitations
One 6-way splitter module is required for each preselector when a receiver matrix is not
used.
All unused splitter outputs on GSM900 must be terminated by a 50 ohm load. On
DCS1800 DPPs, 50 ohm loads are not required.
A passive splitter module can be located in either the host or receiving cabinet.
Operation
For splitter module functional operation in the receiver multicoupler, see the Receiver
multicoupler section in this chapter, and with the dual path preselector see the DPP
section in this chapter.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Splitters GSM-100-323
Passive splitter
module
The diagram shows a passive splitter module installed in the RFE shelf with a DPP2
module:
DPP2
MODULE
PASSIVE SPLITTER MODULE
OUTPUT 0
OUTPUT 0
OUTPUTS TO
RxA/RxB PORTS
ON TOP OF CABINET
214 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Splitters
6 way splitter
module
The diagram shows 6 way splitter modules installed in the RFE shelf with preselector
modules:
RF INPUT
(FROM RX ANTENNA OR
DUPLEXER RX PORT)
TEST PORT (NORMALLY
UNTERMINATED) PRESELECTOR
MODULE 3A
SPLITTER 2 (RX3A) PRESELECTOR

MODULE 2A
PRESELECTOR MODULES 3B, 2B, & 1B

(LEFTTORIGHT, NOT VISIBLE IN THIS PRESELECTOR
VIEW) MODULE 1A
SPLITTER 1 (RX2A)
SPLITTER 5 (RX3B)
SPLITTER 4 (RX2B)
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 2 SPLITTER 0 (RX1A)
SPLITTER 3 (RX1B)
(TO CORRESPONDING (D)RCU) OUTPUT 0
AUX/TEST OUTPUT PORT

(NORMALLY TERMINATED)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Preselector GSM-100-323
Preselector
Overview
The preselector module consists of:
A receive bandpass filter (Rx BPF) to attenuate out-of-band receive signal
frequencies.
An RF preamplifier to amplify the bandpass filtered received signals to a level
sufficient to compensate for splitter, receiver matrix and cable losses, to provide
the proper receive signal level to the DRCU receiver input(s).
There are two types of preselector module:
25 MHz bandwidth (for TACS/GSM).
35 MHz bandwidth (for ETACS/TACS/GSM).
The output of a preselector module can be connected to a six-way splitter module or to a
receiver matrix module.
Limitations
One preselector module is required for each Rx antenna signal coming into the top of the
cabinet, to a maximum of six per BTS cabinet and six per receiver multicoupler cabinet.
Diagram
The diagram is a schematic of the preselector module:
ANTENNA Rx IN RF OUT
Rx BPF
216 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Receiver matrix
Receiver matrix
Description
The receiver matrix module is capable of connecting any of three antenna inputs to any
of six outputs on a timeslot basis.
The three inputs (from the preselectors) are connected to 6-way splitters, the outputs of
which are applied to one of three inputs of each of six solid-state switches. Each
solid-state switch is controlled by a transceiver to select one of the three antenna signals
for its input.
Limitations
A BTS cabinet can accommodate up to two receiver matrix modules, although the
receiver matrix module cannot be used with an RTC.
Any unused output connectors must be terminated by 50 ohm loads.
Diagram
The diagram is a schematic of the receiver matrix module:
DRCU 5 CONTROL

SOLID
STATE DRCU 5 Rx INPUT
SWITCH

DRCU 4 CONTROL
6-WAY
SPLITTER SOLID
SWITCH
DRCU 3 CONTROL
SOLID
SWITCH
6-WAY DRCU 2 CONTROL

SPLITTER
SOLID
SWITCH
DRCU 1 CONTROL
SOLID
6-WAY SWITCH
SPLITTER
DRCU 0 CONTROL
SOLID
SWITCH

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Receiver matrix GSM-100-323
Receiver matrix
module
Receiver matrix modules fitted in an RFE shelf with preselectors:
RECEIVER MATRIX A
PRESELECTOR
MODULE 3A
PRESELECTOR
MODULE 2A
PRESELECTOR MODULES
3B, 2B, AND 1B PRESELECTOR
(LEFTTORIGHT, NOT MODULE 1A
VISIBLE IN THIS VIEW)
RECEIVER MATRIX B
OUTPUT 4
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 2
(TO CORRESPONDING
DRCU) OUTPUT 0
4
3 OUTPUT SWITCHES
2 RECEIVER MATRIX A
TEST OUTPUT PORT 1
(NORMALLY 0
TERMINATED) TEST OUTPUT SWITCHES
OUTPUT
DIP RECEIVER MATRIX B
SWITCHES
DIP switch
settings
The switching function of the module can either be controlled by a DRCU or be preset to
a fixed connection between an antenna and a DRCU.
This is configured using four DIP switches for each output on the front panel of the
module. The table lists the DIP switch settings for each output:
Iput/output signal selection Output DIP switch positions

(Switch order, left to right)
Output signal selection DRCU data controlled Down, Down, Up, Up
Output signal selection of antenna connector Up, Up, Down, Up
Rx1A/Rx1B
Output signal selection of antenna connector Up, Up, Up, Down
Rx2A/Rx2B
Output signal selection of antenna connector Up, Up, Down, Down
Rx3A/Rx3B
218 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Transmit combiner shelf
Description
The transmit combiner shelf is mounted directly above the upper bank of fans and below
the RFE shelf and houses the following equipment:
Transmit combiners can combine up to six RF signals into a composite signal.
Transmit combiners can be either discrete hybrid combiners or remotely tuneable
cavity combiners (RTCs).
Transmit bandpass filters (Tx BPFs) remove spurious and harmonic signals. The
band limited composite transmit signal is then routed to the BTS cabinet antenna
connectors.
The transmit RF signals combined inside a BTS cabinet can either come from
transceivers within the cabinet or from an external source (usually a second BTS
cabinet).

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Hybrid combiner GSM-100-323
Hybrid combiner
Description
The hybrid combiner module combines transmit signals from two inputs for simultaneous
broadcast on a single antenna. The inputs can be from DRCUs or other hybrid combiner
modules; transmit signals from several DRCUs can be combined into a single antenna by
using more than one hybrid combiner module.
Limitations
A BTS cabinet can hold up to five hybrid combiner modules capable of combining six
transmit signals.
There is a 3 dB power signal loss through each hybrid combiner stage. When multiple
stages are coupled together, each input signal must be routed through the same number
of stages to ensure that the combined output signal contains individual channel
frequencies of an equal power level. The practical limit is seven hybrid combiners
(combining eight signals), with each input signal coupled through three stages.
The hybrid combiner is a four-port device, with two ports on one side and two ports on
the opposite side. Either pair of ports can be chosen as the input, but both input ports
must be on the same side of the device.
NOTE
One of the output ports must be terminated by a suitable power load.
220 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Hybrid combiner
Hybrid
combiners with
Tx BPFs in BTS4
or BTS5
The diagram shows four hybrid combiners fitted in the transmit combiner shelf with three
transmit bandpass filters:
TX OUT, ON BACK OF DEVICE, NOT SHOWN IN THIS VIEW
(TO TX BPF OR HYBRID COMBINER)
TX BANDPASS
FILTER 1
TX BANDPASS
FILTER 2 POWER LOAD
TX OUTPUT POWER LOAD
NO CONNECTION
TX IN (FROM CHANNEL COMBINER OUTPUT OR

(D)RCU)
TX BANDPASS
FILTER 0
TX IN (FROM A DRCU OR
ANOTHER HYBRID COMBINER)
TOP OF DRCU SHELF ASSEMBLY

(CUTAWAY VIEW) HYBRID COMBINER
(FOUR ILLUSTRATED)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Hybrid
combiners with
Tx BPFs in BTS6
The diagram shows four hybrid combiners fitted on a transmit combiner shelf with three
transmit bandpass filters:
Tx OUT, ON BACK OF DEVICE, NOT SHOWN IN THIS VIEW
(TO Tx BPF OR HYBRID COMBINER)
Tx BANDPASS
Tx BANDPASS FILTER 1
FILTER 2
POWER LOAD
Tx OUTPUT
NO CONNECTION POWER LOAD
Tx IN (FROM CHANNEL COMBINER

OUTPUT OR DRCU)
Tx BANDPASS
FILTER 0
Tx IN (FROM A DRCU OR
TOP OF DRCU SHELF ASSEMBLY HYBRID COMBINER

(CUTAWAY VIEW) (FOUR ILLUSTRATED)
222 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Hybrid combiner
Hybrid
combiners with a
Tx BPF in BTS6
The diagram shows five hybrid combiners fitted on a transmit combiner shelf with a
transmit bandpass filter:
Tx OUT, ON BACK OF DEVICE, NOT SHOWN IN THIS VIEW
(TO Tx BPF OR HYBRID COMBINER)
Tx BANDPASS
FILTER
POWER LOAD
Tx OUTPUT
NO CONNECTION
Tx IN (FROM CHANNEL COMBINER

OUTPUT OR DRCU)
Tx IN (FROM A DRCU OR
TOP OF DRCU SHELF ASSEMBLY HYBRID COMBINER

(CUTAWAY VIEW) (FIVE ILLUSTRATED)
End view
The diagram shows an end view of the hybrid combiner module:


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Configuration
example
The diagram is a schematic of seven hybrid combiners configured to combine eight Tx
frequencies on one antenna:

224 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Tx BPF
Tx BPF
Description
The transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) module reduces noise and out-of-band
interference caused by spurious and harmonic signals.
It filters the combined transmit signal before it is applied to the antenna, so that only
signals in the transmit frequency band are passed to the antenna.
Limitations
Each BPF has a loss of 0.6 dB.
A Tx BPF module is required for each transmit antenna in all configurations.
Diagram
The diagram is a schematic of the Tx BPF module:
SAMPLING
RF INPUT RF OUT
Tx BPF

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
RTC GSM-100-323
RTC
Description
The remotely tuneable cavity combiner (RTC) consists of up to five independent cavity
resonators. The combiner cavities are narrow-band devices that pass only transmit
signals with an RF frequency equal to the cavitys tuned (resonant) frequency.
Possible configurations are:
The outputs of the individual cavities can be coupled together to combine up to five
channels onto one antenna.
The outputs of the individual cavities can be coupled/decoupled as appropriate to
combine two or three channels onto two separate antennas.
The outputs of two RTCs can be coupled together using a phasing harness, to
combine up to 10 channels onto one antenna.
RTCs are tuned on command from the OMC, which causes a transceiver to send control
data (via coaxial cable) to retune the cavity to a different transmit frequency.
Limitations
The channels to which RTC cavities are tuned must be separated by 800 kHz and in the
GSM frequency band.
A BTS cabinet can accommodate one RTC. Additional combining requires external
RTCs.
One cavity can be retuned and verified in 8 seconds. All five cavities can be retuned and
verified in 19 seconds.
The maximum signal power loss through the RTC is greater than 3 dB when all five
cavities are coupled together.
226 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 RTC
RTC fitted in TC
shelf
The diagram shows an RTC fitted in the transmit combiner shelf:
CAVITY 4 OR
BLANKING PLATE
Tx BANDPASS CAVITY 2 Tx IN
FILTER 2 (FROM DRCU)
CAVITY 4 Tx IN
(FROM DRCU)
CAVITY 0 Tx IN
(FROM DRCU)
ALTERNATE COMBINER OUT

(TO Tx BPF OR PHASING JUNCTION)
CAVITY 3 Tx IN
(FROM DRCU)
TOP OF DRCU SHELF ASSEMBLY Tx BANDPASS

(CUTAWAY VIEW) FILTER 0
ONE OF FOUR COAXIAL BRIDGES
Tx OUT
CAVITY 1 Tx IN (TO Tx ANTENNA )
(FROM DRCU)
TEST PORT
COMBINER OUT
(TO Tx BPF OR PHASING JUNCTION)
Tx IN
(FROM CHANNEL COMBINER OUTPUT OR DRCU)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
RTC GSM-100-323
Configuration
examples
The diagram shows possible RTC combinations:

228 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 CCB 900/1800
CCB 900/1800
Description
The cavity combining block (CCB) hardware feature, available from release GSR2
onwards, provides a cavity combining block which combines the transmit signals from up
to three transceivers, enabling them to transmit on one antenna. The CCBs for 900 MHz
and 1800 MHz are internally different, they operate and look the same. The following
shows the two different configurations of CCB module (CCB output assembly and CCB
extension assembly):
CCB EXTENSION
ASSEMBLY TRANSMIT BANDPASS
FILTER
CAVITY COMBINING
BLOCKS
CCB CONTROL MODULE

CCB OUTPUT ASSEMBLY
A CCB consists of three independent tuneable cavity resonators and can combine the
transmit signals from three transceivers. The RF transmit signals from up to six
transceivers can be combined in one cabinet using two CCBs. The CCB modules are
fitted on the combining shelf in the cabinet.
CCB combiner
The CCB is a cavity combiner operating in the appropriate transmit frequency band. The
CCB consists of three independent tuneable cavity resonators. The combiner cavities
are narrow band devices which only pass transmit signals with an RF frequency equal to
the cavity tuned (resonant) frequency. The output of the individual cavities are coupled
together to provide three channel combining. The following shows a block diagram of a
CCB.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
CCB 900/1800 GSM-100-323
ANTENNA
TRANSMIT BANDPASS FILTER

(CCB OUTPUT ASSEMBLY ONLY)

MOTOR
CAVITY

RF
DATA
BIAS
TEE
MOTOR
CONTROL
CCB CONTROL MODULE
RF AND DATA FROM

TRANSCEIVER
CCB CONTROL BUS
TX1 TX2 TX3
Transmit bandpass filter

A transmit bandpass filter, to reduce emission of spurious signals outside the transmit
frequency band by the transmit antenna equipment, is connected between the combiner
output and the antenna connector.
CCB control module

The power supplies, alarm and control interface from the transceiver and power supply
modules are interfaced by the CCB control module. This allows multiple sourced cavity
combiners to be installed without requiring amended transceiver software.
The CCB cavities are tuned by software commands from the transceivers. Control data is
sent by the transceiver, through the coaxial cable, to the CCB bias tee. The bias tee
sends the RF signals to the appropriate cavity and the control signals to the CCB control
board. The control board passes the tuning information to the motor of the appropriate
cavity. If the system has more than one CCB control board, the boards operate as active
and standby, this makes sure there is no break in control, should a control board fail.
CCB control bus

This control bus is connected between CCB control boards to provide redundancy in the
event of a control board malfunction.
230 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Transceiver shelf
Transceiver shelf
Introduction
A transceiver shelf assembly consists of a tray in which transceivers can be mounted.
The BTS6 shelf can accommodate six DRCU3, SCU900, SCU1800, TCU900 or
TCU1800 transceivers, while the BTS4 and BTS5 can hold up to 5 DRCUs.
NOTE
If a DRCU3 or SCU900 is fitted in a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet, a spacer
(Motorola part number 4304422N01) must be fitted, as these units are
considerably narrower than their slots.
Control signals and traffic channels for a transceiver are routed from a DRIM module by
way of a DRIX module via a fibre optic cable.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU GSM-100-323
DRCU
Overview
The diversity radio channel unit (DRCU) is a radio transceiver and forms the central
element of the base station system (BSS) RF subsystem. The DRCU also supports
diversity reception. It generates the RF transmit and receive frequencies and contains the
channel equalization and DRCU control logic circuits.
View of DRCU
The DRCU:
Function
The DRCU generates the RF transmit and receive frequencies and contains the channel
equalization and DRCU control logic circuits for eight timeslots.
The DRCU provides a fully duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) for
communicating with mobile stations in the following band:
Transmit (Tx): 935 to 960 MHz.
Receive (Rx): 890 to 915 MHz.
The DRCU can change transmit and receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis to
support frequency hopping.
Internal DRCU circuitry consists of:
Receiver.
Synthesizer.
Transmitter (including an RF power amplifier).
Diversity control board (DCB).
Diversity equalizer board (DEQB).
Power supplies.
232 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU
Maintenance
For maintenance purposes, the front panel includes:
RS232 serial ports to the transceiver control processor and equalizer processor.
A test port giving access to critical test points for alignment and maintenance.
All major subsystems, for example synthesizers, RF amplifiers and exciter, are
continuously monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to a GPROC
module in the BSU shelf. The DRCU alarm status is also displayed by LED indicators on
the front panel.
Reset switch
The front panel pushbutton switch is pressed as follows:
Momentarily to reset the control processor and begin the front panel indicator test
sequence.
LEDs
The front panel LED indicators are as follows:
Power (green)
LED on when the power supply circuits are on.
LED off when there is a power supply fault.
Alarm (red)
LED normally off.
LED on during an alarm condition (stays on until alarm condition cleared).
LED on momentarily when the control processor is reset.
Sleep (yellow)
LED normally off (in wake state).
LED on in standby condition (sleep state) when the BSS software detects a lack of
channel activity.
Test (yellow)
LED normally off.
LED on in test mode.
Activity 07 (green)
Each LED lights when Tx (uplink) or Rx (downlink) data processing is active on its
timeslot channel.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU GSM-100-323
DRCU front panel

The DRCU front panel:

#

RX IN 2
RX IN 1

!

#
"

234 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU
Block diagram
The following two pages are a functional block diagram of the DRCU:
"/ #)$

"/ #)$ " $ "/ #)$
" #)$ %$ %$
1 "/ #)$ #
! %$ $ 0 "

&"#$ )!%*""
' '" "

# "#$ 1 # "#$
"/ #)$ #'
! %$ %$ $
"/ #)$

"( "/ #)$ " $ "/ #)$ #)$ %$ %$
"
$ ( "/ #)$ #
0 "
$ $

"$ "

& "##

& "## ##
"
##

#

! #

+,.- $ %$ #

! #
&"#$ )$ ""
0 %$
" "( $

0

0 " 0 $
SEE PAGE 2-36

#)$ #*" " 0

%$ " "* $

+,.- $ %$ %$
"#$

0 %$ %$ """

$ "( (

%$ " "

$ / #)$
$ / #)$ " $ $ / #)$ #)$ %$ %$
"
$ / #)$ #
0 "
' '" "

$ / #)$ #'

$ / #)$
$ / #)$ " $ $ / #)$
#)$ %$ %$
"
$ / #)$ #
0 "
($ " )

($ " "

'" $ " $

"& '"


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU GSM-100-323
!
!

&%
' (
"

! $

(

SEE PAGE 2-35
(

!
' POWER
" &% ( AMPLIFIER
MODULE

# "
!
" "

"
"

236 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU
Transmitter
The non-return to zero (NRZ) data input signal (eight timeslot channels) from the control
board is applied to the direct digital synthesizer (DDS) modulator board.
DDS modulator board

The signal is:
Encoded.
Serial-to-parallel converted.
Gaussian filtered into a digital representation.
D/A converted into a 1/2 Gaussian minimum shift keyed (GMSK) modulated carrier
at an IF of 7.2 MHz.
Up-converted and frequency-doubled into a full GMSK modulated carrier at an IF
of 126 MHz.
Applied to the DDS up-converter board.
DDS up-converter board

The signal is:
Up-converted into the final transmit channel frequency (935 to 960 MHz).
Applied to the exciter board.
Exciter board
The exciter board provides a control point (transmitter keying and power output level) for
the final DRCU transmitter RF power output.
The signal is:
Amplified to the intermediate RF power output level (maximum +27 dBm).
Applied to the power amplifier board.
Power amplifier board

The power amplifier contains an isolator and forward and reverse power detectors,
whose outputs are applied to the power control board.
The signal is amplified to the final RF power output level.
Power control board

Using the measurements from the power amplifier board power detectors, the power
control board signals the power amplifier voltage controlled attenuator to set the RF
power level (maximum 48.4 W to 61.0 W (47.35 dBm +/ 0.5 dB).

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU GSM-100-323
Receiver
The DRCU receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from two
preselectors, via two receive matrices or six-way splitters, on the BTS RFE shelf. These
signals (channel 1 and channel 2) are applied to the DRCU RF front end board.
RF front end board

The signals are:
Converted to a first intermediate frequency (IF) of 70.2 MHz. The baseband
signals are produced to simplify sampling and filtering.
Split and applied to the diversity signal strength indication (DSSI) board and the
diversity in phase and quadrature (DIQ) board.
The DRCUs RF front end is designed to operate during splitter or matrix loss.
DSSI board
The DSSI board:
Converts each first IF output signal to a DSSI IF of 10.7 MHz.
Filters and detects the DSSI IF output signals to produce a dc voltage (V) received
signal strength (RSSI) outputs (VRSSI1 and VRSSI2) proportional to the received
RF signal power applied to the input of the DRCU front end.
Applies the RSSI voltages to the DCB for DSSI and automatic gain control (AGC)
processing.
DIQ board
The DIQ board:
Demodulates each baseband signal into I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals.
Filters and amplifies the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals to the level required by the A/D
converters on the DCB.
Second mixers/bandpass filters

Second mixers and bandpass filters (DSSI mixer/10.7 MHz bandpass filter, I1/I2 signal
mixer/filter and Q1/Q2 signal mixer/filter) further reduce adjacent channel, image channel
and spurious RF signal rejection.
Automatic gain control

The level of the received signal is controlled by AGC in both RF and IF. The RF AGC is a
35 dB fixed signal attenuator that can be switched in or out as required. The IF AGC is a
digital stepped attenuator (DSA) with variable signal attenuation of 0 to 80 dB.
238 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU
DCB operation
The diversity control board (DCB) is a digital control board for the RF part of the DRCU.
It also provides a duplex interface between the digital radio interface (DRI) or digital radio
interface extended memory (DRIM) and the DRCU so that modulation and equalization
data can be passed between them, along with associated control and status data.
The DCB contains the digital circuits required to perform RCU control including the
following functions:
DRI(M) interface.
RF board interface, including DSSI/AGC processing.
Diversity equalizer interface (to DEQB).
Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the DRCU).
Maintenance interface (including DRCU front panel status indicators, Teletype
(TTY) ports, test point I/O port, and test mode operation).
Control of external modules, for example, remotely tunable combiner, and receive
matrix.
DCB on downlink
On the downlink (Tx), the DCB accepts formatted modulation, DRCU control and slow
control (background) messages from the DRI(M), via the fibre optic receiver.
The messages are stored in a 64 byte first-in-first-out (FIFO) by the high level data link
controller (HDLC). The DCB firmware either distributes them to their respective
destinations (for example modulator or equalizer), or interprets them to perform another
slow control or configuration function.
For mobile-bound information (for example voice data), the message is distributed to the
modulator FIFO and interface and then applied to the direct digital modulator board to be
modulated onto the RF carrier and transmitted to the mobile station. Each message must
be transferred in one timeslot.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU GSM-100-323
DCB on uplink
On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the DIQ board, are
applied to A/D converters on the DCB and converted into digital words, which are applied
to each of the eight equalizer digital signal processor blocks on the DEQB. The DEQB
processes the baseband signal into eight timeslot channels of equalized data.
This data output signal is routed back to the DCB and is applied to the equalizer interface
and loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The DCB host processor reads it, formats it into a
message and loads it into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC, which transmits the
information to the DRI(M) via the fibre optic transmitter.
Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads the uplink
control data from DCB registers 1, 2, and 3 and sends this data as a message to the
DRI(M). Slow control information is transmitted by firmware as a separate message after
appropriate hardware transfers have been performed.
Each message must be transferred in one timeslot.
DCB firmware
The DCB firmware:
Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and type of
request/query.
Manages analogue and digital alarms.
Selects and inserts bursts for both test purposes and normal operation.
Inserts tail and guard bits, and midamble training sequence according to training
sequence code (TSC), for any one timeslot.
Formats slow control message protocol into source processor and type of
confirm/response.
Demultiplexes inbound modulation data, DRCU control data and slow control
messages.
Multiplexes equalized data, uplink control and slow control messages.
Performs GSM frequency hopping algorithm for both uplink and downlink on a
timeslot basis.
Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (two for transmit and two for receive,
to handle fast synthesizer hopping).
Allows hopping through the broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier.
Controls and coordinates timing based on an interrupt driven executive.
240 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU
DEQB operation
The DEQB is a digital signal processing board. Due to the large amount of processing to
be done, eight individual equalization blocks are required, one block for each GSM
TDMA timeslot. Each equalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP).
These blocks are largely independent of each other, but access common buses to
communicate with the DCB host processor, and peripherals located on the DCB. All
communications with the DEQB are through the DCB to DEQB interface.
The DEQB:
Equalizes the uplink (Rx) data channel.
Processes DSSI data.
Interfaces with the DCB.
Inputs to the equalizer digitizer signal processor (EQ DSP) blocks are received from the
DCB, and EQ DSP outputs are sent to the DCB. Most EQ DSP peripherals are located
on the DCB. Local RAM, address decoding, and watchdog timers are on the DEQB
itself.
The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the main IF board are applied to the
respective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits on the DCB. The
output of these circuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data and routed to
the DEQB. The second IF output signal from the DRCU front end board is not amplitude
limited, however the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude variations of
the receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be angle demodulated by the EQ
DSP blocks.
The EQ DSP blocks use a Viterbi algorithm, digital filtering and other signal processing
algorithms to equalize the I and Q baseband information signals.
The V RSSI indications from the DSSI board are applied to the RSSI A/D conversion,
data buffer and RAM circuits on the DCB. The output of these circuits are processed into
eight timeslot channels of RSSI data and routed to the DEQB. Each EQ DSP block
processes the RSSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advance averages for its
particular timeslot channel.
The AGC/timing advance data output signal is routed back to the DCB, applied to the
equalizer interface and loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The DCB host processor reads
the AGC/timing advance data out of the equalizer output FIFO.
The host processor adjusts the data timing accordingly. The host processor also formats
the AGC data into a message that is applied to the AGC data RAM and register and RF
AGC logic circuits on the DCB. These circuits output control signals to the fixed
attenuators on the DRCU diversity front end board, and to the variable attenuator on the
main IF board. The attenuators adjust the receiver signal gain accordingly.
DRI(M) interface
The interface between the DRCU and the DRI(M) located in the BSU is via fibre optic
cable at a data rate of E1/T1. All channel data and transceiver control data are
exchanged over this link. All data is Manchester coded (NRZ). The DCB clock recovery
circuit recovers a reference signal from the E1/T1 data stream input (downlink) signal for
DRCU data synchronization. The recovered clock reference signal is also applied to the
reference frequency loop for derivation of a stable frequency reference (2.6 MHz) for
frequency synthesis.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCUII GSM-100-323
DRCUII
Overview
The diversity radio channel unit (DRCUII) is a radio transceiver and forms the central
element of the base station system (BSS) RF subsystem. Functionally similar to the
DRCU, the DRCUII also supports diversity reception. It generates the RF transmit and
receive frequencies and contains the channel equalization and DRCUII control logic
circuits.
View of DRCUII
The DRCUII:
Function
The DRCUII generates the RF transmit and receive frequencies and contains the
channel equalization and DRCUII control logic circuits for eight timeslots.
The DRCUII provides a fully duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) for
communicating with mobile stations in the following band:
Transmit (Tx): 935 to 960 MHz.
Receive (Rx): 890 to 915 MHz.
The DRCUII can change transmit and receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis to
support frequency hopping.
Internal DRCUII circuitry consists of:
Receiver.
Synthesizer.
Transmitter (including an RF power amplifier).
Radio control board (RCB).
Power supplies.
242 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCUII
Maintenance
For maintenance purposes, the front panel includes:
RS232 serial ports to the transceiver control processor and equalizer processor.
A test port giving access to critical test points for alignment and maintenance.
All major subsystems, for example synthesizers, RF amplifiers and exciter, are
continuously monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to a GPROC
module in the BSU shelf. The DRCUII alarm status is also displayed by LED indicators
on the front panel.
Reset switch
The front panel pushbutton switch is pressed as follows:
Momentarily to reset the control processor and begin the front panel indicator test
sequence.
LEDs
The front panel LED indicators are as follows:
Power (green)
LED on when the power supply circuits are on.
LED off when there is a power supply fault.
Alarm (red)
LED normally off.
LED on during an alarm condition (stays on until alarm condition cleared).
LED on momentarily when the control processor is reset.
Sleep (yellow)
LED normally off (in wake state).
LED on in standby condition (sleep state) when the BSS software detects a lack of
channel activity.
Test (yellow)
LED normally off.
LED on in test mode.
Activity 07 (green)
Each LED lights when Tx (uplink) or Rx (downlink) data processing is active on its
timeslot channel.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCUII GSM-100-323
DRCUII front
panel
The DRCUII front panel:

!
!

!

!

RX IN 2
RX IN 1

"
! $

EQL +
CONT
PRCSR
#

244 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCUII
Block diagram
The following two pages are a functional block diagram of the DRCUII:
!. "(#
!. "(# ! # !. "(#

! "(# $# $#
!. "(# "
/ !
& &! !
!. "(# "&
!. "(#
!. "(# ! # !. "(# "(# $# $#
!
!. "(# "
/ !

% !""
% !""
""
!
""

"

"

*+-, # $# "

/ $# "
!# !!

! !' #

/
/ ! / #
SEE PAGE 2-46

"(# ")! ! /

$# ! !) #

*+-, # $# $#
!"#

/ $# $# !!!

# !' '

$# ! !

# . "(#
# . "(# ! # # . "(# "(# $# $#
!
# . "(# "
/ !
& &! !

# . "(# "&

# . "(#
# . "(# ! # # . "(#
"(# $# $#
!
# . "(# "
/ !
'# ! (

'# ! !

&! # ! #

!% &!


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCUII GSM-100-323
!
!

%$
& '
"

!

'

SEE PAGE 2-45
'

!
& POWER
" %$ ' AMPLIFIER
MODULE

# "
!
" "

"
"

246 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCUII
Transmitter
DDS modulator board

The signal is:
Encoded.
of 126 MHz.

The signal is:
Exciter board
the final RCU transmitter RF power output.
The signal is:

Power control board


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCUII GSM-100-323
Receiver
The DRCUII receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from two
signals (channel 1 and channel 2) are applied to the DRCUII RF front end board.
DRCU RF front end board

The signals are:
Split and applied to the low power signal strength indication (LSSI) board and the
low power in phase and quadrature (LIQ) board.
The DRCUII RF front end is designed to operate during splitter or matrix loss.
LSSI board
The LSSI board:
Converts each first IF output signal to an LSSI IF of 10.7 MHz.
Filters and detects the LSSI IF output signals to produce a dc voltage (V) received
RF signal power applied to the input of the DRCUII front end.
Applies the RSSI voltages to the RCB for LSSI and automatic gain control (AGC)
processing.
LIQ board
The LIQ board:
converters on the RCB.

Second mixers and bandpass filters (LSSI mixer/10.7 MHz bandpass filter, I1/I2 signal

248 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCUII
RCB operation
The radio control board (RCB) is a digital control board for the RF part of the DRCUII. It
also duplex-interfaces with the DRI(M) to communicate modulation, equalization, control
and status data.
The RCB contains the DRCUII control circuits including:
DRI(M) interface.
RF board interface, including LSSI/AGC processing.
Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the DRCUII).

(TTY) ports, test point I/O port, test mode operation, etc).
Uplink (Rx) data channel equalization.
LSSI data processing.
Controlling external modules, for example remotely tuneable combiner and receive
matrix.
RCB on downlink
On the downlink (Tx), the RCB accepts formatted modulation, DRCUII control, and slow
control (background) messages from the DRI(M) via the fibre optic receiver.
controller (HDLC). The RCB firmware either distributes them to their respective
modulator FIFO and modulator interface and then applied to the direct digital modulator
board, which modulates the data onto the RF carrier and transmits it to the mobile
station. All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.
RCB on uplink
On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the LIQ board are applied
to A/D converters on the RCB and converted to digital words, which are applied to each
of the four equalizer digital signal processor blocks on the RCB. Each EQ DSP
The data output signal is routed to the equalizer FIFO and read by the host processor,
which formats it into a message and loads it into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC.
The HDLC transmits the information to the DRI(M) via the fibre optic transmitter.
Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads uplink
control data from RCB registers 1, 2 and 3, and sends it as a message to the DRI(M).
Slow control information is transmitted by the firmware as a separate message after
All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCUII GSM-100-323
RCB firmware
The RCB firmware:
Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and request type.
confirm/response.
Demultiplexes inbound modulation data, DRCUII control data, and slow control
messages.
timeslot basis.
Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (two for transmit and two for receive),
for fast synthesizer hopping.
Four equalization
blocks
Four individual equalization blocks are required, each for two TDMA timeslots. Each
equalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP). These blocks are largely
independent of each other, but access common buses to communicate with the host
processor and other peripherals.
Inputs to the equalizer digital signal processor (EQ DSP) blocks are received from the
RCB, and EQ DSP outputs are sent to the RCB. Most EQ DSP peripherals are located
on the RCB, but local RAM, address decoding, and watchdog timers are on the DEQB
itself.
Baseband
signals
respective I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 A/D conversion and data FIFO circuits. The output of these
circuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data and routed to the appropriate
EQ DSP. The second IF output signal from the DRCU front end board is not amplitude
limited, however, the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude variations of
DSP blocks.
250 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCUII
V RSSI
indications
The V RSSI indications from the LSSI board are applied to the RSSI A/D conversion,
data buffer and RAM circuits on the RCB. The output of these circuits are processed into
eight timeslot channels of RSSI data and routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. Each EQ
DSP block processes the RSSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advance
averages for its particular timeslot channel.
AGC data
The AGC/timing advance data output signal is routed back to the RCB, applied to the
equalizer interface and loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The RCB host processor reads
the AGC/timing advance data out of the equalizer output FIFO and adjusts the data
timing accordingly.
The host processor also formats the AGC data into a message that is applied to the AGC
data RAM and register and RF AGC logic circuits on the RCB. These circuits output
control signals to the fixed attenuators on the DRCUII receiver front end board and to the
variable attenuator on the main IF board. The attenuators adjust the receiver signal gain
accordingly.
DRI(M) interface
The interface between the DRCUII and the DRI(M), located in the BSU, is via fibre optic
cable at a data rate of E1/T1. All Manchester coded channel data and transceiver control
data are exchanged over this link. The clock reference signal is recovered from the
E1/T1 data stream input (downlink) signal for DRCUII data synchronization, and is also
applied to the reference frequency loop derive a stable frequency reference (2.6 MHz) for

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU3 GSM-100-323
DRCU3
Overview
The DRCU3 radio transceiver is the central element of the BSS RF subsystem. It
generates RF transmit and receive frequencies, and contains the digital circuits for eight
timeslots of channel equalization and DRCU3 control logic.
The DRCU3 provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel):
Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 935 to 960 MHz.
Receive (Rx) frequency band, 890 to 915 MHz.
The DRCU3 can change transmit/receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis, as required
for frequency hopping applications.
NOTE
If a DRCU3 is fitted in a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet, a spacer (Motorola part
number 4304422N01) must be fitted, as the unit is considerably narrower
than the slot.
View of DRCU3
The DRCU3:
Circuitry
DRCU3 circuitry is contained in an integral module package. This circuitry consists of:
Receiver boards.
Synthesizer boards.
Transmitter boards (including an RF power amplifier).
Various power supply boards.
252 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU3
Maintenance
For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the transceiver control processor and
one to the equalizer processor are included on the front panel of the DRCU3.
A special test port on the DRCU3 front panel provides access to critical test points for
alignment and maintenance.
All major subsystems within the DRCU3, for example, synthesizers, RF amplifiers,and
exciter, are continuously monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to a
generic processor board (GPROC) in the BSU shelf.
NOTE
A voltage of 15 V is present, at the power D-type connector of the DRCU3,
when the circuit breaker for the appropriate DRCU is switched off and the
DRCU3 is disconnected.
This voltage is due to the alarm detection circuitry monitoring the state of the
circuit breaker, and presents no hazard as it is supplied via a 20 kohm current
limiting resistor.
With the DRCU3 connected (and the circuit breaker off) there is no
measurable voltage present at the connector.
Reset switch
The front panel pushbutton reset switch is pressed momentarily to reset the control
processor and begin the front panel indicator test sequence.
LEDs
The front panel incorporates two tricolour LED indicators as follows:
Power/Alarm LED
Off = No power.
Steady green = Call processing in progress.
Flashing green = Bootstrap mode.
Yellow = Sleep mode.
Red = Alarm condition (on until the alarm condition is cleared).
Activity LED
Green = Normal transmit/receive activity.
Yellow = Transceiver in test mode (transmit or receive activity).
Red = Transceiver in test mode (no RF activity).
NOTE
The power/alarm and activity LEDs briefly illuminate red when reset is initiated.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU3 GSM-100-323
DRCU3 front
panel
The DRCU3 front panel:

POWER/
ALARM

GSM 900

EXTERNAL
ALARM
INPUT

RX IN 2
RX IN 1

"

EQL +
CONT
PRCSR
!

254 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU3
Block diagram
The following two pages are a functional block diagram of the DRCU3:
!. "(#
!. "(# ! # !. "(#

! "(# $# $#
!. "(# "
/ !
& &! !
!. "(# "&
!. "(#
!. "(# ! # !. "(# "(# $# $#
!
!. "(# "
/ !

% !""
% !""
""
!
""

"

"

*+-, # $# "

/ $# "

"# !!
! !' #

/
/ ! / #
SEE PAGE 2-56

"(# ")! ! /

$# ! !) #

*+-, # $# $#
!"#

/ $# $# !!!

# !' '

$# ! !

# . "(#
# . "(# ! # # . "(# "(# $# $#
!
# . "(# "
/ !
& &! !

# . "(# "&

# . "(#
# . "(# ! # # . "(#
"(# $# $#
!
# . "(# "
/ !
'# ! (

'# ! !

&! # ! #

!% &!


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU3 GSM-100-323
!
!

%$
& '
"

!

'

SEE PAGE 2-55
'

!
& POWER
" %$ ' AMPLIFIER
MODULE

# "
!
" "

"
"

256 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU3
Transmitter
DDS modulator board

The signal is:
Encoded.
of 126 MHz.

The signal is:
Exciter board
the final DRCU transmitter RF power output.
The signal is:

Power control board


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU3 GSM-100-323
Receiver
The DRCU3 receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from two
signals (channel 1 and channel 2) are applied to the DRCU3 RF front end board.
DRCU RF front end board

The signals are:
Split and applied to the low power signal strength indication (LSSI) board and the
low power in phase and quadrature (LIQ) board.
The DRCU3 RF front end is designed to operate during splitter or matrix loss.
LSSI board
The LSSI board:
Converts each first IF output signal to an LSSI IF of 10.7 MHz.
Filters and detects the LSSI IF output signals to produce a dc voltage (V) received
RF signal power applied to the input of the DRCU3 front end.
Applies the RSSI voltages to the SCB for LSSI and automatic gain control (AGC)
processing.
LIQ board
The LIQ board:
converters on the SCB.

Second mixers and bandpass filters (LSSI mixer/10.7 MHz bandpass filter, I1/I2 signal

258 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU3
SCB operation
The slim control board (SCB) is a digital control board for the RF part of the DRCU3. It
also duplex-interfaces with the DRI(M) to communicate modulation, equalization, control
and status data.
The SCB contains the DRCU3 control circuits including:
DRI(M) interface.
RF board interface, including LSSI/AGC processing.
Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the DRCU3).

(TTY) ports, test point I/O port, test mode operation, etc).
Uplink (Rx) data channel equalization.
LSSI data processing.
Controlling external modules, for example remotely tuneable combiner and receive
matrix.
SCB on downlink
On the downlink (Tx), the SCB accepts formatted modulation, DRCU3 control, and slow
control (background) messages from the DRI(M) via the fibre optic receiver.
controller (HDLC). The SCB firmware either distributes them to their respective
modulator FIFO and modulator interface and then applied to the direct digital modulator
board, which modulates the data onto the RF carrier and transmits it to the mobile
station. All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.
SCB on uplink
On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the LIQ board are applied
to A/D converters on the SCB and converted to digital words, which are applied to each
of the four equalizer digital signal processor blocks on the SCB. Each EQ DSP
The data output signal is routed to the equalizer FIFO and read by the host processor,
which formats it into a message and loads it into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC.
The HDLC transmits the information to the DRI(M) via the fibre optic transmitter.
Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads uplink
control data from SCB registers 1, 2 and 3, and sends it as a message to the DRI(M).
Slow control information is transmitted by the firmware as a separate message after
All messages must be transferred within one timeslot.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRCU3 GSM-100-323
SCB firmware
The SCB firmware:
Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and request type.
confirm/response.
Demultiplexes inbound modulation data, DRCU3 control data, and slow control
messages.
timeslot basis.
Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (two for transmit and two for receive),
for fast synthesizer hopping.
Four equalization
blocks
Four individual equalization blocks are required, each for two TDMA timeslots. Each
equalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP). These blocks are largely
independent of each other, but access common buses to communicate with the host
processor and other peripherals.
Inputs to the equalizer digital signal processor (EQ DSP) blocks are received from the
SCB, and EQ DSP outputs are sent to the SCB. Most EQ DSP peripherals are located
on the SCB, but local RAM, address decoding, and watchdog timers are on the DEQB
itself.
Baseband
signals
circuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data and routed to the appropriate
EQ DSP. The second IF output signal from the DRCU front end board is not amplitude
limited, however, the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude variations of
DSP blocks.
V RSSI
indications
The V RSSI indications from the LSSI board are applied to the RSSI A/D conversion,
data buffer and RAM circuits on the SCB. The output of these circuits are processed into
eight timeslot channels of RSSI data and routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. Each EQ
DSP block processes the RSSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advance
averages for its particular timeslot channel.
260 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRCU3
AGC data
The AGC/timing advance data output signal is routed back to the SCB, applied to the
equalizer interface and loaded into the equalizer FIFO. The SCB host processor reads
the AGC/timing advance data out of the equalizer output FIFO and adjusts the data
timing accordingly.
The host processor also formats the AGC data into a message that is applied to the AGC
data RAM and register and RF AGC logic circuits on the SCB. These circuits output
control signals to the fixed attenuators on the DRCU3 receiver front end board and to the
variable attenuator on the main IF board. The attenuators adjust the receiver signal gain
accordingly.
DRI(M) interface
The interface between the DRCU3 and the DRI(M), located in the BSU, is via fibre optic
cable at a data rate of E1/T1. All Manchester coded channel data and transceiver control
data are exchanged over this link. The clock reference signal is recovered from the
E1/T1 data stream input (downlink) signal for DRCU3 data synchronization, and is also
applied to the reference frequency loop derive a stable frequency reference (2.6 MHz) for

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
SCU900 and SCU1800 GSM-100-323
SCU900 and SCU1800
Overview
NOTE
In this section the generic term SCU is used for the SCU900 and SCU1800
except where information relates specifically to one type.
The slim channel unit (SCU) is a radio transceiver and is the central element of the BSS
RF sub-system. It generates all the GSM and EGSM (SCU900) and DCS1800
(SCU1800) transmit and receive RF frequencies, and contains the digital circuits required
for eight timeslots of channel equalization as well as SCU control logic. SCU1800s
cannot be fitted in BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets.
The SCU provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) for
communicating with mobile stations in the following bands:
GSM: Tx 935 to 960 MHz; Rx 890 to 915 MHz.
EGSM: Tx 925 to 960 MHz; Rx 880 to 915 MHz.
DCS1800: Tx 1805 to 1885 MHz; Rx 1710 to 1785 MHz.
The SCU can change transmit/receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis to support
frequency hopping applications.
NOTE
If an SCU900 is fitted in a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet, a spacer (Motorola part
number 4304422N01) must be fitted, as the unit is considerably narrower
than its slot.
SCU circuitry consists of a receiver board, a synthesizer board, transmitter boards

(including an RF power amplifier), a digital processing and control (DPC) board, and a
power supply board.
262 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 SCU900 and SCU1800
View of an SCU
The diagram shows an SCU:
Maintenance
For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the control processor is included on
the front panel of the SCU. Communication to the equalizer processors is also available
from this port by way of a virtual link provided by the control processor.
A special test port on the SCU front panel provides access to critical test points for
All major sub-systems within the SCU (synthesizers, RF amplifiers, etc) are continuously
monitored and alarmed as necessary. Alarms are reported to a Generic Processor
Board (GPROC) in the BSU shelf. The SCU control and transmitter status is also
displayed using LED indicators, on the front panel of the SCU.
The front panel switch contains a pushbutton used to manually reset the SCU. The
software generates a front panel indicator test sequence when reset is activated.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
SCU front panel

The SCU900 front panel:
GSM 900

TX
OUT
CAUTION
HEAT SINK MAY BE
HOT TO TOUCH
TX
STATUS

DATA
OUT A

DATA
IN A

RADIO

STATUS
RESET

EXTERNAL
ALARMS

CNTRL
PRCSR

RX IN 2

RX IN 1

VOLTAGE INPUT
2030 VDC

264 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Switch
The front panel pushbutton switch is pressed momentarily to reset the control processor
and begin the front panel indicator test sequence.
LEDs
Radio status LED

Red = Power fail.
Steady yellow (and transmitter status LED off) = Sleep mode.
Flashing yellow = Test mode.
Transmitter status LED

Off = Transmitter off and not programmed.
Off (and radio status LED steady yellow) = Sleep mode.
Red = Transmitter alarm exists.
Flashing green = Transmitter programmed and off.
Yellow = Transmitter on during at least one timeslot.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Transmitter
Refer to the SCU block diagram.
The modulator (non-return to zero (NRZ)) data input signal (eight timeslot channels) from
the (digital processing and control board DPC) is applied to the Transmitter Board. This
NRZ data signal is encoded, serial to parallel converted, Gaussian filtered into a digital
representation, and then D/A converted into a Gaussian Minimum Shift Keyed (GMSK)
modulated carrier at a 1st IF of 7.0 MHz. This 7.0 MHz IF signal is up converted with a
high side injection of 182.0 MHz to a full GMSK modulated carrier at a 2nd IF of
175 MHz.
The full GMSK modulated 175 MHz 2nd IF is filtered and applied to the input of a Gilbert
cell linear amplitude modulator for the purpose of transmitter ramping control. The output
of the Gilbert cell is then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is up-converted to
the final transmit channel frequency which is in the range of 925 to 960 MHz (or 1805 to
1880 MHz in DCS1800). This low level modulated carrier signal is then applied to a
combination of analogue and digital attenuators for the purposes of RF power control.
The analogue ramp voltage and power control voltage are provided by the DPC. Digital
attenuator information is provided by the DPC over a serial link. The output of the power
control elements is further amplified by an exciter chain to a maximum output of +5 dBm.
The control driver board provides RF power amplification between the transmitter board
output and the input of the power amplifier board. It provides power regulation and signal
buffering, acting as an interface between the power amplifier and other parts of the radio.
The forward power detector is mounted on this board.
The power amplifier board amplifies the intermediate level modulated carrier signal input
to a final RF power output level. The power amplifier also contains an isolator and the
reverse power detector. The detected output from the the forward power detector (on the
control driver board) and the reverse power detector is applied to the DPC Board. Based
on these detected signals the DPC determines the setting for the final SCU RF power
output level. The DPC then sends a signal to the gain control elements of the transmitter
to set the corresponding RF power level.
The maximum output power available at the SCU900 transmitter RF power output
connector is 54.3 Watts (47.35 dBm) +/ 0.5 dBm.
The maximum output power available at the SCU1800 transmitter RF power output
connector is 25.1 Watts (44.0 dBm) +/ 1.0 dBm.
266 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Receiver
Refer to the SCU block diagram.
The receiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna signals from a dual
preselector module.
The receive RF signal from each BTS RF front end is applied to two inputs (branch 1 and
branch 2) of the SCU receiver board. Following a switchable automatic intermodulation
control (AIC) pad and an RF band pass filter, each receive input signal is converted to an
intermediate frequency (IF) of 86.6 MHz (or 215 MHz in DCS1800). The IF lineup
provides bandpass filtering and a 35 dB switchable pad for automatic gain control (AGC).
The IF output signal (having been downconverted to 10.75 MHz in DCS1800) for each
receiver branch is split into two signals.
One signal is applied to a Log/limiting amplifier stage which provides a Received Signal
Strength Indication (RSSI1, RSSI2) voltage and an amplitude limited IF output. The
RSSI voltage provides an analogue representation of the received signal strength, which
is sent to the DPC where it is digitized and made available to the equalizer blocks for the
purposes of received signal processing. The limiting IF output is used to acquire a
random access channel (RACH).
The other IF signal is applied to a set of AGC pads which provide a linear receiver
branch used to acquire traffic and control channels. Linear AGC gain settings are sent to
the receiver board from the DPC. Either the limited or linear path can be selected by the
DPC on a timeslot basis. The selected path is demodulated into quadrature signals (I1/I2
and Q1/Q2) and filtered by baseband analogue filters. The signals are sent to the DPC
which digitizes and makes them available to the equalizer blocks for receive
synchronization/data recovery.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
SCU diagram
The diagram shows a schematic of the SCU:
"
CHANNEL 2 RECEIVE RF IN
(FROM BTS FRONT END)
$

RX
BOARD

'&
( (
Tx SYNTH SEL
# #
( SYNTHESIZER

BOARD
Rx SYNTH SEL
DIGITAL
PROCESSOR
AND
CONTROL
BOARD
(DPC)
'&
( (
!
! %
!

(FROM DRIX)

$ TX
! ! BOARD
TX KEY
! !
$
(TO DRIX)
#
" # CONTROL

DRIVER
BOARD
POWER RF OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER
module (TO COMBINER)
268 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DPC
The DPC is a digital control board for the RF module of the SCU. It also provides a
duplex interface between the digital radio interface with extended memory (DRIM) and
the SCU so that modulation and equalization data can be passed between them, along
with associated control and status data.
The DPC contains the following SCU digital and analogue control circuits:
DRI(M) interface.
RF board interfaces, including PA power control.
Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the SCU).
Maintenance interface (including SCU front panel status indicators, Teletype (TTY)
ports, test point I/O port, test mode operation, etc).
The channel equalization of the uplink (Rx) data.
Processing of SSI data.
External module control (combiner, receive matrix).
DRIM interface
The connection between the SCU and the DRIM, located in the BSU, is via fibre optical
cable at a data rate of E1/T1. The fibre optic link is designed to support up to 1 km of
fibre optic cable, and redundant fibre links are provided for future applications. All
channel data and transceiver control data is exchanged over this link. All data is
Manchester coded.
Clock recovery
The DPC clock recovery circuit recovers the clock reference signal from the E1/T1data
stream input (downlink) signal for SCU data synchronization. The recovered clock
reference signal is sent to the synthesizer board as a reference for all RF PLLs.
DPC on downlink
On the downlink (Tx), the DPC accepts formatted messages from the DRIM. These
messages all fall under the categories of modulation data, SCU control data, and slow
control data (which are messages that are executed as background tasks by the DPC).
The messages arrive at the DPC and are stored in a 64 byte First In First Out (FIFO) by
the High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC). The DPC firmware takes these messages
and either distributes them to their respective destinations (modulator, equalizer, etc), or
interprets them to perform some other slow control or configuration function.
For instance, in the case of mobile bound information (voice data), the message is
distributed to the modulator interface. The NRZ data output from the modulator
interface is applied to the Tx board. The data is modulated on the RF carrier and
transmitted to the MS. All power control and transmitter timeslot ramping control is
handled by the DPC. During each timeslot, the DPC firmware writes a ramp on
waveform and a power control word to the PA control hardware resident on the DPC.
The power control word is based upon the downlink transmitter power message received
on the fibre link.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DPC on uplink
On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the Receiver board, are
applied to A/D converters on the DPC. The A/D converters convert the analogue I1/I2
and Q1/Q2 signals to digital words which are applied to each of the four equalizer digital
signal processor blocks on the DPC. Each EQ DSP processes the baseband signal into
eight timeslot channels of equalized data. This data output signal is routed to the
equalizer dual port RAM (DPR). The host processor reads the equalized data out of the
equalizer DPR and formats it into a message which is loaded into a 64 byte output FIFO
on the HDLC.
The HDLC transmits the information to the DRIM through the fibre optic transmitter.
Immediately following this message (when required), the host processor reads the uplink
control data from the bottom of the dual port RAM and sends this data as a message to
the DRIM. Any slow control information that needs to be sent uplink, to the DRIM, is
transmitted by the firmware as a separate message after appropriate hardware transfers
have been performed.
DPC firmware
The DPC firmware:
Interprets slow control messages for destination processor and type of
request/query.
Inserts tail and guard bits, and midamble training sequence according to Training
Sequence Code (TSC), for any one timeslot.
Controls all transmitter functions including timeslot ramping and digital and
analogue attenuation for power output control.
Formats slow control messages into source processor and type of
confirm/response.
Demultiplexes inbound modulation, control and slow control messages.
timeslot basis.
Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (2 for transmit and 2 for receive) for
fast synthesizer hopping.
Accommodates hopping through the broadcast control channel (BCCH).
Controls and coordinates timing, based on an interrupt driven executive.
270 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Equalisation
blocks
Due to the large amount of processing to be done, four individual equalization blocks are
required, one block for two TDMA timeslots. Each equalization block contains a digital
signal processor (DSP). These blocks are largely independent of each other, but access
common buses to communicate with the host processor, and other peripherals.
The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the receiver board are applied to the
circuits are processed into eight timeslot channels of data. This data is routed to the
appropriate EQ DSP. The I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude
variations of the receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be equalized and
angle demodulated by the EQ DSP blocks.
Signal strength
The SSI indications from the receiver board are applied to the SSI A/D conversion and
data buffer & RAM circuits on the DPC. The output of these circuits are processed into
eight timeslot channels of SSI data. This data is routed to the appropriate EQ DSP.
Each EQ DSP block processes the SSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing
advance averages for its particular timeslot channel. The timing advance data output
signal is loaded into the uplink message DPR. The AGC message is written directly to
the AGC control function on the DPC. This function outputs control signals to the fixed
attenuators and to the variable attenuator on the receiver board. The attenuators adjust
the receiver signal gain accordingly.
Once a timeslot, the DPC firmware writes modulation data to the modulator interface,
and writes power control information and a ramp profile to the transmitter control
interface. This data is written one timeslot in advance of when it is used by the DPC
control hardware. The power control information consists of a digital attenuator word
which is transmitted over the transmitter serial link, and an analogue attenuator control
word, which is converted to a voltage on the DPC and then sent to the transmitter board.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Transceiver control unit (TCU) GSM-100-323
Transceiver control unit (TCU)
Overview
NOTE
In this section the generic term TCU is used for the TCU900, TCU1800 and
high power TCU1800 except where the information relates specifically to one
type.
This section describes the functional operation of the transceiver control unit (TCU) used
in base transceiver station (BTS) cabinets.
The TCU is a radio transceiver and is the central element of the base station system
(BSS) RF sub-system of BTS6 cabinets.
The TCU:
Generates all the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit and receive
functions.
Contains the digital circuits required for eight timeslots of channel equalization and
TCU control logic.
The TCU provides the Air interface between a BSS and mobile systems. A TCU
employs diversity reception which, during signal fades provides a more consistent
receive operation. A TCU can change frequency on a timeslot basis to provide for
frequency hopping and equipment sharing. The six TCUs provide six RF channels for a
total of 48 timeslot channels.
Requirements
The high power TCU1800 must be used in conjunction with the high sensitivity LNA.
Standard and high power TCU1800s cannot be used in the same sector, but may be
used in different sectors for the same BSS site.
Transceiver
carrier frequency
bands
The TCU provides a full duplexed transmit/receive RF carrier (radio channel) for
communicating with mobile stations. The RF carrier frequency of operation is:
EGSM900
Receive (Rx) frequency band, 880.2 to 914.8 MHz.
Transmit (Tx) frequency band, 925.2 to 959.8 MHz.
DCS1800
PCS1900
The TCU can change transmit/receive RF frequencies on a timeslot basis, as required for
frequency hopping and/or equipment sharing applications.
272 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Transceiver control unit (TCU)
TCU circuitry
TCU circuitry is all contained in an integral module package. This circuitry consists of:
TCU receiver (Rx) board.
Synthesizer board.
Transmitter (Tx) board.
Control driver board.
Power amplifier board.
Digital processor and control (DPC) board.
Transceiver station manager (TSM) board.
Power supply module (SPSM).
View of a TCU
The following shows the TCU module:
Maintenance
For maintenance purposes, an RS232 serial port to the control processor is included on
the front panel of the TCU.
Communication to the equalizer processors is also available from this port via a virtual
link provided by the control processor.
A special test port on the TCU front panel provides access to critical test points for

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Front panel
switches
Reset switch
The front panel pushbutton reset switch is pressed momentarily to rest the control
processor and begin front panel indicator test sequence.
Mode switch
A front panel mode selection switch is used to switch the transceiver between TCU and
SCU modes of operation. The SCU mode of operation must be selected for TCUs fitted
in a BTS cabinet. The mode selection switch is recessed to prevent accidental selection
of the alternate mode of operation.
Alarm reporting
All major sub-systems within the TCU, such as synthesizers, and RF amplifiers, are
continuously monitored and alarmed as necessary.
Alarms are reported to the TSM in the TCU. The TCU control and transmitter status is
also displayed, via LED indicators, on the front panel of the TCU.
LEDs
Radio status LED

Red = Power fail.
Steady yellow (and transmitter status LED off) = Sleep mode.
Flashing yellow = Test mode.
Transmitter status LED

Off = Transmitter off and not programmed.
Off (and radio status LED steady yellow) = Sleep mode.
Red = Transmitter alarm exists.
Flashing green = Transmitter programmed and off.
Yellow = Transmitter on during at least one timeslot.
274 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
TCU front panel

The following shows the TCU front panel (TCU900):
EGSM 900
CAUTION
HEAT SINK MAY BE
HOT TO TOUCH TX OUT Transmitter RF Output
connector (to CBF [M-Cell2/6] or
CCB [M-Cell6])
TX OUT
Tx STATUS Indicator
TX
STATUS
DATA OUT B Fibre optic transmit

DATA
port Tx (uplink) OUT B
DATA OUT A Fibre optic transmit DATA

port Tx (uplink) OUT
A
DATA IN B Fibre optic receiver DATA

port Rx (downlink) IN B
DATA IN A Fibre optic receiver DATA

port Rx (downlink) IN A
RADIO STATUS Indicator RADIO

STATUS
RESET
Manual RESET
(momentary push button switch)
EXTERNAL
ALARMS External Alarms
RCU
MODE
Mode switch SWITCH
TCU
CNTRL
PRCSR
Test Interface
Control Processors TTY
port (RS-232 serial port)
RX IN 2 Receive RF Input connector

TSM Interface (from DNLB [M-Cell2] or IADU [M-Cell6])
RX IN 1 Receive RF Input connector

(from DNLB [M-Cell2] or IADU [M-Cell6])
RX IN 1
RX IN 2
VOLTAGE INPUT
2030 VDC
POWER 27 V dc Input (from PDU breakers)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
TCU input/output
diagram
The following is a block diagram of the TCU:
RX FAIL
I1 SIGNAL RX
BOARD
Q1 SIGNAL
I2 SIGNAL
Q2 SIGNAL
AGC DATA
880.2 to 915 MHz 13 MHz

6.12S REF
4.612mS REF Tx SYNTH SEL
577S REF LOW POWER ALARMS
13 MHz REF IN SYNTHESIZER

FIBRE IN BOARD
FIBRE OUT Rx SYNTH SEL
TRANSCEIVER DIGITAL
STATION FIBRE CLOCK PROCESSOR
MANAGER AND
BOARD 2.048 MHz CLOCK CONTROL
BOARD 925 to 960 MHz 13 MHz
8.192 MHz CLOCK
HDLC DATA
MOD CLK
HDLC DATA
MODULATOR (NRZ) DATA
TSM PRESENT RESET
CARRIER ENABLE
16 X CLK
TX
BOARD
TX KEY
TX ALARM
PWR CONTROL DATA

2.048 Mbit/s DATA INPUT
2.048 MHz CLOCK INPUT

(FROM FOX)
2.048 Mbit/s DATA OUTPUT CONTROL

DETECTED POWER DATA
DRIVER
2.048 MHz CLOCK OUTPUT BOARD
(TO FOX)
POWER
SUPPLY DISTRIBUTED POWER RF
MODULE POWER OUTPUT
(TO EACH OF THE BOARDS) AMPLIFIER
BOARD (TO CBF or
CCB)
276 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
TCU receiver
board detail
The receiver part of the TCU transceiver accepts two amplified and filtered receive
antenna signals from a dual low noise block (DLNB) module. (The TCU RF front end is
designed with consideration towards the DLNB gain and noise level).
RF signals:
The receive RF signal from each DLNB is applied to two inputs (branch 1 and branch 2)
of the TCU receiver board.
Following a switchable automatic intermodulation control (AIC) pad and an RF band pass
filter, each receive input signal is converted to a baseband frequency of 86.6 MHz. The
IF lineup provides bandpass filtering and 35 dB switchable pad for automatic gain control
(AGC).
AIC and AGC RF signals diagram

The following shows the AIC and AGC of the RF signals:
86.6MHz
(VSSI PATH)
splitter
86.6MHz
(TCC PATH)
AIC
880.2 to
915MHz
switchable BANDPASS mixer BANDPASS SWITCHABLE
attenuator 880 to 915MHz 86.6MHz PAD 35dB
AGC
MIXER INPUT
810 to 845MHz
AGC DATA
AGC DATA
AGC
switchable BANDPASS mixer BANDPASS SWITCHABLE

attenuator 880 to 915MHz 86.6MHz PAD 35dB
880.2 to
915MHz
AIC
86.6MHz
(TCC PATH)
splitter
86.6MHz
(VSSI PATH)
IF signals:
The IF output signal for each receiver branch is split into two signals:
A VSSI output.
Traffic and control channel output.
VSSI output
The VSSI voltage provides an analogue representation of the received signal strength.
The limiting IF output is used for the acquistion of random access channel (RACH).
The receive VSSI signal is applied to a 86.6 MHz bandpass filter and converted to an IF
of 13 MHz with amplitude limitation.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
VSSI output path diagram

The following shows the VSSI path:
86.6 MHz AMPLIFIER

BANDPASS BANDPASS and BANDPASS
MIXER AMPLITUDE
LIMITER
RSSI SLOPE ADJUST

INDICATOR and VSSI/1
TEMPERATURE OUTPUT
COMPENSATION
57 MHz
MIXER
INPUT RSSI SLOPE ADJUST
INDICATOR and VSSI/2
TEMPERATURE OUTPUT
COMPENSATION
AMPLIFIER
BANDPASS BANDPASS and BANDPASS
MIXER AMPLITUDE
LIMITER
86.6MHz
Traffic and
control channel
output
The other IF signal is applied to a set of AGC pads which provides analogue AGC
element which provides a linear receiver branch used to acquire traffic and control
channels. Linear AGC gain settings are sent to the receiver board from the DPC. Either
the limited or linear path can be selected by the DPC on a timeslot basis. The selected
path is demodulated into quadrature signals (I1/I2 and Q1/Q2) and filtered by baseband
analogue filters.
These signals are sent to the DPC where they are digitized and made available to the
equalizer blocks for the purposes of receive synchronization and data recovery.
278 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Traffic and control path diagram

The following shows the traffic and control channel path:
ACTIVE LOWPASS
AMPLIFIER FILTER
IF AMPLIFIER
I1 OUTPUT
BANDPASS
I/Q ACTIVE LOWPASS
DEMODULATOR AMPLIFIER FILTER
Q1 OUTPUT
86.6 MHz 80dB

VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR
86.6MHz 80dB
VARIABLE
ATTENUATOR
ACTIVE LOWPASS
AMPLIFIER FILTER
IF AMPLIFIER I2 OUTPUT
BANDPASS ACTIVE LOWPASS

I/Q AMPLIFIER
DEMODULATOR FILTER
Q2 OUTPUT
2WAY
SPLITTER

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Digital
processing and
control board
NOTE
The following details describe the operation of the TCU when the front panel
mode selection switch is set to the SCU position.
The digital processing and control board (DPC) is a digital control board for the RF
portion of the TCU. It also provides a duplex interface between the digital radio interface
with extended memory (DRIM) and the TCU so that modulation and equalization data
can be passed between them, together with associated control and status data.
The DPC contains the digital and analogue circuits required to perform TCU control
including the following functions:
DRIM interface.
RF board interfaces, including PA power control.
Alarm monitoring (of devices internal and external to the TCU).
Maintenance interface, including:
TCU front panel status indicators.
Teletype (TTY) ports.
Test point I/O port.
Test mode operation.
The channel equalization of the uplink (Rx) data.
SSI data processing.
Control of external modules, such as the remotely tunable combiner, receive
matrix, etc.
Diagram
The following shows the DPC block diagram:
CLOCK
RECOVERY
CONTROL HDLC FIBRE A

ITC COMMUNICATION
ASIC PROCESSOR INTERFACE
FIBRE B
UPLINK
EQ#0 TRAFFIC and
PROCESSOR CONTROL
EQ#3 TDM HIGHWAY

PROCESSOR
280 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
TCU connections
The connection between the TCU and the DRIM, located in the BSU is over fibre optic
cable at a data rate of 2.048 Mbit/s.
The fibre optic link is designed to support up to 1 km of fibre optic cable. Redundant fibre
links are provided for future applications. All channel data and transceiver control data
are exchanged over this link.
Data
specifications
All data crossing the 2.048 Mbit/s link is Manchester coded. The DPC clock recovery
circuit recovers 2.048 MHz clock reference signal from the 2.048 Mbit/s data stream
input (downlink) signal for TCU data synchronization. The recovered 2.048 MHz clock
reference signal is sent to the synthesizer board as a reference for all RF PLLs.
Downlink (Tx)
digital
processing
On the downlink (Tx), the DPC accepts formatted messages from the DRIM, via the fibre
optic receiver. These messages all fall under three categories:
Modulation data.
TCU control data.
Slow control data (which are messages the DPC executes as background tasks).
The high level data link controller (HDLC) takes these messages as they arrive at the
DPC and stores them in a 64 byte first in first out (FIFO). The DPC firmware takes these
messages and either:
Distributes them to their respective destinations (modulator, equalizer).
Interprets them to perform some other slow control or configuration function.
For instance, in the case of information going to the mobile, the DPC firmware distributes
the message to the modulator interface. The non-return to zero (NRZ) data output from
the modulator interface is applied to the transmitter board. The data is modulated on the
RF carrier and transmitted to the MS.
The DPC handles all power control and transmitter timeslot ramping control. During each
timeslot, the DPC firmware writes a ramp on waveform and a power control word to the
PA control hardware resident on the DPC. The power control word is based upon the
downlink transmitter power message received on the fibre link.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Uplink (Rx)
digital
processing
On the uplink (Rx), the I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals from the Receiver board are
applied to analogue to digital (A/D) converters on the DPC. The A/D converters convert
the analogue I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 signals to digital words which are applied to each of the 4
equalizer (EQ) digital signal processor blocks on the DPC.
Each EQ DSP processes the baseband signal into 8 timeslot channels of equalized data.
This data output signal is routed to the equalizer dual port RAM (DPR). The host
processor reads the equalized data out of the equalizer DPR and formats it into a
message which is loaded into a 64 byte output FIFO on the HDLC. The HDLC transmits
the information to the DRIM, via the fibre optic transmitter. Immediately following this
message (when required), host processor reads the uplink control data from the bottom
of the dual port RAM and sends this data as a message to the DRIM. Any slow control
information that needs to be sent uplink, to the DRIM, is transmitted by the firmware as a
separate message after appropriate hardware transfers have been performed.
All messages for both uplink and downlink (as described above) must be transmitted and
received by the appropriate entity within a single time division multiple access (TDMA)
timeslot. (eg, For downlink, modulation data, TCU control data, and any slow control
message must all be transferred within one timeslot.)
DPC firmware
tasks
The following list summarizes some of the major tasks of the DPC firmware.
Interpretation of slow control messages into destination processor and type of
request/query.
Analogue and digital alarm management.
Burst selection and insertion for both test purposes and normal operation.
Midamble insertion according to training sequence code (TSC), for any one
timeslot. Also, tail and guard bit insertion.
Control of all Transmitter functions including timeslot ramping control and digital
and analogue attenuation control for the purposes of power output control.
Protocol formatting of slow control messages into source processor and type of
confirm/response.
Demultiplexing of inbound modulation data, TCU control data, and slow control
messages.
Multiplexing of equalized data, uplink control and slow control messages (when
applicable).
Performs GSM frequency hopping algorithm for both uplink and downlink on a per
timeslot basis, thus supporting both normal frequency hopping and equipment
sharing.
Programs transmit and receive synthesizers (2 for transmit and 2 for receive, to
accommodate fast synthesizer hopping).
Accommodates hopping through the broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier in
hopping modes.
Controls and co-ordinates the timing of all the above, based on an interrupt driven
executive.
282 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Processing and
control
Four individual equalization blocks are used for processing; one block for two EGSM
TDMA timeslots. Each equalization block contains a digital signal processor (DSP).
These blocks are largely independent of each other, but access common buses to
communicate with the host processor, and other peripherals.
The I1/I2 and Q2/Q2 baseband signals from the receiver board are applied to the
circuits are processed into 8 timeslot channels of data. This data is routed to the
appropriate EQ DSP. The I1/I2 and Q1/Q2 baseband signals contain amplitude
variations of the receive channel which allow the baseband signal to be equalized and
angle demodulated by the EQ DSP blocks.
The SSI indications from the receiver board are applied to the SSI A/D conversion and
data buffer & RAM circuits on the DPC. The output of these circuits are processed into 8
timeslot channels of SSI data. This data is routed to the appropriate EQ DSP. Each EQ
DSP block processes the SSI value, makes AGC calculations, and timing advance
averages for its particular timeslot channel. The timing advance data output signal is
loaded into the uplink message DPR. The AGC message is written directly to the AGC
control function on the DPC. This function outputs control signals to the fixed
attenuators and to the variable attenuator on the receiver board. The attenuators adjust
the receiver signal gain accordingly.
Once every timeslot, the DPC firmware writes modulation data to the modulator
interface, and writes power control information and a ramp profile to the transmitter
control interface. This data is written one timeslot in advance of when it is used by the
DPC control hardware. The power control information consists of a digital attenuator
word which is transmitted via the transmitter serial link, and an analogue attenuator
control word, which is converted to a voltage on the DPC and then sent to the transmitter
board.
Transceiver
station manager
(TSM) board
NOTE
This board is switched out of circuit when the front panel mode selector switch
is set to the SCU position. With the switch in this position the transceiver
station manager functions are provided by the DRIM board mounted in the
BSU.
Overview
The transceiver station manager (TSM) board provides all radio sub system (RSS)
control, front end processing, channel coding processing and communications to the
BCU via a 2.048 Mbit/s 32 timeslot TDM interface. Two fully redundant links are
available for communications with a redundant BCU. A 2.048 Mbit/s HDLC packet data
link is provided between the front end processor and the control processor on the DPC.
The TSM together with its corresponding DPC and RF boards perform the RSS level
control together with the air interface for eight GSM logical traffic channels or timeslots.
The TSM also performs logical to physical channel mapping, interleaving and
de-interleaving, channel encoding and decoding and downlink Baseband hopping.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the TSM board:
RSS
68040
QUICC DPR FEP QPR
MEMORY 56002
RSS
CONTROL
BBH DATA
TDM
HIGHWAY TDM
INTERFACE
CC#0
TRAU DATA PROCESSOR
TPS
CC#7
UPLINK PROCESSOR
TRAFFIC
and
CONTROL
HDLC
TSM functions
Downlink traffic
Downlink traffic data from the BCU is received at the TDM interface via the TDM
interface and routed to one of eight channel coders. The channel coders encode (cyclic
or convolutional coding) the speech data or TRAU frames and insert signalling messages
per GSM recommendations. The coded traffic data and signalling messages are routed
back to the BCU via the TDM interface for baseband hopping. The post hopped
downlink data is then sent back to the appropriate TCU via the TDM link where it is
received by the FEP and forwarded on to the DPC. The transceiver control information
generated by the FEP is multiplexed with coded downlink messages generated by the
channel coder. This multiplexed information is sent to the control processor on the DPC
via a direct HDLC link.
Uplink traffic
Uplink traffic and control messages from the DPC are received by the HDLC and read by
the FEP. The FEP demultiplexes the incoming data into uplink traffic and control
messages. Control messages are sent to the RSS processor via the host and DPR
interfaces. The FEP forwards the equalizer data on to the channel coders via the quad
port RAM (QPR) interface. The eight channel coders de-interleave, decrypt, and decode
the data into TDM compatible TRAU frames. This data is delivered to the BCU via the
TDM interface.
284 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Baseband hopping
When baseband hopping is implemented, the FEP calculates the hopping sequence for
the TCU. The calculated frequency is converted to the corresponding TCU destination
every GSM frame and sent to the BCU. Because of the timing differences between
GSM air interface and TDM timeslots, baseband hopping data is evenly distributed over
four TDM frames. The TDM timeslots containing the baseband hopping downlink traffic
data are routed to the same or different TCUs depending on the calculated frequency for
that particular downlink traffic data. When baseband hopping data sent through the TDM
interface arrives, a further four TDM timeslots are used to receive the baseband hopping
data and route it to the FEP. The FEP then sends that to the DPC control processor via
the HDLC link.
RSS processing
The RSS processor function provides a BSS software platform which allows the
distribution of the RSS software process to each of the TCUs. The RSS function
communicates to the other software processing functions in the BCU via dedicated
64 kbit timeslots on the 2.048 Mbit/s fibre link. The RSS processor communicates to the
rest of the TSM via a host port and Dual Port RAM (DPR) interface.
The RSS processor is based on a Motorola 68040 processor with a Motorola 68360
communications processor operating in companion mode. The assorted non-volatile and
volatile memory available include 8 Mbytes of DRAM. Non-volatile memory is used for
bootstrap and firmware object code storage.
Front end processing (FEP)

The FEP function provides a transceiver control and system control interface to the RSS
function. It routes data control messages to the control processor on the DPC, and
handles messaging and control of the channel coder DSPs (CCDSPs). In addition, it
handles the routeing of baseband hopping data on the TCU downlink via the TDM
interface. The FEP function is responsible for configuration and control of the channel
coder functions. The FEP controls the reset line of the channel coders and downloads
the operational code into the channel coder DSPs.
The FEP is also responsible for providing a communication links between the following:
Channel coders and the RSS.
Channel coders and the DPC.
RSS and the DPC.
The FEP function is centred on a Motorola 56002 DSP processor. The processor has
external RAM used for program and data space. The FEP has access to a 32K of 8 bit
space that is used to interface with the RSS block together with a host port interface.
The FEP has access to a 2K x 8 memory space that is used for storing uplink and
downlink data and communication with the TDM block. The FEP communicates with the
DB board through an HDLC link.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Channel coder processing

As a unit, the eight blocks are responsible for all signal processing associated with GSM
specified channel coding. There is a single dedicated CCDSP block for each of the eight
GSM air interface timeslots. The channel coders receive downlink speech data from the
TDM across the SCI port in the form of TRAU frames from the TDM interface. The
CCDSPs encode and package the data into GSM air interface frames, which are
returned to the TDM via the quad-port RAM interface. From there, the air frames are
passed to the appropriate FEP via baseband hopping at the BCU. On the uplink side,
the channel coders receive equalized GSM air interface frames from the DPC via the
FEP (through the quad-port RAM interface). After decoding, uplink TRAU frames are
provided to the TDM via the SCI port.
The channel coding functionality of the TSM board is built around a block of eight (one
for each GSM air interface timeslot) Motorola 56002 DSP processors running at 66 MHz.
Each processor has 128K of 24 bit wide SRAM memory used for program and data
storage, as well as hardware-limited access to a portion of a common 2K x 8 quad-port
RAM (QPR). The QPR is used to store encoded pre-baseband hopped data, as well as
equalized GSM air interface frames. SCI, SSI, and Host interfaces are used to
communicate to various other TSM functional blocks.
Time division multiplexed (TDM) interface

The TDM function provides an interface between the 32 timeslot redundant 2.048 Mbit/s
link from the BCU to the RSS, FEP, and CCDSP functions. Optical reception and
transmission as well as Manchester encoding/ decoding are handled for both redundant
links on the DPC. The TDM block provides synchronization to the selected primary link
from the BCU. The data on each link is recovered on a timeslot basis and forwarded to
the appropriate processing function. Master GSM timing synchronization is also
recovered and distributed. The downlink information (BCU to TCU) includes the
following:
Downlink TRAU frames to the CCDSPs.
Post baseband hopped encoded data to the FEP.
Superframe and 60 msec timing information.
64 kbit HDLC channel to RSS with additional timeslots for future use.
The transmit or uplink side of the TDM interface provides a data link path back to the
BCU. Here, the TDM function receives data from the processing functions and
transmits the data back uplink synchronous with the selected primary link. The downlink
information (TCU to BCU) includes the following:
Uplink TRAU frames from the CCDSPs.
Pre baseband hopped data encoded data from the CCDSPs.
Baseboard hopping routeing word from the FOP.
64 Cbi HDLC channel from RSS with additional timeslots for future use.
The TDM interface consists of two Altera FLEX8820 field programmable gate arrays
(FPGAs). The devices are programmed on power up. The TDM block interfaces with
the FEP and CCDSP blocks through a 2k x 8 Quad Port RAM. The TDM interface also
provides a SCI link to the CCDSP blocks for transfer of TRAU data and a HDLC link to
the RSS. Other signals provided include baseband hopping/EQ interrupts to the
CCDSPs and GSM timing interrupts.
286 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Transmitter
details
The transmitter section of the TCU is divided into three boards as follows:
Transmitter board.
Control driver board.
Power amplifier board.
Details of these three boards follow:
Transmitter
board
1st and 2nd IF stages
The modulator non return to zero (NRZ) data input signal (eight timeslot channels) from
the DPC is applied to the transmitter board. This NRZ data signal is encoded, serial to
parallel converted, Gaussian filtered into a digital representation, and then D/A
converted into a gaussian minimum shift keyed (GMSK) modulated carrier at a 1st IF of
7.0 MHz. This 7.0 MHz IF signal is up converted with a high side injection of 182.0 MHz
to a full GMSK modulated carrier at a 2nd IF of 175 MHz.
1st and 2nd If stages block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the input signal to 1st and 2nd IF stages:
MOD CLK FRACTIONAL

COUNTER
MODULATOR
(NRZ) DATA SERIAL SERIAL to
DATA PARALLEL GAUSSIAN
ENCODER CONVERTOR
FILTER
RESET
CARRIER ENABLE
16 x clk 4-BIT TIMING

COUNTER CONTROL
86.6MHz MIXER
INPUT
DIVIDE
BY 2
OSCILLATOR
1st IF
AMPLIFIER
LOWPASS
D/A FILTER UPCONVERTER TO Tx RAMPI
CONVERTER 174 MHz
2nd IF

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Ramping control and transmit frequency stages

The full GMSK modulated 175 MHz 2nd IF is filtered and applied to the input of a Gilbert
cell linear amplitude modulator for the purpose of transmitter ramping control. The output
of the Gilbert cell is then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is upconverted to
the final transmit channel frequency which is in the range of 925 to 960 MHz.
Diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the 2nd IF signal to ramping control and final
transmit frequency stages:
AMPLIFIER
FROM SAW LOWPASS FREQUENCY HIGHPASS

2nd IF BANDPASS FILTER DOUBLER FILTER
STAGE FILTER
AMPLIFIER
LOWPASS SAW 925 MHz TO 960 MHz

UP
FILTER BANDPASS OUTPUT TO
CONVERSION
FILTER ATTENUATORS
MIXER
POWER
DETECTOR
855 to 890 MHz INPUT
Attenuator and exciter path

This low level modulated carrier signal is then applied to a combination of analogue and
digital attenuators for the purposes of RF power control. The analogue ramp voltage and
power control voltage are provided by the DPC. Digital attenuator information is provided
by the DPC over a serial link. The output of the power control elements is further
amplified by an exciter chain to a maximum output of +5 dBm.
Final transmit frequency block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the final transmit frequency to the attenuator and
exciter chain stages:
TRANSMIT ALARM
ALARM POWER
SENSOR DETECTOR
KEYING
CONTROLLED
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER AMPLIFIER
FROM VOLTAGE
TRANSMIT BANDPASS BANDPASS CONTROLLED
FREQUENCY FILTER FILTER ATTENUATORS TO
STAGE CONTROL
DRIVER
BOARD
ATTENUATOR
TRANSMIT KEYING
CONTROL DRIVER
KEY
POWER
CONTROL
288 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Control driver
board
The control driver board provides RF power amplification between the transmitter board
output and the input of the output stage. It provides power regulation and signal
buffering, acting as an interface between the power amplifier section and other parts of
the radio. The RF forward power detection is also included on this board.
Control driver block diagram

The following shows a block diagram of the control driver board:
FORWARD
POWER
DATA
POWER
AMPLIFIER
POWER OUTPUT
FROM REGULATION
TRANSMITTER TO
AND POWER
BOARD BUFFER AMPLIFIER
REVERSE
POWER TO
DETECTION DPC
Power amplifier
board
The power amplifier board amplifies the intermediate level modulated carrier signal input
to a final RF power output level. The power amplifier also contains a forward power
detector, an isolator and a reverse power detector. The detected output from the two
power detectors is applied, via the control driver board to the DPC. Based on these
detected signals the DPC determines the setting for the final TCU RF power output level.
The DPC then sends a signal to the gain control elements of the transmitter to set the
corresponding RF power level.
The maximum output power available at the EGSM900 TCU transmitter RF power output
connector is 54.3 watts (47.35 dBm) +/ 0.5 dBm.
The maximum output power available at the DCS1800/PCS1900 TCU transmitter RF
power output connector is 25.1 watts (44.0 dBm) +/ 1 dBm.
The maximum output power available at the high powered DCS1800 TCU transmitter RF
power output connector is 50.1 watts (47.0 dBm) +/ 1.0 dBm.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the power amplifier board:
FINAL
AMPLIFIER
ISOLATOR
2-STAGE
CLASS AB CIRCULATOR CIRCULATOR
AMPLIFIER
925 to 960 MHz

MODULATED RF PUTPUT
CARRIER
FORWARD REVERSE
REVERSE
POWER POWER
POWER
DETECTOR DETECTOR
DETECTOR
LOAD LOAD
FORWARD
POWER
DETECTOR
290 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 External equipment cabinet or rack
External equipment cabinet or rack
Introduction
An external equipment cabinet or rack can be used to accommodate RF equipment that
is too bulky to fit into the BTS cabinet itself. It is normally positioned next to the BTS
cabinet.
The following equipment can be installed in an external equipment cabinet or rack:
Duplexer.
Quadraplexer.
Receiver multicoupler with multicoupler extender.
These items are described in the sections that follow in this chapter.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Duplexer GSM-100-323
Duplexer
Overview
The duplexer allows the transmit and receive signals to share the same antenna.
It consists of two bandpass filters, one for Tx and one for Rx.
Diagram
The diagram shows the duplexer:

Tx1

292 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Quadraplexer
Quadraplexer
Overview
The quadraplexer allows separate TACS, ETACS, and GSM transmit and receive signals
to share the same antenna. The quadraplexer is fitted in an external equipment cabinet
or rack.
It consists of four bandpass filters, one for each of the following frequency bands:
ETACS (Tx 1, 925.0935.0 MHz).
TACS (Tx 2, 939.5950.0 MHz).
GSM (Tx 3, 955.0960.0 MHz).
Receive (Rx, 880.0915.0 MHz).
Up to three quadraplexers can be mounted in one tray of an external equipment
cabinet/frame.
Diagram
The diagram shows the quadraplexer:


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender GSM-100-323
Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender
Overview
The receiver multicoupler with a multicoupler extender allows the same receive antenna
signals to be distributed to multiple BTS cabinets.
The multicoupler extender must be connected between the receiver multicoupler outputs
and the BTS cabinet antenna inputs to provide the necessary receive attenuation (6 to 8
dB depending on the type of extender used).
The receiver multicoupler contains six preselector modules and six 6-way splitter
modules. Six receive antenna signals, each connected to a receiver multicoupler input,
are filtered and amplified by the preselector module and split six ways to provide six
output signals for each receive antenna input (a total of 36 receive outputs).
The receiver multicoupler preselector modules have a 35 MHz bandpass and operate in
the TACS, ETACS and GSM receive frequency bands.
Receiver
multicoupler
The receiver multicoupler:

294 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender
Large
multicoupler
extender
The large multicoupler extender takes six receive antenna signal outputs from the
receiver multicoupler and splits each signal four ways, providing a total of 24 outputs.
The signal strength is the same at each multicoupler extender output.
The following configurations are possible:
One set of six outputs, each output having a different receive antenna signal, from
the receiver multicoupler are connected to the inputs of the large multicoupler
extender. The large multicoupler extender provides four sets of six outputs having
different receive antenna signals. It is also possible to connect the other five sets
of six outputs, each with different receive antenna signals, from the receiver
multicoupler to the inputs of five additional large multicoupler extenders. This
provides an additional 20 sets of six outputs with different receive antenna signals,
for a total of 24 sets of six outputs with different receive antenna signals.
Six outputs, having the same receive antenna signal, from the receiver
multicoupler are connected to the inputs of the large multicoupler extender. The
large multicoupler extender provides 24 outputs having the same receive antenna
signal. It is also possible to connect the other five sets of outputs, each set having
the same receive antenna signal, from the receiver multicoupler, to the inputs of
five additional large multicoupler extenders. This provides an additional five sets of
24 outputs, each set having the same receive antenna signal, for a total of six sets
of 24 outputs with the same receive antenna signal.
Multicoupler
extender
The multicoupler extender:


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Distributed
multicoupler
extender
Three 2-way splitters are combined in a cascade manner. One receive antenna output
signal, from the receiver multicoupler, is connected to the input of the splitter combination
which provides four outputs having the same receive antenna signal. Each output is
approximately 6 dB less than the receive signal connected to the input of the splitter
combination.
The distributed multicoupler extender configuration can consist of up to six of these
splitter combinations (18 splitters total). The exact number of splitter combinations used
depends on antenna signal to BTS cabinet distribution requirements.
A distributed multicoupler extender configuration consisting of six of these splitter
combinations (18 splitters total) can be configured to provide the same receive antenna
signal distribution as the large multicoupler extender.
Distributed
multicoupler
extender
The following shows a distributed multicoupler extender:

2-way (6dB)
splitter
One receive antenna output signal, from the receiver multicoupler, is connected to the
input of a 2-way splitter which provides two outputs having the same receive antenna
signal. Each output is approximately 6 dB less than the receive signal connected to the
input of the splitter.
The 2-way splitter multicoupler extender configuration can consist of up to 36 of these
splitters (one for each multicoupler output). The exact number of splitters used depends
on antenna signal to BTS cabinet distribution requirements.
6 dB attenuator
One receive antenna output signal, from the receiver multicoupler, is connected through
a 6 dB attenuator to a BTS cabinet receive antenna input. The BTS cabinet receive
antenna input is approximately 6 dB less than the receive signal from the receiver
multicoupler output.
The exact number of attenuators used depends on antenna signal to BTS cabinet
distribution requirements.
296 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Receiver multicoupler and multicoupler extender
Receiver
extender
A receiver extender allows one receive antenna signal to be shared between two BTS
cabinets. The receive antenna is connected to the RFE shelf in the standard
configuration. The receive antenna output signal, from an unused 6-way splitter output,
is routed via a receiver extender cable and a 6 db attenuator to the interconnect panel. A
second cable (part of receiver extender kit) routes the receive signal to the interconnect
panel of a second BTS cabinet.
One receiver extender is required for each antenna to be shared between two BTS
cabinets. Two receiver extenders are required for diversity operation. A maximum of
three receive antennas can be shared between two BTS cabinets.
Diagram
The diagram shows a receiver extender:

6 db
ATTENUATOR

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
298 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Chapter 3
Digital modules

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
Chapter 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
BTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
BTC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DRIM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GCLK diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
GPROC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
GPROC module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
GPROC diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
GPROC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
GPROC2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
GPROC2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
KSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
KSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Highway monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW in a BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
KSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
MSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
MSI diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
MSI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
MSI2 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
MSI2 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
TSW module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
The DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Watchdog timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Interrupt logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
TSW switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
TSW diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
XCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
XCDR module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Line interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
XCDR diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
GDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
GDP module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
MCU subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
DSP subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
MCAP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
TDM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
GDP diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
BBBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
BBBX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
BBBX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
CLKX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
GCLK module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
CLKX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
DRIX3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
DRIX3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
DRIX3 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
KSWX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
KSWX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
KSWX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
LANX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
LANX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Bus arbiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Redundant LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Shelf ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
LANX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
PIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PIX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
PIX diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
vi 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the digital modules used in BTS equipment cabinets.
The digital modules fit into the base station unit (BSU) shelf.
In this chapter
All information given is valid for GSM, EGSM and DCS1800 systems unless otherwise
indicated.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BSU and RXU shelf diagrams GSM-100-323
BSU and RXU shelf diagrams
Introduction
This section contains BSU and RXU shelf module assignments and associated
information. Subsequent sections in this chapter describe each module.
BSU shelf
The diagram shows the BSU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:
AI0 KS0 DR5 DR4 DR3 DR2 DR1 DR0 KS1

AI1
MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3

GK0
AI2
! !
!
! !
! ! !
!
!
!
!

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

!
!

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

!
!
!

U28 U27 U26 U25 U24 U23 U22 U21 U20 U19 U18 U17 U16 U15 U14 U13 U12 U11 U10 U9 U8 U7 U6 U5 U4 U3 U2 U1

!
!

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

&$"%#

L28 L27 L26
L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L3 L1 L0
BSU Module slots

Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.
Half size modules are fitted in the upper row.
Full size modules are fitted in the lower row.
Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes:
Slot L20 GPROC.
All unused full size slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
32 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BSU and RXU shelf diagrams
BSU backplane connectors

AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.
AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the backup supply (BBBX).
KS0 and KS1 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports for
KSW/TSW boards.
DR0 to DR5 are 20-pin headers and provide TTY access to serial ports for
DRI/MSI boards.
GK0 is a 9-pin D-type and provides a GCLK synchronization input.
MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 circuits.
RXU shelf
The diagram shows the RXU shelf slot assignment and backplane connectors:
AI0 KS0 KS1

AI1 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3

AI2

U28 U27 U26 U25 U24 U23 U22 U21 U20 U19 U18 U17 U16 U15 U14 U13 U12 U11 U10 U9 U8 U7 U6 U5 U4 U3 U2 U1

L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L3 L1 L0

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BSU and RXU shelf diagrams GSM-100-323
RXU module slots

Slots are numbered from 0 to 28 from right to left.
Half size modules are fitted in the upper row.
Full size modules are fitted in the lower row.
Master slots must be equipped first for initialization purposes.
Slot L25 GPROC.
All unused slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
Backplane connectors.
AI0 and AI1 are 10-pin headers.
AI2 is a 4-pin power connector to the backup supply (BBBX).
KS0 and KS1 provide TTY access to serial ports for KSWs/TSWs.
MS0 to MS3 are 37-pin D-types for connecting E1/T1 lines.
34 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Module front panels
Module front panels
Introduction
This section is a quick reference guide to the status indicators and switches on the front
panels of the digital modules in BSU and RXU shelves. Subsequent sections in this
chapter describe each module. The reset switch on a module will not return a Disabled or
Locked module to service. If the module was BU or EU before the module was reset
then it will return to an inservice state either Busy or Enabled. Once a module is locked
disabling the module will have no effect on the status of the module as displayed via
MMI, disabling a module results in isolating the module from the cage. Modules not listed
below have no status indicators or front panel switches.
Module Status indicators Front panel switches

DRI(M) Green LED flashing = Waiting for code download Toggle switch (three position)
Green LED on only = FEP running, no alarms
Red LED on only = FEP halted or in reset Up (momentary) = Reset board, download code
Both LEDs on = FEP running, TDM clock and Middle = normal operation
ref alarm or serial link failure Down = disable board for extraction
Both LEDs off = No power to board
GCLK Green LED on only = Master, no alarms Toggle switch (three position)
Red LED on only = Alarms, not Master
Both LEDs on = Master and alarms Up (momentary) = Reset board
Both LEDs off = Not Master, no alarms Middle = normal operation
(or no power) Down = disable board for extraction
(alarms: oscillator or PLL failure, ref. counter overflow)
Potentiometer = adjustment for the VCXO**
GPROC Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarms Toggle switch (three position)
Red LED on only = Processor halted or in reset
Both LEDs on = Processor running, board is Up (momentary) = Reset board, download code
disabled or other alarm Middle = normal operation
Both LEDs off = No power to board Down = disable board for extraction
Both LEDs flashing = Bootstrap reprogram in
progress
KSW and Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarms Toggle switch (three position)
TSW Red LED on only = Processor halted or in reset
MSI Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarms Toggle switch (three position)
Red LED on only = Processor halted or in reset
XCDR Green LED on only = Processor running, no alarms Toggle switch (three position)
and GDP Red LED on only = Processor halted or in reset
Both LEDs on = Processor running, board is Up (momentary) = Reset board
KSWX Green LED on = Master, no alarms Toggle switch (three position)
Green LED blinking = Slave, no alarms
Green LED off = TDM bus or Clock alarms Up (momentary) = Reset board
(or no power) Middle = normal operation
Down = disable board for extraction
LANX None Rotary switch (16 position)
For setting shelf ID number

PIX Green LED on = No alarms None
Green LED off = Customer alarm detected

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Full size modules GSM-100-323
Full size modules
Introduction
Full size modules fit into slots in the lower card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slots
are numbered, right to left, from L0 to L28.
The following sections describe the full size modules that can be mounted in a BSU or
RXU.
The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.
The modules
The following full size modules are described:
Bus terminator card (BTC).
Digital radio interface extended memory (DRIM).
Generic clock (GCLK).
Generic processor (GPROC).
Kiloport switch (KSW).
Multiple serial interface (MSI).
Timeslot switch (TSW).
Transcoder (XCDR).
36 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BTC
BTC
Purpose
The bus termination card (BTC) terminates the backplane to keep signals on a BSU or
RXU shelf at the proper TTL level.
The BTC terminates:
Both MCAP buses.
Both BSS serial buses.
Both reference clocks.
All TDM buses (Expansion, Remote and Local).
Requirements
Two BTC modules must be fitted in each BSU or RXU shelf, in slot L0 and slot L28, at all
times.
While a faulty BTC is being replaced, another BTC must be fitted in a KSW slot to
maintain the above requirement.
BTC module
The diagram shows a BTC module:
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRIM GSM-100-323
DRIM
Purpose
The digital radio interface (extended memory) is the interface between the TDM highway
and the DRCU, via the DRIX.
Downlink (Tx) data input from the KSW or TSW is encoded onto the correct channel
(GSM timeslot). Encoded downlink data is output to the DRCU via the DRIX.
Uplink (Rx) data is received from the DRCU (via the DRIX), decoded and output to the
KSW or TSW.
Requirements
DRIM modules are fitted in slots L7, L9, L11, L13, and L15.
DRIM module
The diagram shows a DRIM module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

(NORMALLY OFF)

(MASTER = ON)
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH
UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET
MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION
DOWN = DISABLE
Brief description
The DRIM module provides the logical interface between the (diversity) radio channel
unit (DRCU) and the TDM bus. The digital radio interface extender (DRIX3) module, a
half-size module described later in this chapter, is the physical interface between the
DRIM and DRCU.
One DRIM, DRIX3, and DRCU function together to form the air interface for eight GSM
logical traffic channels or timeslots. The DRIM also handles logical to physical channel
mapping, interleaving and de-interleaving, channel encoding and decoding, and downlink
baseband hopping (BBH).
38 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRIM
Functional
description
Refer to the functional block diagram at the end of this section.
Downlink
Downlink traffic data from the KSW or TSW is received at the TDM interface via the TDM
outbound highway, and routed to one of eight channel coder blocks by the front end
processor (FEP). The channel coders encode the speech data (using either cyclic or
convoluting code) and insert signalling messages in accordance with GSM
recommendations.
The coded traffic data and signalling messages are routed to the high level data link
controller (HDLC). Downlink control messages generated by the FEP are routed to the
HDLC. The HDLC multiplexes DRCU control information (generated by the FEP) with
coded downlink traffic data and downlink control messages (generated by the channel
coders). This multiplexed data is then Manchester encoded and sent serially to the
DRIX3.
Uplink
Uplink traffic and control messages from the DRCU come to the DRIM via the DRIX3,
and are passed on to the Manchester decoder where it is decoded and sent to the
HDLC. The HDLC demultiplexes the incoming data into uplink traffic and control
information. The control information is sent to the FEP for processing or relaying to the
GPROC via the MCAP bus.
The uplink traffic is routed to the eight channel coders where it is de-interleaved,
de-encrypted, and decoded into TDM-compatible data. This data is routed to the TDM
bus via the TDM interface for delivery to the KSW/TSW.
Baseband hopping
When BBH is implemented, the FEP calculates the hopping sequence for the DRIM. The
calculated frequency is converted to a corresponding TDM timeslot, which is passed to
the TDM interface to program the TDM timeslot assignment for every GSM frame. Due to
the differences between GSM and TDM timing, BBH data is evenly distributed over four
TDM timeslots.
The TDM timeslots containing the BBH downlink traffic data are routed to the same or
different DRIMs depending on the calculated frequency for that particular downlink traffic
data. When BBH data arrives at the proper DRIM (this could be the same DRIM that sent
the BBH data), another five TDM timeslots are used to receive the BBH data and route it
to the FEP. The FEP then routes that BBH data to the HDLC.
Architecture
Refer to the diagram of the DRIM whilst reading this description.
Front end processor

The FEP performs all control functions, and monitors all DRIM operations and off-board
communications, via the MCAP bus.
The FEP:
Handles the transfer of traffic data between the TDM interface and the eight
channel coder blocks.
Acts as a bus arbiter for the eight channel coder blocks, as traffic data is
transferred between the channel coders and the HDLC.
Provides TDM timeslot counter updates, downlink baseband hopping calculations,
and watchdog timer functions.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRIM GSM-100-323
TDM interface
The TDM interface connects the TDM switchbound highway and the TDM outbound
highway with the downlink and uplink GSM traffic data.
Since all eight channel coders are connected to the TDM interface, the TDM controller
acts as an arbiter between the channel coders.
There are several buffers in series with the TDM interface; they are needed due to timing
differences between the TDM bus and the channel coders.
Channel coders
Each channel coder is based on a Motorola MC56001 DSP, and has 128 x 24 kbytes of
fast SRAM associated with it.
Each channel coder operates independently to perform:
Channel encoding and decoding.
Interleaving and de-interleaving.
Speech transcoding.
Logical to physical mapping of downlink traffic and control messages.
Physical to logical mapping of uplink traffic data and control messages.
High level data link controller (HDLC)

For downlink data, the HDLC formats data from the channel coders and the downlink
control information from the FEP. For the uplink information the HDLC unpacks
equalized data from the DRCU to route downlink traffic to the channel coders and control
information to the FEP. The serial data sent to the DRIX3 is sent at 2.048 Mbit/s. Due to
Manchester encoding the actual bit rate on the serial link is 4.096 Mbit/s.
Synchronization
In order to keep the DRCU and the DRIM synchronized, a synchronization generator
transmits sync information to the DRCU during GSM idle frames. Downlink data from the
synchronization generator is routed through the HDLC. The synchronized information is
added to the downlink data after the HDLC process. In addition to synchronized
information the synchronization generator routes DRCU sleep and DRCU wakeup
commands from the GPROC to the DRCU.
Timing reference logic delivers clock and reference signals to both TDM and GSM
counters. The DRIM is the interface between the GSM format and the TDM bus, so two
different counter sections are required.
The TDM counters are used to by the TDM controller to search for the timeslot windows
for sourcing and receiving data to/from the TDM bus. The TDM counters are also used
by the FEP for timing reference when performing baseband hopping calculations. The
GSM counters consists of the GSM timeslot counter and the GSM superframe counter.
Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus

The MCAP interface logic provides communications between the GPROC and the DRIM.
The information can be routed to the FEP, channel coders, or passed to the DRCU. The
MCAP bus is also used to download operating software for the DRIM after power up
initialization.
310 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRIM
Serial interfaces
The serial interface logic supports two ports. One is the TTY interface which is connected
to dedicated backplane pins. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be used
to control the DRIM, monitor operations of the FEP and channel coders, and support
DRIM diagnostics.
The second port is the Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI). The use of this interface is
software dependent.
Watchdog timer
The purpose of the watchdog timer is to ensure that the FEP is functioning normally. The
FEP writes to a special memory address which resets the watchdog timer assuring that it
does not time out. The FEP in turn monitors the processors in each of the channel coder
blocks. If the FEP or any channel coder stops running, the watchdog timer times out and
causes the red LED on the front panel to illuminate. An interrupt is generated and sent to
the GPROC via the MCAP bus.
Direct memory access

The FEP direct memory access (DMA) is used to transfer data for the FEP. Downlink
post-hopped data from the TDM bus is transferred to the FEP via the DMA. Uplink data
is transferred from the FEP to the proper channel coder block via the DMA.
Interrupt registers
The FEP interrupt registers are required so that a device can request attention from the
FEP. The channel coders interrupt requests are ORd together and the FEP must check
a separate interrupt register to see which channel coder block needs service.
The HDLC generates an interrupt request when the HDLC needs to transfer data to the
FEP from the DRCU. Other interrupts are generated when a device has failed, so the
FEP can take corrective actions and report failures to the GPROC.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRIM GSM-100-323
Block diagram
The following is a functional block diagram of the DRIM module:
SERIAL
INTERFACE

LOGIC
MODULE TYPE

REVISION
REGISTER MCAP BUS

INTERFACE 2 FOR
WATCHDOG REDUNDANCY
TIMER 27 MHz LOGIC

TDM A CLOCK & REFERENCE
CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us,

COUNTERS TIMING
RESET/ INTERRUPT 60 ms, AND 6.12 s)
DISABLE LOGIC REFERENCE
SWITCH GSM LOGIC B CLOCK & REFERENCE
COUNTERS CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us,
RED 60 ms, AND 6.12 s)
LED
GREEN
LED
TDM

BUFFER

TDM

BUFFER

FEP
DMA

TDM
FEP INTERFACE
INTERRUPT
REGISTER

DRCU
DATA READY

REGISTER
TDM
CONTROLLER

MANCHESTER

DECODER
TO/FROM
DRCU
SYNC VIA DRIX
GEN. MANCHESTER

ENCODER

CLOCK
RECOVERY
312 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GCLK
GCLK
Purpose
The generic clock (GCLK) module generates all the timing reference signals that the
BSU or RXU requires. The master TDM clock is normally synthesized from a 16.384
MHz .05 ppm stable reference (temperature stabilized crystal oscillator) and a
2.048 MHz or 1.544 MHz clock recovered from one of the E1 or T1 lines.
Requirements
The GCLK module fits in slots L3 and L5 in the BSU and RXU shelf assemblies. The
module is two slots wide and covers L2/L3 and L4/L5.
For initialization purposes, assuming there are no local KSWXs fitted, there must be a
GCLK module in one of the GCLK slots of all available BSU and RXU shelf assemblies.
A second GCLK module in the other slot provides n + 1 redundancy.
Mutually redundant GCLKs must reside in the same BSU or RXU.
GCLK module
The diagram shows a GCLK module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED

(NORMALLY OFF)
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

(MASTER = ON)
E1/T1 In
16.384 MHz OUT
TEST 6.12 S OUT
PORTS 60mS OUT
125uS OUT
GROUND
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH FREQUENCY ADJUST
DOWN = DISABLE
LATER VERSIONS OF THE GCLK DO

NOT HAVE THE 6.12 S, 60mS AND
4.24uS OUTPUTS ON THE FRONT
PANEL

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GCLK GSM-100-323
Brief description
The GCLK module generates all timing reference signals required by the BSS:
16.384 MHz TDM clock.
125 s frame reference.
60 ms synchronization reference.
6.12 s superframe reference.
The GCLK is phase-locked to the recovered clock of a selected E1/T1 line from an MSI
or XCDR module. If the recovered clock signal is lost, and no long term average (LTA) is
available upon which to synchronize, then the GCLK free-runs, providing reference
stability better than 0.05 ppm. The module incorporates self-diagnostics to detect and
isolate board faults and to select a redundant board in the event of module failure.
When a redundant GCLK is present, the GCLKs operate in a master/slave configuration
with the slaved outputs synchronized to the master. If an error is detected, the clock
control circuit reverses the master/slave status of the two GCLKs. Fault status is
reported to the main processor via the MCAP bus.
Reference
oscillator
The reference oscillator uses a phase lock loop (PLL) and a frequency multiplier to
synthesize 16.384 MHz from a E1/T1 line. The PLL consists of:
A digital phase detector.
A loop filter.
A voltage controlled crystal oscillator (VCXO).
A divide by eight loop divider.
If a fault is detected on the signal from both E1/T1 lines, the oscillator either uses the LTA
(if available) or free runs with stability being maintained by the VCXO.
Reference
dividers
The 125 s, 60 ms, and 6.12 s reference dividers consist of cascaded programmable
binary counters to divide the input signal to the correct output frequency. The reference
dividers are synchronized to the master clock. The output of each reference counter is
routed to a multiplexer, which is used to switch the reference output from the master or
the slave GCLK. The output of each reference counter is also routed to the reference
encoder.
Reference
encoders
The reference encoder encodes the reference signals together while maintaining phase
relationships. The encoded clock signals are routed via the backplane to a CLKX to be
transmitted to other shelves at the site, via fibre optic cables.
Reference fail
detect
The reference fail detect circuit monitors the signal on the two E1/T1 lines. Failures are
reported to the clock control/alarm logic. In the event of a reference failure, the GCLK
either uses the LTA (if available) or selects the secondary E1/T1 line reference. In either
case an alarm is reported to the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus.
314 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GCLK
Clock
control/alarm
logic
The clock control/alarm logic determines the GCLK master/slave status based on module
faults and GPROC commands, and reports the operational status to the GPROC.
Buffered test
ports
Buffered test ports are supplied on the front of the GCLK module for test and
measurement of the input reference signal and output clock and reference signals. The
test jacks are recessed.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GCLK GSM-100-323
GCLK diagram
The following is a block diagram of the GCLK module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
16.384 MHz CLK FROM MATE GCLK

125 us REF FROM MATE GCLK
60 ms REF FROM MATE GCLK
6.12 s REF FROM MATE GCLK
ENCODED CLK IN
MUX
REFERENCE ENCODED CLK TO CLKX
ENCODER
ENCODED CLK TO MATE GCLK
MUX
TEST CONNECTOR 6.12 s 6.12 s REF TO BACKPLANE
6.12 s OUT REFERENCE
COUNTER
6.12 s REF TO MATE GCLK
TEST CONNECTOR MUX

60 ms 60 ms REF TO BACKPLANE
60 ms OUT REFERENCE
COUNTER
60 ms REF TO MATE GCLK
MUX
TEST CONNECTOR 125 us
125 us OUT 125 us REF TO BACKPLANE
REFERENCE
COUNTER
125 us REF TO MATE GCLK
MUX
16.384 MHz CLK TO BACKPLANE
TEST CONNECTOR
E1/T1 IN 16.384 MHz TO MATE GCLK
MUX E1/T1 CLOCK REF A
E1/T1 CLOCK REF B
TEST CONNECTOR REFERENCE
16.384 MHz OUT OSCILLATOR
REFERENCE
FAIL
DETECT
CLOCK MASTER/ MASTER/SLAVE

FAILURE SLAVE
RED LED DETECT CONTROL
GREEN LED
CLOCK CONTROL /
ALARM LOGIC OUTPUT ENABLE
RESET/DISABLE MCAP BUS A

SWITCH MCAP
INTERFACE MCAP BUS B

PANEL
316 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GPROC
GPROC
Purpose
The generic processor (GPROC) module provides the processing power to control a
BTS.
GPROCs in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling via several links:
A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in several
shelves via fibre optic cable.
A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the
processors address, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same
shelf.
A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROCs and

half-size modules. This serial bus extends to the PDU.
The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.
Requirements
The GPROC module fits into:
Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.
Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.

Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC.
A GPROC must be fitted in slot L20 of BSU 0, and slot L25 of RXU 0, for use in
initialization.
GPROC module
The diagram shows a GPROC module.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED
(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)
GREEN LED ON, RED LED OFF =
PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES
GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON =
PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET
BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR
RUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLED
OR OTHER ALARM
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH TTY CONNECTOR (THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST

UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET PORT ALLOWS CONTROL OF
MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING AND
DOWN = DISABLE DIAGNOSTICS.)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GPROC GSM-100-323
Brief description
The GPROC module contains:
A Motorola MC68030 16-bit processor operating at 25 MHz.
The LAN processor, which is the interface between the GPROC and the token ring
LAN.
The COMM processor which, in conjunction with the TDM interface controller, is
the interface between the GPROC and the TDM highway.
Communication
The GPROC communicates with other full size modules via the MCAP bus, and with half
size modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus. There are
two other serial ports which are not currently used.
The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speed
private bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68030 address/data
bus and the high-speed private bus.
The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input
signals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain:
Shelf ID.
Slot ID.
Backplane type.
Backplane revision level.
Memory
The GPROC module is equipped with 16 Mbytes of DRAM. There is also 512 kbytes of
EPROM (expandable to 1 Mbyte). The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.
Troubleshooting
and diagnostics
A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal
computer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling
software when performing maintenance or troubleshooting.
The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and CCITT V.24
specifications.
The GPROC runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command
from the maintenance TTY.
Software
Every GPROC is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software
loaded into it.
The processor functions for BTS and BSC applications are different from those for an
RXCDR application and are described separately in the following sections.
318 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GPROC
BTS and BSC

GPROC
functions
The GPROC performs the following processor functions:
Fault Manager (FM).
Configuration Manager (CM).
Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).
Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).
Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).
Cell Resource Machine (CRM).
Switch Manager (SM).
Connectionless Manager (CLM).
Radio Subsystem (RSS).
Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).
Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
GPROC task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software
loaded into a given GPROC.
When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC, it is considered to be a unique GPROC

device type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor (CSFP), which is
not considered to be a unique device type.
The table shows the device types and task groups:
GPROC device BSC BTS BSC/BTS

task groups task groups interface
Type 0 Base Site Control Base Transceiver Motorola
Processor (BSP) Processor (BTP) proprietary
Type1 Base Site Control Base Transceiver Motorola
Link Control Digital Radio Host
Processor (LCP) Processor (DHP)
Operations and Radio System Link
Maintenance Processor (RSLP)
Processor (OMP)
NOTE
A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GPROC GSM-100-323
RXCDR GPROC
functions
The RXCDR GPROC processor functions are similar to the BSC and BTS GPROCs and
comprise:
Fault Manager (FM).
These processor functions:
Maintain the switch database for the KSWs and TSWs.
Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
Initialize the RXCDR network element.
Maintain the configuration database.
Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.
Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link.
Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).
Communicate with collocated digital modules.
Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.
Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs,
KSWs, and XCDRs.
Fault manager
The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder
BSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.
Switch manager
The SM:
Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS)
and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.
Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.
Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC and BTS.
Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters
and operational software currently in use.
Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to
the potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.
320 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GPROC
Flash EPROM
daughter card
The flash EPROM (flash memory) feature allows GPROCs equipped to reprogram to the
latest bootstrap code automatically. This feature eliminates the need to visit every site to
manually replace EPROMs every time the bootstrap code changes.
Reprogramming is an automatic part of code downloading and requires no GSM network
operator interaction.
One flash EPROM GPROC daughter card is needed for each upgraded GPROC module.
Hardware
The flash EPROM contains four 256 kbyte flash EPROMs that contain the bootstrap
code for a total of 1 Mbyte of code space.
The upper 4 kbytes of this address space accesses control logic on the daughter card to
enable and disable the programming voltage. This portion of memory is therefore
unavailable for program storage.
The contents of the flash EPROM can be loaded in the field with the required software
load. The flash EPROM daughter card resides in the address range $0 to $FFFFF on the
GPROC.
Control circuits
The flash EPROM contains control circuits that the software uses to enable and disable
the application of the programming voltage to the flash EPROMs, to provide protection
from accidental writes.
The programming voltage is enabled by a write to a specific address and disabled by a
read to another specific address. The address range $FF000 to $FFFFF is unavailable
for program storage.
The control circuits on the card provide sufficient programming current to program all four
flash EPROMs simultaneously.
Software
The downloadable bootstrap flash EPROM works in all GPROC configurations.
The new bootstrap software is downloaded as a new code object and distributed to all
GPROCs using the current code object download and distribution scheme.
The RAM code programs the new bootstrap code into place. Having transitioned from
ROM to RAM code, the software must determine if the new bootstrap code object is the
same as that currently programmed into EPROM. If it is not, and if the GPROC has been
reworked to use flash EPROMs, the GPROC updates its flash EPROM to the code
contained in the new bootstrap code object.
Programming
All four flash EPROMs are programmed simultaneously. This minimizes the total
reprogramming time of the flash EPROMs, to reduce the possibility of resetting the card
in the middle of the reprogramming cycle and thus rendering the bootstrap (and the
GPROC) useless.
On startup, the ROM code provides the memory management unit write protection over
the flash EPROM area. This helps guard against accidental writes to the bootstrap code.
When the bootstrap reprogramming cycle is in progress, both the red and green LEDs on
the GPROC front panel flash in unison. This is a visual sign to an onsite technician that
the reprogramming cycle is in progress.
An MMI command is available to verify that the bootstrap programming has been
successful. If the technician operates from the OMC, the GPROC(s) are monitored with
printed messages via the rlogin capability from the OMC.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GPROC GSM-100-323
GPROC diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the GPROC module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
BACKPLANE INFORMATION
REGISTER TO DRAM +5 V BATTERY

PORTS
BOARD DISTRIBUTION +5 V
ADDRESS/DATA BUS 52
MCAP BUS MCAP BUS A
INTERFACE
LOGIC
52
MCAP Bus B
} 2REDUNDANCY
FOR
RED LED PARALLEL

GREEN LED PORT
PRIVATE BUS
LAPD
PROCESSOR
PRIVATE BUS
PROCESSOR ARBITER 9
OUTBOUND TDM HWY A
MC68030
TDM 9
OUTBOUND TDM HWY B
} 2REDUNDANCY
FOR
INTERFACE 9
CONTROLLER SWITCHBOUND TDM HWY A
SYSTEM TIMING
9
SWITCHBOUND TDM HWY B
}
RESET/ WATCHDOG CONTROLLER
DISABLE TIMER PRIVATE BUS
(STC)
SWITCH
COUNTER/ REFERENCE CLKS (125 us, 60 ms,
TIMERs 6.12 s AND 16.384 MHz A & B)
MEMORY ARRAY 4
DRAM (16M BYTE ) TOKEN RING LAN A
TOKEN RING 1
EPROM (512 KBYTE TO 1 MBYTE) COMM LAN TOKEN RING CONTROL
(BOOTSTRAP CODE STORAGE) PROCESSOR INTERFACE 4 TOKEN RING LAN B
OR
FLASH EPROM (256 KBYTE TO 1 MBYTE)
REPROGRAMMABLE BOOTSTRAP CODE
STORAGE)
2
DRAM WITH BATTERY BACKUP LOGIC SERIAL LINE 1
NVRAM NONVOLATILE RAM (32K BYTES)
SERIAL
INTERFACE 2
SERIAL LINE 2
} NOT
USED
CURRENTLY
BUFFERED 2
TEST PORT RS232 OPTO BSS SERIAL BUS A
25 PIN D
DRIVER ISOLATOR SERIAL
INTERFACE
SERIAL
BUS
2 BSS SERIAL BUS B } 2REDUNDANCY
FOR
CONNECTOR CONTROL 1 SERIAL A/B SELECT
GND
322 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GPROC2
GPROC2
Purpose
The generic processor (GPROC2) module provides the processing power to control a
BTS. The GPROC2 cannot be used with software version less then 1500.
GPROC2s in a BSU or RXU exchange control signalling in several ways:
A token ring local area network (LAN). The LAN can link processors in several
shelves via fibre optic cable.
A Motorola cellular advanced processor (MCAP) bus, which extends the processor
address, data and control buses to peripheral modules in the same shelf.
A serial bus, which communicates alarm information between GPROC2s and
half-size modules. This serial bus extends to the power distribution unit.
The active time division multiplex (TDM) highway.
Requirements
The GPROC2 module fits into:
Slots L18 to L25 in a BSU shelf assembly.
Slot L25 and slot L26 in an RXU shelf assembly.
Each BSU/RXU requires at least one GPROC2.
GPROC2 module
The diagram shows a GPROC2 module.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED
(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)
GREEN LED ON, RED LED OFF =
PROCESSOR RUNNING, NO FAILURES
GREEN LED OFF, RED LED ON =
PROCESSOR HALTED, OR IN RESET
BOTH LEDS ON = PROCESSOR
RUNNING, MODULE IS DISABLED
OR OTHER ALARM
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH TTY CONNECTOR (THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST

UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET PORT ALLOWS CONTROL OF
MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING AND
DOWN = DISABLE DIAGNOSTICS.)
Brief description
The GPROC2 module contains:
A Motorola MC68040 32-bit processor operating at 33 MHz.
The LAN processors, which are the interface between the GPROC2 and the token
ring LAN.
The COMM processor which, in conjunction with the TDM interface controller, is
the interface between the GPROC2 and the TDM highway.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GPROC2 GSM-100-323
Communication
The GPROC2 communicates with other full size modules via the MCAP bus, and with
half size modules (and modules not on the module shelf) via the BSS serial bus.
The LAPD processor and the TDM interface controller communicate via a high-speed
private bus. The private bus arbiter is the interface between the MC68040 address/data
bus and the high-speed private bus.
The parallel port controls output signals to the front panel LEDs, and receives input
signals (via the register ports) from the backplane. These contain:
Shelf ID.
Slot ID.
Backplane type.
Backplane revision level.
Memory
The GPROC2 module is equipped with 32 Mbytes of DRAM. There is also 1Mbyte of
EPROM. The EPROM contains the bootstrap code.
Troubleshooting
and diagnostics
A fully buffered TTY maintenance port is available on the front panel, to which a personal
computer (PC) can be connected. The TTY can be used for monitoring and controlling
software when performing maintenance or troubleshooting.
The maintenance port meets the requirements of the EIA RS232C and ITUTSS V.24
specifications.
The GPROC2 runs on-board self-diagnostics during initial power-up and on command
from the maintenance TTY connection.
Software
Every GPROC2 is identical in terms of hardware; its function depends upon the software
loaded into it.
The processor functions for BTS and BSC applications are different from those for an
RXCDR application and are described separately in the following sections.
324 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GPROC2
BTS and BSC

GPROC2
functions
The GPROC2 performs the following processor functions:
Fault Manager (FM).
Message Transfer Protocol (MTP).
Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) State Machine (SSM).
Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM).
Cell Resource Machine (CRM).
Connectionless Manager (CLM).
Radio Subsystem (RSS).
Operations and Maintenance System (OMS).
Maintains a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
GPROC2 task groups and device types

The processor functions can be grouped into six task groups depending on the software
loaded into a given GPROC2.
When a group of tasks is assigned to a GPROC2, it is considered to be a unique

GPROC2 device type. The exception to this is the code storage facility processor
(CSFP), which is not considered to be a unique device type.
The table shows the device types and task groups:
GPROC device BSC BTS BSC/BTS

task groups task groups interface
Type1 Base Site Control Base Transceiver Motorola
Operations and Radio System Link
Maintenance Processor (RSLP)
Processor (OMP)
NOTE
A code storage facility processor (CSFP) can also be equipped.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GPROC2 GSM-100-323
RXCDR GPROC2
functions
The RXCDR GPROC2 processor functions are similar to the BSC and BTS GPROC2s
and comprise:
Fault Manager (FM).
These processor functions:
Maintain the switch database for the KSWs and TSWs.
Maintain a copy of the application code for collocated peripheral modules.
Initialize the RXCDR network element.
Maintain the configuration database.
Communicate with other network elements via a 64 kbit/s LAPD serial data link.
Communicate with the OMC via an X.25 link.
Communicate with the local monitor via a man-machine interface (MMI).
Communicate with collocated digital modules.
Handle redundancy between duplicated modules.
Control operational software downloads to digital highway modules such as MSIs,
KSWs, and XCDRs.
Fault manager
The RXCDR FM communicates with the BSS FM function via the optional transcoder
BSC link (XBL), a dedicated 64 kbit/s channel.
Switch manager
The SM:
Makes connections between the terrestrial links on the A interface (MSC to BSS)
and the radio (traffic) channels on the air interface.
Interacts with the call processing and fault management functions.
Provides switching functionality for the BSS distributed within the BSC and BTS.
Configuration manager
The CM maintains and updates a configuration database which contains all parameters
and operational software currently in use.
Changes to the database are restricted to the highest level password protection, due to
the potential for down time caused by incorrect changes to the configuration database.
326 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GPROC2
GPROC2 diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the GPROC2 module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
LAN A
DRAM
RESET/ WATCHDOG TIMING LAPD
DISABLE TIMERS CONTROL PROC
SWITCH
BUS LAN A
SIZER PROC
LAN LAN A
INTERFACE
LAN B
LAN
PROCESSOR BUS
MC68040
33 MHz LAN B
PROC
DATA/ADDRESS LAN B
BUS DRAM
EXT CACHE
TDM TDM A
128 K
INTERFACE TDM B
PERIPHERAL
BUS
MAIN DRAM
(16 64 Mb)
EEPROM
NVRAM MCAP MCAP A
INTERFACE
MCAP A
SERIAL BUS SERIAL BUS A

TTY TEST
CONNECTOR CONTROLLER SERIAL BUS B

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
KSW GSM-100-323
KSW
Purpose
The kiloport switch (KSW) module is a time division digital switch, and:
Performs timeslot interchange for the active TDM highway.
Communicates with the controlling GPROC via the MCAP bus.
At a BSC, routes the logical channels dynamically on a per-call basis.
See also the TSW section of this chapter, in which the timeslot switch (a sub equipped
version of the KSW) is described.
Requirements
The KSW module fits in the following slots in a BSU or RXU shelf assembly:
L1 for TDM highway B.
L27 for TDM highway A.
KSW module
The diagram shows a KSW module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED

(NORMALLY OFF)
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED
(NORMALLY ON)
DOWN = DISABLE
328 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 KSW
Architecture
Refer to the KSW block diagram at the end of this section.
A Motorola MC56001 digital signal processor (DSP) controls the KSW internally. The
DSP:
Executes port connects between the switchbound TDM highway and the outbound
TDM highway.
Controls the timeslot interchange (TSI) section via the connection RAM control
section.
Performs on-line and off-line self diagnostics, including:
Internal (KSW-related) tests.
External (TDM bus-related) tests.
Controls inbound and outbound multiplexers.
Processes alarms.
Updates the dynamic pattern registers.
The DSP communicates via the MCAP bus interface logic, the DSP data/address bus,
and the serial interface logic.
Timing reference
The timing reference section generates various clock signals, timeslot counts, and frame
counts required by other sections of the KSW.
The TDM counters section is an offset counter that adds a fixed offset to the master TDM
timeslot counter.
The GSM counters section contains four separate counters:
GSM sub-timeslot counter.
GSM sequence counter.
GSM timeslot counter.
GSM frame counter.
Switchbound
TDM interface
structure
The switchbound TDM highway interface consists of a series of multiplexers that are
used to select one of four switchbound highways (numbered 0 to 3). The DSP controls
the switchbound multiplexers via highway control logic.
Switchbound highway 0 and the outbound highway are split into local and remote parts.
Local
The local switchbound highway 0 and local outbound highways are active when the KSW
is communicating with highway interface modules in the same shelf.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
KSW GSM-100-323
Remote
The remote switchbound highway 0 and remote outbound highways are active when the
KSW is communicating with highway interface modules in remote shelves. This
effectively extends the TDM bus to multiple shelves. In the remote case, the KSW sends
and receives TDM data to and from a remote KSW Extender (KSWXR) in the same shelf
as the KSW.
The remote KSWXR communicates via fibre optic links with a local type KSWXL in the
remote shelf. Local switchbound highway 0 has a delay circuit which adds a fixed 12
timeslot delay. This delay is equal to the delay associated with the KSWX extension
operation, and keeps the local and remote switchbound highways in phase.
The modules on the TDM bus are:
DRIM.
MSI.
XCDR.
GPROC.
Expansion
switchbound
highways
Expansion switchbound highway 1, 2 and 3 data originates from highway interface
modules associated with other KSWs. These remote highway interface modules send
and receive data between their respective KSWs. Each KSW re-transmits data received
on its switchbound highway 0 (local or remote) to other KSWs via dedicated KSWXE fibre
optic links.
Data is received on switchbound highways 1, 2 and 3 of remote KSWs. This architecture
results in each KSW receiving data from all 1024 timeslots of all expansion highways
connected to the KSW and retransmitting that data on the 1024 timeslots associated with
its own highway interface modules to the other KSWs.
The DSP can write data to any of the four switchbound highways. This allows known
static data patterns to be inserted into any switchbound timeslot, and data can be looped
back to switchbound highway 0 from the TSI section, enabling self diagnostics. When the
KSW is performing self diagnostics, data is compared at two highway monitors, one
before the TSI section and one after the TSI section.
Timeslot
interchange (TSI)
The TSI section is the main section of the KSW. It switches data from a given timeslot on
one of the four switchbound TDM highways to a given timeslot on the outbound TDM
highway. The TSI section consists of four independent TSI blocks operating in parallel to
support sub-rate switching. Each TSI block switches 16 kbit/s of data.
If a particular timeslot is associated with a 64 kbit/s channel, then one TSI block contains
the same path connection for that timeslot. Conversely, if a timeslot is associated with
two 32 kbit/s channels, two TSIs contain a similar path connection and the other two
contain a different path connection. When a timeslot contains four 16 kbit/s channels,
each TSI section has a different path connection.
Connection RAM
control
The connection RAM control is the interface between the DSP and the TSI section. The
connection RAM control isolates the DSP from strict timing constraints associated with
the TSI section.
330 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 KSW
Three-party
conference (TPC)
memory
After traffic data leaves the TSIs, it is sent to either the TSI mode multiplexer, which
selects full-rate or sub-rate switching as required, or to the three party conference (TPC)
memory section. The TPC memory operates in real time allowing the KSW to support
any number of three party conference calls.
Fixed/dynamic
pattern registers
The fixed/dynamic pattern registers can generate fixed patterns and a variety of dynamic
patterns that generate tones, data sequences, or dynamic test patterns.
Outbound
selection MUX
The outbound selection multiplexer selects the correct source data to be sent to the
outbound highway. Although referred to as a multiplexer, this section does not contain a
physical multiplexer. Instead, multiplexing is implemented by connecting the outputs of all
the possible data sources together and selectively enabling one of these sources during
each timeslot.
After data is sent from the outbound selection multiplexer, a parity bit is added to the data
before it is placed on the outbound TDM highway. Output from the outbound multiplexer
is sent directly to the remote outbound highway, but data for the local outbound highway
is sent through a delay circuit to keep the remote and local outbound highways in phase.
This delay is 12 timeslots.
Highway monitor
The KSW has two highway monitor sections:
The switchbound monitor logic which selectively monitors one of the four
switchbound TDM highways at the inputs of the TSI section.
The outbound monitor logic which monitors the output of the outbound selection
mux.
The DSP uses these monitors for monitoring inbound and outbound data on any timeslot.
When used in conjunction with the various DSP controlled data sources and
fixed/dynamic pattern selection, these monitors allow the KSW to perform extensive self
diagnostics on the TSI section.
Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer ensures that the DSP is functioning normally. The DSP writes to a
memory address that resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that it does not time out. If the
DSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out and causes the red LED on the front
panel to illuminate. An interrupt is also generated and sent to the GPROC via the MCAP
bus. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the KSW still switches data, but no new path
connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held while the system is
reconfigured around the failed KSW.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
KSW GSM-100-323
Interrupt logic
The interrupt logic generates two interrupts to the DSP:
Interrupt-A prompts the DSP to perform certain periodic tasks such as updating
the watchdog timer and the dynamic pattern registers.
Interrupt-B, processes alarms such as clock and reference alarms, and parity
alarms.
Serial interface
logic
The serial interface logic supports the TTY interface. This interface is connected to a
dedicated backplane connector port. This port is a buffered RS232 type. The TTY can be
used to control the KSW, monitor KSW operation status, and support KSW diagnostics.
KSW switching
The usable switching capacity of each KSW depends on site hardware and software
configurations because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The
KSW is controlled by the local GPROC via the MCAP bus.
Each KSW can switch connections between 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. However,
total switching capacity can be expanded by interconnecting up to three additional KSWs
via KSWXs.
In this configuration, each KSW has the ability to switch data between
2048 (2 x 1024), 3072 (3 x 1024) or 4096 (4 x 1024) 64 kbit/s input ports and its 1024
outbound ports. Each KSW has access to all 2, 3 or 4 switchbound highways, although
each KSW only drives its own 1024 port outbound TDM highway.
KSW in a BSC
KSW switching at the BSC is variable. Physical channel mapping on the A interface is
performed for each call, and at every handover.
KSW in a RXCDR
KSW switching in an RXU shelf is fixed. It provides one to one physical mapping
between the traffic to and from the BSC and the traffic to and from the MSC.
KSW in a BTS
KSW switching at the BTS is fixed. It provides one to one physical mapping between the
traffic channels on the air interface and the traffic channels on the BSC to BTS interface.
Because fixed switching is less complex than variable switching as performed at the
BSC, a TSW module (a sub equipped version of the KSW) is normally used instead of a
KSW at the BTS. Refer to the TSW section of this chapter for a description of the TSW.
332 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 KSW
KSW diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the KSW module:
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
SERIAL
INTERFACE TTY INTERFACE
LOGIC
52
MCAP BUS MCAP BUS A 2 FOR
INTERFACE
LOGIC
52
MCAP BUS B
} REDUNDANCY
OTHER KSW CIRCUITRY

MC56001
WATCHDOG 27 MHz
DISTRIBUTION TO
TIMER A CLOCK & REFERENCE
DSP TDM
DSP DATA/ADDRES
CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us,
COUNTERS TIMING
REFERENCE 60 ms, AND 6.12 s)
GSM LOGIC B CLOCK & REFERENCE
RESET/
COUNTERS CLKS (16.384 MHz, 125 us,
DISABLE INTERRUPT 60 ms, AND 6.12 s)
SWITCH LOGIC
REMOTE KSWX HWY

HIGHWAY INTERFACE CONTROL
CONTROL
RED LED
GREEN
LED
MUX LOCAL SWITCHBOUND HWY 0

DELAY
MUX
CONNECTION REMOTE SWITCHBOUND
DSP DATA/ADDRES
RAM CONTROL HWY 0
TIME SLOT
INTERCHANGE MUX EXPANSION SWITCHBOUND
(TSI) HWY 1
TIME SLOT
LOOP
BACK
INTERCHANGE
(TSI)
MUX EXPANSION SWITCHBOUND
TIME SLOT
INTERCHANGE HWY 2
(TSI)
FULLRATE
SUBRATE
SOURCE 0
SOURCE 1
TIME SLOT
INTERCHANGE
(TSI)
MUX EXPANSION SWITCHBOUND
HWY 3
HIGHWAY
MONITOR
DELAY
MUX PARITY
GENERATOR EXPANSION OUTBOUND HWY
OUTBOUND SELECT MUX
LOOP
BACK
TSI MODE MUX

DELAY LOCAL OUTBOUND HWY
THIRD
PARTY REMOTE OUTBOUND HWY
CONFERENCE
MEMORY
FIXED/DYNAMIC
PATTERN PARITY HIGHWAY
REGISTERS GENERATOR MONITOR
+12 V
12 V
OUTBOUND +5 V
CONTROL
RAM GND

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
KSW GSM-100-323
Interconnected
KSWs
The diagram shows three interconnected KSWs:
KSW
SWITCHBOUND LOCAL (1024 PORTS) TSI OUTBOUND HIGHWAY (1024 PORTS)
EACH KSW ROUTES SWITCHBOUND DATA TO BOTH

THE TSI SECTION AND THE EXPANSION OUTBOUND EXPANSION OUTBOUND
HIGHWAY. HIGHWAY IS SENT TO
EACH KSWXE
BSU/RXU SHELF KSWX E
KSWX E
KSW
BSU/RXU SHELF
DATA FROM OTHER KSWs
IS SENT TO THE TSI
SECTION (1024 EACH)
KSWX E
TDM DATA IS SENT

KSWX E
TO/FROM
KSWX E TO KSWXE
KSW
ALL EXPANSION SWITCHBOUND

DATA IS SENT (ALONG WITH THE
SWITCHBOUND LOCAL) TO THE TSI FOR
SWITCHING TO THE OUTBOUND HIGHWAY
BSU/RXU SHELF KSWX E
fibRe OPTIC CABLES KSWX E
334 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 MSI
MSI
Purpose
The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module drives two separate interface lines to and from
the TDM bus.
MSI module
The MSI module can drive two European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) data lines.
One of the E1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1 line is known as group B.
The E1 lines can come from either:
A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB).
Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.
The MSI can also extract the clock synchronization from the E1 line data stream.
An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected for
testing and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1 serial data stream.
Two E1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1 line.
Requirements
The MSI module is fitted in:
Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly.
Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.
Initialization
An MSI or MSI2 must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BTS
initialization purposes.
Shelf 15 slot 16 (Software communicates via either group A or group B)
Shelf 15 slot 14 (Software communicates via group A)
Shelf 14 (if second BSU in BTS) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)
MSI module
The diagram shows an MSI module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED

(NORMALLY OFF)
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

(NORMALLY ON)
DOWN = DISABLE

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
MSI GSM-100-323
General features
The MSI converts signals from the E1 lines from serial format to the parallel format that
the TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1 lines from parallel
to serial. The MSI also provides surge protection and frame alignment.
Each serial line can carry the following to and from the active TDM highway in the BSU:
One 64 kbit/s channel for synchronization.
One 64 kbit/s channel for control signalling.
Thirty 64 kbit/s channels that can each be used as follows:
Traffic (four 16 kbit/s compressed voice/data channels each).
Additional control channels.
If all 30 channels are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.
These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under
the control of the GPROC.
The interfaces provided by MSIs depend upon the transcoding location:
If transcoding is integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the BSC to BTS
interface.
If transcoding is not integrated with the BSC, the MSI provides the RXCDR to BSC
and BSC to BTS interfaces.
Transcoded
environment
The MSI can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic channels in a transcoded environment, as
defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s channels are multiplexed into one 64
kbit/s timeslot, as shown in the following example:
30 64 kbit/s timeslots of a serial data stream
x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic channels
x 2 E1 lines
= 240 16 kbit/s traffic channels
Functional
description
Refer to the MSI block diagram at the end of this section.
MC68000 processor
A Motorola MC68000 processor, operating at 8 MHz, controls:
The E1 line to TDM interface function.
A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock to be routed to the GCLK.
The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC on the MCAP bus:
Extracted clock failures.
Frame alignment errors.
Multiframe alignment errors.
Bipolar violations.
CRC4 errors.
Transmit or receive failures.
336 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 MSI
EPROM
The EPROM contains 128 kbytes of bootstrap program code. At power-up the bootstrap
program sends a request message to the GPROC to download the MSIs operating
program into the SRAM. The SRAM also stores program variables, and can be
permanently saved in EEPROM.
E1 line to TDM interface circuits

There are two identical E1 lines to TDM interface circuits on the MSI module. This
functional description applies to both.
The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1 line serial to TDM parallel.
The two E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out
by 32 timeslots. The sequence is as follows:
Group A timeslot 0, group B timeslot 0.

Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent to
the E1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1 line levels. The E1 line data is
then HDB3 and CRC4 encoded. After encoding, the data is routed to the loopback
multiplexer and to a level converter. The level converter converts from split-phase, TTL
level unipolar to bipolar.
The table illustrates the E1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions:
Stage Action
1 The system matches impedance and isolates the signal
2 The E1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter
3 The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level
unipolar
4 The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder and clock extraction circuit
5 The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for:
Diagnostic purposes.
Distance measurements.
Drop and insert feature utilization.
The impedance matching circuits consist of isolation transformers and Zener diodes,
which:
Impedance match the two sides of the interface.
Provide secondary surge protection from high voltage transients, such as lightning
strikes, which may come down the E1 lines.
The drop and insert feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant for
another BTS, to be routed back out on group B.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
MSI GSM-100-323
Clock extraction
The clock extraction section extracts the E1 clocks, to which the entire site (either BTS or
BSC) can be synchronized. The two extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that
selects which clock signal (if any) is routed to the GCLK.
Frame decoding
The HDB3 and CRC4 decoding section performs frame decoding according to CCITT
recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.
338 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 MSI
MSI diagram
Figure 5-1 shows a block diagram of the MSI module.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
WATCHDOG RS232
DRIVERS TTY TEST PORT
TIMER
MCAP BUS A
RED MCAP INTERFACE
LED
MCAP BUS B
MC6800 PROCESSOR
GREEN
LED EPROM SRAM EEPROM
RESET/
DISABLE
SWITCH CRC4 TDM TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY B
HDB3
DECODER DECODER INTERFACE
TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY A
CONTROL
RECEIVED
CLOCK
EXTRACTOR
2
LEVEL IMPEDANCE RECEIVE
CONVERTER MATCHING
E1 LINE A
LEVEL CONVERTER 2
& E1/T1/JT1 LINE IMPEDANCE
TRANSMIT
TRANSMITTER MATCHING
HDB3 CRC4 TDM TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY A

ENCODER ENCODER INTERFACE TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY B
MUX
EXTRACTED CLOCK REF
TDM TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY B

HDB3 CRC4
DECODER DECODER INTERFACE TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY A
RECEIVED
CLOCK
EXTRACTOR
LEVEL 2
IMPEDANCE RECEIVE
CONVERTER MATCHING
E1 LINE B
LEVEL CONVERTER 2
& E1/T1/JT1 LINE IMPEDANCE TRANSMIT
HDB3 CRC4 TDM TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY A

ENCODER ENCODER INTERFACE
TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY B
Figure 5-1 MSI block diagram

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
MSI2 GSM-100-323
MSI2
Purpose
The Multiple Serial Interface (MSI2) module is the interface between the inter-site
communication lines and the TDM highway.
MSI2 module
The MSI2 module is a software configured board and has the following drive capability:
North American 1.544 Mbit/s (T1).
European 2.048 Mbit/s (E1).
Japanese 1.544 Mbit/s (JT1).
One of the E1/T1/JT1 lines is referred to as group A, the other E1/T1/JT1 line is known
as group B.
The E1/T1/JT1 lines are connected at the interconnect panel via either:
A balanced-line interconnect board (BIB).
Type 43 (T43) interconnect board.
The MSI2 can also extract the clock synchronization data from the E1/T1/JT1 line data
stream in order to phase lock the GCLK to the line.
An RS232 maintenance port, to which a personal computer (PC) can be connected for
testing and debugging, is provided at the top of the BSU or RXU shelf.
340 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 MSI2
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1/JT1 serial data stream.
Two E1/T1/JT1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1/JT1 line.
Requirements
The MSI2 module is fitted in:
Slots L6 to L17 of the BSU shelf assembly.
Slots L6 to L10 of the RXU shelf assembly.
Initialization
An MSI or MSI2 must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below for BTS
initialization purposes.
Shelf 14 (if second BSU in BTS) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)
MSI2 module
The diagram shows an MSI2 module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED

(NORMALLY OFF)
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

(NORMALLY ON)
DOWN = DISABLE
General features
The MSI2 converts signals from the E1/T1/JT1 lines from serial format to the parallel
format that the TDM highway requires, and converts signals transmitted to the E1/T1/JT1
lines from parallel to serial.
E1 Data
One 64 kbit/s timeslot for synchronization.
One 64 kbit/s timeslot for control signalling.
Thirty 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows:
Additional control timeslots.
If all 30 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 120 traffic channels are possible.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
MSI2 GSM-100-323
T1 Data
Twenty-four 64 kbit/s timeslots that can each be used as follows:
Additional control timeslots.
If all 24 timeslots are allocated to traffic, 96 traffic channels are possible.
Transcoded
environment (E1)
The MSI2 can support 240 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, as
defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64
x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
x 2 E1 lines
= 240 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
Transcoded
environment (T1)
The MSI2 can support 192 x 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots in a transcoded environment, as
defined by GSM. To accomplish this, four 16 kbit/s timeslots are multiplexed into one 64
x 4 Submultiplexed 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
x 2 T1/JT1 lines
= 192 16 kbit/s traffic timeslots
Functional
description
Refer to the MSI2 block diagram at the end of this section.
MC68302 processor
A Motorola MC68302 processor, operating at 16.384 MHz, controls:
The E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface function.
A multiplexer that selects the extracted clock signal to be routed to the GCLK.
The processor reports the following to the controlling GPROC on the MCAP bus:
Extracted clock failures.
Frame alignment errors.
Multiframe alignment errors.
Bit errors.
Transmit or receive failures.
342 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 MSI2
EPROM
The EPROM contains 64 kbytes of bootstrap program code memory, 256 kbytes of
nonvolatile operational code memory (Flash EPROM) and 128 kbytes of volatile program
and data memory (SRAM). At power-up the bootstrap program sends a request message
to the GPROC to download the MSI2s operating program into the SRAM.
E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits

There are two identical E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM interface circuits on the MSI2 module.
This functional description applies to both.
The TDM interface section converts incoming data from E1/T1/JT1 line from serial to
TDM parallel.
E1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 32
timeslots. The sequence is as follows:
..........
T1/JT1 lines are interleaved onto the TDM bus in groups of two and are spaced out by 24
timeslots. The sequence is as follows:
..........
Outgoing traffic data is converted from parallel to serial. The serial data is then sent to
the E1/T1/JT1 line transmitter which converts it to standard E1/T1/JT1 line levels.
E1/T1/JT1 data uses Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) format and line encoding/error
checking can be used as given below:
Line format Line Encoding Error Checking

E1 HDB3 CRC4
T1/JT1 B8ZS CRC6
After encoding, the data is routed to the loopback multiplexer and to a level converter.
The level converter converts from split-phase, TTL level unipolar to bipolar.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
MSI2 GSM-100-323
The table illustrates the E1/T1/JT1 line to TDM Interface circuit actions:
Stage Action
1 The system matches impedance and isolates the signal
2 The E1/T1/JT1 line receive signal is applied to a level converter
3 The level converter converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level
unipolar
4 The signal passes to the HDB3 decoder (E1) or B8ZS decoder (T1) and clock
extraction circuit
5 The signal goes through a crosspoint switch for:
Diagnostic purposes.
Distance measurements.
Drop and insert feature utilization.
The drop and insert feature allows a timeslot coming in on group A, which is meant for
another BTS, to be routed back out on group B.
Clock extraction
The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1/JT1 clocks, to which the entire site (either
BTS or BSC) can be synchronized. In the case of T1/JT1, the extracted clock is fed
through a clock adaptor to convert the 1.544 MHz signal to a 2.048 MHz signal. The two
extracted clocks are routed to a multiplexer that selects which clock signal (if any) is
routed to the GCLK.
Frame decoding
The HDB3 (E1) and B8ZS (T1) decoding section performs frame decoding according to
CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment.
344 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 MSI2
MSI2 diagram
Figure 5-2 shows a block diagram of the MSI2 module.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
LINE INTERFACE A
T1, E1, OR JT1 RXA

LOCAL AND REMOTE LOOPBACK
COMMON 2M OR 1.5M EXTRACTED CLOCK
INTERFACE DATA
DATA
FUNCTIONS
TXA
DISTANCE
MEASURING
SWITCHING
LINE INTERFACE
EXTRACTED CLOCK STATUS/CONTROL
DATA TO GCLK
LINE INTERFACE B
DATA RXB
T1, E1, OR JT1
DATA LOCAL AND REMOTE LOOPBACK
2M OR 1.5M EXTRACTED CLOCK
DATA
TXB
EXTRACTED
CLOCK/
DISTANCE
INBOUND/OUTBOUND MEASURING
INTERFACE DATA
STATUS
CONTROL
TTY PORT
CONTROL
PROCESSOR
RESET 68302
SWITCH
BOOTSTRAP EPROM TDM INTERFACE SWITCHBOUND
SRAM TDM HIGHWAY
WATCHDOG TIMER TSA RAM
POWER/RESET
CIRCUIT OUTBOUND
LEDS BACKPLANE TDM HIGHWAY
TTY PORT
DRIVERS
FLASH EPROM RECEIVERS
PARALLEL I/O
SERIAL EEPROM
16.384 MHZ
REF 125
CLOCK AND REF 60
REFERENCE REF 6.12
GENERATION
TDM
STATUS
AND
CONTROL
EXTRACTED MESSAGE
CLOCK AND DPRAM BUS
DISTANCE DATA
MEASURING MCAP INTERFACE
CONTROL
MCAP CONTROL
REGISTERS
ADDRESS
+5 V, +12 V
AND 12 V
Figure 5-2 MSI2 block diagram

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
TSW GSM-100-323
TSW
Purpose
The timeslot switch (TSW) module is a time division digital switch, controlled by a
Motorola MC56001 digital signal processor (DSP).
DSP communications are supported via the MCAP bus interface logic, the DSP
data/address bus, and the serial interface logic.
The TSW is static, that is the port connects are fixed, and routes logical channels on a
per-call basis.
The TSW is a sub equipped KSW module. Refer to the KSW section of this chapter for a
description of the KSW module.
Primary TSW functions

To execute port connects between the switchbound and outbound TDM highways.
To control the timeslot interchange (TSI) via the connection RAM control section.
Secondary TSW functions

To perform on-line and off-line self-diagnostics, including:
Internal (TSW-related) tests.
External (TDM bus-related) tests.
To control inbound and outbound multiplexers.
To process alarms.
To update the dynamic pattern registers.
Requirements
The KSW module fits in the following slots in a BSU shelf assembly:
L1 for TDM highway B.
L27 for TDM highway A.
TSW module
The diagram shows a TSW module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

(NORMALLY OFF)

(NORMALLY ON)
DOWN = DISABLE
346 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 TSW
Functional
description
Refer to the TSW block diagram at the end of this section.
Timing reference
The timing reference section of the TSW generates various clock signals, timeslot
counts, and frame counts required by other sections of the TSW circuitry.
The TDM counters section is an offset counter that adds a fixed offset to the master TDM
timeslot counter. It contains:
GSM sub-timeslot counter.
GSM sequence counter.
GSM timeslot counter.
GSM frame counter.
Switchbound
TDM interface
The switchbound TDM highway interface consists of a series of multiplexers that are
used to select one of four switchbound highways (0, 1, 2 and 3). The DSP controls the
switchbound multiplexers via highway control logic.
Switchbound highway 0 and the outbound highway are split into two parts, local and
remote.
Local
The local switchbound highway 0 and local outbound highways are active when the TSW
is communicating with highway interface modules, for example MSI or XCDR, in the
same shelf.
Remote
The remote switchbound highway 0 and remote outbound highways are active when the
TSW is communicating with highway interface modules in remote shelves. This extends
the TDM bus to multiple shelves. The TSW sends and receives TDM data to and from a
remote type KSWXR in the same shelf as the TSW.
The remote KSWXR communicates via fibre optic links with a local type KSWXL in the
remote shelf. Local switchbound highway 0 has a delay circuit which adds a fixed 12
timeslot delay. This delay is equal to the delay associated with the KSWX extension
operation, keeping the local and remote switchbound highways in phase.
Expansion
switchbound
highways
Expansion switchbound highway 1, 2, and 3 data originates from highway interface
modules associated with other TSWs. These send and receive data to and from their
respective TSWs. Each TSW retransmits data received on its switchbound highway 0
(local or remote) to other TSWs via dedicated KSWXE fibre optic links.
The data is received on switchbound highways 1, 2, and 3 of remote TSWs. This
architecture means that each TSW receives data from all 1024 timeslots of all expansion
highways connected to the TSW, and re-transmits that data to the 1024 timeslots
associated with its own highway interface modules.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
TSW GSM-100-323
The DSP
The DSP can write data to any of the four switchbound highways. This allows known
static data patterns to be inserted into any switchbound timeslot, and data can be looped
back to switchbound highway 0 from the TSI section. These two features provide for self
diagnostics, during which data is compared at two highway monitors, one before the TSI
section and one after the TSI section.
The TSI section is the main section of the TSW. It switches data from a given timeslot on
one of the four switchbound TDM highways to a given timeslot on the outbound TDM
highway. The TSI block switches data at 64 kbit/s.
Connection RAM
control
The connection RAM control is the interface between the DSP and the TSI section. The
connection RAM control isolates the DSP from strict timing constraints associated with
the TSI section. After traffic data leaves the TSI it is sent to the outbound select
multiplexer.
The fixed and dynamic pattern registers can generate fixed patterns (such as the -law
idle channel code) and a variety of dynamic patterns which generate tones, data
sequences, or dynamic test patterns.
Outbound
selection
multiplexer
The outbound selection multiplexer selects the correct source data to be sent to the
outbound highway. Although referred to as a multiplexer, this section does not contain a
physical multiplexer. Instead, multiplexing is implemented by connecting the outputs of all
the possible data sources together and selectively enabling one of these sources during
each timeslot.
After data is sent out from the outbound selection multiplexer, a parity bit is added to the
outbound data before it is placed on the outbound TDM highway. Output from the
outbound multiplexer is sent directly to the remote outbound highway, but data for the
local outbound highway is sent through a delay circuit to keep the remote and local
outbound highways in phase. The delay is 12 timeslots.
Highway
monitors
The TSW has two highway monitor sections:
The switchbound monitor logic selectively monitors one of the four switchbound
TDM highways at the inputs of the TSI section.
The outbound monitor logic monitors the output of the outbound selection
multiplexer.
The DSP uses these monitors for monitoring inbound and outbound data on any timeslot.
When used in conjunction with the various DSP controlled data sources and
fixed/dynamic pattern selection, these monitors allow the TSW to perform extensive self
diagnostics on the TSI section.
348 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 TSW
Watchdog timer
The purpose of the watchdog timer is to ensure that the DSP is functioning normally. The
DSP writes to a special memory address which resets the watchdog timer, ensuring that
it does not time out. If the DSP stops running, the watchdog timer times out, causing an
interrupt to be generated and sent to the GPROC via the MCAP bus, and the red LED on
the front panel to illuminate. If a DSP fails, the TSI section of the TSW still switches data,
but no new path connections are implemented. This results in existing calls being held
while the system is reconfigured around the failed TSW.
Interrupt logic
The interrupt logic generates two interrupts to the DSP, interrupt-A and interrupt-B.
Interrupt-A prompts the DSP to perform certain periodic tasks such as updating
the watchdog timer and the dynamic pattern registers.
Interrupt-B, processes alarms such as clock, reference and parity alarms.
Serial interface
logic
The serial interface logic supports the buffered RS232 TTY interface, a dedicated
backplane connector port. The TTY can be used to control the TSW, monitor TSW
operation status, and support TSW diagnostics.
TSW switching
Usable TSW switching depends upon site hardware and software configurations,
because certain modules require a number of ports for their own use. The TSW is
controlled by the local GPROC via the MCAP bus.
The TSW can switch connections between 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs. However,
these connections may be extended to additional BTS cabinets. The remote switchbound
and outbound highways are connected, via up to five KSWXR in the master cabinet, to a
KSWX L fitted to each remote BSU shelf in up to five other BTS cabinets. This allows six
cabinets to interchange the same information.
TSW switching at the BTS is fixed and provides one to one physical mapping between
the traffic channels on the air interface and the traffic channels on the BSC to BTS
interface.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
TSW GSM-100-323
TSW diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the TSW module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
SERIAL
INTERFACE TTY INTERFACE
LOGIC
52
MCAP BUS MCAP BUS A
INTERFACE 52
LOGIC MCAP BUS B
MC56001 2 FOR REDUNDANCY
WATCHDOG OTHER TSW CIRCUITRY A CLOCK & REF.
DISTRIBUTION TO
TIMER 27 MHz
TDM CLKS (16.384 MHz,
DSP DATA/ADDRES
DSP COUNTERS TIMING 125 us, 60 ms, & 6.12 s)

RESET/ REFERENCE
GSM LOGIC B CLOCK & REF.
DISABLE CLKS (16.384 MHz,
SWITCH COUNTERS
INTERRUPT 125 us, 60 ms, & 6.12 s)
LOGIC
REMOTE KSWX HWY

RED HIGHWAY INTERFACE CONTROL
LED CONTROL
GREEN
LED
LOCAL
SWITCHBOUND
MUX DELAY HWY 0
MUX
DSP DATA/ADDRES
REMOTE
SWITCHBOUND
CONNECTION HWY 0
RAM CONTROL
MUX EXPANSION
SWITCHBOUND
HWY 1
TIME SLOT
LOOP
BACK
INTERCHANGE
(TSI)
MUX EXPANSION
SWITCHBOUND
HWY 2
FULLRATE
MUX EXPANSION
SWITCHBOUND
HWY 3
HIGHWAY
MONITOR
DELAY
MUX PARITY EXPANSION

GENERATOR OUTBOUND HWY
OUTBOUND SELECT MUX
LOOP
BACK
LOCAL
DELAY OUTBOUND HWY
REMOTE
OUTBOUND HWY
FIXED/DYNAMIC
PATTERN PARITY HIGHWAY
REGISTERS GENERATOR MONITOR
+12 V
12 V
OUTBOUND +5 V
CONTROL
RAM GND
350 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 TSW
TSW extension
between cabinets
The diagram shows an example of TSW extension between three cabinets:
TSW
LOCAL SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY TSI LOCAL OUTBOUND

(1024 PORTS) HIGHWAY
(1024 PORTS)
REMOTE OUTBOUND
REMOTE SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY IS HIGHWAY IS SENT TO EACH
SENT TO EACH KSWXR KSWX R
BSU SHELF KSWX R KSWX R
TDM DATA IS SENT TO/FROM

KSWX R TO KSWXL
TDM DATA IS SENT TO/FROM
KSWX R TO KSWXL
BSU SHELF
LOCAL OUTBOUND
HIGHWAY
KSWX L
LOCAL SWITCHBOUND
HIGHWAY
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES

FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
BSU SHELF
LOCAL OUTBOUND HIGHWAY

KSWX L
LOCAL SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
XCDR GSM-100-323
XCDR
Purpose
The transcoder (XCDR) module:
Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a
parallel format.
Transcodes thirty 64 kbit/s channels into 120 compressed voice/data channels, in
accordance with the GSM recommendations:
Channel zero of each E1/T1 line is reserved for synchronization.
Channel sixteen is reserved for link control signalling.
If the BSC performs the transcoding function, XCDRs interface the BSU or RXU to the
MSC in place of MSI modules.
The XCDR transcodes the remaining 30 channels into 120 x 16 kbit/s compressed
channels. The synchronization and signalling channels and the 120 compressed
voice/data channels are applied to the active TDM highway in the BSU or RXU.
These channels can be placed in any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under
control of the GPROC.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream.
Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.
Requirements
The XCDR module is fitted in:
Slots L6 to L17 (maximum 6 modules) in the BSU shelf assembly.
Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 16 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.
There must be an XCDR or MSI module in slot L14 or slot L16 of the BSU or RXU in
shelf 0 for initialization purposes.
XCDR module
The diagram shows an XCDR module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED

(NORMALLY OFF)
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED
(NORMALLY ON)
DOWN = DISABLE
352 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 XCDR
Brief description
Refer to the XCDR block diagram at the end of this section.
The XCDR module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:
GSM-defined speech encoding.
GSM-defined speech decoding.
Submultiplexing functions.
The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land
network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface.
Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.
Architecture
The XCDR module contains the following major systems:
Processor system.
DSP system.
Line interface system.
Switching system.
MCAP interface system.
TDM interface system.
Processor
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which:
Controls and interfaces the five major systems (listed below) on the XCDR
module.
Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.
Other components of the processor system are:
A watchdog timer.
16 kbytes of RAM.
64 kbytes of EEPROM.
1 kbyte of dual port RAM.
A power monitor circuit.
The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not
strobed before a pre-set timeout.
DSP
The DSP system consists of:
30 mask programmed DSP units.
A subrate multiplexer.
A serial port timing generator.
A parallel host interface.
Each DSP unit has its own internal memory (2 kbytes of RAM and 12 kbytes of ROM)
and serial interface. The DSP units are arranged into four banks (three banks of eight
and one bank of six).
The serial port timing generator keeps all DSPs synchronized. The parallel host interface
is used to transfer status and control data between the MCU and DSP units.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
XCDR GSM-100-323
Subrate
multiplexer
modes
The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes. The following lists the modes and
shows what happens:
Mode Functions
The DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a self
DSP loop back
test function.
Each DSP receives 16 bits of data:
16 kbytes The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from the
multiplexed TDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM.
The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCM
is processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames.
64 kbytes The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to the
non-multiplexed E1/T1 line.
The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed to
the TDM bus.
Line interface
The line interface system performs:
Impedance matching.
Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes),
which may come down the E1/T1 lines.
The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.
After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a level
converter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar.
After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuit
and a HDB3 decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which all
BSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The HDB3/CRC4 decoding section performs
frame decoding law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic
is then routed to the switching system.
Switching
The switching system consist of two separate digital switches, each performing a
different function.
The first switch has the E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams passing
through it.
The second switch is used as an interface between the processor section and the
framer of the line interface system.
MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the XCDR. The
XCDR communicates with the GPROC in the same manner as all other full-size
modules.
354 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 XCDR
TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from
parallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.
XCDR diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the XCDR module:
RECEIVED
CLOCK EXTRACTED CLOCK REF
EXTRACTOR
LEVEL 2
CONVERTER IMPEDANCE E1/T1 LINE A RECEIVE
CS61574 MATCHING
LEVEL
CONVERTER 2
E1/T1 IMPEDANCE E1/T1 LINE A TRANSMIT
FRAMER CRC4/HDB3
MT8979AP ENCODER
FRAMER CRC4/HDB3
MT8979AP DECODER
TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY A
TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY A
TDM
SWITCHING INTERFACE
SYSTEM
TDM OUTBOUND HIGHWAY B
TDM SWITCHBOUND HIGHWAY B

CONTROL
GREEN
LED MCAP BUS A
MCAP BUS
RED INTERFACE
LED MCAP BUS B
MCU
MC68HC811E2
RESET/ POWER TTY TEST PORT
DISABLE MONITOR
SWITCH
CONTROL
CONTROL
WATCHDOG
TIMER
DSP UNIT 1
SUBRATE
MULTIPLEXER
DSP UNIT 2
DSP UNIT 3
SERIAL PORTING DSP UNIT 4

GENERATOR
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
DSP UNIT 29
DSP UNIT 30

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GDP GSM-100-323
GDP
Purpose
The Generic DSP Processor (GDP) module can be used as an enhanced XCDR, with
additional features, including Enhanced Full Rate (EFR) speech and uplink/downlink
audio volume control. The GDP DSP firmware is downloadable whereas the XCDR
DSP firmware is mask programmed.
The description in the following pages assumes the GDP is being used as an enhanced
XCDR.
NOTE
The GDP module can only be used with systems running GSR 3 or later
releases, as this contains the neccessary software support to allow operation.
In addition, for GRS3, GPROC2 must be fitted to the BSC as the master
processor (with redundant master and CSFP).
For a BSC which will operate the EFR speech option, all transcoder boards it
connects to must be GDP, not XCDR.
The GDP has two configured types, one for E1 serial line use and one for T1
serial line use. Each GDP type has a different framer/transceiver with
accompanying crystall oscillator, and two associated resistors. This means
that a GDP used for E1 serial line use cannot be used for T1, and a GDP used
for T1 serial line use cannot be used for E1.
The GDP module:
Provides the transcoding interface to the MSC. The GDP module is located at the
RXCDR, or at a BSC where transcoding is integrated within the BSC.
Interfaces an E1/T1 serial line to the internal cabinet TDM highway, which is in a
parallel format.
Transcodes thirty E1(twenty-four T1) 64 kbit/s channels, inserting them as part of

120 E1 (96 T1) compressed voice/data channels, in accordance with the GSM
recommendations:
Channel zero of each E1 line is reserved for synchronization.
Channel sixteen of each E1 line is reserved for link control signalling.
The 30 remaining E1 channels are transcoded.
Each GDP supports thirty compressed voice and data channels, using 15 DSPs. These
channels, and the synchronization and link control signalling channels, can be placed in
any of the 1024 channels on the TDM highway under control of the GPROC/GPROC2.
Terminology
One wire pair (balanced or unbalanced) equals one E1/T1 serial data stream.
Two E1/T1 serial data streams (transmit and receive) equal one E1/T1 line.
356 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GDP
Requirements
The GDP module is fitted in:
Slots L6 to L17 (but maximum 6 modules in total) in the BSU shelf assembly.
Slots L6 to L24 (maximum 19 modules) in the RXU shelf assembly.
An MSI, MSI2, XCDR or GDP must be located in at least one of the BSU locations below
for BSC initialization purposes.
Shelf 1 (if second BSU in BSC) slot 16 (Software communicates via group A)
An RXU initialization uses slot 10 instead of slot 16, and slot 8 instead of slot 14.
GDP module
The diagram shows a GDP module:
ALARM LED (RED)

ACTIVE LED (GREEN)
UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET BACKPLANE
MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION CONNECTOR
DOWN = DISABLE
Brief description
Refer to the GDP block diagram at the end of this section.
The GDP module contains a digital signal processor (DSP) unit that performs:
GSM-defined speech encoding.
GSM-defined speech decoding.
Submultiplexing functions.
The speech transcoder bi-directionally interfaces the 64 kbit/s E1/T1 line in the land
network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the air interface.
Signalling channels are passed straight through the transcoder.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GDP GSM-100-323
Architecture
The GDP module contains the following major systems:
MCU subsystem.
DSP subsystem.
E1/T1 Line interface.
Digital crosspoint switch.
MCAP interface.
TDM interface.
MCU subsystem
The main component of the processor system is the microcontroller unit (MCU), which:
Controls and interfaces the other major systems on the GDP module.
Performs self-diagnostics and error monitoring.
Other components of the processor system are:
A watchdog timer.
256 kbytes of RAM.
512 kwords of Flash EPROM.
1 kbyte of dual port RAM for MCAP messaging.
1 kbyte of dual port RAM for TDM interface.
A power monitor circuit.
The watchdog timer is periodically strobed by the MCU; an alarm is generated if it is not
strobed before a pre-set timeout.
DSP subsystem
The DSP subsystem consists of 15 identical blocks each with:
One 80 MHz DSP processor
128k x 24 dedicated SRAM for program and data storage.
Two Enhanced Synchronous Serial Interfaces (ESSIs).
On-board phase-locked loops to multiply input from subsystem 16.384 MHz clock.
DSP firmware is downloadable. The MCU uses one of its Serial Communications
Controllers (SCC1) to connect to the SCI of all DSPs, for control, monitoring and
download purposes. All the ESSI signals to the DSPs are buffered by tristate devices.
358 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GDP
Subrate
multiplexer
modes
There is a subrate multiplexer within the serial data formatter, converting data from the
DSP subsystem ESSI format to the digital crosspoint switch ST bus format.
The subrate multiplexer can operate in three modes. The following lists the modes and
shows what happens:
Mode Functions
The DSP output is logically connected to its input, enabling a self
DSP loop back
test function.
16 kbytes The first 8 bits are from a 16 kbytes/s subrate channel from the
multiplexed TDM highway Two bits at a time are expanded into PCM.
The last eight bits are from the E1/T1 line data stream. The PCM
is processed into 16 kbit/s TRAU frames.
64 kbytes The first eight bits are from the TDM bus, and are passed to the
non-multiplexed E1/T1 line.
The second eight bits are from the E1/T1 line, and are passed to
the TDM bus.
E1/T1 Line
interface
The line interface system performs:
Impedance matching.
Secondary surge protection from high voltage transients (such as lightning strikes),
which may come down the E1/T1 lines.
The impedance matching circuit consists of isolation transformers and Zener diodes.
After impedance matching and isolation the E1/T1 line receive signal is applied to a level
converter that converts the signal from bipolar to split-phase TTL level unipolar.
After level conversion the received E1/T1 line data is sent to the clock extraction circuit
and a decoder. The clock extraction section extracts the E1/T1 clock to which all
BSU/RXU shelves can be synchronized. The decoding section performs frame decoding
law CCITT recommendation G.704 for digital multiplex equipment. Traffic is then routed
to the switching system.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GDP GSM-100-323
CRC-4 Error
checking
A GDP module configured for use with an E1 serial line supports CRC-4 error checking.
This is set by default to the on state 0. All associated switches (MSCs) must also have
CRC-4 error checking set to the on state. This allows communication across the
A-interface
To check if the GDP board CRC-4 state is set, use the MMS_config_type CM database
command.
disp_element MMS_config_type <location>
Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference (GSM-100-321) for
information on the above CM database command.
To ensure the correct setting of CRC-4 error checking at the MSC, consult the vendor
supplied equipment manual.
Digital
crosspoint
switch
The switching system consist of a digital switch, which performs the following functions:.
Transmission of E1/T1 line data stream and TDM data streams.

Connection between the processor section and the E1/T1 line interface system.
MCAP interface
The MCAP interface system supports two redundant MCAP buses to the GDP. The
GDP communicates with the GPROC2 in the same manner as all other full-size modules.
TDM interface
The TDM interface system takes traffic data from the TDM bus and converts it from
parallel data to serial data. The serial data is then sent to the switching system.
360 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 GDP
GDP diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the GDP module:

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Half size modules GSM-100-323
Half size modules
Introduction
Half size digital modules provide interface extension for the full size modules, enabling
unit interconnection (for example BSU to BSU, RXU to RXU) and external alarm
connection.
The modules fit into slots in the upper card cage of a BSU or RXU shelf. The slots are
numbered, right to left, from U0 to U28.
The following sections describe the half size modules that can be mounted in a BSU or
RXU.
The quantity fitted depends upon the specific configuration of the BSU or RXU.
The modules
The following half size modules are mounted in a BSU or RXU shelf:
Battery backup board (BBBX).
Clock extender (CLKX).
Digital radio interface extender (DRIX).
Kiloport switch extender (KSWX).
Local area network extender (LANX).
Parallel interface extender (PIX).
362 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 BBBX
BBBX
Purpose
If the main supply fails, the battery backup board (BBBX) provides a backup supply of +5
V at 8 A.
The +5 V DRAM battery backup supply maintains power to the:
Optical circuit on the LANX module.
DRAM memory located on the GPROC.
Normally, the PSMs supply +5 V DRAM voltage to the BSU or RXU backplane. If the
PSMs fail to deliver this due to cabinet input power failure or PSM failure, the BBBX
converts an external backup supply to a fused +5 V DRAM supply. The BBBX can only
be used in a BTS6 cabinet.
Requirements
The BBBX module is normally positioned in slots U16, U17 or U18 of the BSU or RXU
shelf assembly, but can be fitted in any spare half-size card slot.
All connections are made at the front of the module.
BBBX module
The following shows a BBBX module:
CONNECTOR PC1 IS CABLED TO AI2 ON THE

DIGITAL CAGE BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR PC2 IS CABLED TO TOP

OF CABINET FOR CONNECTION TO
PC4 ON THE DAB AND BATT BACKUP
BBBX diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the BBBX:
4 PIN AMP CONNECTOR
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
(+5 V @ 8 A)
9 PIN D CONNECTOR
INPUT VOLTAGE SURGE BRIDGE DC to DC

(20 to 75 V @ 3.2 to 0.85 A) PROTECTION RECTIFIER CONVERTER
OVER VOLTAGE
OUTPUT GOOD
ALARM
INPUT GOOD SIGNALS OVER TEMPERATURE

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
CLKX GSM-100-323
CLKX
Purpose
WARNING
The clock extender (CLKX) module optically distributes the clock and reference signals
generated by the GCLK in the parent shelf to all other shelves at a site.
The extended clock signals are received by a KSWXL in the remote BSU/RXU.
Requirements
The CLKX module is fitted in slots U2 to U7 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly.
A maximum of six remote shelves can be supported.
In a multishelf site, the shelf containing the GCLK must also receive its clocks via a
CLKX and a KSWXL to maintain synchronization integrity.
GCLK module
The following shows a CLKX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC CLOCK

OUTPUTS TO LOCAL
KSWX s
364 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 CLKX
CLKX diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the CLKX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER

TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT
FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER

TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT
FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER

TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT
ENCODED CLOCK /
REFERENCES
(FROM GCLK)
FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER
TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT
FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER

TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT
FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER

TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT
BSS SERIAL INTERFACE
REGISTERS BSS SERIAL BUS A

1. REVISION LEVEL
2. BOARD TYPE
3. SLOT ID
BSS SERIAL BUS B

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRIX3 GSM-100-323
DRIX3
Purpose
WARNING
The digital radio interface extender (DRIX3) module is the electrical-optical interface for
downlink (Tx) data, and the optical-electrical interface for uplink (Rx) data, between the
DRCU and the DRIM.
A DRIM, a DRIX3 and a DRCU work together to form the air interface for eight logical
GSM channels, which may or may not all be on the same RF frequency.
Electrical connections to the DRIX3 are via the backplane. Optical connections are via
polymer or glass fibre optic cables connected to the front panel of the DRCU and DRIX3.
NOTE
Fibre optic cable types must not be mixed. The jumper settings on DRIX3 (A &
B) do not cater for this. A DRIX3C module will only accept glass fibre optic
cables, the jumper settings on this module are hard-wired.
Requirements
DRIX3 modules can be fitted in slots U10 to U15.
NOTE
If an SCU900 or TCU900 is installed with a DRIX3 Type A module, or if the
existing fibre optic cables are too short, the fibre optic cable extender
(Motorola part number 3004423N01) must be fitted.
DRIX3 (A & B)
The DRIX3 (A & B) has three selectable modes of operation associated with Motorola
products, when connected using polymer fibre optic cables:
Mode T: TopCell set jumpers J5 and J9.
Mode BE4 (BTS4 and BTS5) set jumpers J3 and J6.
Mode BE6 (BTS6) set jumpers J3 and J7.
The jumpers J5 and J9 must be set (as for mode T) if glass fibre optic cables are used.
If it is in the wrong mode, the DRIX3 fails to operate correctly because the fibre optic
drivers transmit and receive at the wrong levels.
Jumper location
Two blocks of jumpers are used to set the DRIX3s operating mode:
Jumpers J5, J6 and J7 are beside fibre optic driver D2.
Jumpers J9 and J3 are in the middle of the module.
366 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DRIX3
DRIX3C
The DRIX3C board is functionally identical to the previous DRIX3 boards (A & B). It is
intended for use only with glass fibre optic cables, and has no alternative drivers or
receivers for use with polymer fibres. The jumpers on the module are hard-wired to cater
for this.
DRIX
compatibility
The following table shows DRIX compatibilty when fitted to certain cabinets using
particular radios:
Table 5-1 DRIX compatibility

Radio Carrier type... When is compatible with...
fitted
into...
Carrier type Cabinet DRIX DRIX3A DRIX3B DRIX3C See
(Part No.) type SLN SWLN SWLN SWLN Note
7137A 4104A 4104B 4104C
DRCU (SWLF1006A,B) BTS4/5 Yes Yes Yes No 1
DRCU2 (SWLF1006C)
DRCU3 (SWLF1010) BTS4/5 No Yes Yes Yes 2
SCU900 (SWLF2032) BTS6
SCU1800 (SWLG1009) BTS6 No Yes Yes Yes 2
The corresponding note below should be used to determine recommended DRIX usage
from the above table.
NOTE
1. DRIX, DRIX3A or DRIX3B module can be used. Polymer fibre optic cables
must be used and fitted by following the connection procedure.
2. When using a DRIX3A or DRIX3B module the use of glass fibre optic
cables is recommended, if replacing unserviceable cables or if DRI 61/63
alarms are occuring. A DRIX3C module is supplied with, and can only be used
with, glass fibre optic cables.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DRIX3 GSM-100-323
DRIX3 module
The following shows the DRIX3 module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT

TO DRIX3 FROM DRCU
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT

FROM DRIX3 TO DRCU
SELECTABLE
JUMPER LINKS
DRIX3 diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the DRIX3 module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER RECEIVED

FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER DATA
CABLE FROM DRCU CIRCUIT
FIBRE OPTIC FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER RECEIVED

CABLE FROM DRCU RECEIVER CIRCUIT DATA
FIBRE OPTIC FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER MANCHESTER

CABLE TO DRCU TRANSMITTER CIRCUIT ENCODED
DATA
FIBRE OPTIC DRIVER MANCHESTER

FIBRE OPTIC
CABLE TO DRCU CIRCUIT ENCODED
TRANSMITTER
DATA
368 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 KSWX
KSWX
Purpose
WARNING
The kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module extends the 1024 ports of a KSW in one
BSU or RXU to the TDM highways in another BSU or RXU. It is used when the number
of required peripherals exceeds the capacity of a BSU or RXU shelf.
A KSWX in expansion mode (KSWXE) connects the KSW to the KSW in a remote
BSU or RXU.
A KSWX in remote transmit mode (KSWXR) accepts the highway data from a
KSW and sends it to a local receiver.
A KSWX in local receive mode (KSWXL) accepts the highway data and drives the
TDM bus in the local BSU or RXU, and also provides a clock reference in
multishelf configurations.
Although a KSW is located in a particular BSU/RXU, it is logically connected to the TDM
bus in that BSU/RXU and to the TDM buses in up to 16 other shelves it can be driving.
For each BSU or RXU that a KSW/TSW is driving, two KSWXs are required; one acting
as a remote transmitter attached to the KSW/TSW, the other as a local receiver attached
to the TDM highway in the remote shelf.
NOTE
This description details how KSWX modules work with KSW modules.
However the description is also valid when a TSW is used (normally at a
BTS).
Requirements
The KSWX is fitted in slots U0 to U9 and slots U21 to U28 of the BSU or RXU shelf
assembly, with the following limitations:
KSWX R must be fitted in slots U2 to U6 and U24 to U28.
KSWX L must be fitted in slots U0 and U1.
KSWX E must be fitted in slots U7 to U9 and U21 to U23.
KSWX module
The following shows a typical KSWX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER KSWX

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM CLKX
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER KSWX
ACTIVE/ALARM (GREEN) LED


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
KSWX GSM-100-323
Brief description
The KSWX is a multi-function module responsible for optically transmitting all TDM bus
information between shelves, and for distributing the TDM bus information and TDM
clock and reference pulses in the BSS shelves.
The KSWX is required when a site has more than one cabinet. It extends the 1024 ports
of a KSW/TSW to other shelves and/or interconnects up to four KSW/TSW modules via
fibre optic cable. In a TDM switch highway extended between two module shelves, a
KSWX module is required in each shelf.
There are three modes in which the KSWX may operate. These modes are dependent
on where in the shelf the KSWX module is placed. The three modes are:
Expansion (KSWXE)
Expands the TDM bus between up to four KSW/TSWs to expand switching capacity.
KSWX E modules are optically connected to other KSWXE modules.
Remote (KSWXR)
Extends the TDM bus to a shelf with no KSW/TSW. This allows a KSW/TSW to switch
data to and from highway interface modules (MSIs and DRIMs) in a shelf with no
KSW/TSW. KSWXR modules are optically connected to KSWXL modules.
Local (KSWXL)
The KSWXL distributes the TDM bus within a shelf and this is received optically from a
KSWX R in another shelf, and distributes clock and reference signals received from a
CLKX. KSWXL modules are optically connected to CLKX modules and can also be
connected to KSWXR modules.
370 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 KSWX
KSWX diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the KSWX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
TDM BUS OUTBOUND (LCL)

INCOMING FIBRE OPTIC TAXI CAGE TDM
INTERFACE OR
FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER RECEIVER SYNCHRONIZER
CABLE TDM BUS SWITCHBOUND
(RMT, EXP)
WRITE
READ
OUTGOING FIBRE OPTIC TAXI TDM BUS SWITCHBOUND (LCL)
TDM OR
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMITTER TRANSMITTER INTERFACE
CABLE TDM BUS OUTBOUND (RMT, EXP)
16.384 MHz CLOCK A

16.384 MHz CLOCK B
FRAME COUNTER
125 us REF A
R/W CONTROL 125 us REF B
CLOCK
8 MHz CLOCK CLK SELECT 60 ms REF A
DISTRIBUTION
60 ms REF B
6.12 s REF A
6.12 s REF B
DELAY
LINE 16.384 MHz FROM MATE KSWX
MUX
16.384 MHz TO BACKPLANE
CLOCK
FAIL MASTER/ MASTER REQUEST FROM MATE
DETECT SLAVE
CONTROL
INCOMING FIBRE OPTIC EDGE LOGIC MASTER REQUEST TO MATE
FIBRE OPTIC RECEIVER DETECTOR
CABLE
(CLKX)
MUX
DECODER 125 us REF TO BACKPLANE
REFERENCE MUX
STATE
DECODER 60 ms REF TO BACKPLANE
MUX
6.12 s REF TO BACKPLANE
ENCODED CLK FROM MATE

ENCODED CLK TO MATE
GREEN SERIAL INTERFACE

BSS SERIAL BUS A
LED MODULE ALARMS
& STATUS
RESET/ BSS SERIAL BUS B
DISABLE MODULE CONTROL
SWITCH

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
LANX GSM-100-323
LANX
Purpose
WARNING
The local area network extender (LANX) module is required for each BSU or RXU shelf.
The LANX:
Connects one of the LAN interfaces of each GPROC/GPROC2 in a BSU or RXU
shelf to the local shelf token ring LAN via the shelf backplane.
Allows optical LAN extension from one BSU or RXU to another.
Switches empty module slots or faulty GPROC/GPROC2s out of the LAN.
Sets the cage (BSU or RXU shelf) ID.
Performs on-board MCAP bus arbitration.
Provides shelf active/standby redundant LAN control.
Shelf to shelf extension is via a LANX module in each shelf, interconnected with fibre
optic cabling.
The LANX supports up to eight GPROC/GPROC2s on the local LAN in one BSU or RXU
shelf.
Requirements
LANX modules must be fitted in slots U19 and U20 of the BSU or RXU shelf assembly at
all times.
A sixteen position (0 to F hex) rotary switch on the LANX module sets the BSU or RXU
LAN address (shelf ID number).
LANX module
The diagram shows a LANX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM ANOTHER LANX
IN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO ANOTHER LANX

IN ANOTHER SHELF AT THE SITE
ROTARY SWITCH
FOR SETTING SHELF ID NUMBER
372 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 LANX
Brief description
Refer to the block diagram at the end of this section.
Each LANX receives LAN data from another shelf via optical fibre cables and:
1. Routes the LAN data to the first GPROC/GPROC2.
2. Receives the LAN data back from the first GPROC/GPROC2.
3. Routes the LAN data to the second GPROC/GPROC2.
4. Receives the LAN data back from the second GPROC/GPROC2.
And so on until all GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf have received the LAN data.
The LAN data received back from the last GPROC/GPROC2 in the shelf is sent via fibre
optics to the next shelf (if LAN extension is used). If a GPROC/GPROC2 is not present in
the shelf or has failed, the LANX bypasses it and passes the LAN data to the next
GPROC/GPROC2.
Local LAN data

switching
Each GPROC/GPROC2 using the LANX uses the following signals to route LAN data:
LAN DATA IN.
LAN DATA OUT.
INSERT.
GPROC/GPROC2 present
When the GPROC/GPROC2 is present and operating with no faults, the INSERT line is
logic 1, causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows:
LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LAN DATA IN
signal of the next GPROC/GPROC2 slot. In the case of shelf extension, the LAN
DATA OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic transmitter
stage.
LAN DATA OUT signal from the previous GPROC/GPROC2 slot is switched to the
LAN DATA IN signal of this GPROC/GPROC2. In the case of shelf extension, the
signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA IN signal of
GPROC/GPROC2 0.
GPROC/GPROC2 not present

If the GPROC/GPROC2 is not present or operating with faults, the INSERT line is logic 0
causing LANX multiplexers to switch the GPROC/GPROC2 signals as follows:
LAN DATA OUT signal of this GPROC/GPROC2 is switched (looped back) to the
LAN DATA IN signal of the same GPROC/GPROC2.
LAN DATA OUT signal of the previous GPROC/GPROC2 is switched to the LAN
DATA IN signal of the next GPROC/GPROC2.
This removes the GPROC/GPROC2 from the LAN ring, and subsequent LAN data
bypasses the GPROC/GPROC2.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
LANX GSM-100-323
Extended LAN
data switching
In configurations of more than one shelf, the LANX allows the local LAN data to be
extended to another shelf via optical fibre connected to a LANX in the other shelf.
Any of the GPROC/GPROC2s in the shelf controls local LAN data switching between
shelves. Control is via the serial bus connected to the LANX signal, LAN
LOCAL/EXTERNAL.
Logic 1
A logic 1 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch
signals as follows:
LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the fibre optic
transmitter stage. The optical transmitter provides a Tx data signal, consisting of
the local LAN data of this shelf, which is transmitted via fibre optic to a LANX in
another shelf.
Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is switched to the LAN DATA
OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.
Logic 0
A logic 0 on the LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL line causes multiplexers on the LANX to switch
signals from LAN DATA IN signal of GPROC/GPROC2 7 is switched to the LAN DATA
OUT signal of GPROC/GPROC2 0.
This bypasses the LANX fibre optic transmitter and receiver stages consequently
disabling local LAN extension to another shelf.
Power loss
If the local LANX loses dc power, the Rx data signal from the fibre optic receiver stage is
switched (looped back) to the optical transmitter, providing a Tx data signal via fibre optic
to the LANX in another shelf.
Bus arbiter
The LANX bus arbiter decides which GPROC/GPROC2 is allowed to write data to the
MCAP bus via the LAN DATA IN line. Each GPROC/GPROC2, 0 to 7, can assert its
respective BUS REQUEST line. The bus arbiter starts by monitoring GPROC/GPROC2
0 slot.
If GPROC/GPROC2 0 has an active BUS REQUEST line, the bus arbiter asserts the
GPROC/GPROC2 0 BUS GRANT line. GPROC/GPROC2 0 seizes the MCAP bus and
writes data to the bus. When GPROC/GPROC2 0 has finished writing data to the MCAP
bus, it deactivates the BUS REQUEST line. This frees the bus and the bus arbiter
activates the BUS GRANT line of the next higher numbered GPROC/GPROC2 with an
active BUS REQUEST line.
374 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 LANX
Redundant LAN
If the redundant GPROC/GPROC2 LAN interface is used, a redundant LANX is required.
Each LANX has two serial bus interfaces for communications with the
GPROC/GPROC2. The selection of which LAN interface is to be used is determined by
the GPROC/GPROC2.
Shelf ID
The shelf ID is a unique hexadecimal number assigned to each BSU or RXU shelf. The
LANX is fitted with a 16-position (hexadecimal encoded) rotary switch, which defines the
shelf ID number of the shelf containing the LANX. The shelf ID is read by the
GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus interface. The ID number is used by the BSS
software when configuring the BSU or RXU.
No two shelves at a site can have the same shelf ID. When a redundant LANX is present
in a shelf, it must have the same ID number as the primary LANX.
The following rules apply:
A BSU shelf in a BSC is numbered 0 to D (hexadecimal).
A BSU shelf in a BTS is numbered F to 2 (hexadecimal).
Front panel
The front panel of the LANX incorporates:
Rx fibre optic input connector. This connects to the Tx fibre optic output of a LANX
in another shelf.
Tx fibre optic output connector. This connects to the Rx fibre optic input of a LANX
in another shelf.
Rotary switch for setting the BSU/RXU shelf ID number.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
LANX GSM-100-323
LANX diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the LANX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ROTARY SELECT BSS SERIAL BUS A

SERIAL
SWITCH SHELF ID INTERFACE
NUMBER BSS SERIAL BUS B
Rx DATA FIBRE OPTIC

RECEIVER BUS ARBITER
LAN LOCAL/EXTERNAL
BUS GRANT 0
MUX
LAN DATA OUT 0
BUS REQUEST 0 GPROC
SLOT 0
LAN DATA IN 0
INSERT 0
BUS GRANT 1
MUX
LAN DATA OUT 1
GPROC
BUS REQUEST 1 SLOT 1
LAN DATA IN 1
INSERT 1
BUS GRANT 2
MUX
LAN DATA OUT 2
POWER FAIL GPROC
BUS REQUEST 2 SLOT 2
DETECT &
LAN LAN DATA IN 2
LOCAL/EXTERNAL
LOGIC INSERT 2
GPROC
DC INPUT SLOTS
POWER 3, 4, 5, 6
DISTRIBUTION
BUS GRANT 7
MUX
LAN DATA OUT 7
BUS REQUEST 7 GPROC
Tx DATA FIBRE OPTIC SLOT 7
TRANSMITTER LAN DATA IN 7
INSERT 7
376 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PIX
PIX
Overview
Refer to the block diagram on the next page.
The parallel interface extender (PIX) module provides:
An input/output (I/O) interface for customer site equipment.
The interface logic between the GPROC and external customer alarm devices
such as relays and switches.
Eight optically isolated inputs and four relay outputs.
Requirements
PIX modules can be fitted in the following slots of a BSU or RXU shelf assembly:
BTS6: slots U16, U17 and U18.
BTS4 and BTS5: slots U15 and U16.
PIX module
The diagram shows a PIX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (GREEN) LED

(ON = NO ALARMS)
(OFF = CUSTOMER ALARM DETECTED)
CONNECTOR IS CABLED TO TOP OF

CABINET FOR INTERCONNECT TO
CUSTOMER SITE EQUIPMENT

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PIX GSM-100-323
PIX diagram
The following shows a block diagram of the PIX module:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
62 PIN D
CONNECTOR
12 V +12 V
SENSE S1 DC to DC
SURGE OPTO CONVERTER
SENSE D1 PROTECTION COUPLER
SENSE S2 SURGE OPTO +12 V

EARTH
SENSE S3 SURGE OPTO +5 V
SENSE S4 SURGE OPTO

FROM
CUSTOMER SENSE S5 SURGE
EQUIPMENT OPTO
SENSE S6 SURGE OPTO

SERIAL BUS
SENSE S7 SURGE TRANSCEIVER BSS SERIAL BUS A
OPTO
SENSE D7 PROTECTION COUPLER BSS SERIAL BUS B
SENSE S8 SURGE OPTO

N. O. 1
N. C. 1 RELAY RELAY
COM 1 DRIVER
N. O. 2
TO N. C. 2 RELAY RELAY
CUSTOMER COM 2 DRIVER
EQUIPMENT N. O. 3
N. C. 3 RELAY RELAY
COM 3 DRIVER
N. O. 4
N. C. 4 RELAY RELAY
COM 4 DRIVER
GREEN
LED
378 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Chapter 4
Power, fans & interconnections

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
Chapter 4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
DPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
EPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
EPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
IPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
IPSM view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
IPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
PCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
PCU description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
PCU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
DAB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Fuses and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323
PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fuses and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Alarm functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Visual warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Input signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Serial bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
48/60 V status inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Signal routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
PDB and AIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
AIB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
AIB view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PDB description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
PDB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BSSC with PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
BTS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
T43 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
T43 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
BIB diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
BIB connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the following pieces of cabinet equipment:
Power supplies.
Digital power supply module (DPSM).
Enhanced power supply module (EPSM).
Integrated power supply module (IPSM).
Power converter unit (PCU).
Power distribution units (PDUs).
Distribution alarm board (DAB).
Power alarm board (PAB).
Power distribution board (PDB) and alarm interface board (AIB).
Circuit breaker panel.
Fan cooling systems.
Fan power converter unit (FPCU).
Interconnect panels.
In this chapter
CAUTION
Do not fit equipment in any cabinet not listed in the Applies to section of
the equipment description.
All information given is valid for GSM, extended GSM (EGSM) and DCS1800 systems
unless otherwise indicated.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Power supply modules GSM-100-323
Power supply modules
Introduction
CAUTION
Ensure that the correct power supply module is fitted for the input used.
There are three compartments at the base of the BSU shelf assembly with slide-in
mountings for plug-in power supply modules (PSMs):
These cabinets ... Use this type of power supply ...

BTS4 and BTS5 Digital power supply modules (DPSMs)
Positive earth BTS6 Integrated power supply modules (IPSMs)
Negative earth BTS6 Enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs)
The left compartment is for an optional redundant PSM. If the configuration of a particular
cabinet does not require a redundant PSM, a blanking plate is fitted over the
compartment. The redundant PSM must be compatible with the other cabinet power
units.
Cabinet power
requirements
The table shows the power requirements of the various cabinets:
Supply System Cabinet type

Earth Voltage BTS4 BTS5 BTS6
Negative +27 V GSM900 75 A 85 A 95 A
DCS1800 70 A 85 A
Positive 48 V GSM900 45 A 60 A
DCS1800 40 A 55 A
60 V GSM900 35 A 50 A
DCS1800 32 A 45 A
42 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DPSM
DPSM
Overview
The digital power supply (DPS) system for each BSU consists of up to three plug-in
enhanced power supply modules (DPSMs). The DPS can only be fitted to GSM900
systems.
The DPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input
power to the following dc outputs:
+5 V ( 2% at 85.5 A).
12 V ( 5% at 2.5 A).
The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each DPSM in parallel.
The DPSMs in the DPS system load-share:
Two of the DPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped SHELF.
The third DPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.
A DPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the
serial bus.
DPSM view
The following shows the DPSM:

!

!
!
!

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DPSM GSM-100-323
Functional
description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the DPSMs share the load current demand of the shelf
modules:
Half of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a two-DPSM system.
One third of the load current supplied by each DPSM in a three-DPSM system.
Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the shelf modules.
Redundancy
Two DPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a shelf. A third
DPSM can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all DPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so
that the DPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual DPSM; any third
DPSM is redundant (n+1).
Power supply shutdown

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty DPSM, the output circuits of the
malfunctioning DPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the DPSM alarm
LED is switched on. The malfunctioning DPSM informs the GPROC of the shutdown
condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each DPSM to sense its own output lines for:
Output voltage regulation.
Over-voltage protection to shut the DPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2
to 1.3 times the rated output.
Over-current protection to latch the power supply off (after a short delay for large
overloads) if the output current exceeds:
1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output.
1.15 to 2 times the full-load rating of the +12 V and 12 V outputs.
The shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 also monitors the status of each DPSM, via a serial alarm
link on the backplane, for:
Loss of dc input voltage.
Loss of output voltage.
Overtemperature.
Loss of serial link.
44 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DPSM
Circuit protection
Additional internal DPSM circuit protection includes:
Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent DPSM damage using an input series
diode to block reverse voltages.
Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the
serial port, and shut the DPSM down, if the DPSM ambient temperature exceeds a
safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal DPSM operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
The serial link carries the following information and flags an alarm if an unexpected state
or failure occurs:
Address Device location Revision DPSM Alarms
I/P Fail
Slot 0 2 O/P Fail
Overtemp
LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the DPSM to indicate the following:
Active (Green): on when all output voltages are present and within specified limits.
Alarm (Red): on when one or more alarm conditions exist.
DPSM diagram
The diagram shows a functional block diagram of the DPSM:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+5.V)
VOUT (+12 V)
VOUT (12 V)
GREEN POWER
LED CONVERTER
AND
RED SYSTEM
LED MONITOR INPUT FAIL
SERIAL LINK
OUTPUT FAIL
OVERTEMPER
VIN (+27 V)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
EPSM GSM-100-323
EPSM
Overview
The enhanced power supply (EPS) system for each BSU in a negative earth (+27 V)
system consists of up to three plug-in enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs). The
EPSM can be fitted to negative earth BTS6 cabinets.
The EPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input
+5 V ( 2% at 85.5 A).
12 V ( 5% at 2.5 A).
The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each EPSM in parallel.
When three EPSMs are fitted in the EPS system, they load-share as follows:
Two EPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU.
The third EPSM (if fitted) provides n+1 redundancy.
An EPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC via the serial
bus.
EPSM view
The following shows the EPSM:
! !

46 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 EPSM
Functional
description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the EPSMs share the load current demand of the shelf
modules:
Half of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a two-EPSM system.
One third of the load current supplied by each EPSM in a three-EPSM system.
Regulated dc power is applied to the backplane to power the shelf modules.
Redundancy
Two enhanced power supply modules (EPSMs) can provide adequate operating power
for all modules in a shelf. A third EPSM can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all EPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so
that the EPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual EPSM; any third
EPSM is redundant (n+1).

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty EPSM, the output circuits of the
malfunctioning EPSM are isolated from the backplane output line, and the EPSM alarm
LED is switched on. The malfunctioning EPSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the
shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each EPSM to sense its own output lines for:
Over-voltage protection to shut the EPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2
to 1.3 times the rated output.
1.15 to 1.5 times the full-load rating of the +5 V output.
The shelfs GPROC also monitors the status of each EPSM, via a serial alarm link on the
backplane, for:
Overtemperature.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
EPSM GSM-100-323
Circuit protection
Additional internal EPSM circuit protection includes:
Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent EPSM damage using an input series
diode to block reverse voltages.
Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC via the serial port,
and shut the EPSM down, if the EPSM ambient temperature exceeds a safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal EPSM operation is automatically restored.
Serial link
or failure occurs:
Address Device location Revision EPSM Alarms
I/P Fail
Slot 0 2 O/P Fail
Overtemp
LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the EPSM to indicate the following:
EPSM diagram
The diagram shows a functional block diagram of the EPSM:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+5 V)
VOUT (+12 V)
VOUT (12 V)
GREEN POWER
LED CONVERTER
AND
RED SYSTEM
SERIAL LINK
OUTPUT FAIL
OVERTEMPERATURE
VIN (+27 V)
48 1st Jun 01
68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 IPSM
IPSM
Overview
The integrated power supply (IPS) system for each BSU or RXU in a positive earth
(48 V/60 V) system consists of up to three plug-in integrated power supply modules
(IPSMs). The IPSM can be fitted in positive earth (48/60 V) BTS6 cabinets.
The IPSM is a switching type dc dc power converter that converts the cabinet dc input
+27.5 V 5 % at 45 A (full-load current).
+5.1 V 2 % at 87.5 A (full-load current).
+12 V 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).
12 V 5 % at 2.5 A (full-load current).
The BSU or RXU backplane connects the outputs of each IPSM in parallel.
When three IPSMs are fitted in the IPS system, they load-share as follows:
Two IPSMs provide sufficient power for a fully equipped BSU or RXU.
The third IPSM provides n + 1 redundancy.
An IPSM in an alarm condition sends an alarm message to the GPROC via the serial
bus.
IPSM view
The following shows the IPSM:
25-PIN D-TYPE
ACTIVE LED (GREEN) ON WHEN CONNECTOR
ALL OUTPUT VOLTAGES ARE (REAR VIEW)
(FEMALE)
PRESENT AND WITHIN TOLERANCE.
+27.5 V RTN
+27.5 V (OUTPUT)
ALARM LED (RED) ON WHEN ONE +5 V

OR MORE ALARM CONDITIONS C GND (CHASSIS GROUND)
+5 V V RTN (0 V INPUT)
EXIST. OFF WHEN NO ALARM RTN (GROUND FOR +5 V OUTPUT)
CONDITION EXISTS. V IN (48 V/60 V INPUT)
RTN (GROUND FOR +5 V OUTPUT)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
IPSM GSM-100-323
Functional
description
Normal operation
During normal operation, the IPSMs equally share load current demand of the shelf
modules:
Half of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a two-IPSM system.
One third of the load current supplied by each IPSM in a three-IPSM system.
Redundancy
Two IPSMs can provide adequate operating power for all modules in a shelf. A third
IPSM can be added for redundancy.
When plugged into the backplane, all IPSM power outputs are connected in parallel, so
that the IPS system current capacity is twice that of the individual IPSM; any third IPSM
is redundant (n+1).

During a shutdown condition caused by a faulty PSM, the output circuits of the
malfunctioning PSM are isolated from the backplane output line and the PSM alarm LED
is on. The malfunctioning PSM informs the GPROC/GPROC2 of the shutdown condition.
Monitoring circuits
Parallel output connections allow each IPSM to sense its own output lines for:
Over-voltage protection to shut the IPSM down if the output voltage exceeds 1.2 to
1.3 times the rated output.
1.05 to 1.3 times the full-load rating of the +5.1 V output.
The BSU or RXU shelfs GPROC/GPROC2 monitors the status of each IPSM via a serial
alarm link on the backplane for:
Overtemperature.
Circuit protection
Additional internal IPSM circuit protection includes:
Input dc reverse polarity protection to prevent IPSM damage using an input series
diode that blocks reverse voltages.
Thermal protection to send an alarm message to the GPROC/GPROC2 via the
serial port, then shut the IPSM down, if the IPSM ambient temperature exceeds a
safe level.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal IPSM operation is automatically restored.
410 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 IPSM
Serial link
or failure occurs:
Address Device location Revision IPSM Alarms
Slot 0 2 I/P Fail

O/P Fail
Overtemp
LED display
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of the IPSM to indicate the following:
IPSM diagram
The following shows a functional diagram of the IPSM:
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+5 V)
VOUT (+12 V)
VOUT (12 V)
VOUT (+27.5 V)
GREEN POWER
LED CONVERTER
AND
RED SYSTEM
SERIAL LINK
OUTPUT FAIL
OVERTEMPERA
VIN (48 V/60 V)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PCU GSM-100-323
PCU
Purpose
The power converter unit (PCU) contains up to four power converter (PC) modules. The
PCU is fitted in positive earth (48/60 V) BTS4 cabinets. It converts the 48/60 V dc
input into +27 V dc to supply the following:
Cooling fans.
Diversity radio channel units (DRCUs).

Power alarm board (PAB).
Receiver front end (RFE) components.

Remotely tuneable combiner (RTC).
Requirements
The PCU must be fitted in slot 4 of the BTS4 DRCU shelf.
Three PC modules can provide sufficient power for a fully equipped cabinet; a fourth can
provide n+1 redundancy.
Power converter
unit
The following shows a PCU.
POWER CONVERTER
MODULE
POWER CONVERTER
UNIT
412 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PCU
Power converter
module
The following shows a PC module.

!

!
%#"% &$#'
9-PIN D-TYPE
CONNECTOR
(FEMALE)
(

(


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PCU GSM-100-323
PCU description
The number of PC modules used depends upon the +27 V load current demand, which
depends upon from the number of DRCUs fitted. The table shows the number of PC
modules required with and without n+1 redundancy.
Number of PC modules
N mber of DRCUs
Number
No redundancy With redundancy
1 1 2
2 1 2
3 2 3
4 3 4
When the PCU is connected to the cabinet backplane, all PC module outputs are
connected in parallel. During normal operation, the PC modules equally share the +27 V
dc output load current demand.
The PAB monitors the PCU output, PC module failure and module temperature via a
serial data link between the PCU and PAB.
During a shutdown condition due to a PC module failure, the output circuits of the
malfunctioning PC module are isolated from the backplane output line, and the PC alarm
LED is lit. The malfunctioning PC module informs the PAB of a shutdown condition, and
the PAB forwards an alarm message to the GPROC.
414 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PCU
PCU diagram
The following is a functional block diagram of the PCU.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR

GREEN
LED
POWER CONVERTER 1
RED
LED

GREEN
LED
POWER CONVERTER 2
RED
LED

GREEN
LED
POWER CONVERTER 3
RED
LED

GREEN

LED
POWER CONVERTER 4
RED
LED


68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PCU GSM-100-323
PC module
description
The PC module is a switching type dc-dc converter that plugs into the PCU backplane.
DC input power at 48/60 V is applied via the associated circuit breaker in the PDU.
The PC module converts the input voltage to a regulated output of +27 V 1% at 26 A
(full load current).
The PC module monitors its own +27 V output for the following purposes:
Over-voltage protection to shut the module down if the output voltage exceeds
1.25 times the rated output.
Over-current protection to provide foldback voltage/current output limiting if the
output current exceeds 1.15 to 1.5 times full load rating.
The PC module is also protected against:
Input dc reverse polarity protection. The PC module trips the cabinet circuit
breaker if the input dc polarity is reversed.
Thermal protection. The PCU sends an alarm message to the GPROC via the
PAB if the ambient temperature of the PC module exceeds a safe level, after which
the PC module shuts down.
Protection circuit activation, dc input voltage loss or disconnection from the PCU
backplane cause an alarm condition, in which an alarm signal is sent to the GPROC.
After an alarm condition has ceased, normal operation resumes.
Two LEDs are mounted on the front of each PC module to indicate the following:
Active (Green). On when output voltages are present and within tolerance.
Alarm (Red). On when one or more alarm conditions exist.
416 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PDU
PDU
Overview
The power distribution unit (PDU) is located on the top shelf of the cabinet and:
Distributes dc power throughout the cabinet.
Provides an alarm interface.
It consists of a circuit breaker panel and one of the following:
A distribution alarm board (DAB).
A power alarm board (PAB).
A power distribution board (PDB) with an alarm interface board (AIB).
Input power
DC input power is applied at the interconnection panel on top of the cabinet and is routed
to:
The VIN bus bar.
The earth (GND) bus bar in the PDU.
A second bus bar obtains +27 V power from:
The power supply modules (PSMs) in the lower shelf in positive earth (48/60 V)
cabinets.
The VIN and GND busbars via busbar links in negative earth (+27 V) cabinets.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DAB GSM-100-323
DAB
Purpose
The distribution alarm board (DAB):
Distributes +27 V dc to units within the cabinet via 25 fuses.
Monitors alarm lines.
Passes individual alarms to the GPROC/GPROC2.
The DAB processes operational failure signals from:
Ruptured fuses.
The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
VSWR monitoring (BTS6 only).
Two bi-coloured LEDs (D43 and D8) are mounted on the DAB to indicate DAB- and
cabinet-based faults. The other LEDs indicate fuse failures according to the tables in this
section. The DAB can be fitted to BTS6 cabinets.
Requirements
The DAB is fitted in the PDU shelf.
DAB diagram
The diagram shows a DAB:

418 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DAB
Fuses and LEDs

The table details the functions of the DAB fuses and LEDs:
Fuse Rating Power to LED

F4 0.5 A Preselector 1B D27
F7 0.5 A Preselector 1A D24
F10 0.5 A Receiver matrix (main power) D22
F11 0.5 A Receiver matrix (redundant D25
power)
F12 4A Internal remotely tuneable D28
combiner (main power)
F13 4A Internal remotely tuneable D26
combiner (redundant power)
F14, F15 4A External remotely tuneable D30
combiner (main power)
F18 2A VSWR meter supply D42
(redundant power)
F19 0.5 A DAB supply
F20 2A VSWR meter supply (main D40
power)
F21 2A Upper fan 5 D33
F24 2A Lower fan 2 D38
F27 2A External receiver multicoupler D36
(main power)
F28 2A External receiver multicoupler D39
(redundant power)
F29, F30 4A External remotely tuneable D34
combiner (redundant power)

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
DAB GSM-100-323
Switch settings
(BTS6)
DAB switches S1 and S2 set the following configurations in the BTS6:
Function Switch Position Setting

VSWR1 (Sector 1) S1 1 As required (ON = VSWR1
selected)
selected)
selected)
Spare S1 4 OFF
BB O/P2 S1 5 OFF (if battery backup selected)
ON (if battery backup not installed
or installed but not selected)
BB O/P1 S1 6 ON
BB I/P2 S1 7 ON
BB I/P1 S1 8 ON
DRCU5 S2 1 ON (if fitted)
Spare S2 7 OFF
BBB ID S2 8 OFF
Alarm functions
The DAB produces alarms for several different devices and modules:
25 fuses.
Battery backup input and output alarms.
VSWR monitor.
Multicoupler.
Six circuit breakers.
Six fan alarms.
Each signal from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to a TTL high
level. Under no-fault conditions, the TTL output is held at a high level. If one or more
fuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low.
The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has eight status inputs,

which are multiplexed to obtain the required alarm functionality.
420 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 DAB
Visual warnings
Each +27 V (nominal) fuse protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has a
corresponding LED indicator on the DAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a fault
condition, and the associated alarm line goes low.
The DAB also provides visual warnings for alarms via two bi-coloured LEDs:
D43 indicates any internal cabinet or multicoupler and combiner failure.
D8 indicates a fuse failure on the DAB only.
Both LEDs are driven by the master GPROC/GPROC2 in response to alarms generated
by the DAB; red indicates an alarm, otherwise the LEDs remain green. If the master
GPROC/GPROC2 is not running then both LEDs default to red.
Communications
The DAB communicates with the master GPROC/GPROC2 via the serial bus link. The
master GPROC/GPROC always initiates connections, in which all modules respond with
status reports on the serial bus.
The DAB processes operational failure reports from the following:
Ruptured fuses.
Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers, which are
monitored by the master GPROC/GPROC2 directly).
Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
Hardware failures reported directly to the DAB are individually sent to the master
GPROC via the serial bus.
The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf.
The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as 12 V) deliver isolated outputs.
Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earth
relative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed are
referenced to cabinet earth.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PAB GSM-100-323
PAB
Purpose
The power alarm board (PAB) located in the PDU processes operational failure reports
from the following:
Ruptured fuses.
Protected side of circuit breakers (except DPS circuit breakers).
Fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
Hardware failures that are reported directly to the PAB, are individually sent to the
GPROC via the serial bus.
The PAB provides +27 V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuits for cabinet equipment
and fuse-protected +5 V DRAM backup power for the digital modules in the BSU and
RXU shelves. Each fused branch has a corresponding LED indicator on the PAB, which
lights when the fuse is ruptured. The PAB can be fitted to BTS4 cabinets.
The PAB also has a bi-coloured LED which turns red to indicate a PAB-based fault. The
PAB maintains the bicoloured LED on the cabinet front door at green to indicate that the
system has power applied.
Diagram
The diagram shows a PAB:

LED27
422 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PAB
Jumpers
Jumper JU1 must be fitted on POS, as shown in the diagram, for +27V cabinets, or to
NEG for 48/60V cabinets.
Normally, the +5 V DRAM voltage is supplied to the BSU backplane by the DPSMs. If
the DPSMs fail to deliver the +5 V DRAM supply, due to cabinet input power failure or
DPSM failure, the PAB converts either an external +27 V backup supply (input power
protection) or the +27 V cabinet supply (DPSM failure protection) to a fused +5 V DRAM
supply. The desired option is selected using jumpers JU2 and JU3, as shown below.
Set to POS (JU1 pins 2 3) NEG 1 POS JU1
Connect pins 23 on both jumpers for EXTERNAL backup power 1 JU2

INT EXT
Connect pins 12 on both jumpers for INTERNAL power conversion 1 JU3
Fuses and LEDs

The table details the functions of the PAB fuses and LEDs:

7 -4%/ '%*& 7 "!11%/6 "!#)2.

7 7 (,.21 1- "!11%/6 "!#)2.
7 /%0%*%#1-/ "
7 /%0%*%#1-/ "
7 /%0%*%#1-/
"
7 /%0%*%#1-/ !
7 /%0%*%#1-/
!
7 /%0%*%#1-/ !
7 %#%(3%/ !1/(5 !(, -4%/ ,.21
7 %#%(3%/ !1/(5 %$2,$!,1 -4%/ ,.21
7 ,1%/,!* %+-1%*6 2,%!"*% -+"(,%/ !(, -4%/

7 ,1%/,!* %+-1%*6 2,%!"*% -+"(,%/ %$2,$!,1 -4%/
7 51%/,!* %+-1%*6 2,%!"*% -+"(,%/ !(,
7 ..%/ '%*& 7 "!11%/6 "!#)2.

7 %1%/ 2..*6 %$2,$!,1 -4%/
7 2..*6
7 %1%/ 2..*6 !(, -4%/
7 ..%/ !,
7 ..%/ !,

7 ..%/ !,

7 -4%/ !,
7 -4%/ !,
7 -4%/ !,
7 51%/,!* %#%(3%/ 2*1(#-2.*%/ !(, -4%/

7 51%/,!* %#%(3%/ 2*1(#-2.*%/ %$2,$!,1 -4%/

7 51%/,!* %+-1%*6 2,%!"*% -+"(,%/ %$2,$!,1

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PAB GSM-100-323
Alarm functions
The PAB alarms several different devices and modules:
26 fuses.
Four +5 V DRAM backup fuses.
48/60 V converter alarms.
The multicoupler alarm.
Eight circuit breakers.
Six fan alarms.
The addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter (AART) has seven status inputs
available. To obtain the required alarm functionality, the inputs to the status pins are
multiplexed.
The serial bus circuitry is powered by the same +5 V that powers each digital card shelf.
The power supplies that provide this +5 V (as well as 12 V) deliver isolated outputs.
Thus all devices in the serial bus circuit have a return that is floating (digital) earth
relative to the cabinet (main) earth. However, many of the signals being alarmed are
referenced to cabinet earth.
In order to preserve the isolation between the two grounds present in the PAB,
opto-isolators between the multiplexer/data selector outputs and status inputs are used
where needed.
Fuse protected
circuits
The cabinet has fuse-protected branch circuits for the following internal and external
cabinet equipment:
+5 V DRAM backup to lower BSU.
Each cabinet cooling fan.
Each preselector in the RFE.
Receiver matrix module (internal and external).
Remotely tuneable channel combiner module (internal and external).
Receiver multicoupler (external).
+27 V DRAM backup battery (external).
Visual warnings
Each +27V (nominal) fuse-protected branch circuit that powers cabinet equipment has a
corresponding LED indicator on the PAB. The LED lights if the fuse is ruptured by a fault
condition, and the associated alarm line goes low.
The PAB also provides visual warnings for alarms through two bicoloured LEDs.
The first LED is mounted on the cabinet door. This LED indicates failures in:
An internal cabinet function.
External multicoupler and combiner.
The second LED (LED27) is on the lower left corner of the PAB and signals a fuse
failure on the PAB only.
424 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PAB
Input signals
Fuse alarm levels

Each of the signals from the fuse alarms is at a nominal +27 V level and is brought to a
TTL high level.
Circuit breaker alarms

Depending on the cabinet fit, the following signals from circuit breakers are fed to the
PAB:
BTS4 (48/60 V):
Four signals to sense the DRCU circuit breakers and four signals to sense
the 48/60 V dc to dc converter input voltages. The output from each
converter circuit breaker, at a nominal 48 V or 60 V level, is brought to a
TTL high level.
BTS4 (+27 V):
Five signals to sense the DRCU circuit breakers.
BSSC:
Two signals to sense the 48/60 V dc to dc fan power converter input
voltages. The output from each converter circuit breaker, at a nominal
48 V or 60 V level, is brought to a TTL high level.
Multicoupler alarm
Under no-fault conditions the TTL level output is held at a high level. If one or more
fuses fail on the multicoupler fuse panel the TTL level is low.
Converter alarms
Two 48 V or 60 V dc to dc converter alarm signals are detected. One signal is an over
temperature indication, the other a low voltage failure. Under no-fault conditions the TTL
level output is held high. If one or both failures occur the TTL level is low.
+5 V backup supply
The PAB also supplies current to the digital shelves for the purpose of a backup supply.
The device used to perform this function is a 150 W dc to dc converter which delivers an
output of 16 A at a nominal +5 V. The converter is configured to give a +4.85 V output.
This backup power, which is for the GPROC and LANX modules, is switched in only in
the event of a loss of the primary base station cabinet input power.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PAB GSM-100-323
Serial bus
The serial bus allows the GPROC bus master to connect to, and communicate with, the
PAB.
Status word
The function of the status word is to report any alarms that occur to the master GPROC.
Under normal (no alarm) operating conditions, bits S0S2 and S4S6 are high while bits
S3 and S7 are low.
Transmit enable
As the serial bus communication link is bidirectional, allowing the PAB to receive and
transmit information along the same signal path, a one-shot serial bus access circuit is
used to provide an 10 ms access/transmit window. The command strobe (CS) pulse is
generated by the addressable asynchronous receiver/transmitter ( AART) after it
receives a valid command word. The CS pulse signals the one-shot to send the 10 ms
pulse to the receive and transmit circuitry, allowing data transmission.
Transmit and receive

When the transmit enable 10 ms pulse is active, the PAB can send data (input data and
status words) on the serial bus. The A/B select line decides on which serial data line the
information is to be received from the GPROC.
Reset
The ART could enter an unknown state at switchon, therefore its reset is tied to an
undervoltage sensing circuit. This allows the AART to receive power before it is reset.
Timing
A MC406 crystal oscillator provides the 307.2 kHz clock frequency. This frequency is
then internally divided by 64 to derive the receive data strobe and the data clock rate
(4800 Hz).
426 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PAB
48/60 V status
inputs
The status inputs S0S7 respond to the following alarms on the (48/60 V working)
cabinet:
Status input ... Respond to alarms from the following ...

S0 DRCU 0 (CB1), DRCU 1 (CB2), DRCU 2 (CB3), DRCU 3 (CB4);
preselector 1A (F7), preselector 2A (F9), preselector 3A (F8) and
48/60 V converter 1 (CB5).
S1 Matrix 1 (F10), matrix 2 (F11); internal combiner 1 (F12), internal
combiner 2 (F13), external combiner 1 (F14 and 15), external
combiner 2 (F29 and 30); multicoupler 1 (F27) and multicoupler 2
(F28).
S2 Fan 0 (F26), fan 1 (F25), fan 2 (F24), fan 3 (F23), fan 4 (F22) and
fan 5 (F21) power supplies; 48/60 V converter temperature fail
and +27 V DRAM backup input supply.
S3 +27 V PAB supply (F19); preselectors 1B (F4), 2B (F5), 3B (F6);
48/60 V converters 1 (CB5) and 2 (CB6), 48/60 V converter fail
and multicoupler alarm.
S4 +5 V DRAM supply (lower shelf) (F1 and 2) and (upper shelf) (F16
and 17).
S5 48/60 V converters 3 (CB7) and 4 (CB8) and fans 05 stall
alarms.
S6 +27 V PAB supply (F19).
S7 Not used.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PAB GSM-100-323
BTS4 (+27 V)
status inputs
The status inputs S0S7 respond to the following alarms on the BTS-4 (+27 V working)
cabinet:
Status input ... Respond to alarms from the following ...

S0 (D)RCU 0 (CB1), (D)RCU 1 (CB2), (D)RCU 2 (CB3) (D)RCU 3
(CB4) (D)RCU 4 (CB5) and preselector 1A (F7), preselector 2A
(F9), preselector 3A (F8).
S1 Matrix 1 (F10), matrix 2 (F11); internal combiner 1 (F12), internal
combiner 2 (F13), external combiner 1 (F14 and 15), external
combiner 2 (F29 and 30); multicoupler 1 (F27) and multicoupler 2
(F28).
S2 Fan 0 (F26), fan 1 (F25), fan 2 (F24), fan 3 (F23), fan 4 (F22) and
fan 5 (F21) power supplies and +27 V DRAM backup input supply.
S3 +27 V PAB supply (F19); preselectors 1B (F4), 2B (F5), 3B (F6) and
multicoupler alarm.
S4 +5 V DRAM supply (lower shelf) (F1 and 2) and (upper shelf) (F16
and 17).
S5 Fans 05 stall alarms.
S6 +27 V PAB supply (F19).
S7 Not used.
Signal routeing
Each of the above signals, with the exception of the +5 V DRAM supply, are first brought
to a TTL level before being fed to a data selector, which selects the appropriate input.
The input is passed through an opto-isolator to ensure the signal is isolated between the
main and digital grounds. The output of the opto-isolator is routed to the appropriate
status input of the AART.
Signal timing
Since the data selectors that drive the status inputs S0S3 and S5 are referenced to
main ground, the clocking signals, and output from the AART, are opto-isolated before
clocking the data selectors. The status input S4 is driven from a data selector that is
referenced to digital ground and is clocked directly from the AART.
428 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 PDB and AIB
PDB and AIB

Overview
The PDU in BSSC and BTS5 cabinets comprises an alarm interface board (AIB) and a
power distribution board (PDB). The PDU can only be fitted in a BTS5 cabinet.
AIB description
The AIB circuits operate from:

+27 V and optional +27 V DRAM backup from the PDB.
+5 V from digital power supplies via the BSU backplane.
Normally the +5 V DRAM voltage for a GPROCs dynamic RAM is supplied to the BSU
backplane by the DPSM. If the primary +27 V is removed from the cabinet, the AIB
converts the +27 V DRAM backup to a fused +5 V DRAM voltage, which is supplied to
the BSU backplane.
+5 V DRAM voltage fuses and usage are as follows:
F1 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the upper BSU shelf backplane.
F2 (60 V, 10 A) supplies +27 V to the lower BSU shelf backplane.
The AIB monitors alarm lines, passes individual alarms to the GPROC and provides a
composite alarm signal for the cabinet alarm LED.
The AIB combines all alarms into one common alarm output which is routed to the
cabinet alarm LED mounted on the cabinet front door. When the LED is on, a hardware
and/or software failure condition exists within the cabinet. There is also a bi-coloured
LED mounted on the AIB which indicates an AIB based fault.
The AIB processes operational failure signals from:
Ruptured fuses.
The protected side of circuit breakers (except DPSM circuit breakers).
The fan stall sense line from each cooling fan.
AIB view
The following shows an AIB:

SERIAL
CHIP
PC7

PC8
PC2

PDB description
The PDB distributes +27 V and +5 V to units within the cabinet through 25 fuses. The
PDB reports fuse failures to the AIB and also provides a fused circuit for the optional
27 V DRAM backup battery which connects to the DRAM port on top of cabinet.
The table shows the functions of the PDB fuses:

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
PDB and AIB GSM-100-323
Fuse Voltage Rating Power to

1 to 5 60 25 A Not used (May or may not be installed)
6 to 10 60 0.5 A Not used (May or may not be installed)
11 & 12 60 5A Not used (May or may not be installed)
13 & 14 60 10 A Not used (May or may not be installed)
15 & 16 60 2A Not used (May or may not be installed)
17 60 2A Lower Fan 0
20 60 2A Upper Fan 0 (If installed)
23 60 4A Spare
24 60 4A DRAM Back-up
25 60 5A Alarm Interface Board
PDB diagram
The diagram shows a PDB:

F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

430 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Circuit breakers
Circuit breakers
Purpose
Power is distributed within the cabinet via the circuit breakers. This section details the
function of each circuit breaker in each cabinet.
BSSC with PAB

Eight circuit breakers distribute power to units in a BSSC cabinet with a PAB-type PDU.
CB4 and CB5 provide -48/60 V power to the fan power converters in positive
ground cabinets only.
CB6, CB7 and CB8 provide power to the DPSMs in the upper BSU or RXU shelf:
In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V.
In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V.
CB9, CB10 and CB11 provide power to the DPSMs in the lower BSU or RXU shelf:
BTS4
Ten circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BTS4 cabinet.
CB1, CB2, CB3 and CB4 (20 A) provide +27 V power to DRCUs 0 to 3.
CB5 and CB8 provide -48/-60 V power to the PCU in positive ground cabinets only.
CB9, CB10 and CB11 (30 A) provide power to the DPSMs in the BSU:
BTS5
Three circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BTS5 cabinet.
CB0, CB1 and CB2 (50 A) provide +27 V power to the DPSMs in the BSU.
BTS6
Ten circuit breakers distribute power to units within the BTS6 cabinet.
CB1, at 30 A, provides +27 V power to the DAB.
CB2 to CB7, at 20 A, provide +27 V power to DRCUs 0 to 5.
CB8 to CB10, at 60 A, provide power to the PSMs:
In a positive earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply 48/60 V power to
the IPSMs.
In a negative earth cabinet, the circuit breakers supply +27 V power to the
EPSMs.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Fan cooling system GSM-100-323
Fan cooling system
Overview
The fan cooling system comprises two fan tray assemblies mounted directly below each
BSU or RXU shelf (in a BTS cabinet the upper fan tray assembly is above the DRCU
shelf). Each fan tray assembly contains three exhaust fans.
Cabinet baffling divides the cabinet cooling system into upper and lower cabinet cooling
subsystems. The cooling system, in conjunction with the correct use of shelf airflow
deflectors, provides adequate cooling for all cabinet equipment.
Each fan has a fan stall sensor, which is connected to alarm circuits in the PDU.
Power
In negative earth cabinets, power for the fans is derived from the +27 V bus bar via the
PDU.
In positive earth BSSC cabinets, a fan power converter unit (FPCU) is required to derive
+27 V from the -48/60 V supply.
The FPCU is mounted above the lower BSU or RXU shelf in positive earth BSSC
cabinets. The FPCU is shown below:
FAN POWER CONVERTER UNIT

INTERFACE
FAN POWER
FAN POWER CONVERTER CONVERTER
MODULE 2 MODULE 1
432 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Interconnect panel
Location
The interconnect panel is on top of the cabinet.
Purpose
This panel provides connections for:
DC input power.
2.048 Mbit/s line interconnect modules.
Customer defined alarm equipment input and output.
+27 V battery backup input for DRAM.
+27 V power/alarm for external receiver multicoupler and external remotely
tuneable combiner.
The interconnect panel has feed-through tubes for routing fibre optic intercabinet cables
into and out of the cabinet. Feed-through tubes do not compromise the cabinet EMC
screening, as the tubes operate below the waveguide cut off frequency.
The 2.048 Mbit/s line interconnection modules are:
Type 43 interconnect boards (T43), used for unbalanced lines.
Balanced-line interconnect boards (BIB), used for balanced lines.
BTS4
Diagram
The diagram shows the interconnect panel for the BTS4:
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FIBRE OPTIC CABLES

FEED-THROUGH TUBE FEED-THROUGH TUBE

PHASE 1

PHASE 0
+27 V BAT.
BACKUP

T43 T43
or or
PIX1 BIB BIB
PIX0
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL 48/60 V DC

(40 V TO 75 V)
MULTICOUPLER COMBINER

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Connectors
The table details the interconnect panel connectors for the BTS4:
Connector Function Internal destination External

destination
+27 V Batt DRAM backup PAB connector PC6 +27 V back-up battery
Backup battery.
Rx1A, Rx2A and Receive antenna Input to Preselectors 1A, 2A Rx antenna 1A, 2A, 3A
Rx3A. signals. and 3A (upper RFE shelf). or duplexer 0,1 or 2.
Rx1B, Rx2B, Diversity receive Diversity input to Diversity Rx antenna
Rx3B. antenna signals. preselectors 1A, 2A and 3A 1B, 2B and 3B.
(lower RFE shelf).
Tx0, Tx1, Tx2, Transmit antenna Refer to interconnection Refer to site specific
Tx3 and Tx4 signal. matrix or site documentation. documentation.
External External RTC power. PAB connector PC11 External RTC dc power
Combiner connector.
External External Receiver PAB connector PC10 External Receiver
Multicoupler Multicoupler dc Multicoupler dc power
power/sense. connector.
MS1 and MS3 Multiple serial MS1 and MS3 connectors E1/T1 circuits source
interface ports (up to on BSU backplane. or termination
six E1/T1 circuits at equipment (via a T43
each connector; six or BIB).
Tx and six Rx
circuits).
PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarm Front edge connector of PIX Customer alarm
input/output ports. modules. equipment.
GK0 Not used. GK0 connector on BSU
backplane.
X210 and Not used in this
X211. configuration.
Phase 0 and Cabinet phasing Transmit combiner shelf. Tx phasing harness.
Phase 1.
434 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS5
Diagram
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
FEEDTHROUGH TUBE FIBRE OPTIC CABLES EXTERNAL
FEEDTHROUGH TUBE MULTICOUPLER

EXTERNAL
COMBINER

PIX1
T43 T43 T43 T43 +27 V BAT

PIX0 BACKUP
PHASE 1 PHASE 0
+27 V
(+20 V TO +30 V)
Connectors
The table details the interconnect panel connectors:
destination
+27 V Batt DRAM backup PDB connector PC8 +27 V backup battery
Backup battery
RxA, RxB, RxC Receive antenna Input to preselectors 1A, 2A Rx antenna 1A, 2A, 3A
signals and 3A (upper RFE shelf). or duplexer port 0,1, 2.
Tx3 and Tx4 signal matrix/site documentation. documentation.
External External RTC dc PDB connector PC5 External RTC dc power
Combiner power. connector.
External External Receiver PDB connector PC6 External Receiver
Multicoupler Multicoupler dc Multicoupler dc power
power/sense. connector.
MS0 to MS3 Multiple serial MS0 to MS3 connectors on E1/T1 circuits source
interface ports (up to BSU backplane. or termination
six E1/T1 circuits at equipment (via a T43).
each connector; six
Tx and six Rx
circuits).
PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarm Front edge connector of PIX Customer alarm
input/output ports. modules. equipment
GK0 Not used in this GKO connector on lower
configuration. BSU backplane.
D, D and D Not used in this
configuration.
Phase 0 and Not used in this
Phase 1 configuration.

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
BTS6
Diagram


PHASE 1
PHASE 0
EARTH
STUD
PIX1

48/60 V DC
PIX0 T43 T43 (40 V to 75 V)
or or
BIB BIB
EXT C & M + VSWR BATTERY BACKUP
Connectors
The table details the interconnect panel connections for the BTS6:

destination
Battery backup DRAM backup battery DAB connector PC4 Backup battery
Rx1A, Rx2A and Receive antenna Input to dual path Rx antenna 1A, 2A,
Rx3A signals preselectors 1, 2, 3 (RFE 3A or duplexer port 0,
shelf) 1, 2
Rx1B, Rx2B and Diversity receive Diversity input to dual path Diversity Rx antenna
Rx3B antenna signals preselectors 1, 2, and 3 1B, 2B, and 3B
(RFE shelf)
Tx3, Tx4 and Tx5 signal matrix/site specific documentation
documentation
EXT C & M + External RTC dc DAB connector PC6 External RTC and
VSWR power and external external receiver
receiver multicoupler multicoupler dc power
dc power/sense connector
MS1 and MS3 MSI ports (up to six MS1 and MS3 connectors E1/T1 circuits source
E1/T1 circuits at each on BSU backplane or termination
connector; six Tx and equipment (via a T43
six Rx circuits) or BIB)
PIX0 and PIX1 Customer alarm Front edge connector of Customer alarm
input/output ports PIX modules equipment
GK0 Not used in this GK0 connector on BSU
configuration backplane
Phase 0 and 1 Cabinet phasing Transmit combiner shelf Tx phasing harness
436 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Type 43 interconnect board
Type 43 interconnect board
Location
Plugs into the interconnect panel through via a 37-pin D-type connector.
Purpose
The T43 interconnect board matches the impedance between the pulse code modulation
(PCM) circuit lines and the BSU/RXU backplanes. The board interfaces up to six input
and six output unbalanced coaxial 75 ohm 2.048 Mbit/s lines to the external PCM circuit
lines through twelve type 43 coaxial connectors.
The T43 uses 12 transformers to provide impedance matching between the PCM circuit
lines and the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1.25 turns
ratio to match the external 75 ohm and backplane 120 ohm connections. Each input and
output is isolated from the backplane by up to 1500 V.
NOTE
Use the T43 for unbalanced lines.
T43 diagram
The following shows the T43 interconnect board:
J0
J8 J4
J14 J10
J16 J2
J13 J11
J7 J1
J17 J5

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Type 43 interconnect board GSM-100-323
T43 connectors
The table details the T43 connectors:
DType
yp Function Coaxial DType
yp Function Coaxial
Pin no. Pin no. Pin no. Pin no.
J0-1 MSI_MEGA_Tx1+ J1 Centre J0-20 MSI_MEGA_Tx1 J1 Shield
(AC coupled to ground)
J0-2 MSI_MEGA_Rx1+ J2 Centre J0-21 MSI_MEGA_Rx1 J2 Shield
(Ground)
(Ground)
(Ground)
(Ground)
(Ground)
(Ground)
Connector J0 pins 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34, and 37 are not used
438 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-323 Balanced line interconnect board
Balanced line interconnect board
Location
Plugs into the interconnect board via two 37-pin D-type connectors.
Purpose
The balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) matches the impedance between the pulse
code modulation (PCM) circuit lines and the BSU backplanes. The board provides
interfaces for six input and six output balanced 120 ohm E1/T1 lines.
The board uses 12 transformers to match the impedance between the PCM circuit lines
and the multiple serial interface (MSI) modules. Each transformer has a 1:1 turns ratio to
match the external and backplane 120 ohm connections.
NOTE
Use the BIB for balanced lines.
BIB diagram
The following shows the BIB:
J1
J0

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
Balanced line interconnect board GSM-100-323
BIB connectors
The table details the BIB connectors:
Pin no. Function Pin no. Pin no. Function Pin no.
J01 MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA J11 J020 MSI_MEGA/EXT_MEGA J120
_Tx1+ _Tx1
_Rx1+ _Rx1
J03 Ground J13 J022 Ground J122
_Tx4+ _Tx4
_Rx4+ _Rx4
_Tx2+ _Tx2
_Rx2+ _Rx2
_Tx5+ _Tx5
_Rx5+ _Rx5
_Tx3+ _Tx3
_Rx3+ _Rx3
_Tx6+ _Tx6
_Rx6+ _Rx6
J019 Ground J119
440 1st Jun 01

68P02901W03-A
GMR-01
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3
SITE PREPARATION INSTALLING THE DECOMISSIONING THE
EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
Category 423
Installation and Configuration
1st Jun 01 Installation and Configuration: BTS i

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
ii 1st Jun 01
Installation and Configuration: BTS
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
Category 423
Installation and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tool kit one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tool kit two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Backup power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Before the visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rubbish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Safety on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
BTS4 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Key to BTS4 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BTS5 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Key to BTS5 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
BTS6 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Key to BTS6 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
1st Jun 01 Installation and Configuration: BTS iii

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
Chapter 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BTS4 and BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Common antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Five-cavity RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Four-cavity RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
1st Jun 01 Installation and Configuration: BTS v

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
PIX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Chapter 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BTS checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
vi 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Chapter 1
Site preparation

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
Chapter 1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tool kit one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tool kit two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Backup power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Before the visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rubbish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Safety on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cabinet labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
BTS4 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Key to BTS4 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
BTS5 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Key to BTS5 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
BTS6 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Key to BTS6 labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Overview
Introduction
This manual contains installation and decommissioning procedures for Motorola BSS
equipment cabinets in the GSM, Extended GSM and DCS1800 systems.
All procedures apply to all types of equipment cabinet unless otherwise stated, for
example some are not applicable to DCS1800.
WARNING
Hazardous voltages in excess of 50 V dc exist inside 48 V and 60 V
cabinets.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied.
Remove all rings, watches and other jewellery.
Terminology
The term transceiver is used throughout as a generic term to represent all transceiver
modules; where information applies only to one module type, this is indicated.
Torque values
Use the torque values listed below when tightening bolts:
Size Torque
Nm lbf
M4 5.4 4
M5 8.2 6
M6 14.8 11
M8 34 22
M10 66 49
M12 126 93
In this chapter
Read this chapter before beginning the installation. It covers installation tool kits, site
requirements, power requirements, optical fibre handling precautions, site visits and
cabinet labelling.
1st Jun 01 Installation and Configuration: BTS 11

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment GSM-100-423
Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment

Introduction
Two tool kits are recommended for use when installing GSM cellular sites. Cellular tool
kit number one is for installation, and number two is for commissioning. Equipment
required for optimization is listed in Chapter 3.
Tool kit one

The table lists the contents of cellular tool kit number one:
Quantity Description
1 pair Safety goggles
1 Hard hat
1 Dust mask
1 pair Ear defenders
1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead
1 Antistatic mat
1 Torch
1 5-Tray cantilever tool box (22 in)
1 Padlock to fit cantilever tool box
1 Zipped tool case
1 Socket set (A/F/Metric 1/2 in drive)
1 10 in adjustable spanner
1 8 in adjustable spanner
Combination spanners A/F:
1 each 1/4 in, 5/16 in, 3/8 in, 7/16 in, 1/2 in, 9/16 in, 5/8 in, 11/16 in, 7/8 in
2 and 1 in
3/4 in
1 Ratchet spanner (9/16 in x 1/2 in)
1 Torque wrench (10-150 ft/lb)
1 Torx driver set (T10 to T30)
1 Allen key set A/F
1 Claw hammer
1 Pipe cutter
1 Cone cutter (up to 1 in)
1 Cone cutter (up to 2 in)
1 Junior hacksaw
10 Replacement blades for junior hacksaw
1 300 mm hacksaw
10 Replacement blades for 300 mm hacksaw
1 pair 6 in side cutters
. . . continued
12 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment
1 pair 6 in heavy-duty side cutters
1 pair Wire cutters
1 pair Cable shears
1 Knife with retractable blade
1 pair 8 in combination pliers
1 pair General purpose pliers
1 pair Snipe nose pliers
1 each Screwdrivers 0pt, 1pt and 2pt
1 each Screwdrivers 4 in, 6 in and 8 in
1 Set of jewellers screwdrivers
1 Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades)
1 Transpower 110 V (twin outlet)
1 Kango 501 110 V
1 M20 drill bit to fit Kango 501
1 Pistol drill P221 115V
1 24-piece drill bit set 1/16 in to 1/2 in
2 110 V plugs
1 6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet)
1 Soldering iron
1 Soldering iron stand
1 Hand crimp tool
1 Crimp tool for type 43 connectors
1 BNC crimp tool with inserts
1 Telephone plug crimp tool
1 50 mm crimp tool
1 Cable tie gun
1 4 ft wooden step ladder
1 Table vice
1 10 in vice grips
1 7.5 m tape measure
1 12 in steel rule
1 Spirit level (3 ft)
1 Centre punch
1 Pocket scriber
1 10 in half round file

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Tool kits for installing GSM cellular equipment GSM-100-423
Tool kit two

The table lists the contents of cellular tool kit number two:
1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead
1 Antistatic mat
1 Marker pen
1 Zipped tool pack case
1 Large sectioned storage box
1 Torx driver set including sizes T10 to T30
1 pair Flush cut wire cutters
1 pair Light duty cable cutters
1 pair Industrial scissors
1 pair GP serrated jaw pliers
1 pair Snipe nose pliers
1 pair Straight point tweezers
1 Screw/nut driver set
1 Screw gripping driver
1 Null modem
1 RS232 mini tester
1 Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder
1 Cable tie gun
1 M to M gender changer
1 Co-ax cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)
14 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Site requirements and considerations
Site requirements and considerations
Introduction
The base site must meet the following criteria.
Structural
requirements
There must be:
Clearance of at least 775 mm in front of the equipment for operation and maintenance
purposes.
An overhead cable trough, mounted at least 150 mm above the top of the tallest cabinet.
Cabinet
dimensions
BTS cabinets have the following dimensions:
Height 2096 mm.
Width 711 mm.
Depth (with door) 416 mm.
Depth (without door) 400 mm.
Operating
environment
Temperature 0 C to +50 C.
Humidity 20 % to 80 % non-condensing relative humidity
(maximum 0.024 gram of water per gram of dry
air).
Airborne particulate matter < 5 milligrams/1000 cubic feet of air.
The BTS cabinet dissipates a maximum of 3500 watts when fully equipped.
Storage
environment
Temperature 40 C to +70 C.
Humidity 10 % to 90 % non-condensing relative humidity

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Site requirements and considerations GSM-100-423
Diagram
The diagram shows the cabinet dimensions and mounting foot details:
CABLE TROUGH
150 mm TOP VIEW
416 mm MINIMUM 711 mm
CLEARANCE
400 mm
FRONT
FRONT
MOUNTING FOOT DETAIL
2096 mm 502.6 mm
201.6 mm

SIDE VIEW 36.3 mm
DETAIL A CABINET DIMENSIONS AND TYPICAL MOUNTING-FOOT DETAIL
400 mm CABINET 1 CABINET 2 CABINET 3
FRONT
673 mm NOTE: 1.5 mm INSULATOR
STRIPS ARE ATTACHED TO THE
775 mm SIDES AND BACK OF ALL CABINETS
EXCEPT THE BTS6.
CABINET
DOOR
DETAIL B RECOMMENDED CABINET CLEARANCES
16 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Power requirements
Power requirements
Introduction
BTS cabinets can operate from positive or negative earth supplies at various voltages.
Positive earth
BTS cabinets
Positive earth BTS cabinets operate from a 48 V or 60 V dc supply. The maximum
power requirements are:
GSM900
BTS4 (48 V) = 45 A.
BTS4 (60 V) = 35 A.
BTS6 (48 V) = 60 A.
BTS6 (60 V) = 50 A.
DCS1800
BTS6 (48 V) = 55 A.
BTS6 (60 V) = 45 A.
Negative earth
BTS cabinets
Negative earth BTS cabinets operate from a nominal +27 V dc (+3 V, 5 V dc) supply.
The maximum power requirements are:
GSM900
BTS5 (+27 V) = 85 A.
BTS6 (+27 V) = 95 A.
DCS1800
BTS6 (+27 V) = 85 A.
Backup power
BTS cabinets can be connected to an external battery to provide a dc input power
backup for dynamic random access memory (DRAM) devices.
The DRAM backup maximum power requirement for each cabinet is:
4 A (maximum) at +27 V dc.
NOTE
An adequate means of routeing cables from the power source to the
equipment, for example a cable trough, must be provided (BS 7671 Reference
Method 11).

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Power requirements GSM-100-423
Overcurrent
protection
The cabinet overcurrent protection device can be:
A fuse conforming to BS88.
A main circuit breaker conforming to BS3871.
The device must be of the following rating:
+27 V cabinets: 100 A.
48 V cabinets:
BTS6: 80 A.
60 V cabinets: 63 A.
18 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Handling optical fibres
Handling optical fibres
Introduction
The section details the precautions necessary for the handling of both glass and polymer
optical fibres.
Optical fibre cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of polymer or glass, coated
by a cladding (sometimes in two layers), and an outer sheath providing mechanical
protection.
The optical fibre acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly, light
must be propagated with minimal losses from end-to-end of the fibre. A number of
causes can prevent this from happening, resulting in the potential for the link to become
faulty.
Protection of
fibres and
connectors
To maintain good light transmission through the fibre optic link it is essential that the
connector end surfaces and/or bare fibre ends are kept clean at all times. Dust or dirt
must not be allowed to contaminate either the ends of the fibres, or enter the emitters or
detectors on the circuit board.
When an optical fibre is not connected, the protective caps must be fitted at all times to
the ends of the fibre and to all unused connectors on the modules.
Cleaning of
fibres and
connectors
When cleaning of contaminated optical connectors is deemed necessary, all areas must
be wiped gently with a lint-free cloth soaked in a suitable cleaning solution.
CAUTION
Care must be taken to ensure the ends of optical fibres are not damaged in
any way.
NOTE
Lint free cloth is the preferred medium for cleaning, since the risk of
contamination or damage due to the cleaning process is minimal. In extreme
circumstances the use of soft clean cotton may be acceptable.
The use of cotton buds soaked in cleaning solution is not recommended, since
lint is frequently left on the fibre and the connectors may be wet when the
cables are inserted into the connectors
Fibre connection
SMA connectors are used at both ends of the glass fibre optic cables. These should be
tightened to hand tight only when connecting under no circumstances should any
tools, such as pliers or spanners be used to tighten the connectors.
For polymer fibres, the procedures in Connection and disconnection of polymer fibre
cables must be adhered to.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Handling optical fibres GSM-100-423
Minimum bend
radius
All optical fibres have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallest circle that
can be formed, without damage, from a loop of fibre, that is how tight it can be coiled,
looped or bent.
CAUTION
Under NO circumstances should fibres be bent tighter than the minimum
bend radius.
The minimum bend radius for the optical fibres used in Motorola BSS equipment cabinets
is 30 mm. Refer to Figure 1-1.
NOTE
Double the bend radius value stated above if the fibre is under tension.
As a rule of thumb, the natural bend radius of the fibre can be determined by allowing
the fibre to bend under its own weight. This radius will normally be greater than that
specified above, and it is recommended that this is not exceeded. If in doubt, check by
measuring accurately.
If a fibre is bent tighter than the minimum bend radius, two effects are possible:
Excessive light loss from the outside of the bend.
Fibre fracture due to microscopic imperfections caused by bending. Light is
scattered and reflected by the fracture. The damage is permanent and is not
repaired by straightening the fibre.
30 mm
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
Figure 1-1 Minimum bend radius of 30 mm (at size)
110 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Visiting the site
Visiting the site
Introduction
Follow these instructions when preparing to work at a site and upon arrival.
Before the visit

Before going to the site:
Step Action
a. Ensure that all team members have adequate test
equipment, tools and hardware to carry out their tasks.
Check the site folder for any special requirements.
b. Contact the person in charge of the building to advise of the
teams estimated time of arrival and the expected duration of
their stay on the site. This will usually have been dealt with
previously, but it is always advisable to make sure that the
information has been passed on.
c. Check with the engineer in charge of the project to see if
anything needs to be taken to the site and collect any
outstanding work for the site to be visited.
d. Ensure that the team read the site access details on each
visit to a site as local regulations may change.
Arriving at the
site
When entering any site:
Step Action
a. Contact the local OMC and MSC to announce the teams
arrival, indicate your expected time of departure, and
arrange for the 2Mbit/s links to be checked, before entering
the site. Do not enter the site until you have made contact
with its OMC or MSC.
b. Enter the site and check for any building alarms, for
example intruder alarms, that may have been activated by
entry.
c. Disable the Halon gas systems (if fitted) and any entry
alarms.
d. Read any local instructions.
Occupied sites
In any exchange or occupied building, contact the caretaker or person in charge, who will
explain local regulations and may advise on parking, rubbish disposal and catering
facilities.
Be as polite and helpful as possible; colleagues may well have to go back to the site at a
later date.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Visiting the site GSM-100-423
Leaving the site

When leaving a site during the installation or optimization period:
Step Action
a. At the end of the working day enable the Halon gas system
(if fitted) and any alarm systems disabled on entry.
b. Contact the local OMC or MSC to announce the teams
departure.
c. Out of hours, if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC is not
staffed, contact the network control centre or OMC and
inform them of the teams departure.
d. Sign out of the building as necessary.
NOTE
Never leave vehicles parked on site overnight.
Rubbish
At the end of the job, clear all rubbish from the site unless otherwise indicated by the
customer.
WARNING
Do not burn rubbish, as the packaging can give off toxic gases.
Rural sites
The senior engineer must:
Ensure that all personnel on site are aware of the country code and the health
regulations relating to water authority sites.
All personnel must:
Guard against all risk of fire.
Fasten all gates.
Drive carefully on country roads and observe all speed restrictions.
Keep to the paths and tracks across farm land.
Not leave litter.
Remember that site visits can be traced back if a complaint is made.
112 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Visiting the site
Safety on site
The senior engineer must:

Advise all staff on site of safety requirements before any work takes place.
Ensure that cabinets are safely positioned at all times.
WARNING
Do not move a cabinet without assistance. Cabinets must be safely positioned
at all times.
All personnel must:

Wear the safety helmets supplied when antenna or overhead work is in progress,
and when local regulations require them.
Wear the safety goggles, ear protectors and dust masks supplied when drilling.
This is particularly important when drilling overhead ironwork.
Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.
Stop work if any person in the team is not properly protected.
Cut cable tie tails to remove sharp edges.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Cabinet labels
Introduction
This section details the warning, advisory and other labels on the BTS4, BTS5 and BTS6
cabinets.
BTS4 labels
The diagram shows the position of labels on the BTS4 cabinet:
6 7
4 5 8
9
3
2
1 10
Motorola

11
12
31

13
30

29

28
14

27
26

15

16
25

24
17

18
FRONT OF DOOR
19
22 20
23 21
114 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Key to BTS4
labels
The table details labels on the BTS4 cabinet:
Key Description Part number
1 Safety glasses 5402275W01
2 Fuse map 5402347W01
3 Circuit breaker 5402349W01
5402349W02
4 CE mark 5402470W01
5 Safety (for example, EN60 950) 5402489W01
6 T43 connection (-48/-60V cabinets only) 5402401W01
7 Caution non-ionizing radiation 5402282W01
8 Rating label 5402284W01
5402284W02
9 Danger energy hazard 5402192W01
10 Earth label 5402098W01
11 Serial number (factory marked) N/A
12 Warning live terminals 5409954E01
13 Warning disconnect fuse (part of fan) N/A
14 Panel must be in place 5409816E01
15 ESD 5409951E01
17 Halfsize module laser hazard 5402281W01
18 Caution isolate 5402374W01
19 Warning disconnect fuse (part of fan) N/A
20 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard 5402103W01
21 Warranty (calibration) 5402402W01
22 RCU legend 5409809B01
or
DRCU legend (Including laser) 5402236W01
23 Caution non-ionizing radiation 5402282W01
24 ESD and card map 5409889E01
25 Warning possible laser radiation 5402274W01
26 Open door handle 5402471W01
27 Turn to release, this panel must be lowered 5409816E02
29 Caution isolate (48/60 V version only) 5402374W01
30 Hazard 5402234W01
31 Do not obstruct 5402194W01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
BTS5 labels
7
6 8
5
9
4
10
3
2

Motorola
11

12

30

13
29
28

27
14

26

15

16
25

17

24

18
FRONT OF DOOR
19
20
23 22 21
116 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Key to BTS5
labels
1 Warning, live terminals 5409954E01
3 Fuse map 5409609F01
4 CE mark 5402470W01
5 Safety (for example, EN60 950) 5402489W01
6 T43 connection label 5402401W01
7 Earth label 5402098W01
8 Caution, non-ionizing radiation 5402282W01
9 Danger energy hazard 5402192W01
10 Rating label 5402284W01
11 Serial number (factory marked) N/A
13 Warning, disconnect fuse (part of fan) N/A
15 ESP 5409951E01
17 Halfsize module laser hazard 5402281W01
18 Caution, isolate 5402374W01
20 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard 5402103W01
21 Warranty (calibration) 5402402W01
22 RCU legend (including possible laser hazard) 5409809B01
or
DRCU legend (including possible laser hazard) 5402236W01
24 ESD and card map 5409889E01
25 Warning, possible laser radiation 5402274W01
26 Open door handle 5402471W01
29 Hazard 5402234W01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
BTS6 labels
6 7
5 8
4
9
3 10
31

11

12

13
30
29

28
14

15

27
16
26
25

17

18
20
FRONT OF DOOR 19
24
21
22
23
118 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Key to BTS6
labels
3 Fuse map 5402845W01
4 Circuit breaker 5402890W01
5 Serial number
6 T43 connection label 5402401W01
8 Rating label (C01=+27 V, C02=48 V) 5404316C01/02
9 Warning, live terminals 5402830W01
10 Earth symbol (stamped into metalwork)
11 Alarm label 54044315C01
13 Panel must be in place 5402812W01
15 Half-size module laser hazard 5402281W01
16 Warning laser radiation (on both sides) 5404365C01
18 Caution, isolate 5402374W01
20 Be Ox, ESD, and energy hazard (radio) 5402103W01
21 Warranty (on both sides) 5402402W01
22 Anti-tip (on both sides) 5402456W01
23 DRCU legend, including laser (radio) 5402038W01
(radio)
25 ESD and card map 5402832W01
26 Warning, possible laser radiation 5402274W01
27 Panel must be in place 5402812W01
30 Hazard 5402234W01
31 Frequency designation label

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
120 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Chapter 2
Installing the equipment

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
Chapter 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Cabinet types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Shipping crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BTS6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BTS4 and BTS5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Common antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
The modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Five-cavity RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Four-cavity RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
BSU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
RXU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
PIX connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
MS0 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
MS1 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
MS2 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
MS3 to BSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
MS0 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
MS1 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
MS2 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
MS3 to RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
1st Jun 01 Installation and Configuration: BTS v

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
vi 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Overview
Introduction
Follow the procedures and guidelines in this chapter to install BSS equipment cabinets
and their internal and external interfaces.
To install equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers, power
supplies and antennas, refer to the site specific documentation and the vendor
instructions.
WARNING
cabinets.
Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied. Remove
all rings, watches and other jewellery.
In this chapter
Installation consists of the following steps, all of which are described in this chapter:
Unpacking the equipment and inspecting for visible damage.
Positioning and securing the cabinets as shown on the floor plan.
Earthing the cabinets.
Connecting dc power to the cabinets.
Inserting modules into the cabinets.
Connecting external equipment cabling such as transmit and receive antenna
cables and E1/T1 lines.
Connecting the inter-cabinet fibre optic cables.
Before starting
Before starting an installation, prepare the site as described in Chapter 1 of this manual
and in the site specific documentation.
Cabinet types
This chapter describes the installation procedure for BTS cabinets. The procedure is the
same for all cabinets except where otherwise indicated.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to fit a module in any cabinet or slot for which it is not
suitable.
Delivery
Before the the BSS equipment is delivered, designate an area of the site where the
heavy freight and/or moving company can unload the equipment. The equipment must be
carefully delivered to the site with the dollies and padding required to move it from the
unloading area to the installation point.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Overview GSM-100-423
Packaging
The cabinets are shipped in wooden crates.
Cabinets are shipped with the following items already installed:
Cabinet interconnect panel.
DC power distribution and alarm interface equipment.
Module mounting shelves.
Cooling fan assemblies.
All intra-cabinet cabling.
Receiver front end modules and bandpass filters (BTS cabinets only).
Transmit combining and filtering modules (BTS cabinets only).
Digital modules.
The following items are shipped in separate cartons:
Power supply modules (PSMs).
Transceivers (BTS cabinets only).
The external RF equipment cabinet (or frame) is shipped in its own carton. The
equipment to be installed in the frame (duplexer, triplexer, quadraplexer, receiver
multicoupler, multicoupler extender or transmit channel combiner modules) and all
inter-cabinet cabling is shipped in separate cartons.
Lifting cabinets
WARNING
An unequipped BTS cabinet can weigh up to 148 kg (325 lb). Handle cabinets
with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
BTS cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts,
built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect the
threads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured to
C.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Only
eyebolts supplied in this kit must be used.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage that
may have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contact
Motorola for replacement.
1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point.
2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.
WARNING
The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw the
eyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed.
3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.
4. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic
inserts.
For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use of
lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to be
used, ensure that all such regulations are met.
22 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Site earthing
This manual summarizes general procedures. For detailed earthing information, refer to
Grounding Guidelines For Cellular Radio Installations (68P81150E62).
The cell site equipment must be earthed at the same common earth point as its power
source. Provision must be made for routeing earthing lines into the site and to the
cabinet before installing the system cabinets. An earthing terminal (stud) is located on
the interconnect panel on top of each cabinet. Each cabinet must be earthed separately
(not daisy chained). For detailed site earthing information, refer to the site specific
documentation.
Transient/
lightning
protection
E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient protection as
part of the balanced-line interconnect board (BIB) or T43 board. The receive and transmit
antenna connections to the building must be fed through coaxial electromagnetic
protection (EMP) devices.
Torque values
Use the torque values listed below when tightening bolts:
Size Torque
Nm lbf
M4 5.4 4
M5 8.2 6
M6 14.8 11
M8 34 22
M10 66 49
M12 126 93
Optical fibres
Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before installing fibre optic cables.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Unpacking the equipment GSM-100-423
Unpacking the equipment
Introduction
Carry out the following procedure with reference to the diagram on the next page.
Procedure
To unpack a cabinet from its shipping crate:
1. Cut the recyclable plastic banding used to secure the wooden crate. Put the
banding in a place where it will not be lost.
2. Remove the eight metal clips that secure the lid of the crate using a claw hammer
or a similar levering device. Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost or
damaged.
3. Lift the lid free of the crate. Place the lid where it will not be damaged.
4. Remove the 12 metal clips that secure the sides of the crate using a claw hammer.
Put the clips in a place where they will not be lost or damaged.
5. Lift the sides free of the crate. Place the sides where they will not be damaged.
CAUTION
Take care not to scratch or otherwise damage the cabinet.
6. Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet.
7. Lift or slide the cabinet off the base of the crate.
8. Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet.
9. Put all the clips in a bag and tie them together with the banding, desiccant bag,
barrier bag and the lid, sides and base of the cabinet.
10. Return the dismantled crate as advised by the in-country project manager.
11. Immediately after unpacking the equipment, inspect it for damage and report the
extent of any damage to the transport company.
24 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Unpacking the equipment
Shipping crate
The diagram shows the cabinet shipping crate:
LID
METAL CLIP
SIDE
SIDE
SIDE
BASE
SIDE

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Anchoring the cabinet GSM-100-423
Anchoring the cabinet
Introduction
Mounting procedures must conform to local building codes and regulations. Consult the
site authorities before beginning an installation.
Procedure
To secure a cabinet to the floor:
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. For access to the bottom of the cabinet, remove the lower fan housing/air baffle
assembly (below the BSU shelf) by removing the four screws that secure it to the
cabinet frame; retain the screws for reassembly.
3. Carefully place the cabinet at its anchoring point as shown in the site plan.
CAUTION
Ensure that cabinets are electrically insulated from each other. Cabinets can
be secured to adjacent cabinets or support structure using insulating bolts.
4. Use the mounting foot of the cabinet as a template to mark the location of the four
mounting holes. All four anchoring positions must be used.
WARNING
Wear safety glasses while drilling holes.
CAUTION
Cement dust from drilling concrete flooring is harmful to equipment and wiring.
Make sure that the cabinet and any nearby equipment are protected. Use a
tarpaulin, cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Carefully
clean up any accumulated debris from the anchor installation before exposing
the equipment.
5. Move the cabinet away from the installation point. Drill holes for concrete
mounting anchors and fit them (Motorola suggests the RAWLNUT 1275).
6. Move the cabinet back to the installation point. Place an insulating shoulder
washer and then a flat washer onto each bolt. Loosely secure each cabinet to the
anchors using the bolts with washers (Motorola suggests M12 x 100 bolts for use
with the RAWLNUT 1275 anchors).
7. Tighten the bolts, ensuring that the cabinet remains vertical and level.
8. Replace the lower fan housing/air baffle assembly removed in step 2.
26 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the cabinet air deflector
Installing the cabinet air deflector
Introduction
The SHN4757 air deflector unit is supplied with each cabinet. Installation is
recommended, but is left to the customers discretion.
The air deflector mounts on the cabinet door in front of the upper exhaust vent, which is
approximately at the height of a persons eye when standing in front of the cabinet. It
directs the airflow upwards without adversely affecting cabinet equipment cooling.
BTS6
The unit comprises a deflector and four mounting screws.
Temporary installation
1. Clip the air deflector on to the cabinet door upper exhaust vent.
Permanent installation
1. Remove the protective caps from the four predrilled holes in the door around the
upper exhaust vent.
3. Secure the air deflector to the door using four M5 screws.
BTS4 and BTS5

The unit comprises a deflector and three mounting screws.
Temporary installation

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the cabinet air deflector GSM-100-423
Permanent installation
2. Using the predrilled holes in the bottom flange of the deflector, mark the locations
for screw mounting holes on the door.
3. Remove the air deflector.
4. Open the door and cover the internal units.
WARNING
Wear safety glasses while drilling holes.
CAUTION
Ensure that the interior of the cabinet is protected from possible swarf
ingestion.
5. Drill three 3.5 mm diameter holes through the door.

6. Repeat step 1.
7. Secure the air deflector to the door using three M4 x 8 self tapping screws.
Diagram
The diagram shows the air deflector mounted on a BTS4 or BTS5 cabinet:
EXHAUST VENT

DRILL THREE

3.5 mm HOLES
(OPTIONAL)
AIR DEFLECTOR

M4 X 3

TAPPING

CLIPS
(2 EACH END)
28 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables
Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables
Introduction
WARNING
The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double or
reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must also
conform to safety standard EN60 950.
Do not make dc input power connections at the main dc power source at this
point in the procedure.
CAUTION
To protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damage
by static electricity or foreign matter, ensure that the covers supplied are fitted.
Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, perform
any adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipment
recommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all load
conditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dc
operation and between 40 V and 75 V dc for 48/60 V dc operation.
The dc power distribution system within each cabinet, including all internal power cabling
and fuses, is factory assembled and tested.
The power requirements for the cabinets are listed in Chapter 1.
The power input and earth connectors are secured with M10 nuts.
Adequate means, for example a cable trough, must be provided for routeing cables from
the main power source to the cabinet.
PAB
Configure the power alarm board (PAB) jumpers JU1 to JU3 for the power supply polarity
and the external +27 V backup supply as shown below:
JU1, set for negative earth (+27 Vdc) supply (JU1 pins 2, 3) NEG 1 POS JU1
JU1, set for positive earth (48/60 Vdc) supply (JU1 pins 1, 2) NEG 1 POS JU1
JU2 and JU3 set to external supply (JU2 pins 2, 3) 1 JU2

INT EXT
(JU3 pins 2,3) 1 JU3

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables GSM-100-423
DAB
Configure the distribution alarm board (DAB) switches S1 and S2 for the cabinet
equipment configuration. Each switch comprises eight switches in a line.
The table lists the alarms that the switches enable:
Label Switch Position Circuit monitored On/Off

VSWR1 (Sector 1) S1 1 Power to VSWR1 monitor As required
Spare S1 4 OFF
BB O/P2 S1 5 BBBX lower shelf output ON
BB O/P1 S1 6 BBBX upper shelf output ON
BB I/P2 S1 7 BBBX lower shelf input ON
BB I/P1 S1 8 BBBX upper shelf input ON
DRCU5 S2 1 Power to DRCU5 ON if fitted
Spare S2 7 OFF
BBB ID S2 8 Backup battery fitted ON if fitted
NOTE
The battery backup input and output alarms (switch S1 positions 5 to 8) are
enabled when the switch is set to OFF.
210 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
BTS6
interconnect
panel
The diagram shows the BTS6 interconnect panel:
FIBRE OPTIC CABLES

FIBRE OPTIC CABLES
PHASE 1 PHASE 0

EARTH STUD
PIX1 VIN 48/60 V dc

PIX0 T43 T43 or +27 V dc
or or 0V
BIB BIB
EXT C & M + VSWR GK0 BATTERY

BACKUP
The table lists the BTS6 interconnect panel connectors:
Connector Function Internal destination External destination

Battery DRAM backup battery BBBX connector PC2 Backup battery
backup
Rx1A, Rx2A, Receive antenna Input to dual path Rx antenna 1A, 2A,
and Rx3A signals preselectors 1, 2, and 3 and 3A or port of
(RFE shelf) duplexer 0, 1 or 2
Rx1B, Rx2B, Diversity receive Diversity input to dual Diversity Rx antennas
and Rx3B antenna signals path preselectors 1, 2, 1B, 2B, and 3B
and 3 (RFE shelf)
Tx0, Tx1, Transmit antenna Refer to Refer to site specific
Tx2, Tx3, signal interconnection matrix documentation
Tx4, and Tx5 and site specific
documentation
EXT External RTC dc DAB connector PC6 External RTC and
C&M+VSWR power, and external external receiver
receiver multicoupler multicoupler dc power
dc power and sense connector
MS1 and MSI ports (maximum Corresponding MS E1/T1 line source or
MS3 six E1/T1 per connector on termination equipment
connector six Tx and backplane (through T43 or BIB)
six Rx)
PIX0 and End user alarm Edge connector of PIX End user alarm
PIX1 input/output ports modules equipment
GK0 GPS satellite receiver GK0 connector on BSU Master synchronization
(for future use) backplane source (for future use)
Phase 0 and Phasing: Cabinet Transmit combiner Tx phasing harness
Phase 1 phasing shelf
External External receiver PAB connector PC6 External receiver
multicoupler multicoupler dc multicoupler dc power
power/sense connector

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
BTS5
interconnect
panel
EARTH STUD
FEEDTHROUGH TUBE
FEEDTHROUGH TUBE

External
External
Combiner Multicoupler

GK0

PIX1 +27 V BATT

BACKUP
PIX0
T43 T43 T43 T43
Phase 0
Phase 1
INPUT POWER TERMINALS

+27 V (+20 V TO +30 V)
Note: Tx connectors are 7/16 in and rx connectors are N-type

Rx1A, Rx2A, Receive antenna Input to preselectors Rx antenna 1A, 2A,
and Rx3A signals 1A, 2A, and 3A (upper and 3A or Rx port of
RFE shelf) duplexer 0, 1, or 2
Rx1B, Rx2B, Diversity receive Diversity input to Diversity Rx antennas
and Rx3B antenna signals preselectors 1A, 2A, 1B, 2B, and 3B
and 3A (lower RFE
shelf)
Tx2, Tx3, and signal interconnection matrix documentation
Tx4 and site specific
documentation
Phase 0 and Phasing: Inter cabinet Refer to site specific Refer to site specific
Phase 1 Tx channel combining documentation documentation
External DC power for external PAB connector PC11 External RTC dc power
combiner RTC connector
+27V dc DRAM backup battery PAB connector PC6 +27 V dc backup
battery battery
backup
MS1 and MSI ports Corresponding MS E1/T1 line source or
MS3 connector on termination equipment
backplane (through T43 or BIB)
212 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01

GK0 GPS satellite receiver GK0 connector on Master synchronization
BTS4
interconnect
panel

Phase 1 Phase 0

External Multicoupler +27 V BATT BACKUP
External Combiner EARTH STUD
Input power
PIX1

terminals
PIX0
Note: Tx AND RX connectors are 7/16 in

Rx1A, Rx2A, Receive antenna Input to preselectors Rx antenna 1A, 2A,
and Rx3A signals 1A, 2A, and 3A (upper and 3A or Rx port of
RFE shelf) duplexer 0, 1, or 2
Rx1B, Rx2B, Diversity receive Diversity input to Diversity Rx antennas
and Rx3B antenna signals preselectors 1A, 2A, 1B, 2B, and 3B
and 3A (lower RFE
shelf)
Tx2, Tx3, and signal interconnection matrix documentation
Tx4 and site specific
documentation
Phase 0 and Phasing: Inter cabinet Refer to site specific Refer to site specific
Phase 1 Tx channel combining documentation documentation
External DC power for external PAB connector PC11 External RTC dc power
combiner RTC connector
+27V dc DRAM backup battery PAB connector PC6 +27 V dc backup
battery battery
backup
MS1 and MSI ports Corresponding MS E1/T1 line source or
MS3 connector on termination equipment
backplane (through T43 or BIB)

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01

GK0 GPS satellite receiver GK0 connector on Master synchronization
214 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment
Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external

equipment
Introduction
CAUTION
Protect unused connectors on the cabinet interconnect panel from damage by
static electricity or foreign matter by ensuring that the covers supplied are
fitted.
The procedure below describes how to install dc power cabling from the cabinets to the
following ancillary external equipment:
DRAM backup battery.
External RTC (GSM900 BTS cabinets only).
External multicoupler (BTS cabinets only).
All cables and connectors must be supplied by the end user.
Procedure
To install dc power cabling between a cabinet and external equipment:
1. For BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets, construct the required cables with reference to the
table below.
Cable Cable type Connector: cabinet end Connector: external

end
Type Pin function Type Pin
function
Ext Shielded 3 or 15 way 1: Main supply (link A) 3 pos male As cabinet
RTC 4 conductors female fused +27 V dc end
1mm2 shielded 15: Redundant supply
D type (link B) fused +27 V
dc
5: DC earth
Ext Shielded 4 9 way 1: Multicoupler alarm 4 pos male As cabinet
multi conductor female 2: Main supply fused end
coupler 1mm2 shielded +27 V dc
D type 3: Redundant supply
fused +27 V dc
4: DC earth

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment GSM-100-423
2. For BTS6 cabinets, construct the required cables with reference to the table below.
Cable Cable type Connector: cabinet end Connector: external

end
Type Pin function Type Pin
function
DRAM Shielded 9 way 1 (upper cage) and 2 End users End users
backup twisted pair female (lower cage): Battery choice choice
battery (red/black) shielded ve (black)
1mm2 D type 7 (lower cage) and 6
(upper cage) : Battery
+ve (red)
Ext Shielded 3 or 15 way 1: Main supply (link A) 3 pos male As cabinet
RTC 4 conductors female fused +27 V dc end
1mm2 shielded 15: Redundant supply
D type (link B) fused +27 V
dc
5: DC earth
Ext Shielded 4 9 way 1: Multicoupler alarm 4 pos male As cabinet
multi conductor female 2: Main supply fused end
coupler 1mm2 shielded +27 V dc
D type 3: Redundant supply
fused +27 V dc
4: DC earth
3. Connect the cable shield to the connector shell at the cabinet end.
4. Make sure that no cable has short or open circuit conductors.
5. Locate the connector(s) on the top of the cabinet interconnect panel.
6. Connect the cabinet end of the cable to the cabinet mating connector.
7. Connect the other end of the cable to the external equipment mating connector.
216 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet
Introduction
The location and details of the BTS cabinet input power terminals and the earth stud are
shown in the diagrams and tables in Preparing to connect dc power and earth cables.
earlier in this chapter.
Power and earth

cables
CAUTION
Earth each cabinet using the earth stud on the interconnect panel on the top
of the cabinet. Each cabinet must be individually connected to the master
earth bar (MEB). Do not daisy chain cabinet earths.
The maximum cable lengths allowed for each type of cabinet are shown in the tables that
follow. The following rules must be observed:
If the required length falls between two values of cross sectional area (CSA),
round up to the next biggest cable.
The earth cable must be the same size as the power cable.
The cabinet overcurrent protection device must be a BS88 fuse or a BS3871 main
circuit breaker.
Maximum ambient temperature +50 C.
Cables must be routed parallel and touching each other on a perforated tray
(BS7671 method 11).
The maximum length given is based on a 4% voltage drop at nominal voltage
(BS7671 section 5250102).
+27 V cabinets
CSA (mm2) Maximum cable length (m)

BTS5 BTS6
16
25
35 19.2 17.2
50 25.8 23.2
70 38.0 34.2
95 52.1 46.9
120 66.6 60.0

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet GSM-100-423
48 V cabinets

BTS4 BTS6
16
25 19.9 17.1
35 27.8 24.0 30.3
50 37.4 32.2 40.7
70 55.2 47.6 60.1
95 75.7 65.2 82.3
120 96.7 83.3 105.2
60 V cabinets

BTS4 BTS6
16
25 24.8 21.4
35 34.8 30.0
50 46.8 40.3
70 69.1 59.5
95 94.6 81.5
120 120.9 104.1
218 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet
Power cables for

ve earth
cabinets
Use the correct cable specified in the tables for the dc input power cable from the main
dc power source.
WARNING
The positive cable must be red and the negative cable must be black. The
black cable is at earth potential.
To connect dc power cables to a negative earth cabinet:

1. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off.
2. Connect the earth ground from the MEB to the earth stud on top of the cabinet.
3. Connect the red positive dc power cable from the main dc power source to the
cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN.
4. Connect the black negative dc power cable from the main dc power source to the
cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0 V.
5. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the cabinet GSM-100-423
Power cables for

+ve earth
cabinets
Use the correct cable specified in the tables for the dc input power cable from the main
dc power source.
WARNING
The negative power cable must be blue and the positive cable must be black.
The black cable is at earth potential.
To connect dc power cables to a positive earth cabinet:

1. Ensure that the main power source output is switched off.
2. Connect the earth ground from the master ground bar to the earth stud on top of
the cabinet.
3. Connect the blue negative () dc power cable from the main dc power source to
the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked VIN.
4. Connect the black positive (+) dc power cable from the main dc power source to
the cabinet dc power connector assembly terminal marked 0V.
5. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal set screws (M10).
220 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power source
Connecting dc input power and earth cables to the main power

source
Safety
WARNING
Do not wear an antistatic wrist strap when servicing the power supplies or
power distribution cabling. Serious personal injury can result.
The external converter used to supply the cabinet must have double or
reinforced insulation between its primary and secondary circuits and must also
conform to safety standard EN60 950.
Procedure
To connect the dc power cables to the main power source:
CAUTION
Before connecting input dc power cables to the main dc power source, perform
any adjustment procedures on the main power supply equipment
recommended by the manufacturer. Input to the cabinet, under all load
conditions, must remain between 22 V and 30 V dc for nominal +27 V dc
operation and between 40 V and 75 V dc for 48/60 V dc operation.
1. Ensure that all main dc power source output switches are switched off.
2. Ensure that all circuit breakers in the cabinet are switched off.
3. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present.
4. Connect the positive lead of the input dc power cable to the positive terminal of the
main dc power supply.
5. Connect the negative lead of the input dc power cable to the negative terminal of
the main dc power supply.
WARNING
Ensure that all power connections are secure.
6. Do not apply power to the cabinet at this point in the procedure.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing power supply modules GSM-100-423
Installing power supply modules
Introduction
The following types of power supply modules (PSMs) are fitted:
BTS4 and BTS5: Digital power supply module (DPSM).
ve earth BTS6: Enhanced power supply module (EPSM).
+ve earth BTS6: Integrated power supply module (IPSM).
Before installing power supply modules, refer to the site specific documentation to
determine the following:
The number of power supply modules to be installed.
The positions in which the power supply modules are to be installed.
The number of power converter (PC) modules to be fitted (positive earth BTS4 and
BTS5 cabinets only).
Procedure
To install the power supply modules:
1. Locate and unpack the power supply modules.
2. Positive earth BTS4 and BTS5 only. Locate and unpack the PC modules.
CAUTION
Switch the appropriate circuit breakers OFF to ensure that the supply to the
PSMs is isolated.
CAUTION
Refer to the label on the power supply module to ensure that the correct
module is fitted for the input power (48V, 60V or +27V) used.
3. If the cabinet is delivered with the digital modules already installed, two
transportation panel fillers are fitted to the digital shelf to prevent the modules from
falling out of the shelf in transit. Remove these by releasing the clips at the top and
bottom, and replace them with blanking plates, before proceeding.
4. Mount each power supply module (and power converter if fitted) in the shelf
assembly according to the configuration information in the site specific
documentation.
5. Pull each PSM forward by about 25 mm (1 in) to unseat it.
222 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Connecting RF cables
Connecting RF cables
Introduction
Refer to the site specific documentation for detailed antenna configurations and
connection procedures.
Use jumper leads to make connections from the antenna window to the connectors on
the top of the BTS cabinets. The jumper leads must be as short as possible, fabricated
on-site of 1/2 in Heliax (unless otherwise specified in the site installation plan), and
routed to the appropriate cabinet in overhead cable trays.
For reference, the line loss of 1/2 in Heliax at 900 MHz is 7.55 dB per 100 m (2.3 dB per
100 feet).
CAUTION
Connect all antenna feeders entering the building via coaxial EMP
protectors.
Separate
transmit antenna
To BTS cabinet
To connect a separate transmit antenna to BTS cabinets:
1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each transmit antenna feeder connector on the
antenna window to the appropriate BTS cabinet.
2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Tx connector on top of the
BTS cabinet.
To external equipment
To connect a separate transmit antenna to optional external RF equipment cabinet or
frame and BTS cabinets:
1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each transmit antenna feeder connector on the
antenna window to the optional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.
2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Tx ANT connector on the
optional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.
3. Route the required number of coaxial jumper leads from the optional external RF
equipment cabinet, or frame, to the appropriate BTS cabinet.
4. Connect the external RF equipment cabinet, or frame end of each coaxial jumper
lead to the appropriate Tx connector on the optional external RF equipment
cabinet or frame.
5. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the correct Tx connector on top of the BTS
cabinet.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Connecting RF cables GSM-100-423
Separate receive
antenna
To BTS cabinet
To connect a separate receive antenna to BTS cabinets:
1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each receive antenna feeder connector on the
antenna window to the appropriate BTS cabinet.
2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Rx connector on top of the
BTS cabinet.
To external equipment
To connect a separate receive antenna to optional external RF equipment cabinet or
frame and BTS cabinets:
1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each receive antenna feeder connector on the
antenna window to the optional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.
2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Rx ANT connector on the
lead to the appropriate Rx connector on the optional external RF equipment
cabinet or frame.
5. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate Rx connector on top of the
BTS cabinet.
Common
antenna
To connect a common transmit/receive antenna to optional external RF equipment
cabinet or frame and BTS cabinets:
1. Route a coaxial jumper lead from each transmit/receive antenna feeder connector
on the antenna window to the optional external RF equipment cabinet or frame.
2. Connect each coaxial jumper lead to the appropriate ANT connector on the
lead to the appropriate Tx connector on the optional external RF equipment
cabinet or frame.
5. Connect the BTS cabinet end of each transmit coaxial jumper lead to the
appropriate Tx connector on top of the BTS cabinet.
lead to the appropriate Rx connector on the optional external RF equipment
cabinet or frame.
7. Connect the BTS cabinet end of each transmit coaxial jumper lead to the
appropriate Rx connector on top of the BTS cabinet.
224 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs
Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs
Introduction
NOTE
In the text that follows DRCU with parentheses is used as a general term
for DRCU and DRCUII modules.
Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of DRCUs and their slot
positions. Install the first DRCU in the rightmost slot (DRCU 0). All subsequent DRCUs
must be installed adjacent to the previously installed DRCU. DRCUs can only be installed
in BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets.
Procedure
WARNING
The DRCU module weighs 15 kg (33 lbs). Handle with care.
To install a DRCU:
1. Locate and unpack the DRCUs.
2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transceiver shelf assembly.
3. Locate the cable conduit that runs along the bottom front of the transceiver shelf.
At each transceiver slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxial
cables/connectors and fibre optic cables emerge from an opening in the conduit. In
some cabinets the cables are held inside the conduit; release the two 1/4-turn
fasteners to open the conduit.
4. Raise the hinged air block door to the vertical position and secure it to the back
wall of the transceiver shelf assembly using the integral 1/4-turn fastener. Leave
the door of any unused slot in the horizontal position.
5. Grasp the DRCU upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the other
hand. Position the module in the desired slot. Insert the back of the DRCU module
into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensure that the module
is firmly seated in the slot.
CAUTION
Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the DRCU being installed is
switched off.
6. Connect the dc power cable connector (D-subminiature, labelled on the cable as

DRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) to the POWER connector at the
bottom of the DRCU front panel. Secure the connector to the DRCU by tightening
the two captive screws on the connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing DRCUs and DRCUIIs GSM-100-423
7. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type-N, labelled on the cable as
DRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connector
near the bottom of DRCU front panel.
WARNING
Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connectors with or
without the use of optical aids. Radiation can come from either the data in/out
connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out
connectors.
CAUTION
Refer to Handling optical fibres in chapter 1 before connecting fibre optic
cables.
8. Select the data in fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as DRCUx IN, where x =
DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) for the slot position. Unscrew and remove the
protective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cable to the DATA
IN optic port on the DRCU front panel by the turning the connector clockwise.
NOTE
Refer to Installing fibre optic cabling, in category 523, for information on
routing and installation of fibre optic cables.
9. Select the data out fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as DRCUx OUT, where
x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 4) for the slot position. Unscrew and remove the
OUT optic port on the DRCU front panel by the turning the connector clockwise.
10. Connect the DRCU end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifier
output (Tx OUT) connector at the top of the DRCU front panel. Connect the other
end of the coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF or cable to
the Tx connector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specific
documentation to determine the exact connection point for the DRCU module).
11. Repeat step 5 to step 10 for each DRCU to be used in the BTS cabinet.
226 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing DRCU3s
Installing DRCU3s
Introduction
Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of DRCU3s and their
slot positions. Install the first DRCU3 in the rightmost slot DRCU3 0). All subsequent
DRCU3s must be installed adjacent to the previously installed DRCU3.
Procedure
WARNING
The DRCU3 module weighs 15 kg (33 lbs). Handle with care.
To install a DRCU3:
1. Locate and unpack the DRCU3s.
2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transceiver shelf.
At each transceiver slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxial
some cabinets the cables are held inside the conduit; open the conduit by
releasing the two 1/4-turn fasteners.
4. BTS4 and BTS5. Raise the hinged air block door to the vertical position and
secure it to the back wall of the transceiver shelf assembly using the integral
1/4-turn fastener. Leave the door of any unused slot in the horizontal position.
BTS6. Remove the plastic air blank from the top of the transceiver shelf for all
occupied slots. Leave the blank in place for any unoccupied slot.
5. BTS4 and BTS5. Insert the spacer (Motorola kit number SWLN4096) into the slot
before continuing.
6. Grasp the DRCU3 upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the
other hand. Position the module in the desired slot. Insert the back of the DRCU3
module into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensure that the
module is firmly seated in the slot.
CAUTION
Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the DRCU being installed is
switched off.

DRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the POWER connector at the
bottom of the DRCU3 front panel. Secure the connector to the DRCU3 by
tightening the two captive screws on the connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing DRCU3s GSM-100-423
8. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type-N, labelled on the cable as
DRCUx, where x = DRCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connector
near the bottom of DRCU3 front panel.
WARNING
Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connectors with or
connectors.
CAUTION
cables.
9. Select the data in fibre optic cable for the slot position (labelled on the cable as
RADIO x INPUT, where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space).
Remove the protective cap from the fibre optic cable. Secure the fibre optic cable
to the DATA IN optic port on the DRCU3 front panel by turning the connector
clockwise.
NOTE
10. Select the data out fibre optic cable for the slot position (labelled on the cable as
RADIO x OUTPUT, where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space).
to the DATA OUT optic port on the DRCU3 front panel by the turning the connector
clockwise.
11. Connect the DRCU3 end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifier
output, Tx OUT, connector at the top of the DRCU3 front panel. Connect the other
end of the coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF, or cable to
the Tx connector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specific
documentation to determine the exact connection point for this DRCU3 module).
12. Repeat step 6 to step 11 for each DRCU3 to be installed in the BTS cabinet.
228 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s
Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s
Introduction
NOTE
In this section, the term SCU is used generically for SCU900 and SCU1800.
The procedure applies to both unless otherwise stated.
Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of SCUs and their slot
positions. Install the first SCU in the rightmost slot (SCU 0). All subsequent SCUs must
be installed adjacent to the previously installed SCU.
Procedure
WARNING
The SCU module weighs 10 kg (22 lb). Handle with care.
To install an SCU:
1. Locate and unpack the SCUs.
2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the SCU shelf assembly.
3. Locate the cable conduit that runs along the bottom front of the SCU shelf. At each
SCU slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxial cables/connectors
and fibre optic cables emerge from an opening in the conduit. In some cabinets the
cables are held inside the conduit. In these cases release the two 1/4-turn
fasteners to open the conduit.
4. BTS4 and BTS5. For each occupied slot, raise the hinged air block door to the
vertical position and secure it to the back wall of the SCU shelf assembly using the
integral 1/4-turn fastener.
BTS6. Remove the plastic air blank from the top of the SCU shelf for all occupied
slots. Leave the blank in place for any unoccupied slot.
before continuing.
6. Grasp the SCU upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the other
hand. Position the module at the front of the desired slot. Insert the back of the
SCU module into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensure
that the module is firmly seated in the slot.
CAUTION
Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the SCU being installed is
switched off.

SCUx, where x = SCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the VOLTAGE INPUT connector
(SCU900) or the POWER connector (SCU1800) at the bottom of the SCU front
panel. Secure the connector to the SCU by tightening the two captive screws on
the connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing SCU900s and SCU1800s GSM-100-423
8. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type N, labelled on the cable as
SCUx, where x = SCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connector
near the bottom of SCU front panel.
WARNING
Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or data in/out connector with or
connectors.
CAUTION
cables.
to the DATA IN optic port on the SCU front panel by turning the connector
clockwise.
NOTE
10. Select the data out fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as RADIO x OUTPUT,
where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space). Remove the
OUT optic port on the SCU front panel by turning the connector clockwise.
11. Connect the SCU end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifier output
(Tx OUT) connector at the top of the SCU front panel. Connect the other end of
the coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF or cable to the Tx
connector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specific documentation to
determine the exact connection point for the SCU module).
12. Repeat step 5 to step 11 for each SCU to be installed in the BTS cabinet.
230 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing TCU modules
Installing TCU modules

Introduction
NOTE
In this section, the term TCU is used generically for TCU900, TCU1800 and
high power TCU1800. The procedure applies to all TCUs unless otherwise
stated.
Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the number of TCUs and their slot
positions. Install the first TCU in the rightmost slot (TCU 0). All subsequent TCUs must
be installed adjacent to the previously installed TCU.
Procedure
WARNING
The TCU module weighs 9.8 kg. Handle with care.
To install an TCU:
1. Locate and unpack the TCUs.
2. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transceiver shelf assembly.
At each TCU slot position the dc power cable/connector, receive coaxial
some cabinets the cables are held inside the conduit. In these cases release the
two 1/4-turn fasteners to open the conduit.
4. BTS4 and BTS5. For each occupied slot, raise the hinged air block door to the
vertical position and secure it to the back wall of the transceiver shelf assembly
using the integral 1/4-turn fastener.
BTS6. Remove the plastic air blanking panel from the top of the transceiver shelf
for all occupied slots. Leave the blanking panel in place for any unoccupied slot.
before continuing.
NOTE
TCU1800s and high power TCU1800s are only fitted in BTS6 cabinets, and
the high power TCU1800 must be used in conjunction with a high sensitivity
LNA.
6. Grasp the TCU upper handle with one hand and the bottom handle with the other
hand. Position the module at the front of the desired slot. Insert the back of the
TCU module into the slot and push the module all the way into the slot. Ensure
that the module is firmly seated in the slot.
CAUTION
Ensure that the appropriate circuit breaker for the TCU being installed is
switched off.

TCUx, where x = TCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the VOLTAGE INPUT connector
(TCU900) or the POWER connector (TCU1800) at the bottom of the TCU front
panel. Secure the connector to the TCU by tightening the two captive screws on
the connector with a flat blade screwdriver.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing TCU modules GSM-100-423
8. Connect the coaxial cable connector (right-angle, type N, labelled on the cable as
TCUx, where x = TCU slot number, 0 to 5) to the Rx IN 1 or Rx IN 2 connector
near the bottom of TCU front panel.
WARNING
connectors.
CAUTION
cables.
to the DATA IN optic port on the TCU front panel by turning the connector
clockwise.
NOTE
10. Select the data out fibre optic cable (labelled on the cable as RADIO x OUTPUT,
where x is a blank space; write the slot number in this space). Remove the
OUT optic port on the TCU front panel by turning the connector clockwise.
11. Connect the TCU end of the RF Tx coaxial cable to the RF power amplifier output
(Tx OUT) connector at the top of the TCU front panel. Connect the other end of
the coaxial cable to the appropriate channel combiner, Tx BPF or cable to the Tx
connector on the cabinet interconnect panel (see the site specific documentation to
determine the exact connection point for the TCU module).
12. Ensure that the mode selection switch on the TCU front panel is set to the SCU
position.
13. Repeat step 5 to step 12 for each TCU to be installed in the BTS cabinet.
232 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Receiver front end shelf

Introduction
Receiver front end (RFE) modules are factory-fitted to new cabinets. Use these
procedures to upgrade cabinets after installation.
Refer to the site specific documentation to determine the required RFE configuration.
The table shows the possible combinations of RFE modules in each cabinet:
Equipment GSM 900 DCS1800

Item Additions BTS4 BTS5 BTS6 BTS6
Preselector 6-way splitter Yes Yes No No
Passive splitter No No Yes No
Receiver
Yes Yes Yes No
matrix
Dual path
Yes No Yes
preselector
Dual path
Yes No Yes
preselector 2
Low noise
Yes
amplifier
High
sensitivity Yes
LNA
NOTE
A dual path preselector (DPP) and a low noise amplifier (LNA) provide similar
functions, a DPP is for GSM 900 and a LNA is for DCS1800.
Preselector
The preselector module comprises a bandpass filter and a preamplifier. One preselector
is required for each receive antenna signal, of which a BTS cabinet can support a
maximum of six with DRCUs or SCUs.
Preselector modules are used in conjunction with:
Six-way splitters (one preselector per six-way splitter).
Passive splitters (one preselector per passive splitter).
Receiver matrix (a maximum of three preselectors per receiver matrix).
Dual path preselector

The dual path preselector comprises two bandpass filters, two preamplifiers and two
passive splitters in a single module. One DPP is required for each pair of receive antenna
signals. The DPP2 has an extra pair of connectors on the rear for extension or test
purposes.
Low noise amplifier

The low noise amplifier comprises two bandpass filters, two preamplifiers and two
passive splitters in a single module. One DPP is required for each pair of receive antenna
signals. The high sensitivity LNA incorporates additional amplification, and has manually
selectable low and high gain modes.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Receiver front end shelf GSM-100-423
The modules
The sections that follow describe installation procedures for:
Preselector with 6-way splitter.
Preselector with receiver matrix.
Passive splitter.
Dual path preselector.
Diversity receive extender.
234 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing a preselector with a 6-way splitter
Installing a preselector with a 6-way splitter
Procedure
The preselector and 6-way splitter can be fitted to BTS4 and BTS5 cabinets.
To install a preselector and six-way splitter:
1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the RFE shelf.
2. Locate the appropriate preselector/splitter position to be used.
There are three sets of tracks on the upper RFE shelf, used for antenna Rx1A,
Rx2A, and Rx3A respectively from right to left. There are three sets of tracks on
the lower RFE shelf, used for Rx1B, Rx2B, and Rx3B respectively from right to
left.
NOTE
In a BTS4 cabinet a spring clip is used to retain the preselector in each slot.
Attach the springs to the rear of the RFE shelf before installing the splitter.
3. Align the tracks on the bottom of the preselector module with the tracks on the
RFE shelf. Position the preselector module at the back of the RFE shelf.
4. Locate the cables hanging from the cabling bracket mounted at the back of the
RFE shelf. Select the preselector dc power cable (two-conductor cable labelled
1A, 2A, 3A, 1B, 2B, or 3B). Grasp the moulded portion of the cable connector and
push it onto the mating connector on the back of the preselector module. Dress
any unused cables to the cabling bracket.
CAUTION
Take care to ensure proper mechanical mating of the slide fit connection
between the splitter and the preselector modules. Improper connection could
damage the connectors.
5. Align the tracks on the bottom of the splitter module with the tracks (used in step
3) on the RFE shelf. Connect the splitter input connector to the preselector output
connector.
6. BTS5. Secure the modules with their 1/4-turn fasteners.
BTS4. Hold the modules in place, tension the retaining spring against the
preselector and splitter, then insert the two ends of the spring into the slots in the
RFE shelf. Secure the preselector and splitter with tie-wraps.
7. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for the remaining modules to be installed.
8. Locate the receive RF coaxial cables (labelled Rx1A, Rx2A, Rx3A, Rx1B, Rx2B
and Rx3B) that are tie-wrapped to the bracket at the back of the RFE shelf. Select
the appropriate cable and undo its tie wrap. Connect this cable to the RF input
connector of the corresponding preselector filter at the front of the RFE shelf.
9. Repeat step 8 for each preselector to be installed and dress any unused cables to
the cabling bracket.
10. Locate the RF coaxial cables (labelled DRCU0 to DRCU5) stored on both sides of
the cabinet next to the RFE shelf. Connect the appropriate cables to the RF
output connectors of the appropriate splitter modules. Up to five coaxial cables can
be connected to each splitter. Connect 50 ohm terminations to any unused splitter
output connectors.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix GSM-100-423
Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix
Procedure
The preselector with receiver matrix can be fitted to GSM900 cabinets.
To install a preselector and receiver matrix module:
1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the RFE shelf.
2. Locate the appropriate preselector mounting track to be used. There are three sets
of tracks on the upper RFE shelf, used for antenna Rx1A, Rx2A, and Rx3A
respectively from right to left. There are three sets of tracks on the lower RFE
shelf, used for Rx1B, Rx2B, and Rx3B respectively from right to left.
NOTE
In a BTS4 cabinet a spring clip is used to retain the preselector in each slot.
Attach the springs to the rear of the RFE shelf before installing the receiver
matrix.
3. Align the tracks on the bottom of the preselector module with the tracks on the
RFE shelf. Position the preselector module at the back of the RFE shelf.
4. Locate the cables hanging from the cabling bracket mounted at the back of the
RFE shelf. Select the preselector dc power cable (two-conductor cable labelled
1A, 2A, 3A, 1B, 2B, or 3B). Grasp the overmoulded portion of the cable connector
and push it onto the mating connector on the back of the preselector module.
Dress unused cables to the cabling bracket.
5. Repeat step 2 to step 4 for each preselector module to be installed.
CAUTION
Take care to ensure proper mechanical mating of the slide fit connection
between the matrix and the preselector modules. Improper connection could
damage the connectors.
6. Align the tracks on the bottom of the receiver matrix module with the tracks (used
in step 3) on the RFE shelf. Connect the matrix input connector to the preselector
output connector.
7. BTS5 and BTS6. Secure the preselector and receiver matrix module with its
1/4-turn fasteners.
BTS4. Hold the preselector and receiver matrix modules in place, tension the
retaining spring against the preselector and receiver matrix, then insert the two
ends of the spring into the slots in the RFE shelf. Secure the preselector and
receiver matrix with tie-wraps.
8. Connect the receiver matrix module dc power cable connector J2 to the receiver
matrix module input power connector located at the right rear corner of the
module.
9. Locate the receive RF coaxial cables (labelled Rx1A, Rx2A, Rx3A, Rx1B, Rx2B,
and Rx3B) that are tie-wrapped to the bracket at the back of the RFE shelf. Select
the appropriate cable and undo its tie-wrap. Connect this cable to the RF input
connector of the corresponding preselector filter at the front of the RFE shelf.
10. Repeat step 9 for each preselector to be installed and dress any unused cables to
the cabling bracket.
236 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing a preselector with a receiver matrix
the cabinet next to the RFE shelf. Connect the appropriate cables to the RF output
connectors of the receiver matrix module. Up to six coaxial cables can be
connected to each receiver matrix. Connect 50 ohm terminations to any unused
receiver matrix output connectors.
12. Set the receiver matrix module front panel DIP switches according to the
information in the site specific documentation.
13. Repeat step 2 to step 12 for the lower preselectors and receiver matrix module if
the BTS cabinet is equipped for diversity.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the dual path preselector GSM-100-423
Installing the dual path preselector
Procedure
To install a dual path preselector (DPP) module in a BTS4 or BTS6 cabinet:
1. Locate the appropriate DPP module position to be used. There are three sets of
antenna RF cables on the RFE shelf labelled RX1A/RX1B, RX2A/RX2B, and
RX3A/RX3B respectively from right to left.
2. Position the DPP module on the RFE shelf, but do not push it in yet.
3. Locate the power cables hanging from the bracket behind the RFE shelf. Select
the DPP dc power cables (two-conductor cables labelled 1A, 2A, 3A, 1B, 2B or
3B). Grasp the overmoulded portion of the cable connector and push it onto the
mating connector on the back of the DPP module. Dress any unused cables to the
cabling bracket.
4. Locate the receive RF coaxial cables that are tie-wrapped to the bracket behind
the RFE shelf (labelled RX1A, RX2A, RX3A, RX1B, RX2B and RX3B). Select the
appropriate cable and undo its tie wrap. Connect this cable to the RF input
connector of the corresponding DPP filter at the front of the RFE shelf. Repeat for
each DPP being used. Dress unused cables to the cabling bracket.
NOTE
The two receive RF coaxial cables fitted to each DPP filter must be crossed (A
from right to left and B from left to right) in front of the filter to maintain the
correct bend radius.
the cabinet next to the RFE shelf. Connect the appropriate cables to the RF output
connectors of the appropriate DPP module. Up to 14 coaxial cables can be
connected to each DPP module in a BTS6, or up to 10 in a BTS4 or BTS5.
Connect 50 ohm terminations to any unused DPP module output connectors.
Dress unused cables inside the cabinet.
CAUTION
Take care to ensure the correct routeing of the power cables from the DPP
modules to the back of the RFE shelf. Incorrect routeing could damage the
power connectors.
6. Position the DPP module and engage the tongues at the back of the RFE shelf.
Secure the DPP module to the RFE shelf using M4 retaining screws. Dress all
fitted cables to the RFE shelf.
7. Repeat step 1 to step 6 for each DPP module to be installed.
238 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the passive splitter
Installing the passive splitter
Introduction
The passive splitter distributes receive signals from a single antenna to multiple BTS6
cabinets. A maximum of three antenna pairs can be distributed among two BTS cabinets,
or one antenna pair to three cabinets, with passive splitters. The passive splitter is fitted
in the right hand position on the RFE shelf in BTS6 cabinets.
Procedure
To install a passive splitter:
1. Connect one end of an N-to-N coaxial cable to the TEST/AUX connector on the
rear of the DPP.
2. Connect an N-to-SMB adaptor to the other end of the cable.
3. Insert the adaptor into the hole in the support bracket behind the passive splitter.
4. Mate the adaptor to the SMB connector on the rear of the passive splitter.
5. Align the tongue on the bottom of the passive splitter with the right hand slot at the
rear of the RFE shelf.
6. Secure the module with two M4 screws.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the diversity receive extender GSM-100-423
Installing the diversity receive extender
Introduction
The diversity receive extender (DRX) is a low cost alternative to a multicoupler for
distributing receive signals from a single antenna to multiple BTS cabinets. Up to three
antennas can be distributed among two BTS cabinets.
The diversity receive extender kit (SWKN4001) consists of:
Two RF cables with a mini-UHF connector on one end and an N-type connector on
the other.
Two RF cables with 7/16 in connectors on each end (length to suit).
Two attenuators.
One mounting bracket.
Miscellaneous hardware to attach the attenuators to the bracket.
Procedure
To install a diversity receive extender:
1. Using RF coaxial cable (Motorola part number 3002443W01), connect the
mini-UHF end of one cable to an unused connector of the splitter connected to the
antenna to be distributed to a second BTS cabinet.
2. Dress the cable around the back of the splitter to the position of the attenuator
bracket.
3. With the attenuator bracket (Motorola part number 0702466W01) just clear of the
RFE shelf connect the N-type bulkhead connector to the attenuator bracket.
4. Connect the 6 dB attenuator (Motorola part number 5882781R01) through the
mounting bracket to the N-type bulkhead connector.
5. Locate the cable (already installed) connected to the appropriate unused receive
connector on the interconnect panel.
6. Move the bracket roughly into position and connect the 90 N-type connector end
of the cable (already installed) to the other end of the attenuator.
7. Hook the back of the bracket over the hole in the RFE shelf. Push the bracket onto
the front edge of the RFE shelf and fix with two thread forming screws (Motorola
part number 0312016A04).
8. Make up a cable with a 7/16 in connector on each end.
9. Connect one end of the cable to the connector connected to the 6 dB attenuator
on the primary BTS cabinet interconnect panel.
10. Connect the other end of the cable to the appropriate unused connector on the
interconnect panel on the secondary BTS cabinet.
11. Repeat step 1 to step 10 for each receive extender to be installed.
240 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Transmit combiner shelf
Introduction
In a BTS cabinet, transceiver RF output signals can be:
Combined by an RTC (not DCS1800) or hybrid combiners.
Bandpass filtered by Tx BPFs.
Both of the above.
None of the above.
The combiners and filters can be installed either in the transmit combiner shelf (below the
RFE shelf) or in external equipment racks.
Output signals are connected to the cabinet interconnect panel connectors Tx0, Tx1,
Tx2, Tx3, Tx4 and Tx5, from where they are routed either to external combining and
filtering equipment or directly to the antennas.
The modules
The sections that follow describe installation procedures for:
Hybrid combiner with power load.
Remotely tuneable channel combiner (RTC).
Transmit bandpass filter.
Transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering.
Internal transmit phasing harness.
External transmit phasing harness.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the hybrid combiner and power load GSM-100-423
Installing the hybrid combiner and power load
Introduction
Hybrid combiners are factory fitted to new cabinets. Use this procedure to upgrade
cabinets after installation.
Up to five hybrid combiners can be installed in a BTS6, or up to two in a BTS4 and
BTS5.
Before starting the installation procedure refer to the site specific documentation and
determine:
The number of hybrid combiners to be installed.
The positions of the hybrid combiners on the transmit combiner shelf.
The hybrid input/output cabling configuration to be used.
The number of DRCU or SCU transmitter outputs to be routed to the input of the
transmit combiners.
Procedure
To install a hybrid combiner and power load:
1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transmit combiner shelf.
2. BTS4 and BTS5. Go to step 8.
BTS6. Go to step 3.
3. Position the load bracket on the shelf. Lift the front of the bracket up and push it
towards the rear of the cabinet until the rear tab is engaged in the shelf slot.
Secure the bracket by inserting a screw in the front edge of the transmit combiner
shelf.
4. Mount the RF power load on the load bracket. The bracket can be used to mount
up to two loads. Secure each load to the bracket by inserting two screws through
holes in the bracket and into threaded holes in the bottom of the load.
5. Mount a hybrid combiner on the power load by mating the coaxial connectors (any
one of the connectors on the combiner can be used). Position the combiner so that
the end with the two unterminated connectors extends above the load.
6. Repeat step 3 to step 5 for each bracket.
7. Go to step 13.
8. Mount the RF power load on the power load mounting bracket. The bracket can be
used to mount up to two loads. Secure each load to the bracket by inserting two
screws through holes in the bracket and into threaded holes in the bottom of the
load.
9. Mount a combiner on the power load by mating the coaxial connectors (any one of
the connectors on the combiner be used). Position the combiner so that the end
with the two unterminated connectors extends above the load.
10. Repeat step 9 for each additional combiner to be used.
11. Position the load bracket (with load and combiner attached) on the shelf. Lift the
front of the bracket up and push it toward the rear of the cabinet until the rear tab
is engaged in the shelf slot. Secure the bracket by inserting a screw in the front
edge of the transmit combiner shelf.
242 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the hybrid combiner and power load
12. Repeat step 11 for the second load bracket.

13. Connect one end of the DRCU or SCU transmitter output coaxial cable to the
transmitter RF output connector of the appropriate DRCU or SCU.
NOTE
The two unterminated connectors located on the same side of the hybrid
combiner housing are input ports. The unterminated connector located on the
same side of the hybrid combiner housing as the load connection is the
combiner output port.
14. Connect the other end of the DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable to its hybrid
combiner input connector.
NOTE
To connect more than one hybrid combiner together, use RF coaxial cable
(Motorola part number 3009739D01). Connect one end of the cable to the
output port of the first hybrid combiner and the other cable end to the input
port of the second hybrid combiner.
15. Using RF coaxial cable (Motorola part number 3009531E01), connect the N-type
connector end of the RF coaxial cable to the final hybrid combiner output
connector. The 7/16 in connector end of the cable will be connected to the
corresponding Tx BPF input connector during the Installing the transmit
bandpass filter procedure described in this chapter.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the RTC GSM-100-423
Installing the RTC
Introduction
One remotely tuneable channel combiner (RTC) only can be installed on the transmit
combiner shelf. The RTC is mounted in the middle of the shelf between the Tx BPFs,
which are mounted on the outside edges of the shelf. The RTC can not be used in DCS
1800 systems.
Before installing the RTC, refer to the site specific documentation and obtain the
following user specified information:
The 8-bit RTC address (needed in the equip_device command for the COMB
variable).
Which RTC input is to carry RTC link A, and if applicable which input is to carry
RTC link B (needed in the equip_device command for the COMB and DRI
variables).
Which DRCU is to be connected to the RTC input designated as link A, and which
is to be connected to the RTC input designated as link B.
The status (in/out) of the coaxial coupling bridges on the front panel of the RTC.
The RTC output cabling configuration and which RTC outputs are to be used.
Procedure
Refer to the diagrams in this section for the location of all jumpers and switches.
To install an RTC:
1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the transmit combiner shelf. The RTC is
mounted on top of the transmit combiner shelf.
2. Position the RTC on the transmit combiner shelf. Lift the front of the RTC up and
push it toward the rear of the cabinet until the rear tabs are engaged in the shelf
slots. Secure the RTC with three screws inserted at the front edge of the transmit
combiner shelf.
3. Loosen the captive screws that secure the internal jumper/switch cover plate
located on the upper left corner of the RTC front panel. Remove the cover plate to
gain access to the internal jumpers.
CAUTION
The captive screws securing the internal jumper/switch cover plate to the
RTC front panel must be secured finger tight. Do not use a screwdriver.
4. Set the RTC address jumpers ADRS0 (LSB) to ADRS7 (MSB) to match the RTC
address in the site specific documentation and the database.
NOTE
Jumpering an address line to GND provides a logic 1 address bit. Leaving an
address line unjumpered provides a logic 0 address bit. These jumpers allow
a decimal address range of 0 to 255.
5. Ensure that the RS232 interface port enable jumpers are out. These jumpers are
reserved for software testing.
244 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the RTC
6. Set the RTC link jumpers. Insert a LINK A jumper to GND for the cavity (CAV0 to
CAV5) input designated as RTC link A. If applicable, insert a LINK B jumper to
GND for the cavity (CAV0 to CAV5) input designated as RTC link B.
NOTE
(1) CAV5 LINK A and CAV5 LINK B are for future equipment design
and are always out.
(2) On a 4-cavity RTC, CAV4 LINK A and CAV4 LINK B are always
out.
(3) Only one cavity can be jumpered as Link A and only one cavity
can be jumpered as Link B.
(4) A cavity cannot be jumpered as both Link A and Link B.
(5) For data link redundancy both Link A and Link B are selected.
7. Insert the RTC parking jumpers.
NOTE
The parking jumpers prevent the RTC stepping motors from turning when no
dc input power is applied. Leave the parking jumpers in at all times; this does
not affect the normal operation of the equipment when dc input power is
applied to the RTC, because the system software ignores these jumpers and
the motors operate as normal.
8. Insert the required RTC coaxial coupling bridges.

9. Terminate all unused RF input connectors with a 50 ohm dummy load.
10. Connect a short circuit between the centre conductor and shield of any unused
output port coaxial connectors and all exposed coaxial bridge connectors.
11. Locate the cables that are tie-wrapped to the bracket at the back of the RFE shelf.
Select the RTC dc power cable labelled J1 and undo its tie-wrap.
12. Fit the RTC dc power cable connector J1 into either of the two mating connectors
on the upper right corner of the RTC front panel. Dress any unused cables to the
cabling bracket.
13. Connect one end of the DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable (Motorola part
number 3009651D01 or 3009651D02) to the transmitter RF output connector of
the appropriate DRCU.
NOTE
When performing step 12 and step 13, make sure that the DRCUs are
connected to the correct RTC cavity input. This is critical to proper DRCU/RTC
cavity frequency tuning as well as proper DRCU/RTC link communications.
14. Connect the other end of the DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable to the
appropriate RTC input connector.
15. Repeat step 13 and step 14 for each DRCU to be used in the BTS cabinet.
16. Connect the N-type connector end of the RF coaxial cable (Motorola part number
3009531E01) to the appropriate RTC output connector.
NOTE
Do not connect the 7/16 in connector end of the cable to the corresponding Tx
BPF input connector until the appropriate step during the procedure described
in Installing the transmit bandpass filter in this chapter.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the RTC GSM-100-423
17. Repeat step 16 for the remaining output connector of the RTC if the connector is to
be used.
18. Terminate all unused RTC RF connectors (input, output and coupling) with 50 ohm
dummy loads. If terminations are not available for unused RF connectors, fit the
caps supplied to these connectors.
Five-cavity RTC
The diagram shows the front panel of a five-cavity RTC:
FIVECAVITY RTC COAXIAL BRIDGE SETTINGS VS CAVITY CONFIGURATION

5/0 CAV0 TO CAV4 NOT USED IN IN IN IN

4/1 CAV1 TO CAV4 CAV0 OUT IN IN IN
3/2 CAV2 TO CAV4 CAV0 AND CAV1 IN OUT IN IN
2/3 CAV3 AND CAV4 CAV0 TO CAV2 IN IN OUT IN
1/4 CAV4 CAV0 TO CAV3 IN IN IN OUT
INPUT FROM DRCUs DC PWR input connectors
CAV 3 CAV 1
See Detail A
Output port 0
(terminated with a short
Output
circuit coaxial connector for this
Port 1 application) see note
JU4 CAV 4 CAV 2 CAV 0
JU3 INPUT FROM JU2

DRCUs
Jumper Block
NOTE: Dashed lines represent coaxial coupling
connectors. There are two connectors
associated with each coaxial coupling bridge

(JU1 to JU4/JU5). These connectors are

exposed when a coaxial coupling bridge is

removed. These exposed connectors and any

RS232 unused OUTPUT PORT connector must be

INTERFACE terminated with a short circuit coaxial connector.

FULL

PARTIAL

RESET RESET

ENABLE Reset

RESET Switches

Fault LED

DETAIL A
246 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the RTC
Four-cavity RTC
The diagram shows the front panel of a four-cavity RTC:
FOURCAVITY RTC COAXIAL BRIDGE SETTINGS VS CAVITY CONFIGURATION

4/0 CAV0 TO CAV3 NOT USED IN IN IN

3/1 CAV1 TO CAV3 CAV0 OUT IN IN
2/2 CAV2 AND CAV3 CAV0 AND CAV1 IN OUT IN
1/3 CAV3 CAV0 TO CAV2 IN IN OUT
INPUT FROM DRCUs DC PWR input connectors
CAV 3 CAV 1
See Detail A
Output port 0
(terminated with a
short circuit coaxial
Output connector for this
Port 1 application) see
note
CAV 2 CAV 0
JU1
Jumper Block JU3 INPUT FROM JU2 (NOTE)
DRCUs
NOTE: Dashed lines represent coaxial

coupling connectors. There are

two connectors associated with

each coaxial coupling bridge (JU1

to JU4/JU5). These connectors

RS232

INTERFA are exposed when a coaxial

CE coupling bridge is removed. These

exposed connectors and any

unused OUTPUT PORT

connector must be terminated with

FULL PARTIAL

RESET RESET a short circuit coaxial connector.

ENABLE Reset

RESET

Switches

Fault LED

DETAIL A

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the cavity combining block GSM-100-423
Installing the cavity combining block
Introduction to
CCB
Cavity combining blocks (CCB) replace the remotely tuneable cavity combiner (RTC),
and can be installed in Omni and Sector configurations.
The following information details the installation procedures for upgrading from a RTC to
a CCB, in the same BTS configuration.
Safety
Installing a cavity combining block requires the removal of RF transmitter power, it is
therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.
Notify the OMC of imminent installation activity.
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present within
the cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or
batteries are connected.
Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF

power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.
Preparation for
fitting CCBs
The following steps are required prior to installation of a CCB:
1. Fit CCB bracket (Motorola part number 0704865N01) to the CCB, using two M6
nuts with plain washers and one M8 bolt with plain and locking washers.
2. Two CCBs are required if the installation is for an Omni 4, 5 or 6 site, remove the
short circuit stub (dummy load) from the CCB with the filter attached (Motorola part
number 9104559D02).
3. Remove CCB control module cover from the CCB.
NOTE
The CCB control module (Motorola part number SWLN4507AA) will already be
attached to the front of the CCB.
4. Power down the BTS cabinet by turning all circuit breakers to the OFF position.
5. All dc, Tx and Rx cables should be marked at this stage to ensure they are
correctly assembled during the installation.
6. Remove all front end RF equipment from the cabinet, including the DPP shelf.
Remove DPP modules from the DPP shelf.
248 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the cavity combining block
Omni
configuration
(Cables not shown)
Initial Omni configuration procedure

The initial installation steps for all Omni configurations are as follows:
1. Fit an Omni configuration DPP, as detailed in Installing the dual path
preselector of this chapter.
2. Place the CCB output assembly (Motorola part number 91004559D02) onto the RF
shelf, so that the rear of the module is accessible (turned 90 degrees clockwise).
Fit RF output cable TX0 to the rear of the filter.
3. Rotate the CCB anti-clockwise 90 degrees and slide into the two retaining fixtures
at the rear of the unit. Secure the CCB bracket using two M4 x 8 screws, torqued
to 2.2 Nm.
NOTE
A right angled torx drive will be required for this operation due to space
restrictions.
4. Fit the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) to the RTC power
connector at the rear of the cabinet.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Omni 3 configuration
Further steps for an Omni 3 configuration are as follows:
1. Connect the power cable spur to the CCB.
Omni 4, 5 and 6 configuration

Further steps for Omni 4, 5 and 6 configurations are as follows:
1. For Omni4, 5 and 6 configurations fit the extension CCB into the cabinet in a
similar manner as for the original CCB. Fit the RF linking cable between the two
CCBs and ensure the short circuit stub is connected to the spare RF socket on top
of the second CCB.
2. Ensure the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) is routed
between the two CCBs. Connect the power cable to the CCBs, noting that CCB0
is on the right.
3. Fit the signal link cable (Motorola part number 3004650D01) to connect the two
control modules.
Final Omni configuration procedure

The final installation steps for all Omni configurations are as follows:
1. Fit right angled 50 ohm N-type adaptors (Motorola part number 2804867N01) to all
CCB input ports.
2. Slide the CCB cover brackets over these adaptors and secure each bracket with
two M4 x 8 screws, torqued to 2.2 Nm.
3. Fit the BTS4D/6 blanking bracket to the left side of the cabinet and secure using
two M6 x 12 screws torqued to 3.4 Nm.
4. Route the splitter cables from the left of the cabinet, connecting the DPP to the
radio modules, behind the two CCB cover brackets.
NOTE
A BTS4D may require the splitter cables extending, if this is so use RF splitter
extension cables (Motorola part number 3086226E01).
A BTS6 cabinet may need the left blanking panel, by the transceivers,
removed to enable removal of a cable tie.
5. Connect the transceivers to the CCBs using the relevant RF cable:
Transceiver number BTS4D cable number BTS6 cable number

0 3004869N03 3004869N01
1 3004869N03 3004869N02
2 3004869N03 3004869N03
3 3004869N03 3004869N04
4 N/A 3004869N05
5 N/A 3004869N06
250 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
6. Switch all the circuit breakers to the ON position.
NOTE
The cavity identities stored on the control modules may need changing to
match those of the CCBs. This can be achieved by interrogating the CCB and
changing the switches on the control module. Refer to the relevant procedures
detailed in BSS Optimization: Installation and Configuration: (GSM-100-423).
7. Once fully operational refit the control module covers and close the cabinet door.
8. The installation is now complete, log completion of the installation activity and
inform the OMC.
Sector
configuration
If a Sector cabinet is to have two CCBs installed each will be fitted with an output filter
and short circuit stub (dummy load).
(Cables not shown)

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Sector configuration procedure

The steps for fitting a CCB into position CCB0 are as follows:
1. Fit Sector configuration DPPs, as detailed in Installing the dual path preselector
of this chapter.
2. Place the CCB with attached filter (Motorola part number 91004559D02) onto the
RF shelf, so that the rear of the module is accessible (turned 90 degrees
clockwise). Fit RF output cable TX0 to the rear of the filter.
3. Rotate the CCB anti-clockwise 90 degrees and slide into the two retaining fixtures
at the rear of the unit. Secure the CCB bracket using two M4 x 8 screws, torqued
to 2.2 Nm.
NOTE
A right angled torx drive will be required for this operation due to space
restrictions.
4. Fit the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) to the RTC
connector at the rear of the cabinet.
Fitting a second CCB

The steps for fitting a CCB into position CCB1 are as follows:
1. Fit the remaining output CCB into the cabinet in a similar manner as for the original
CCB.
NOTE
The RF output cable TX1 must be fitted to the rear of the filter. An additional
person will be required to hold the CCB clear of the RF shelf to allow this
connector to be fitted.
2. Ensure the power cable spur (Motorola part number 3004886N01) is routed
between the two CCBs. Connect the power cable to the CCBs, noting that CCB0
is on the right.
3. Fit the signal link cable (Motorola part number 3004650D01) to connect the two
control modules.
Fitting a third CCB

Further steps for a Sector 3-3-3 configuration are as follows:
1. Install a third output CCB into the second BTS cabinet by repeating the Omni 3
installation procedure.
2. Link the two cabinets in the normal 3-3-3 fashion.
Final Sector configuration procedure

The final steps for all sector configurations are as follows:
1. Fit right angled 50 ohm N-type adaptors (Motorola part number 2804867N01) to all
CCB input ports.
2. Slide the CCB cover brackets over these adaptors and secure each bracket with
3. Fit the BTS4D/6 blanking bracket to the left side of the cabinet and secure using
252 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
4. Route the splitter cables from the left of the cabinet, connecting the DPPs to the
transceivers, behind the two CCB cover brackets.
NOTE
A BTS6 cabinet may need the left blanking panel, by the transceivers,
removed to enable removal of a cable tie.
5. Connect the transceivers to the CCBs using the relevant RF cable:
Transceiver number BTS6 cable number

0 3004869N01
1 3004869N02
2 3004869N03
3 3004869N04
4 3004869N05
5 3004869N06
6. Switch all the circuit breakers to the ON position.
NOTE
The cavity identities stored on the control modules may need changing to
match those of the CCBs. This can be achieved by interrogating the CCB and
changing the switches on the control module. Refer to the relevant procedures
detailed in BSS Optimization: Installation and Configuration: (GSM-100-423).
7. Once fully operational refit the control module covers and close the cabinet door.
8. The installation is now complete, log completion of the installation activity and
inform the OMC.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the transmit bandpass filter GSM-100-423
Installing the transmit bandpass filter
Introduction
Transmit bandpass filters (Tx BPFs) are factory fitted to new cabinets (although cables
are not connected to them). Steps 1 to 3 of these instructions are intended for upgrades
carried out after installation.
One Tx BPF is required for each transmit antenna. A BTS cabinet can support a
maximum of three transmit antenna signals via three Tx BPFs.
One Tx BPF can be mounted on the right of the shelf (Tx BPF0), one in the middle of the
shelf (Tx BPF1), and one on the left of the shelf (Tx BPF2).
NOTE
If an RTC is installed, only Tx BPF0 and Tx BPF2 can be used.
Before installing a Tx BPF, refer to the site specific documentation and determine:
The number of Tx BPFs to be installed.
The positions in which the Tx BPFs are to be installed.
The Tx BPF input/output cabling configuration to be used.
Procedure
To install a Tx BPF:
2. Position the Tx BPF on the transmit combiner shelf. Lift the front of the Tx BPF up
and push it towards the rear of the cabinet until the rear tabs are engaged in the
shelf slots. Secure the Tx BPF to the shelf by inserting a screw at the front edge of
the transmit combiner shelf.
3. Repeat step 2 for all the Tx BPFs to be installed.
4. Connect RF coaxial cables (Motorola part number 3009532E01) from the combiner
output or transceiver transmitter RF output to the corresponding Tx BPF input
connector on the bottom front panel of Tx BPF.
5. Locate and untie the RF coaxial cables labelled Tx0 to Tx4 (cables Tx0, Tx1 and
Tx2 are on the right of the cabinet, and Tx3 and Tx4 are on the left of the cabinet).
6. Connect the 7/16 in connector of the appropriate cable to the corresponding Tx
BPF output connector on the top front panel of Tx BPF.
254 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering
Installing the transmit RF cabling for external combining and

filtering
Introduction
Before starting the installation procedure, refer to the site specific documentation to
determine the number of transmitter outputs to be routed to the transmit output
connectors on top of the cabinet.
Procedure
To install transmit RF cabling for external combining and filtering:
2. Connect one end of the transmitter output coaxial cable (Motorola part number
3009647E01) to the transmitter RF output connector of the DRCU.
3. Repeat step 2 for each DRCU in the BTS cabinet.
4. Locate and untie the RF coaxial cables labelled Tx0 to Tx4 (cables Tx0 and Tx1
on the right of the cabinet and Tx2, Tx3, and Tx4 on the left of the cabinet).
5. Remove the panels on the side walls of the DRCU shelf assembly.
6. Route the cables Tx0 and/or Tx1 (depending on which transmit output connector
on the top of the cabinet is to be used) up and through the opening next to the
right side of the transmit combiner shelf.
7. Connect the 7/16 in connector of the appropriate Tx cable to the corresponding
DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable connector.
8. Route the cables Tx2, Tx3 and/or Tx4 (depending on which transmit output
connector on the top of the cabinet is to be used) up and through the opening next
to the left side of the transmit combiner shelf.
9. Connect the 7/16 in connector of the appropriate Tx cable to the corresponding
DRCU transmitter output coaxial cable connector.
10. Reinstall the panels on each side wall of the DRCU shelf assembly.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing digital modules GSM-100-423
Installing digital modules
Introduction
WARNING
without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the data
in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out
connectors.
CAUTION
The BTS and BSSC cabinets use circuitry that is sensitive to static discharge.
Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment. Do not touch
connector contacts. Wear an earthed high-impedance wrist strap when
handling modules.
NOTE
Bus terminator cards (BTCs) are fitted in all BSU/RXU shelves at the factory.
The BTC ejectors have a protective plastic cover over the ejector tabs, which
is held in place by a crosshead screw. The plastic cover must be removed
before installing or replacing a BTC module.
Before installing digital modules, refer to the site specific documentation to determine the
following:
The number of digital modules to be installed.
The positions in which the digital modules are to be installed.
Factory
installation
Some cabinets are delivered with all digital modules already installed. If this is the case,
perform only those steps in the procedure that relate to cabling.
If a digital module is found to be unserviceable, return it to Motorola in the container
provided in the PCB transportation boxes kit (SWBN4831A).
256 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing digital modules
Installing DRIX3
modules
When installing DRIX3 modules use the normal procedure with the following provisos:
1. Fully remove the blue or black screw in the port guide by turning the connector
anti-clockwise. Push the fibre through the screw in the port guide so that the fibre
extends from the connector by a few millimetres, then reconnect the port guide to
the DRIX3.
NOTE
Inserting the fibre with the port guide in place, that is, loosened by a quarter
turn, results in a poor connection and causes DRI alarms 61, 62, and 63.
2. Jumpers must be positioned on links J3 and J6 for a BTS4/BTS5, or on J3 and J7

for a BTS6.
Installing BBBX
modules
The battery backup board (BBBX) module has no backplane connections, and can
therefore be installed in any available slot, provided that the associated cables can reach
it.
The cables are factory installed in the cabinet, but must be connected to the BBBX
module on site.
Cabling is as follows:
BBBX Type Pin Function Connects

connector to
Input 9-way male D-type 1 Input return DAB
4 Input good signal
5 Output good signal
6 Input voltage
7 Earth
9 Signal return (0 V
digital)
Output 4way 1 0V Connector
AI2 on
4 +5 V backplane
NOTE
Pins not listed are not used.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Procedure
CAUTION
Refer to Handling optical fibres in Chapter 1 before connecting fibre optic
cables.
To install the digital modules:

1. Locate and unpack the full- and half-size digital modules. Place the modules on
an antistatic bench mat. If an antistatic bench mat is not available place each
module on the antistatic bag from which it was removed.
2. Locate a PIX module. If no PIX module is present go to step 6.
3. Locate the PIX interconnect cables that are tie-wrapped to the BSU/RXU shelf. If
one PIX module is present, cut the tie-wrap for the cable labelled PIX0. If two PIX
modules are present, cut the tie-wraps for both cables (labelled PIX0 and PIX1).
4. Insert the first PIX module into slot 16, ensuring that the module is firmly seated in
the backplane connector. Insert the second PIX module (if present) into slot 15,
making sure that the module is firmly seated in the backplane connector.
5. Connect the cable PIX0 to the PIX module in slot number 16 and tighten the two
captive screws to secure the cable to the PIX module. Connect the cable PIX1 to
the PIX module in slot 15 (if present) and tighten the two captive screws to secure
the cable to the PIX module.
6. Mount the remaining modules in the BSU/RXU shelf assembly according to the
configuration information in the site specific documentation and the diagrams on
the next two pages.
7. Locate the fibre optic pair and the DRCU module for DRCU 0. Connect the fibre
optic cable marked CR400 to the DRCU connector marked CR400, and connect
the fibre optic cable marked CR401 to the DRCU connector marked CR401. The
connectors marked D1 and D2 are not used in this configuration.
8. Ensure that the jumpers on all DRIX modules are positioned on links J3 (BE4/6)
and J7 (BE6).
9. Make sure that the switch on the front of each digital module is set to the down
(disabled) position.
10. Using a non-permanent marker, note the module arrangement used for this BSU
shelf on the label affixed to the inside of the cabinet door.
258 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing digital modules
BSU shelf
The diagram shows the BSU shelf module arrangement. It is intended to show module
locations and is not drawn to scale. Modules in the lower shelf are actually twice the
vertical height of those in the upper.
NOTE
DRI and DRIX modules are not used in a BSSC cabinet BSU shelf.
CARD CAGE BOARD ARRANGEMENT DIRECTORY NOTATIONS TO BE MADE WITH NONPERMANENT MARKERS ONLY
WHEN SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT A WRIST STRAP

GROUNDING DEVICE MUST BE WORN AT ALL TIMES
Any open slots in the lower shelf area must have a filler panel in place for proper cooling of shelf modules

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
RXU shelf
The diagram shows the RXU shelf module arrangement. It is intended to show module
locations and is not drawn to scale. Modules in the lower shelf are actually twice the
vertical height of those in the upper.
WHEN SERVICING THIS EQUIPMENT A WRIST STRAP

GROUNDING DEVICE MUST BE WORN AT ALL TIMES
Any open slots in the lower shelf area must have a filler panel in place for proper cooling of shelf modules
260 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Optical fibre installation
Optical fibre installation
Introduction
The following procedures detail the instructions for connecting both polymer fibre optic
and glass fibre optic cables. Before commencing installation refer to Handling optical
fibres for instructions on care and handling of fibre optic cables.
Polymer fibre
optic cable
installation
BTS4/5 cabinet preparation

Follow the necessary steps in Cabinet preparation under Replacing fibre optic cables
in BTS4/5, to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.
BTS4/5 polymer fibre optic installation

1. Connect the radio end of the new fibre to the radio. This connection is made with
an SMA connector and is achieved by turning the connector clockwise. Do not
over-tighten, hand tight is sufficient.
CAUTION
Do not use pliers or spanners to torque up the SMA connector. This will
damage the radio.
2. Route the fibre along the DRCU cable tray to the left.
3. Pass the loose DRIX ends of the fibre through the opening at the left side of the
DRCU cable tray.
4. Feed the fibre through the hole from the top. This aids the routeing and prevents
any straining or stretching of the fibre.
5. Route the fibre down the cabinet side wall.
6. Pass the ends of the fibre back through the cabinet wall and into the left side of the
digital card cage.
Carefully feed through any extra cable as required.
7. Route the cable along the digital card cable tray and through the plastic separators
adjacent to the appropriate DRIX board.
NOTE
Ensure that sufficient cable has been routed to form a neat loop to the DRIX,
complying with bend radius requirements detailed in Handling optical fibres.
Proceed to Connecting the fibre to the DRIX.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Optical fibre installation GSM-100-423
BTS6 Cabinet preparation

in BTS6 , to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.
BTS6 polymer fibre optic installation

1. Route the new fibre through the corresponding grommet in the DRCU cable tray,
which is associated with the DRCU to be connected, from the underside.
NOTE
If the hole is too small the grommet should be removed from the cable tray and
split. It should then be slipped onto the new fibre near the radio end. Pass
this end through the original hole in the DRCU cage cable tray from the
underside, and then refit the grommet.
CAUTION
Do not use pliers or spanners to tighten the SMA connector. This will cause
damage.
3. Route an amount of fibre through the grommet hole in the DRCU cable tray from
below as required to prevent any straining or stretching of the fibre.
Refer to the note above to correctly fit new fibre.
4. Route the DRIX end of the fibre through the corresponding grommet in the plastic
air baffle, towards the associated DRIX card, from above.
5. Feed through enough fibre optic cable as required to connect to the DRIX.
NOTE
Proceed to Connecting the fibre to the DRIX.
262 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Connecting the fibre to the DRIX

This procedure applies to all DRIX original (no suffix) and DRIX3 (A or B) using polymer
fibre connections.
NOTE
This procedure is not applicable to DRIX3C, as it is designed to be used with
glass fibre optic cables only
CAUTION
Inserting or removing the fibre with the port guide still in place (that is loosened
by a quarter turn) results in damage to the fibre end and poor connections.
This will directly cause DRI alarms 61, 62 and 63. If alarms do occur the fibre
should be disconnected and replaced with a new item if:
The length of bare fibre exposed beyond the protective sheath exceeds
4.5 mm.
The fibre sheath is damaged where the port guide has clamped.
The exposed fibre is damaged in anyway, such as being scratched or
bent.
The fibre ends are dirty and cannot be cleaned satisfactory.
When making a new connection to the DRIX board, fully remove the blue or black
screw-in port guide, by rotating the port guide anticlockwise until it separates from the
component body. Push the bare fibre end through the screw-in port guide so the fibre
extends from the connector (as shown in Figure 2-1) by 10 mm minimum, then reconnect
the port guide to the DRIX. The port guide should then be slid down the fibre and
screwed up. During this last step, the fibre should be held in place so that no movement
can occur. It should not be allowed to hang free when the guide is screwed up. Do not
apply excessive force to retain the fibre in place.
10mm min 4.5mm max

FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
OUTER SHEATH EXPOSED FIBRE

PORT GUIDE
Figure 2-1 Fibre cable through port guide

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Optical fibre installation GSM-100-423
Glass fibre optic

cable installation
BTS4/5 cabinet preparation

in BTS4/5, to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.
BTS4/5 glass fibre optic installation

CAUTION
damage.
2. Route the fibre along the DRCU cable tray to the left.
3. Pass the loose DRIX end of the fibre through the opening at the left side of the
DRCU cable tray.
4. Feed the fibre through the hole from the top. This aids the routeing and prevents
any straining or stretching of the fibre.
5. Route the fibre down the cabinet side wall.
6. Pass the ends of the fibre back through the cabinet wall and into the left side of the
digital card cage.
Feed through any extra cable as required.
7. Route the cable along the digital card cable tray and through the plastic separators
adjacent to the appropriate DRIX board.
NOTE
8. Connect the DRIX end of the new fibre to the DRIX. This connection is made with
over tighten, hand tight is sufficient.
Proceed to Cabinet restoration.
264 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
BTS6 cabinet preparation

in BTS6, to make the cabinet ready to accept fibre optic installation.
BTS6 glass fibre optic installation

1. Route the new fibre through the corresponding grommet in the DRCU cable tray,
which is associated with the DRCU to be connected, from the underside.
NOTE
If the hole is too small the grommet should be removed from the cable tray and
split. It should then be slipped onto the new fibre near the radio end. Pass
this end through the original hole in the DRCU cage cable tray from the
underside, and then refit the grommet.
CAUTION
damage.
3. Route an amount of fibre through the grommet hole in the DRCU cable tray from
below as required to prevent any straining or stretching of the fibre.
4. Route the DRIX end of the fibre through the corresponding grommet in the plastic
air baffle, towards the associated DRIX card, from above.
NOTE
If the hole is too small the grommet should be removed from the plastic air
baffle and split. It should then be slipped onto the new fibre near the DRIX
end. Pass this end through the hole in the plastic air baffle from above, and
then refit the grommet.
5. Feed through enough fibre optic cable as required to connect to the DRIX.
NOTE
6. Connect the DRIX end of the new fibre to the DRIX. This connection is made with
Proceed to Cabinet restoration.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the control signal cabling GSM-100-423
Installing the control signal cabling
Introduction
The internal control signal cabling within each BTS cabinet is factory fitted and tested.
This section deals with external connections.
Inter-cabinet
fibre optic
connections
WARNING
without the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from either the data
in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out
connectors.
Refer to the site specific documentation for information on the following inter-cabinet fibre
optic interconnections:
BTS cabinet to other BTS cabinet.
BTS cabinet to BSSC cabinet.
BTS cabinet to other BSSC cabinet.
E1/T1 line
connections
CAUTION
Transient protection of the E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment is the
responsibility of the end user. All E1/T1 lines brought in from outside the
building must be spark-gap (three-anode gas tube) protected at the building
entry point. Where this is not practical, an optional transient-protection board
can be purchased from Motorola. Consult Motorola about transient protection
for the BTS and BSSC sites.
E1/T1 line connections are made by one of the following methods:

120 ohm twisted pair through a BIB mounted on top of a BTS.
75 ohm coaxial cable through a T43 board mounted on top of a BTS cabinet.
See T43 to backplane connections and BIB to backplane connections at the end of
this chapter for the connections between the T43 or BIB and the cabinet backplane.
266 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Installing the control signal cabling
End user I/O

device cabling
A maximum of two PIX modules per cabinet allows for a total of eight sets of output
control contacts and 16 input sense contacts at a BTS or BSSC site.
Relay-closure outputs
CAUTION
If connectors PIX0 and/or PIX1 on the cabinet interconnect panel are unused,
they should be protected from damage by static electricity or foreign matter by
ensuring that the covers supplied are fitted.
The PIX module includes four relays controlled by a GPROC. There are both normally
open and normally closed contacts for each of the four relays. The contacts are rated for
1A at 30 V and can be used to control external equipment at the site such as fans or
audible alarms. The external equipment is connected to the BTS at the 62-pin D-type
connector marked PIX0 or PIX1 on the interconnect panel.
Dry-contact inputs
The PIX module includes eight inputs which can be used to connect external sensors.
These inputs cause alarms to be reported at the BSC, which forwards the alarm to the
OMC.
The external sensors are supplied by the end user. Each sensor is connected across a
pair of PIX inputs (SEN Dn and SEN Sn, where n corresponds to a PIX opto-coupler 1 to
8). For proper operation, all sensors must be of the dry-contact type with the following
specification:
10 kohms or greater across sense inputs is required for a logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler
off).
1 kohm or less across sense inputs is required for a logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).
These inputs are available at the 62-pin D-type connectors marked PIX0 and PIX1 on the
interconnect panel. Ensure that the connector being used is terminated at a PIX module
in the cabinet.
PIX connector
The diagram shows the PIX connector:
(MATING SIDE OF FEMALE CONNECTOR VIEWED FROM TOP OF CABINET.)


68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Installing the control signal cabling GSM-100-423
PIX connector
details
The table lists the PIX connector details:
PIN no. Function PIN no. Function PIN no. Function

1 Sense S7 22 Not used 43 Not used
2 Sense D7 23 Not used 44 Sense S8
3 Not used 24 Not used 45 Sense D8
13 Not used 34 Not used 55 Not used
14 Common 4 35 Not used 56 NC4
15 Not used 36 NO4 57 Not used
21 Not used 42 NO1
268 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 T43 to backplane connections
T43 to backplane connections
Introduction
The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the four
associated T43 positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will have
four T43 positions associated with each cage. Some equipment, for example the BTS,
may not equip all four T43 positions.
The following mappings are listed:
MS0 to BSU.
MS1 to BSU.
MS2 to BSU.
MS3 to BSU.
MS0 to RXU.
MS1 to RXU.
MS2 to RXU.
MS3 to RXU.
MS0 to BSU
The table lists T43 MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping:
MSI no. Card T43 conn.

slot PIN no.
4 L13 J1, Tx
4 L13 J2, Rx
4 L13 J4, Tx
4 L13 J5, Rx
2 L15 J7, Tx
2 L15 J8, Rx
2 L15 J10, Tx
2 L15 J11, Rx
0 L17 J13, Tx
0 L17 J14, Rx
0 L17 J16, Tx
0 L17 J17, Rx

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
T43 to backplane connections GSM-100-423
MS1 to BSU

slot PIN no.
5 L12 J1, Tx
5 L12 J2, Rx
5 L12 J4, Tx
5 L12 J5, Rx
3 L14 J7, Tx
3 L14 J8, Rx
3 L14 J10, Tx
3 L14 J11, Rx
1 L16 J13, Tx
1 L16 J14, Rx
1 L16 J16, Tx
1 L16 J17, Rx
MS2 to BSU

slot PIN no.
10 L7 J1, Tx
10 L7 J2, Rx
10 L7 J4, Tx
10 L7 J5, Rx
8 L9 J7, Tx
8 L9 J8, Rx
8 L9 J10, Tx
8 L9 J11, Rx
6 L11 J13, Tx
6 L11 J14, Rx
6 L11 J16, Tx
6 L11 J17, Rx
270 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS3 to BSU

slot PIN no.
11 L6 J1, Tx
11 L6 J2, Rx
11 L6 J4, Tx
11 L6 J5, Rx
9 L8 J7, Tx
9 L8 J8, Rx
9 L8 J10, Tx
9 L8 J11, Rx
7 L10 J13, Tx
7 L10 J14, Rx
7 L10 J16, Tx
7 L10 J17, Rx
MS0 to RXU
The table lists T43 MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping:
MSI/XCDR Card T43

slot conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 5 L19 J1, Tx
XCDR 5 L19 J2, Rx
XCDR 4 L20 J4, Tx
XCDR 4 L20 J5, Rx
XCDR 3 L21 J7, Tx
XCDR 3 L21 J8, Rx
XCDR 2 L22 J10, Tx
XCDR 2 L22 J11, Rx
XCDR 1 L23 J13, Tx
XCDR 1 L23 J14, Rx
XCDR 0 L24 J16, Tx
XCDR 0 L24 J17, Rx

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
T43 to backplane connections GSM-100-423
MS1 to RXU
MSI/XCDR Card T43

slot conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 11 L13 J1, Tx
XCDR 11 L13 J2, Rx
XCDR 10 L14 J4, Tx
XCDR 10 L14 J5, Rx
XCDR 9 L15 J7, Tx
XCDR 9 L15 J8, Rx
XCDR 8 L16 J10, Tx
XCDR 8 L16 J11, Rx
XCDR 7 L17 J13, Tx
XCDR 7 L17 J14, Rx
XCDR 6 L18 J16, Tx
XCDR 6 L18 J17, Rx
MS2 to RXU
MSI/XCDR Card T43

slot conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 1 L9 J1, Tx
XCDR 1 L9 J2, Rx
XCDR 1 L9 J4, Tx
XCDR 1 L9 J5, Rx
XCDR 0 L10 J7, Tx
XCDR 0 L10 J8, Rx
XCDR 0 L10 J10, Tx
XCDR 0 L10 J11, Rx
XCDR 13 L11 J13, Tx
XCDR 13 L11 J14, Rx
XCDR 12 L12 J16, Tx
XCDR 12 L12 J17, Rx
272 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS3 to RXU
MSI/XCDR Card T43

slot conn.
PIN no.
XCDR 4 L6 J1, Tx
XCDR 4 L6 J2, Rx
XCDR 4 L6 J4, Tx
XCDR 4 L6 J5, Rx
XCDR 3 L7 J7, Tx
XCDR 3 L7 J8, Rx
XCDR 3 L7 J10, Tx
XCDR 3 L7 J11, Rx
XCDR 2 L8 J13, Tx
XCDR 2 L8 J14, Rx
XCDR 2 L8 J16, Tx
XCDR 2 L8 J17, Rx

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
BIB to backplane connections GSM-100-423
BIB to backplane connections
Introduction
The following tables show the mapping between a single backplane and the four
associated BIB positions (MS0 to MS3). Equipment containing two card cages will have
four BIB positions associated with each cage. Some equipment, for example the BTS,
may not equip all four BIB positions.
The mappings listed are:
MS0 to BSU.
MS1 to BSU.
MS2 to BSU.
MS3 to BSU.
MS0 to RXU.
MS1 to RXU.
MS2 to RXU.
MS3 to RXU.
274 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 BIB to backplane connections
MS0 to BSU
The table lists the BIB MS0 to BSU backplane card slot mapping:
MSI no. Card PCM signal BIB conn. Signal BIB no.
slot (MSI board) PIN no. (BIB board) & MS no.
4 L13 MEGATX+ J11 EXT_MEGA_RX1+ 0
4 L13 MEGATX J120 EXT_MEGA_RX1 0
4 L13 MEGARX+ J12 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ 0
4 L13 MEGARX J121 EXT_MEGA_TX1 0
4 L13 MEGBTX+ J14 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ 0
4 L13 MEGBTX J123 EXT_MEGA_RX4 0
4 L13 MEGBRX+ J15 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ 0
4 L13 MEGBRX J124 EXT_MEGA_TX4 0

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS1 to BSU
276 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS2 to BSU

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS3 to BSU
278 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS0 to RXU
The table lists the BIB MS0 to RXU backplane card slot mapping:
MSI/XCDR Card PCM signal BIB Signal BIB no.

slot (MSI/XCDR conn. (BIB board) & MS no.
board) PIN no.
XCDR 5 L19 MEGATX+ J11 EXT_MEGA_RX1+ 0
XCDR 5 L19 MEGATX J120 EXT_MEGA_RX1 0
XCDR 5 L19 MEGARX+ J12 EXT_MEGA_TX1+ 0
XCDR 5 L19 MEGARX J121 EXT_MEGA_TX1 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBTX+ J14 EXT_MEGA_RX4+ 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBTX J123 EXT_MEGA_RX4 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBRX+ J15 EXT_MEGA_TX4+ 0
XCDR 4 L20 MEGBRX J124 EXT_MEGA_TX4 0

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS1 to RXU

board) PIN no.
280 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS2 to RXU

board) PIN no.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
MS3 to RXU

board) PIN no.
282 1st Jun 01

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Chapter 3
Decommissioning the equipment

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
Chapter 3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BTS checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes how to decommission BTS cabinets. To decommission
equipment not supplied by Motorola, for example battery chargers, power supplies and
antennas, refer to the vendors instructions.
WARNING
cabinets.
Use extreme caution when working on a cabinet with power applied. Remove
all rings, watches and other jewellery.
Prerequisite
Read Chapter 1 of this manual before attempting to decommission a base site.
Lifting cabinets
BTS cabinets are fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M12 eyebolts,
built in to the top panels. These lifting points are fitted with plastic inserts to protect the
threads. Motorola kit number SWLN4648A contains four M12 eyebolts manufactured to
C.E. conformity, each with a safe weight load of 400 kg and individually numbered. Only
eyebolts supplied in this kit must be used.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for any damage that
may have occurred in transit. If any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE; contact
Motorola for replacement.
1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M12 threaded lifting point.
2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.
WARNING
The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is sufficient. Screw the
eyebolt fully into the lifting point so that no thread is left exposed.
3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.
4. When the lifting operation is complete, remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic
inserts.
For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the use of
lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the eyebolts are to be
used, ensure that all such regulations are met.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
Decommissioning a BTS cabinet GSM-100-423
Decommissioning a BTS cabinet
Introduction
Use the following procedure to decommission a BTS, and use the checklist to check off
each action as it is completed. Photocopy the checklist as often as required. Do not write
on the original.
Before starting
Before starting to decommission a BTS ensure that:
The main power source is switched off and that no power is connected to the
BSSC cabinet.
Sufficient packing crates and cartons are available to pack the decommissioned
equipment.
Procedure
To decommission a BTS cabinet:
1. Check the cabinet and its contents for signs of damage.
2. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present in the cabinet.
WARNING
Stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a hazard to personnel
using the site.
3. Disconnect the positive and negative leads of the cabinet input dc power cable
from the main power source. Do not remove the earth lead. Put the cables in
suitable packaging.
4. Disconnect the E1/T1 link cables from the cabinet and secure them to the
overhead racking.
5. Disconnect the transmit RF cables from between the cabinet and the antenna
window. Put the cables in suitable packaging.
6. Disconnect the receive RF cables from between the cabinet and the antenna
window.
32 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Decommissioning a BTS cabinet
7. Disconnect and remove the following cables from the cabinet:

The RF cable from between the hybrid or remote tune combiner and
bandpass filter.
The RF cable from between the DRCU and the hybrid or remote tune
combiner.
The RF cable from between the transmit port and the bandpass filter.
The RF cable from between the DRCUs and the six-way splitter.
The receive RF cables from between the receive port and the DRCUs.
The dc cables from the DRCUs.
The fibre optic cables from between the DRIX modules and DRCUs (put the
cables into suitable packaging).
8. Ensure that the optical ports on the DRIX modules and DRCUs are protected by
dust caps.
9. Remove the DRCUs taking care not to damage or trap any remaining cables. Put
the DRCUs in the packing boxes provided.
10. Remove the following modules from the cabinet:
Bandpass filter.
Hybrid/dummy load tray.
Six-way splitter.
11. Put the modules in the packing boxes provided.
12. Disconnect and remove the RF and dc cables connected to the preselectors. Put
the cables into suitable packaging.
13. Remove the preselectors. Put the preselectors in the packing box provided.
CAUTION
BTS cabinets use circuitry that is sensitive to static discharge. Avoid handling
the modules in a high-static environment. When handling the modules, do not
touch connector contacts. An earthed high-impedance wrist strap must be
worn when handling modules.
14. Remove the fibre optic cables from the LANX modules and put them into suitable
packaging.
15. Using a suitable screwdriver remove:
The T43 or BIB boards including covers.
The PIX modules.
BTC modules, take care not to damage the threads on the extractor lever
covers.
The remaining half-size modules.
16. Ensure that the optical ports on the LANX modules are protected by dust caps.
Put the boards and modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the
boxes provided.
17. Remove the following full-size modules:
KSW modules.
GPROC/GPROC2 modules.
MSI modules.
GCLK modules.
DRI modules.

68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
18. Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack them in the boxes
provided.
19. Remove the DPSMs. Put the modules into antistatic bags then carefully pack
them in the boxes provided.
20. Disconnect the power leads from the cabinet and the earth lead from the cabinet
and the main power source.
21. Remove the air deflector from the cabinet door. Put the deflector and the securing
screws into suitable packaging.
22. If the BTS is mounted on a plinth, remove the bottom fittings (bolts and washers)
then carefully pack them in suitable bags.
23. Remove the overhead cable trough and supports and put them into suitable
packaging.
WARNING
An unequipped BTS cabinet can weigh up to 148 kg (325 lb). Handle cabinets
with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
24. Move the cabinet to a location where it can be safely packed into its wooden
transit case.
34 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-423 Decommissioning a BTS cabinet
BTS checklist
ENGINEERS NAME DATE
SIGNATURE
SITE NAME
EQUIPMENT TYPE
NAT ID

"#!,**'//',+#"
!('+% *0#.') '+!)1"'+% +0'7/00'! %/ ,+ /'0#
.# ! '+#0/ "*%#"
$ 5#/ "#0') '+ !,**#+0/ ,4
)#/ "'/!,++#!0#" $.,* 0,- ,$ ! '+#0 +" /0,3#"
)#/ $.,* &5 .'" .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
)) .#*'+'+% +" $' .# ,-0'! ! )#/ "'/!,++#!0#"
/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
5 .'" "1**5 )," 0.5 .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
.#/#)#!0,./ 735 /-)'00#. .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
+" *,"1)#/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
*,"1)#/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
#*'+'+% &)$ /'6# *,"1)#/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
*,"1)#/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
*,"1)#/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"

*,"1)#/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"

)) ),,/# ! )#/ '+ 0&# ! '+#0 /0,3#" +" /#!1.#"
.0& ! )# "'/!,++#!0#" $.,* ! '+#0
'. "#$)#!0,. .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
'+#0 ,00,* $'00'+%/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"
)# 0.,1%& +" /1--,.0/ .#*,2#" +" -!(#"

'+#0 -!(#" '+ 0.+/'0 !/#


68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
36 1st Jun 01
68P02901W04-A
GMR-01
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 5
INTRODUCTION GENERAL PROCEDURES MAINTENANCE REPLACEMENT MISCELLANEOUS REPAIR
PROCEDURES PROCEDURES
Category 523
Maintenance Information
1st Jun 01 Maintenance Information: BTS i

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
ii 1st Jun 01
Maintenance Information: BTS
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
Category 523
Maintenance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Chapter 2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
MMI uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Chapter 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1st Jun 01 Maintenance Information: BTS iii

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 4
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Removing a Tx BPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Replacing CLKXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Replacing CLKXB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Removing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
1st Jun 01 Maintenance Information: BTS v

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
MSI replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
vi 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
PIX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
GDP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Locating the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Removing the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Installing a RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Removing a CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Refitting a CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
1st Jun 01 Maintenance Information: BTS vii

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
Chapter 5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Procedure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Alarm level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
OMC actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
viii 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Chapter 1
Introduction

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
Chapter 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Introduction
Introduction
Overview
This chapter:
Gives the purpose of the maintenance category.
Lists prerequisites for using the maintenance category.
Lists documents related to this category.
Audience
This manual is for technicians who work at base station system (BSS) sites.
The manual assumes a degree of familiarity with Motorola BTS hardware. Technicians
may use this manual to maintain and repair the BTS cabinets.
Purpose of the
manual
Use this manual to find procedures necessary to maintain and to remove and replace
various components in the cabinets.
Prerequisites
This manual assumes the reader knows is suitably qualified to maintain Motorola BTS
sites.
Structure
The manual contains the following:
General procedures
This chapter contains general information to be used whilst maintaining the BTS.
Maintenance
This chapter contains the procedures for general maintenance of the BTS.
Repairs
These chapters contain specific instructions for replacing and repairing
components within the BSS cabinets. Anyone, regardless of skill level, should
refer to these instructions when working on the site.
1st Jun 01 Maintenance Information: BTS 11

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Introduction GSM-100-523
12 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Chapter 2
General procedures

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
Chapter 2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
MMI uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 General procedures
General procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains general repair information. This information applies to all
diagnostic and repair procedures.
Motorola recommends reading this chapter before:
Leaving for a site.
Beginning a repair procedure.
Table 2-1 lists the different sections in this chapter.
Table 2-1 General procedures sections

This section... Contains...
Test and repair equipment A list of required testing equipment.
lists A list of required repair equipment.
Warnings and safety Definitions of the three types of messages.
Toxic material warnings.
Electrical warnings.
Static discharge cautions.
Fibre optic cabling precautions.
Locating faulty Cabinets Instructions for locating the cabinets at a site that are
generating the alarms.
Connecting the Local Instructions for:
Maintenance Terminal (LMT) Connecting the LMT.
Setting up the MMI interface.
Changing the security level.
Identifying the faulty devices The procedure for displaying alarms at the LMT.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Test and repair equipment lists GSM-100-523
Test and repair equipment lists

Test equipment
list
Table 2-2 lists the equipment Motorola recommends for diagnosing and testing BTS
cabinets. This table contains recommendations for both GSM900 and DCS1800
systems.
The following table identifies the required test equipment, suitable alternatives can be
used.
Table 2-2 GSM test equipment

1 IBM compatible personal computer (PC) with the following
minimum specifications:
Intel 486 processor.
170 MB hard drive.
8 MB RAM.
ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.
NOTE
Some software tools require a PC with these specifications. If the
only purpose of the PC is to monitor alarms and enter MMI
commands, a PC with the following specifications should suffice:
Intel 386 processor.
60 MB hard drive.
4 MB RAM.
ODS Local Area Network (LAN) card.
1 Either of the following:
RF signal generator (Hewlett - Packard HP 8657A or
equivalent) for testing GSM 900 systems only,
Or:
RF signal generator (Hewlett - Packard HP 8657B or
equivalent) for testing either GSM 900 or DCS 1800
systems.
1 Digital multimeter (Hewlett - Packard HP E2378A or equivalent)
As required RF 50 ohm resistive load(s) with the following minimum
specifications:
50 watt minimum.
Operation up to 1 GHz (GSM 900 systems).
Operation up to 2 GHz (DCS 1800 systems).
1 RF 50 ohm power load (Relm T44004 or equivalent)
100 watt minimum
1 RF 20 dB attenuator (Narda 76920 or equivalent)
150 watt minimum
1 RF Adaptor kit: N to 716 (Huber and Suhr 33716n501 or
equivalent)
. . . continued
22 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Test and repair equipment lists
Table 2-2 GSM test equipment

1 RF Wattmeter (Bird 43 or equivalent) with the following elements:
1 watt.
2.5 watt.
5 watt.
10 watt.
25 watt.
50 watt.
1 N to N male coaxial cable, 4 m long, calibrated
6 N to 7/16 male coaxial cable, 2 m long, calibrated
1 N to 7/16 male coaxial cable, 4 m long, calibrated
1 N to 7/16 male coaxial cable, 300 mm long, calibrated
1 100/140 fibre optic loop back cable, polished at both ends
1 RS-232 ribbon cable
1 GSM Communications analyzer (Hewlett - Packard HP 8922B or
equivalent)
1 Down converter (Hewlett - Packard HP 83220A or equivalent) for
use with the GSM Communications analyzer (DCS 1800 systems
only)
1 ESD protection kit

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Test and repair equipment lists GSM-100-523
Repair
equipment list
Table 2-3 lists the tools Motorola recommends for repairing BTS cabinets.
Table 2-3 Repair equipment

1 Torque wrench, calibrated in newton meters or footpounds
1 Torx driver, size T30
1 Nut driver, size 10 mm AF
1 Nut driver, size 8 mm AF
1 Flat blade screwdriver
1 Phillips screwdriver
1 Tamper-proof Allen key for loosening and tightening the
covers on external cabinet locks
1 Motorola approved wrist strap
1 Antistatic pad
May vary, depending Antistatic containers or bags
on the number of
boards being
removed.
1 Set, jewellers screwdrivers, both Phillips and flat blade
1 Bucket
Mild dishwashing soap or detergent
24 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 General repair procedures
General repair procedures
Overview
The Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC) uses Base Station System (BSS) Fault
Management software to determine whether or not the site is in a fault condition. If it is,
the OMC sends a technician to a site to fix the problem.
The rest of this section contains the general steps to follow to isolate the fault.
Site
configuration
A site may include any or all of the following:
Base transceiver station (BTS).
Base station controller (BSC).
Remote transcoder (RXCDR).
This manual assumes familiarity with these components. Refer to the appropriate
service manuals for detailed descriptions.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Man machine interface (MMI) GSM-100-523
Man machine interface (MMI)
Definition
The MMI is the interface between the user and the software.
The MMI may run on:
A terminal at the Operations and Maintenance Centre (OMC).
A local maintenance terminal (LMT).
MMI uses
Use the MMI to:
Obtain information from the system:
Display alarm reports.
Retrieve device status.
Control the system:
Take modules out of service (OOS).
Put modules into service (INS).
26 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Locating faulty cabinets
Locating faulty cabinets
Purpose
This section contains instructions for isolating a particular fault to a particular cabinet.
Prerequisites
These steps assume that:
The OMC requested a visit to the site.
The OMC knew the site locations, and which cabinet was generating the alarm.
Procedure
Follow these steps to isolate the fault to a cabinet.
1. Enter the site if it is safe to do so.
2. Determine if the BTS cabinet has alarm LEDs in the door.
Some older cabinets have an LED in the upper left corner. Later generations of
cabinets do not have this LED.
The cabinet LED shows that the cabinet is receiving power.
If the cabinet... Then...

has an LED in the door... continue with step 3.
does not have an LED in the skip ahead to step 4.
door...
3. Check the LED on each BTS cabinet.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Locating faulty cabinets GSM-100-523
If the door The Therefore...

LED is... cabinet...
lit... has continue with step 4.
power...
off... does not investigate the power failure to this cabinet.
have i. Check the rectifiers for correct
power... operation. Refer to the
documentation supplied by the
rectifier manufacturer.
If the rectifiers are working correctly,
continue with step ii, below.
If the rectifiers are working incorrectly,
repair or replace them according to
the manufacturers instructions.
Check back with the OMC to see if

the alarm cleared.
If the alarm is cleared, the condition is

fixed. No further action is necessary.
If the alarm did not clear, continue

with step ii, below.
ii. Check the top of the cabinet to see if
there is voltage present.
If there is no voltage present, check
for an auto disconnect.
If voltage is present, check for an
internal failure.
4. Open the door of the faulty cabinet.

The OMC should identify the faulty cabinet. The OMC gets this information from
the various alarm messages sent by the system.
If the OMC did not identify which cabinet was faulty, open each cabinet on the site
until you find one with fault indicators, such as lit Alarm (red) LEDs.
5. Note the status of the LED indicators on the front panel of each module equipped
with them.
See Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 for BSU and RXU module location within the shelf.
6. Continue with Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT).
28 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
U28
L28
AI2
1st Jun 01
AI2
! !
AI1
AI0
AI1
AI0
L27
! !
GSM-100-523
L28 L27 L26
L26
! &$"%# !

! !
KS0
L25 L24
! ! !
KS0
MS0
MS0
! ! !
! !
! ! ! ! !
U28 U27 U26 U25 U24 U23 U22 U21

! ! ! ! !
DR5
L23 L22 L21 L20

U20
! ! !
L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19

!
! !
L18
!

DR4
MS1
L19 L18 L17

! !
MS1
L17 L16
! ! ! !
L16 L15
! ! ! !

U27 U26 U25 U24 U23 U22 U21 U20 U19 U18 U17 U16 U15 U14
! ! !
DR3
U19 U18 U17 U16 U15 U14 U13
L14 L13
! !
GMR-01
!
L15 L14 L13 L12

! !

!
68P02901W05-A
! ! !
L12 L11
MS2
DR2
MS2
! !
U13 U12 U11 U10

U12 U11 U10

L11 L10
!
L10
L9
L9
U9
!
! ! ! ! !
U9 U8
L8
L8

U8
! ! ! ! ! !

DR1
L7
U7
L7
U7
! ! ! ! ! ! ! !
!
L6
L6
U6
! ! ! ! !
U6 U5
U5
! ! ! !
L5
L5

MS3
DR0
U4
U4
! ! MS3 ! !
U3
U3
! ! ! !
L3
L3

! ! ! !
U2 U1
U2 U1
L1
! !
L1
KS1
GK0
KS1

! !
L0
L0
Figure 2-1 BSU shelf modules slot assignment layout and backplane connectors
Figure 2-2 RXU shelf modules slot assignment layout and backplane connectors
Locating faulty cabinets
29
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) GSM-100-523
Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)
Overview
Most of the diagnostic and repair procedures suggest connecting a Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) in order to enter MMI commands, lock and unlock devices, and view
alarms.
This section gives detailed instructions for connecting the LMT.
Required tools
and equipment
This procedure requires the following equipment:
IBM - compatible Personal Computer (PC),
RS-232 cable.
Refer to Table 2-2 for a list of test equipment and equipment specifications.
Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure, determine which cabinet contains the
master processor.
Connecting the
LMT to a GPROC
Follow these steps to connect the PC to a GPROC, or GPROC2, to create an LMT.
1. Open the cabinet containing the master GPROC.
2. Find the master GPROC.
Motorola recommends connecting the PC to the master GPROC. However, the
PC can be connected to any GPROC that is not in an alarm state.
3. Connect one end of the RS-232 ribbon cable to the asynchronous communications
controller port of the PC.
4. Connect the other end of the RS-232 ribbon cable to the TTY port connector on
the front panel of the master GPROC in the BSU (or RXU) shelf.
5. Power up the PC.
The PC is now a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).
6. Continue with Setting up the MMI.
210 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT)
Setting up the
MMI
Follow these steps to set up the Local Maintenance Terminal.
1. Set the LMT TTY port parameters:
9600 baud.
8 data bits.
1 stop bit.
1 start bit.
no parity.
2. Press the RETURN (or ENTER) key.
The LMT displays one of the following prompts:
MMI-ROM 0115 > (for GPROC running in ROM)
MMI-RAM 0115 > (for GPROC running in RAM)
Work from either prompt.
Changing the
security level
Follow these steps to change the security level.
1. Enter the disp_level command at the prompt.
The system displays the current User Security level, like this:
Current security level is 1
2. Enter the chg_level command.

The system asks for the password for the next security level. There are two
passwords available:
One password will change the security level to Level 2.
One password to change from security level 2 to level 3.
The OMC will know the passwords. Contact the OMC for the passwords.
3. Enter the user password to access the BSS.
Enter the And the system displays... Continue with...

password...
correctly... the new security level and the system Identifying the faulty
prompt: devices
Current security level is x MMIRAM
0115>
Where x is the new security level.
Possible values are:
2
3
incorrectly... the old security level and the system Step 2 and step 3. until
prompt: the system displays the
Current security level is 1 MMIRAM new security level.
0115>

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Identifying the faulty devices GSM-100-523
Identifying the faulty devices
Prerequisites
Before performing the steps in this procedure:
Locate the faulty cabinet.
Connect the LMT.
Equipment safety
During replacement procedures, it may be possible to identify signs of damage caused
by overheating, short circuits or sudden component failure. This may indicate a problem
that could repeat, cause additional damage, or be a symptom of a failure elsewhere.
Analysis of the problem may identify common faults and make corrective action possible.
it is recommended that:
The OMC is informed that an equipment safety problem has been identified.
The steps for Reporting safety issues are followed. These detailed in the
introductory section of this manual.
Checking the
status
Follow these steps to check the status of the device which is reporting the alarm to the
OMC.
NOTE
Devices that are Out Of Service (OOS) report an operational state of
disabled.
1. To enable alarm reporting, enter the following command at the LMT:

enable_alarm #
Where: # is: location id
2. To display a list of the currently active FMIC and OIC alarms, enter the following
command at the LMT:
disp_act_alarm #
Where: # is: location id
The OMC should provide the number for the site variable (see step 4 in Locating
Faulty Cabinets).
3. Observe the displayed alarm report and active alarm list.
The system now displays alarm reports as they occur. The module in the alarm
report is detecting the alarm.
4. Check to see if the module reporting the alarm or that has an active alarm is the
same as the module with a status LED indicating a fault.
This module may be the source of the fault. However, some other device, cable,
shelf, or RF equipment could be causing the fault.
212 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Identifying the faulty devices
5. Look up the Device Alarm in the Device Alarms tables, detailed in Maintenance
Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting (GSM100523).
There is an Alarm table for each device or digital board.
6. Diagnose the problem by following the Fault Diagnosis procedure indicated in the
Device Alarm table.
7. If necessary, use the module replacement procedures detailed in this manual to
replace the suspect module.
Additional fault isolation may be necessary if the module reporting the failure is replaced
and placed in service and new alarms are reported again. To perform this additional fault
isolation, evaluate the actual alarm message that the module is reporting. Refer to the
GSM event/alarm messages in Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC
(GSM-100-501) for a list of valid alarm reports and alarm information details.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Resetting and re-initializing a site GSM-100-523
Resetting and re-initializing a site
Overview
BSS software commands cannot take the following BTS cabinet hardware modules Out
of Service (OOS):
Power distribution unit modules
Radio Front End (RFE) modules
Transmit combining/filtering modules
External RF equipment
Procedure
Follow these steps to reset the site.
CAUTION
Resetting the site takes the site out of service (OOS) and drops all calls. It
is advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.
1. Enter reset_bss at the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT).

2. Replace the faulty module using the appropriate procedure.
3. Activate the front panel RESET switch on each of the following modules to
reinitialize the site and put it back In Service (INS).
DRI
MSI
KSW/TSW
GPROC
4. Verify the site automatically reboots and is INS.
214 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Chapter 3
Maintenance procedures

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
Chapter 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Maintenance procedures
Maintenance procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains the maintenance procedures for the BTS cabinet.
Prerequisites
These procedures assume that the engineer is competent to work on Motorola BTS
equipment.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Air filter replacement GSM-100-523
Air filter replacement
Introduction
As part of BSSC/BSSC2 cabinet maintenance, foam air filters should be replaced every
six months with new or previously washed filters.
Replacement
procedure
Follow the procedure detailed under Air filter replacement in chapter 4, to correctly
replace cabinet foam air filters.
Air filter cleaning

Air filters removed from BSSC/BSSC2 cabinets during air filter replacement must be
washed prior to storing for reuse. Follow the procedure detailed under Cleaning cabinet
air filters later in this chapter, to correctly clean used foam air filters.
32 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Cleaning cabinet air filters
Cleaning cabinet air filters
Introduction
The cabinet air filters should be replaced with new or clean filters every six months. To
remove the filters refer to Chapter 4 Air filter replacement.
Follow these instructions to wash the foam air filters fitted to the BTS cabinet after they
have been removed and taken to a location were they are to be cleaned.
Tools and
equipment
This procedure requires the following tools and equipment.
A bucket, or similar container.
A source of warm water.
Mild soap, dishwashing soap or detergent.
Cleaning cabinet
air filters
To clean the cabinet air filters proceed as follows:
1. Wash the filter in warm soapy water.
2. Squeeze the water out of the filter gently, and allow the filter to dry.
CAUTION
Do not wring the filter. Wringing may tear the material.
3. Inspect the filter for splits and holes. If the filter is undamaged it should be stored
for reuse. Damaged filters are to be discarded in accordance with local
guidelines.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Cleaning of fibre optics GSM-100-523
Cleaning of fibre optics
Introduction
The ends of the fibre optic, whether or not terminated by a connector, must be kept clean
at all times. No dust or dirt must be allowed to contaminate the ends of the fibre or the
female connectors on the modules.
When a fibre is not connected, the protective caps must be fitted at all times to the ends
of the fibre and to all unused connectors on the modules.
Tools and
equipment
The following tools and equipment are required:
Lint free cloth.
A suitable cleaning solution.
Cleaning of
fibres and
connectors
As a matter of routine, the fibre optic ends should be cleaned whenever the cables are
inserted into their connector.
To clean fibre optic components, wipe gently with a lint-free cloth soaked in a suitable
cleaning solution.
CAUTION
Care must be taken not to scratch the ends of the fibres.
Protective caps, if fitted, should be removed for the minimum amount of time, to reduce
the risk of contamination/damage.
NOTE
Lint free cloth is the preferred medium for cleaning, since the risk of
contamination or damage due to the cleaning process is minimal. In extreme
circumstances the use of soft clean cotton may be acceptable.
The use of cotton buds soaked in cleaning solution is not recommended, since
lint is frequently left on the fibre and the connectors may be wet when the
cables are inserted into the connectors.
34 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Chapter 4
Replacement procedures

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
Chapter 4
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Removing a Tx BPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Replacing CLKXA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Replacing CLKXB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Removing the fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
LED indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
MSI replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
PIX replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
1st Jun 01 Maintenance Information: BTS v

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
GDP replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Locating the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Removing the RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Installing a RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Removing a CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Refitting a CCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
vi 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacement procedures
Replacement procedures
Purpose
This chapter contains procedures for replacing various components within the BTS
cabinets.
Chapter structure
The replacement procedures are listed alphabetically, by device name (for example,
CLKX, or GPROC/GPROC2).
If there are different procedures for replacing a redundant device and a similar
nonredundant device (such as redundant and nonredundant CLKX modules) the
instructions for replacing the redundant device are given first.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Using the MMI to change device status GSM-100-523
Using the MMI to change device status

Introduction
A device must be out of service (OOS) before it can be removed from an operational
cabinet. This is achieved by use of the lock_device command. The unlock_device
command is used to return the device in service (INS).
If an operational cabinet has active and standby (redundant) devices it is possible to
swap their functionality. The swap_device command swaps the specified standby
device with the specified active device.
Taking a device
out of service
(OOS)
Follow these steps to take a device out of service.
To take a device out of service intrusively, invoke the following command at the
LMT:
lock_device <location> <device_name> <device_id1>
<device_id2> <device_id3>
Where: <location> is: site id
<device_name> unique device
identification
<device_id1> first device identifier
<device_id2> second device identifier
<device_id3 third device identifier
The system takes the device out of service.
NOTE
Locking a device intrusively puts the device OOS and excludes it from use
immediately.
To take a device out of service nonintrusively, invoke the following at the LMT:
shutdown <location> <device> <device_id> <device_id>
<device_id> <seconds>
identification
<seconds> time limit on transition in
seconds
The system lets the device continue existing calls, but will not use the device for
any new traffic. At the end of the timeout period the system treats the command
as a lock.
The shutdown_device command usually applies to DRIMs.
42 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Using the MMI to change device status
Unlocking a
device
To unlock a locked device and put it INS, enter the following at the LMT:
unlock_device <location> <device_name> <device_id1>
<device_id2> <device_id3>

identification
The system puts the device into service.
NOTE
The unlock_device command only brings a locked device in service from
a locked state, allowing the system to use the device. If the system finds
problems with the device during configuration, however, the device will
remain out of service.
The system uses some devices of the same type in a redundant pair. One device is
active (device status of BUSY_UNLOCKED) and the other device is standby (device
status of ENABLED_UNLOCKED). If the active device fails, the standby device switches
to BUSY_UNLOCKED status.
Swapping
devices
Follow these steps to determine the current state of the active and standby devices when
attempting to swap devices.
1. Enter the following command at the LMT:
state <location> <device_name> <device_id1> <device_id2>
<device_id3>

identification
The system displays the status of the device.

2. Repeat step 1 for any redundant devices.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Using the MMI to change device status GSM-100-523
3. If one device is Busy/Unlocked and the other device is ENABLED_UNLOCKED,

enter the following command at the LMT:
swap_devices <location> <ACTIVE device_name> <STANDBY
device_name> <ACTIVE device_ids> <STANDBY device_ids>

<ACTIVE unique device id of active
device_name> device
<STANDBY unique device id of
device_id1> standby device
<ACTIVE device_ids> first, second and third
active device identifiers
<STANDBY device_ids first, second and third
standby device identifiers
The system swaps the devices. Now the device that was ENABLED_UNLOCKED
will be BUSY_UNLOCKED.
4. Repeat the state command to verify that the devices have swapped states.
NOTE
Devices can only be swapped when both devices are INS (device status of
BUSY_UNLOCKED or ENABLED_UNLOCKED).
44 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Air filter replacement
Air filter replacement
Introduction
Follow these instructions to replace the foam air filters in the BTS cabinets.
The cabinet air filters should be replaced with new or clean filters every six months. It is
recommended that filters are not washed on site but replaced with new or previously
washed filters.
Tools and
equipment
This procedure requires the following tools and equipment.
New or previously washed air filters.
Table 4-1 lists the different air filters and the kits of new filters that can be ordered.
Table 4-1 Replacement air filters

Kit Number Filter Part Description: Approximate
(10 Filters): Number: Size:
SWEN4008A 3509601F04 BTS4 upper intake 124mm x 515mm
air filter
(Three latch door)
air filter
(Single latch door)
SWEN4006A 3509601F02 BTS4 lower air filter 269mm x 610mm
air filter
air filter

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Air filter replacement GSM-100-523
Replacing the air

filter
To replace the cabinet air filters proceed as follows:
WARNING
Eye protection must be worn if you open the cabinet door when the cabinet is
powered up.
1. Open the cabinet door.

2. Lift the bar securing the filter and carefully lift it free.
NOTE
The door locking mechanism obstructs the bar on some older BTS4 cabinets.
Move filter securing bar to the right when lifting it free.
3. Remove the filter.
CAUTION
Do not install a wet filter. A wet filter will damage the equipment.
4. Position the new or previously washed filter.

5. Refit the securing bar.
6. Repeat step 2 to step 5 for the second filter, as necessary.
7. Close and latch the cabinet door.
8. Filters can be washed off site using warm water and mild soap (dishwashing soap
or detergent) for later installation at a site.
46 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Interface board replacement
Interface board replacement
Introduction
This section gives instructions for removing and replacing a balanced line interface board
(BIB) or a T-43 interface board (T43). Since the procedure for both boards is the same,
this section refers to either board as an interface board.
CAUTION
All channel traffic associated with an interface board is lost during the
replacement procedure. If only one 2.048 Mbit/s link is affected by an
interface board fault, replacement of the interface board should be performed
during a period of low traffic so as not to interrupt service on the other 2.048
Mbit/s links connected to the interface board.
Illustrations
Figure 4-1 shows a sample of the balanced line interconnect board (BIB).
T17
T7 T8
T14 T16
T4 T5 J1 T11 T13
T10
T1 T2
J0
Figure 4-1 Balanced-line Interconnect Board
Figure 4-2 shows a sample of the T-43 interconnect board (T43).
J0
J8 J4
J14 J10
J16 J2
J13 J11
J7 J1
J17 J5
Figure 4-2 Type 43 interconnect board

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Interface board replacement GSM-100-523
Replacing an
interface board
1. Enter the lock_device command to take the affected MMS device out-of-service
(OOS).
MMS is the software name for the 2.048 Mbit/s links.
2. Remove the four screws that secure the interface board to the cabinet interconnect
panels.
3. Lift the interface board free to disconnect the 37-pin D connector.
4. Note the order that the 2.048 Mbit/s links are connected to the interface board.
5. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links from the interface board.
6. Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s links to the replacement interface board.
7. Reconnect the interface board to the correct 37-pin D connector on the cabinet
interconnect panel.
8. Secure the interface board to the interconnect panel using the four screws
removed in step 2.
9. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the MMS device back in-service
(INS).
48 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement
Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and installing a transmit bandpass filter
(Tx BPF).
WARNING
Do not remove or replace a transmit bandpass filter while the radio unit is
transmitting!
Removing a Tx
BPF
Follow these steps to remove the Tx BPF:
The transmit combiner shelf is located above the DRCU shelf assembly between
the DRCU fans and the RFE shelf.
2. Check the LEDs on the DRCU associated with the Tx BPF being replaced to verify
the DRCU does not have any traffic on it.
3. Enter the lock_device command to take the radio unit out of service (OOS).
CAUTION
The DRCU cannot have traffic at the moment the Tx BPF is replaced.
4. Disconnect all the coaxial cables by turning the cable connectors clockwise.
5. Note the order of that the coaxial cables are connected to the three ports on the
BPF for reconnecting purposes.
6. Remove the Tx BPF hold down screw from the bottom edge of the transmit
combiner shelf.
7. Lift the front of the Tx BPF module up and pull it toward the front of the cabinet
until the rear module tab disengages from the shelf slot.
Installing a Tx
BPF
Follow these steps to install a Tx BPF:
1. Install the Tx BPF into the cabinet by pushing the module toward the back of the
cabinet until the rear module tab engages to the shelf slot.
2. Tighten the Tx BPF hold down screws to the bottom edge of the transmit combiner
shelf.
3. Connect all the coaxial cables.
4. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRI/DRIX/DRCU associated
with the Tx BPF back in-service (INS).

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement GSM-100-523
Initializing the
site
After installing this module, it may be necessary to reinitialize the site.
Follow these steps to reset the site:
CAUTION
Resetting the site takes the site outofservice (OOS) and interrupts or drops
calls in progress. It is advisable to perform this procedure during periods of
low traffic.

reinitialize the site and put it back In Service (INS).
DRI
MSI
KSW/TSW
GPROC
410 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing redundant clock extender
modules (CLKX).
Example
Figure 4-3 shows a typical CLKX card.
Backplane connector
Fibre optic
clock outputs to
local KSWXs
Figure 4-3 Clock Extender (CLKX) module
Replacing
CLKXA
Follow these steps to replace CLKX A.
NOTE
Replacing redundant CLKX modules may cause a system glitch when the
CLKXs are being switched.
1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane.
This forces a changeover to CLKX B modules.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX A module to be replaced.
3. Remove the CLKX A module and insert the replacement CLKX.
4. Reconnect all the fibre optic cables.
5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Redundant clock extender (CLKX) module replacement GSM-100-523
Replacing
CLKXB
Follow these steps to replace CLKX B.
NOTE
Replacing redundant CLKX modules may cause a system glitch when the
CLKX are being switched.
1. Pull the CLKX forward just enough to disconnect it from the module backplane.
This forces a changeover to CLKX A modules.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the CLKX B module to be replaced.
3. Remove the CLKX B module and insert the replacement CLKX.
5. Push the CLKX back into the shelf until it connects to the backplane.
412 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Non-redundant CLKX replacement
Non-redundant CLKX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing non-redundant clock
extender modules (CLKX)
Example
Figure 4-4 shows a typical CLKX card.
Backplane
connector
Fibre optic clock

outputs to local
KSWXs
Figure 4-4 Clock Extender (CLKX) module
Replacing the
CLKX
Follow these instructions to remove and replace the CLKX.
NOTE
Replacing stand-alone CLKX modules causes system down time.
1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the CLKX to be replaced.
2. Remove the faulty CLKX.
3. Insert the replacement CLKX.
The procedure is complete.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Dual path preselector replacement GSM-100-523
Dual path preselector replacement
Description
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the dual path preselectors
in GSM900 systems.
Removing a dual
path preselector
Follow these steps to remove the dual path preselector (DPP):
1. Open the cabinet door and locate the faulty DPP unit.
2. Enter the lock command to take the radio units connected to the faulty DPP out
of service.
3. Use a Torx T20 driver to remove the two screws that secure the DPP to the
cabinet shelf.
Set the screws aside for later use.
4. Pull the DPP forward. Do not remove the DPP from the shelf.
Pulling the DPP forward makes it easier to remove the various cables.
5. Disconnect all the cables from the DPP.
Make note as to which cables connect to the different DPP connectors. This
information is necessary for proper installation of the new DPP.
6. Remove the DPP from the shelf and set it aside.
414 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Dual path preselector replacement
Installing a dual
path preselector
Follow these steps to install a new DPP:
1. Lift the DPP onto the receiver front end (RFE) shelf.
Do not secure the DPP at this time.
2. Connect the two RF input cables to the two input connectors on the DPP.
The input connectors are on the top of the DPP. They are N-type
connectors, to match the RF input cable connectors.
Connect the cables to match the connections to the original DPP.
3. Connect the radio unit cables to the output connectors.
Connect the cables to match the connections to the original DPP.
4. Line up the DPP with the back of the shelf.
The DPP has two large tabs along the lower back edge. These tabs fit into slots in
the receiver front end shelf.
5. Slide the DPP back into the RFE shelf.
CAUTION
Do not force the DPP into the back of the shelf. The connectors should
mate with little effort.
Slide the DPP until:

The two tabs slide into the slots.
CAUTION
Make sure the tabs do not trap or cut any cables.
The screw holes in the base of the DPP line up with the holes in the RFE.
6. Secure the DPP to the RFE shelf with two Torx screws.
Use the screws that were removed in step 3 on the previous page.
CAUTION
If the screw holes in the DPP do not align with the screw holes in the RFE
shelf the DPP is not inserted properly.
Tighten the screws with a T20 driver.

7. Enter the unlock command to unlock the radio unit and return it to service.
8. Close and lock the cabinet door.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Low noise amplifier replacement GSM-100-523
Low noise amplifier replacement
Description
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the low noise amplifiers in
DCS1800 systems.
These instructions also apply to the high sensitivity LNA, with additional instructions
added where necessary.
Removing a low
noise amplifier
Follow these steps to remove the low noise amplifier (LNA):
1. Open the cabinet door and locate the faulty LNA unit.
2. Enter the lock command to take the radio units connected to the faulty LNA out of
service.
3. Use a Torx T20 driver to remove the two screws that secure the LNA to the cabinet
shelf.
Set the screws aside for later use.
4. Pull the LNA forward. Do not remove the LNA from the shelf.
Pulling the LNA forward in a DCS1800 cabinet disconnects it from the
modified D connectors at the rear of the cabinet, and makes it easier to
remove the various cables.
5. Disconnect all the cables from the LNA.
Make note as to which cables connect to the different LNA connectors. This
information is necessary for proper installation of the new LNA.
6. Remove the LNA from the shelf and set it aside.
416 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Low noise amplifier replacement
Installing a low
noise amplifier
Follow these steps to install a new LNA:
NOTE
For a high sensitivity LNA ensure that Low Gain is selected on both rear panel
switches if there are additional sources of gain in the receive path, ie if a
masthead amplifier is fitted or the receivers are daisy chained together.
1. Lift the LNA onto the receiver front end (RFE) shelf.
Do not secure the LNA at this time.
2. Connect the two RF input cables to the two input connectors on the LNA.
The input connectors are on the top of the LNA. They are N-type
connectors, to match the RF input cable connectors. Connect the cables to
match the connections to the original LNA.
3. Connect the radio unit cables to the output connectors.
Connect the cables to match the connections to the original LNA. They are
TNC-type connectors.
4. Line up the LNA with the back of the shelf.
The LNA has two large tabs along the lower back edge. These tabs fit into slots in
the receiver front end shelf.
5. Slide the LNA back into the RFE shelf.
CAUTION
Do not force the LNA into the back of the shelf. The connectors should
mate with little effort.
Make sure the tabs do not trap or cut any cables.
Slide the LNA until:

The two tabs slide into the slots.
The screw holes in the base of the LNA line up with the holes in the RFE.
The modified D connectors on the back of the LNA connect with the
matching D connectors on the RFE shelf (DCS1800 only).
6. Secure the LNA to the RFE shelf with two Torx screws.
Use the screws that were removed in step 3 in the removal procedure.
CAUTION
If the screw holes in the LNA do not align with the screw holes in the RFE shelf
the LNA is not inserted properly.
Tighten the screws with a T20 driver.

7. Enter the unlock command to unlock the radio unit and return it to service.
8. Close and lock the cabinet door.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Radio unit replacement GSM-100-523
Radio unit replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and installing transceivers of similar type
(DRCU, DRCU2, DRCU3, SCU, TCU or high powered TCU). The procedures apply to
all transceivers unless otherwise stated.
If a DRCU, DRCU2 or DRCU3 is being replaced with an SCU or TCU the following
changes must be made:
Plastic fibre optic cables must be replaced with glass fibre optic cables
DRIX digital cards must be replaced with DRIX3 digital cards
A width thermal spacer must be fitted to the SCU A thermal spacer is not
required when replacing a DRCU3 with an SCU.
Disconnecting
the unit
1. Open the BTS cabinet door and locate the radio unit shelf assembly.
NOTE
The radio unit shelf assembly is located in the middle of the cabinet.
2. Check the LEDs on the radio unit to verify the unit does not have any traffic on it.
If the cabinet is equipped with DRCU3 radios or SCUs the LED does not indicate
the presence of traffic.
3. When the radio unit does not have channel traffic, enter the lock_device
command to take the DRIMs out-of-service (OOS)
4. Disconnect all the coaxial cables from the power amplifier output connector at the
top of the radio unit front panel.
5. Disconnect all the coaxial cables from the receive RF input connector at the
bottom of the radio unit front panel.
If the radio unit is equipped for diversity reception, disconnect the coaxial cable
second receive RF input connector.
6. Set the circuit breakers for the radio unit to the off position.
418 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Radio unit replacement
7. Use a flat blade screw driver to loosen the two retaining screws on the power cable
connectors, and gently pull the connectors free.
This disconnects the dc power cable from the POWER connector at the bottom of
the radio unit front panel.
NOTE
A voltage of 15 V is present, at the power D-type connector of the DRCU3,
when the circuit breaker for the appropriate DRCU is switched off and the
DRCU3 is disconnected.
This voltage is due to the alarm detection circuitry monitoring the state of the
circuit breaker, and presents no hazard as it is supplied via a 20 kohm current
limiting resistor.
With the DRCU3 connected (and the circuit breaker off) there is no
measurable voltage present at the connector.
8. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the DATA IN and DATA OUT connectors on
the radio unit front panel by turning the connectors counterclockwise and gently
pulling them free.
CAUTION
Protect the tips of the fibre cables with a cover, if available.
Removing the
unit
Follow these instructions to remove the radio unit from the cabinet.
WARNING
The heat sinks on the radio may be hot to the touch. Hold the radio by the
handle and flange only.
1. Grasp the radio unit handle with one and and place your finger tips of the other
hand under the front panel bottom flange.
WARNING
The radio unit is very heavy. Proceed with caution.
2. Gently lift up on the flange and pull outward on the handle to remove the radio unit
from the shelf slot.
3. Ensure all cables exit the DRCU cable trough through the cut out provided. Failure
to do this could cause the cables to be chaffed.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Radio unit replacement GSM-100-523
Replacing the
Unit
Follow these steps to place a radio unit into the cabinet:
WARNING
The radio unit is very heavy. Proceed with caution.
1. Place a new radio unit in an empty shelf slot.

2. Remove any protective tips from the fibre optic cables.
3. Connect the fibre optic cables into the DATA IN and DATA OUT connectors on the
radio unit front panel.
4. If replacing an DRCU, DRCU2 or DRCU3 with an SCU or TCU, the plastic fibre
cables must be replaced with glass fibre cables.
5. If replacing an DRCU, DRCU2 or DRCU3 with an SCU or TCU, DRIX digital
modules must be replaced with DRIX3 digital modules see DRIX board
replacement.
6. If replacing an DRCU or DRCU2 with an SCU or TCU, a thermal spacer must be
fitted with the SCU or TCU.
Powering up the
unit
Follow these steps to power up the new radio:
1. Press the power cable onto the power cable connector
2. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the two retaining screws on the power cable
connector.
3. Connect the coaxial cable to the receive RF input connector at the bottom of the
DRCU front panel.
NOTE
If the DRCU is equipped for diversity reception, connect the second receive
RF input connector.
4. Connect the coaxial cable to the power amplifier output connector at the top of the
radio unit front panel.
5. If fitting a TCU ensure that the front panel mode selection switch is set to the SCU
position.
6. Reset the circuit breakers.
7. Use the bay level calibration procedure Installation & Configuration: BSS
(GSM-100-423) to set the CS power level of the new radio.
8. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the
DRI/DRIX/radio unit back in-service (INS).
9. Close the cabinet door.
420 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Radio unit replacement
Resetting the site

After installing this module, it may be necessary to reinitialize the site.
Follow these steps to reset the site.
CAUTION
Resetting the site takes the site out-of-service (OOS) and interrupts or drops
calls in progress. It is advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low
traffic.

reinitialize the site and put it back in service (INS).
DRI
MSI
KSW/TSW
GPROC/GPROC2

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing the DRIM GSM-100-523
Replacing the DRIM
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the digital radio interface
module (DRIM) boards in BTS cabinets.
A faulty DRIM may be carrying some traffic. If so, removing and replacing the DRIM may
reduce channel capacity temporarily.
If, however, the DRIM to be replaced cannot carry channel traffic, no additional ill effects
will be noticed during removal and replacement.
Replacing the
DRIM
Follow these steps to replace the DRIM board(s).
1. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the DRIM that requires
replacement to examine channel traffic.
NOTE
The radio unit should not have any channel traffic at the moment of
replacement.
2. After the channel traffic has cleared, in a TTY window, enter the lock_device
command. to take the DRIM/DRIX/radio unit out of service (OOS).
3. Connect an approved antistatic wrist strap to the cabinet, if one is not already
connected.
4. Put the antistatic strap on a wrist.
CAUTION
Always wear an earth strap connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on the
equipment.
5. Disable the faulty DRIM using the front panel switch.

6. Remove the DRIM.
7. Install the replacement DRIM into the slot from which the faulty DRIM was
removed in step 6.
DRIM/DRIX/radio unit back in service (INS).
422 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 DRIX board replacement
DRIX board replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and replacing the digital radio interface
extender board (DRIX) in BTS cabinets.
A faulty DRIX may be carrying some traffic. If so, removing and replacing the DRIX may
reduce channel capacity temporarily. If, however, the DRIX to be replaced cannot carry
channel traffic, no additional ill effects will be noticed during removal and replacement.
Replacing the
DRIX
Follow these steps to replace the DRIX.
1. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the DRIM that requires
replacement to examine channel traffic.
NOTE
The radio unit should not have any channel traffic at the moment of
replacement.
2. When the radio unit associated with the DRIX channel traffic has cleared, in a
TTY window, enter the lock_device command to set the DRIM/DRIX/radio unit
out of service (OOS).
CAUTION
Take care when disconnecting and connecting fibre optic cables. Refer to
Handling optical fibres.
3. Disconnect the fibre optic cable from the DRIX to be replaced.

4. Remove the DRIX.
5. Install the replacement DRIX into the slot from which the faulty DRIX was removed
in step 4.
6. Reconnect the fibre optic cables.
DRI/DRIX/radio unit back in-service (INS).

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables GSM-100-523
Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables
Introduction
For systems which use DRCU and DRCU2 radios, and/or the original DRIX board, the
original plastic fibres remain the optimum solution and therefore plastic fibres should
continue to be used. Spares and replacement plastic fibres are available from Motorola
until stocks become exhausted.
The black polymer fibres must be handled extremely carefully. The notes on Bending
Radius and cleanliness should be followed at all times. These plastic cables have an
SMA connector at one end and (radio end), but no connector at the other end (DRIX
end).
The procedure for disconnection and connection at the radio end is the same as for glass
fibres, avoid cross threading and over tightening.
The procedure for disconnection and connection at the DRIX board is very important.
The connection joint is highly sensitive, and the utmost care is required at all stages of
fibre handling. The procedure below should be followed for all connections using plastic
fibre to the DRIX boards.
Disconnection at
DRIX board
When disconnecting the fibre from the DRIX board, fully disconnect the blue or black
screw in port guide and fibre by rotating the port guide anticlockwise. Remove the port
guide complete with fibre. This should be performed without applying any force on the
fibre itself it will come out with the port guide. The port guide should not be removed
from the fibre.
NOTE
If the removal is to replace the DRIX board, then the new port guides should
be placed on the ports of the DRIX being removed, and the fibre reconnected
using the original port guides as described above. DRIXs returned to Motorola
for repair without both port guides cannot be repaired.
If disconnection is to replace the fibre, the port guide can be removed from the
fibre with extreme care. To remove the port guide from the fibre, slide the port
guide further up the fibre before removing. This causes the port guide to open
fully.
CAUTION
The bare fibre end is required to be optically flat and perpendicular to ensure
satisfactory performance of the link. Preparation of the fibre end requires
special tools. At no time should cutting of the fibre be attempted in the field.
Connection
procedure at the
DRIX board
For connection of polymer fibres, to the DRIX board, follow the procedure detailed under
Optical fibre connection in category 423.
424 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Disconnection and connection of polymer fibre cables
Disconnection at
the radio
There will be an SMA style connector at the radio end of polymer fibres. Disconnection
of the connector from the radio should not require any form of tool, as during installation
fibre connection to the radio must only be made hand tight.
Connection at
the radio
For connection of polymer fibres, to the radio, follow the procedure detailed under
Optical fibre connection in category 423.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables GSM-100-523
Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables
Introduction
Glass fibres can be used with DRIX3 (all models) connected to DRCU3, SCU900/1800
and TCU900/800 radios. They do not work with DRIX, DRCU and DRCU2. If converting
to glass, from polymer, the DRIX3 will need its jumpers moving to TopCell settings, J5
and J9 only. The new DRIX3C board is hard wired, so the setting of jumpers does not
have to be carried out.
The glass fibres used for BTS6 are Motorola Part number 3004462N01; these are about
1.3 m in length. The glass fibres used for BTS4/5 are Motorola Part number
3004462N02; these have a length of 2 m.
General fibre
care
Ensure that proper care is taken of the glass fibres, especially during the installation
process. The full care procedures are documented in Handling optical fibres. They are
summarized below:
Fibre bend radius

All fibres have a minimum bend radius, which represents the smallest loop/circle that
should be made from the fibre allowing it still to function correctly. For glass fibres this is
30 mm long term, increasing to 60 mm when under strain (for example - installation).
Care should be taken when routeing the fibres in the BTS cabinets that they are not bent
over objects which may cause a sharp bend, such as panel edges.
Fibre protection
The end surfaces of the fibre assembly must be kept extremely clean. The protective end
caps must be used at all times, and especially during routeing. The fibre ends should
only be exposed when connecting to the Radio or DRIX units. After disconnection, the
protective caps must be fitted to the fibre ends to maintain cleanliness.
Fibre connection
Fibre SMA connectors are used for both ends of all glass fibre cables. These should be
tightened to hand tight only when connecting. Under no circumstances should any
tools, such as pliers or spanners, be used to tighten the connectors.
Fibre optic cable

replacement
procedures
The replacement of glass fibre optic cables in BTS4/5/6 cabinets comprises of the
following procedures:
Cabinet Preparation
Configuring the DRIX
Fibre Optic cable installation
Cabinet restoration
426 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Connection and disconnection of glass fibre cables
Replacing fibre
optic cables in
BTS 4/5
Replacement of optical fibres requires the removal of RF transmitter power and the
locking of the DRIM, this will interrupt service on that carrier. This must be done in
agreement with the OMCR. It is therefore advisable to carry out this maintenance activity
during periods of low traffic.
In all cases, attention must be paid to care instructions and DRIX jumper settings.
Jumper settings must be changed to accommodate glass fibres if these are being used
to replace polymer fibres.
Fibre optic cable routing

For a BTS4/5 cabinet ensure:
The fibres are routed from the radio and along the DRCU cage cable tray, which
has a removable cover.
The cables are bound together and to the cage, typically by cable ties or tiewraps.
The fibres are passed down through the left wall of the cabinet and emerge into
the cable tray of the digital rack, which is on top of the half size cards.
The fibres run along the cable tray of the digital rack, emerging at the appropriate
place for connection to the DRIX.
Cabinet preparation
1. Ensure that the DRIM has been locked and radio powered down, for each fibre to
be replaced.
2. Remove the DRCU cable tray cover, by unscrewing the two 1/4 turn fasteners that
secure it.
3. Remove the air deflector baffle from above the half size digital cards. This is
retained by four sprung fasteners, and its removal will allow easier access to the
fibres.
4. Remove the digital cage cable tray plastic cover, which is clipped in place.
5. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced from the radio.
CAUTION
Take care and follow the correct disconnect procedure. Refer to Connection
and disconnection of polymer fibre cables when replacing polymer fibre
cables with glass fibre cables.
6. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced fibre from the DRIX boards, according to
type, as follows:
If polymer, by completely unscrewing the retaining collet and sliding it up the
fibre prior to pulling the fibre from the connector. Do not force the fibre.
If glass, by unscrewing the SMA connector on the DRIX front panel.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01

1. If replacing polymer fibre with glass, check DRIX and fibre type compatibility, see
DRIX compatibility in Chapter 3 of Category 323, and:
Where a DRIX is fitted replace with a DRIX3C, and proceed to Fibre optic
installation.
Where a DRIX3A or 3B is fitted, continue with steps 2 to 4.
Where a DRIX3C is fitted the jumpers are preconfigured for glass. The
DRIX3C should not be removed. Proceed to Fibre optic installation.
2. Remove the DRIX, by carefully pulling on the board bracket (this part of the DRIX
is marked 4104 on the front).
3. Set the two jumpers on the DRIX3A or 3B to J9 and J5, both marked T. This will
select the correct connectors and drive mode for glass fibres on the DRIX.
NOTE
The jumpers were previously fitted to J3, J6 or J7 (marked BE4/6, BE4, BE6
respectively).
4. Refit and screw the DRIX in its original location.
Fibre optic cable installation

For correct fibre optic cable installation follow the procedure detailed under Optical
cable installation in Chapter 2 of Category 423.
Cabinet restoration
1. Dress or adjust the fibre so that no particular excess of fibre is visible in the DRCU
or digital cages. The centre section of the new fibre should be allowed to hang
naturally in the cabinet wall, without excessive bending, along with all the other
fibres.
2. The original fibre can either be left in place or removed.
If leaving in place, the loose ends of the fibre should be laid straight along
the respective cable trays, and passed through into the cabinet wall space if
required.
CAUTION
Take care not remove to the wrong fibre or damage adjacent fibres. Excessive
force must not be used, nor should any cutters or snips be used to remove bits
of fibre.
If removing the fibre, then start from the DRIX end, as this end has no
connectors and is easiest to pass through the cabinet.
3. Remove the blanking panel below the DRCU cage to permit access to the cable
ties.
4. Remove the cable ties which hold the cable bundle in the DRCU cable tray. Fit
new cable ties so that the new fibres are secured.
CAUTION
Cut the cable ties from below only. This will prevent any accidental damage to
the actual cables and fibres.
Do not over-tighten the cable ties, especially on glass fibres which may suffer
loss in performance over time if crushed.
428 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
5. Refit the blanking panel removed in step 3.

6. Refit the digital cage cable tray plastic cover, then the air deflector baffle.
CAUTION
Take care not to catch any fibres or cables in the covers.
7. Refit the DRCU cage cable tray cover.
Return to service
It is recommended that a functional check of the DRIX to radio link is performed to verify
the connection. The DRIM should be unlocked and the subsequent download observed.
After this has completed, confirm the radio is operational by using the state command.
Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.
Replacing fibre
optic cables in a
BTS6 cabinet
Replacement of optical fibres requires the removal of RF transmitter power and the
locking of the DRIM this will interrupt service on that carrier. This must be done in
agreement with the OMC-R. It is therefore advisable to carry out this maintenance
activity during periods of low traffic.
In all cases, attention must be paid to care instructions and DRIX jumper settings.
Jumper settings must be changed to accommodate glass fibres if these are being used
to replace polymer fibres.
Fibre optic cable routing

For a BTS6 cabinet ensure:
The fibres are routed from the radio through a hole in the DRCU cage tray, through
the plastic air baffle, and down to the DRIXs that are located in the half size digital
card cage.
Any excess in fibre length is dressed or coiled in the space above the air baffle.
Cabinet preparation
1. Ensure that the DRIM has been locked and the radio has been powered down, for
each fibre to be replaced.
2. Remove the digital cage cable tray plastic cover, which is clipped in place.
3. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced from the radio.
CAUTION
Take care and follow the correct disconnect procedure. Refer to Connection
and disconnection of polymer fibre cables when replacing polymer fibre
cables with glass fibre cables.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
4. Disconnect each fibre to be replaced fibre from the DRIX boards, according to
type, as follows:
If polymer by completely unscrewing the retaining collet and sliding it up the
fibre prior to pulling the fibre from the connector. Do not force the fibre.
If glass by unscrewing the SMA connector on the DRIX front panel.

1. If replacing polymer fibre with glass, check DRIX and fibre type compatibility, see
DRIX compatibility in Chapter 3 of Category 323, and:
Where a DRIX is fitted replace with a DRIX3C, and proceed to Fibre optic
installation.
Where a DRIX3A or 3B is fitted, continue with steps 2 to 4.
Where a DRIX3C is fitted the jumpers are preconfigured for glass. The
DRIX3C should not be removed. Proceed to Fibre optic installation.
2. Remove the DRIX, by carefully pulling on the board bracket (this part of the DRIX
is marked 4104 on the front).
3. Set the two jumpers on the DRIX3A or 3B to J9 and J5, both marked T. This will
select the correct connectors and drive mode for glass fibres on the DRIX.
NOTE
The jumpers were previously fitted to J3, J6 or J7 (marked BE4/6, BE4, BE6
respectively).
4. Refit and screw the DRIX in its original location.

5. Remove the fibre to be replaced. Extract the fibre from the DRIX end towards the
radio end.
NOTE
When removing a glass fibre, it may be necessary to remove the DRCU cable
tray grommet in order to pass the SMA connector through the cable tray hole.
Fibre optic cable installation

For correct fibre optic cable installation follow the procedure detailed under Optical
cable installation in Capter 2 of Category 423.
Cabinet restoration
1. Dress or adjust the fibre so that no particular excess of fibre is visible in the DRCU
or digital cages. The remaining fibre must be looped up gently and allowed to sit
naturally in the space above the plastic air baffle.
CAUTION
Take care not to bend the fibre optic cable to tight when looping. Refer to
Handling optical fibres.
2. Refit the digital cage cable tray plastic cover.
CAUTION
Take care not to catch any fibres or cables in the cover.
430 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Return to service
It is recommended that a functional check of the DRIX to radio link is performed to verify
the connection. The DRIM should be unlocked and the subsequent download observed.
After this has completed, confirm the radio is operational by using the state command.
Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module GSM-100-523
Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and installing a duplexer or quadraplexer
module.
The duplexer or quadraplexer is mounted in an external equipment cabinet or rack
located close to the BTS cabinet.
Removing the
duplexer or
quadraplexer
Follow these steps to remove a duplexer or quadraplexer module:
WARNING
Before disconnecting cables, ensure that the transmit RF power is OFF.
Severe burns may result if RF power is ON while disconnecting the cables.
1. Locate the duplexer or quadraplexer that needs replacing.

2. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the duplexer/quadraplexer being
replaced to verify the radio unit does not have any traffic on it.
The radio unit cannot have any traffic at the moment the duplexer/quadraplexer is
replaced.
3. When the radio unit has no channel traffic, enter the lock_device command to
take the DRIMs associated with the faulty duplexer/ quadraplexer out of service
(OOS).
4. Note the order of that the coaxial cables are connect to the ports of the
duplexer/quadraplexer.
The cables must be reconnected in the same order later in the procedure.
5. Disconnect all the coaxial cables from the duplexer/quadraplexer by turning the
cable connectors counterclockwise,
6. Remove the cables from the duplexer/quadraplexer.
7. Remove the duplexer/quadraplexer mounting screws.
8. Remove the duplexer/quadraplexer.
432 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module
Installing the
duplexer or
quadraplexer
Follow these steps to install a duplexer or quadraplexer module:
1. Install the new duplexer/quadraplexer in the space previously occupied by the
faulty duplexer/quadraplexer removed in the previous section.
2. Tighten the duplexer/quadraplexer mounting screws.
3. Connect the coaxial cables to all duplexer/quadraplexer TX, RX, and ANT ports.
4. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRIMs back in service (INS).
Resetting the site

After installing this module, it may be necessary to re-initialize the site. Follow these
steps to reset the site.
CAUTION
Resetting the site takes the site out of service (OOS) and interrupts or drops
calls in progress. It is advisable to perform this procedure during periods of
low traffic.

re-initialize the site and put it back in service (INS).
DRI
MSI
KSW/TSW
GPROC/GPROC2

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a fan unit GSM-100-523
Replacing a fan unit
Removing the
fan
Follow these steps to replace a faulty fan:
1. Locate the faulty fan.
The faulty fan is the one that is not spinning.
2. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the four quarter-turn fasteners which
secure the fan to the shelf assembly.
3. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet.
4. Disconnect the fan power cable connector and lift it free of the cabinet.
Installing the fan

Follow these steps to install a fan unit:
1. Connect the Fan Power cable connector to the new fan.
2. Install the new fan into the cabinet.
3. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four quarterturn fasteners that secure
the fan to the shelf assembly.
4. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms at
the OMC are cleared.
434 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Redundant GCLK module replacement
Redundant GCLK module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant generic clock (GCLK) modules.
Replacing a
redundant GCLK
Follow these steps to replace the GCLK module
1. Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of the master
GPROC/GPROC2.
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for
instructions.
Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master
GPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to
any available GPROC/GPROC2.
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter all MMI commands.
2. Determine which GCLK card needs replacement.

Use the following table to determine the next action to take.
Table 4-2 GCLK replacement options

If... Then...
the master GCLK card needs i. In a TTY window, enter the
replacement... swap_devices command to
tell the software to make the
redundant GCLK the
master.
ii. Continue on to step 3.
the stand-by GCLK card... Continue on to step 3.
3. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK out
of service (OOS).
4. Disable the faulty GCLK using the front panel switch.
5. Remove the faulty GCLK.
6. Insert the replacement GCLK.
7. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the replacement
GCLK back in service (INS).

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Non-redundant GCLK replacement GSM-100-523
Non-redundant GCLK replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing non-redundant Generic Clock (GCLK)
modules.
Prerequisite
If one is not already connected, connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY
port of the master GPROC/GPROC2.
instructions.
GPROC/GPROC2. However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any
available GPROC/GPROC2.
NOTE
Illustration
Figure 4-5 shows a GCLK board.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
ALARM (RED) LED

(NORMALLY OFF)
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

(MASTER = ON)
2.048 MHz In
16.384 MHz OUT
TEST 6.12 S OUT
PORTS 60mS OUT
125uS OUT
GROUND
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH FREQUENCY ADJUST
DOWN = DISABLE

PANEL
Figure 4-5 GCLK board
436 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Non-redundant GCLK replacement
Conditions
There are two configurations that may require GCLK replacement. The following table
shows the two configurations and which instructions apply.
Table 4-3 Non-redundant GCLK replacement conditions

If the cabinet contains: Follow the steps in:
A single BSU shelf Replacing a Single Shelf Configuration GCLK in
this section
More than one BSU shelf Replacing a Multi-Shelf Configuration GCLK in
this Chapter.
Follow the appropriate procedure.
Replacing a
single shelf
configuration
GCLK
Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a single-shelf configuration cabinet.
NOTE
1. Insert the replacement GCLK into the empty GCLK slot.

2. In a TTY window, enter the equip_device command to equip the replacement
GCLK.
GCLK inservice (INS).
4. Wait at least 30 minutes for the GCLK to stabilize.
5. In a TTY window, enter the state command to verify the operational and
administrative state of the GCLK.
6. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the faulty GCLK
outofservice (OOS).
Replace the GCLK with a blanking plate.
9. Reset the DRIM module, using the front panel switches.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Non-redundant GCLK replacement GSM-100-523
Replacing a
multi-shelf
configuration
GCLK
Follow these steps to replace a GCLK in a multi-shelf configuration cabinet.
CAUTION
If the system is operational, module replacement will cause down-time for the
entire system.

3. Insert the replacement GCLK.
438 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 GPROC/GPROC2 replacement
GPROC/GPROC2 replacement
Overview
This section provides the procedure for replacing redundant and non-redundant General
Processor (GPROC) boards. The procedure for replacing the GPROC or GPROC2 is the
same, only the procedure for the GPROC is given.
Redundant
GPROC
considerations
If the processing capability of a GPROC in a redundant system fails, the redundant
GPROC should be loaded automatically with the appropriate code and enabled. The
system then takes the failed GPROC Out Of Service (OOS). Therefore, no ill effects
should be seen during GPROC replacement.
Nonredundant
GPROC
considerations
If a non-redundant system is still operational, GPROC replacement may cause a
temporary system glitch when GPROCs are switched.
Before going to
the site
The OMC must determine the following:
Site number.
Device ID.
Cage number.
Slot number.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GPROC/GPROC2 replacement GSM-100-523
Locating the
faulty GPROC
Use the information from the OMC together with the LED display on the GPROCs to
locate the faulty board.
Table 4-4 shows the various LED displays.
Table 4-4 GPROC LED Guide

If the And the The board is... Additional action...
Green Red LED
LED is... is...
on... off... either: no further action is
operating normally necessary.
may be unequipped
unequi ed
Use the site command to
verify whether the board is
equipped or not.
flashing... off... waiting for code to download...
flashing... flashing... undergoing normal ROM
programming...
flashing... on... in an alarm condition... continue with Removing
g
off... on... th GPROC.
the GPROC
on... on...
off... off... not receiving dc power...
Illustration
Figure 4-6 shows a GPROC module.
ALARM (RED) LED

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
(NORMALLY OFF)
ACTIVE (GREEN) LED

(NORMALLY ON)
RESET/DISABLE SWITCH TTY CONNECTOR

UP (MOMENTARY) = RESET THIS OPTICALLY ISOLATED TEST PORT ALLOWS CONTROL OF
MIDDLE = NORMAL OPERATION ON BOARD SELF DIAGNOSTICS.
DOWN = DISABLE
Figure 4-6 GPROC module
440 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 GPROC/GPROC2 replacement
Removing the
GPROC
Follow these steps to set up the GPROC replacement:
CAUTION
Do not exchange all GPROCs connected to one LAN simultaneously or all
DTE addresses will be lost.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC.

Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT), beginning in Chapter
2 for instructions.
Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the TTY port of the master GPROC.
However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can connect to any available
GPROC.
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter all the MMI commands.
2. Enter the lock command to lock the faulty GPROC.

3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the faulty GPROC to the down (DISABLE)
position.
4. Remove the faulty GPROC.
Installing the
GPROC
Follow these steps to replace the GPROC.
CAUTION
Replacing the master GPROC will cause a site outage.
1. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch of the replacement GPROC to the down

(DISABLE) position.
2. Insert the replacement GPROC into the empty GPROC slot.
Make sure the GPROC locks firmly into the backplane.
3. The DTE addresses of a replacement master GPROC must be checked to ensure
that it is correct for the site in which it is installed.
4. The OMC must initiate the equip_device command to inform the software to
load code into the replacement GPROC.
NOTE
From software release 1510 onwards the equip_device command will only
be available from the OMC.

GPROC back in-service (INS).

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Hybrid combiner and power load replacement GSM-100-523
Hybrid combiner and power load replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a Hybrid Combiner and its power load
module.
Each hybrid combiner requires a power load. One hybrid combiner combines two
transmit input signals into one transmit output signal. Hybrid combiner stages can be
cascaded together. A BTS cabinet can support a maximum of four hybrid
combiner/power loads.
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before performing this procedure.
instructions.
NOTE
Removing the
hybrid combiner
Follow these steps to remove a hybrid combiner.
WARNING
Turn the transmit RF power OFF, and verify that it is off, before disconnecting
cables! Severe burns may result if RF power is ON while disconnecting the
cables.
The transmit combiner shelf is located above the DRCU shelf assembly between
the DRCU fans and the RFE shelf.
2. Locate the hybrid combiner to be removed.
3. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the hybrid combiner being
replaced to verify the radio does not have any traffic on it.
The radio unit must not have any traffic at the moment the hybrid combiner is
replaced.
4. If the radio unit has no channel traffic, in a TTY window, enter the lock_device
command to take the DRI/DRIX/radio unit associated with the faulty hybrid
combiner out of service (OOS)
5. Note the order that the coaxial cables are connected to the three ports.
6. Disconnect all the coaxial cables by turning the cable connectors
counter-clockwise.
442 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Hybrid combiner and power load replacement
7. Disconnect the hybrid combiner from its power load (a black, finned device) by
turning the power load connector clockwise.
8. Continue on to the next section on removing power loads, if necessary.
Removing the
power load
Follow these step to remove the power load.
1. Remove the power load mounting bracket securing screw from the bottom front
edge of the transmit combiner shelf.
2. Lift the front of the bracket up and pull it toward the front of the cabinet until the
rear bracket tab disengages from the shelf slot.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the power load to the bracket.
4. Remove the power load.
Installing the
power load
Follow these step to install the power load.
1. Install the power load into the cabinet.
2. Tighten the two screws that secure the power load to the bracket.
3. Push the front of the bracket in until the rear tab engages to the shelf slot.
4. Install the power load mounting bracket securing screw to the bottom edge of the
transmit combiner shelf.
5. Continue on to the next section on installing hybrid combiners, if necessary.
Installing the
hybrid combiner
Follow these step to install the hybrid combiner.
1. Connect the hybrid combiner to the power load by turning the power load
connector counterclockwise.
2. Connect all the coaxial cables to the three ports on the hybrid combiner by turning
the cable connectors clockwise.
3. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRI/DRIX/DRCU associated
with the hybrid combiner back in-service (INS).
NOTE
4. After installing this module, it may be necessary to re-initialize the site. Refer to
Resetting the Site in Chapter 2 for more information.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Redundant KSW or TSW replacement GSM-100-523
Redundant KSW or TSW replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switches (KSWs) or
timeslot switches (TSWs).
Prerequisites
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for
instructions.
NOTE
Illustration
Figure 4-7 shows a sample KSW / TSW board.
Backplane connector
Alarm (red) LED

(Normally off)
Active (green) LED

(Normally on)
RESET/DISABLE Switch
Up (momentary) = Reset
Middle = Normal operation
Down = Disable
Figure 4-7 KSW board
444 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Redundant KSW or TSW replacement
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a redundant KSW or TSW.
CAUTION
Module replacement may cause system down time.
1. Enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch to the

replacement KSW/TSW (A/B).
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter this command.
2. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and release the switch.
The switch returns to the middle (active position) automatically.
3. Press the RESET/DISABLE switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the
faulty KSW/TSW.
4. Remove the faulty KSW/TSW.
5. Insert the replacement KSW/TSW.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Nonredundant KSW or TSW module replacement GSM-100-523
Nonredundant KSW or TSW module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing nonredundant kiloport switches (KSWs)
and Timeslot switches (TSWs).
Prerequisites
instructions.
NOTE
Illustration
Figure 4-8 shows a sample KSW / TSW board.
Backplane connector
Alarm (red) LED

(Normally off)
Active (green) LED

(Normally on)
Middle = Normal operation
Down = Disable
Figure 4-8 KSW module
446 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Nonredundant KSW or TSW module replacement
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace the KSW or TSW.
CAUTION
Module replacement may cause a short SITE outage when KSWs/TSWs are
switched.
1. Insert the replacement KSW/TSW into an empty KSW/TSW slot.

2. If necessary, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to switch to
the replacement KSW/TSW (A/B).
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable, the OMC must enter this command.
3. Set the RESET/DISABLE switch up to the RESET position and then down to the
DISABLE position to disable the faulty KSW/TSW.
4. Remove the faulty KSW/TSW.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Redundant KSWX module replacement GSM-100-523
Redundant KSWX module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant kiloport switch extender
(KSWX) modules
CAUTION
Module replacement will cause the site to selfreset. It is recommended that
network appropriate action be implemented to minimize the effects of the reset
when the KSWXs are switched.
Illustration
Figure 4-9 shows a typical KSWX module.
Fibre optic input from Backplane connector

another KSWX
Fibre optic input

from CLKX
Fibre optic output
to another KSWX LED (green)
Figure 4-9 Kiloport switch extender (KSWX) module
448 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Redundant KSWX module replacement
LED indications
The indications for the redundant and non-redundant KSWX are shown in the following
table:
Table 4-5 LED indications

LED Action
Lit KSWX in local slot and
KSWX is master and
KSWX is receiving clocks from the fibre
port and
No GCLK alarms and
No TDM receive violations from the fibre
port and
KSW not present
or
KSWX in local slot and
KSWX is master and
port and
No GCLK alarms and
KSW is present
or
KSWX in remote or expansion slot and
No GCLK alarms and
port
Flashing KSWX in local slot and

KSWX is slave and
port and
No GCLK alarms and
port and
KSW not present
or
KSWX in local slot and
KSWX is slave and
port and
No GCLK alarms and
KSW is present
OFF When any of the lit or flashing criteria are

not present or no power to the card

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Redundant KSWX module replacement GSM-100-523
Replacing KSWX
A and B
Follow these step to replace a KSWXA and KSWX B.
1. Take network appropriate actions to use KSWX B modules only.
2. Disconnect the fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX.
3. Remove the faulty KSWX.
4. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the faulty KSWX was
removed.
5. Reconnect all fibre optic cables.
6. If required, take network appropriate actions to restore the new KSWX back
in-service (INS).
NOTE
A KSWX B module must be replaced with a KSWX A module.
450 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Nonredundant KSWX module replacement
Nonredundant KSWX module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing nonredundant kiloport switch extender
(KSWX) modules
Illustration and
indications
A board view of the redundant module is shown in Figure 4-9 and the LED indications in
Table 4-5
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a nonredundant kiloport switch extender module.
1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty KSWX.
2. Remove the faulty KSWX.
3. Install the replacement KSWX in the slot from which the fault KSWX was removed.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Redundant LANX replacement GSM-100-523
Redundant LANX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing redundant local area network extender
(LANX) cards.
There are two sets of instructions:
Replacing the LANX associated with the active LAN.
Replacing the LANX associated with the standby LAN.
Follow the instructions that fit the situation.
Prerequisites
Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) before replacing this module.
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) in Chapter 2 for instructions.
NOTE
Replacing the
LANX associated
with the active
LAN
Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the active LAN.
CAUTION
Module replacement will cause system down time.
1. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to tell the software to used
the standby LAN.
2. Remove the LANX.
3. Install the replacement LANX in the slot from which the faulty LANX was removed
in the previous step.
5. Wait about 30 seconds.
6. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked
(active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby).
7. Enter the swap_device command to swap the active LAN back to standby and
the replacement LAN to active.
452 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Redundant LANX replacement
Replacing the
LANX associated
with the standby
LAN
Follow these steps to replace the LANX card for the standby LAN.
1. Disconnect all the fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX.
2. Remove the LANX.
5. Wait about 30 seconds.
6. Enter the state command to verify that one LAN device is busy and unlocked
(active) and one LAN is enabled and unlocked (standby)
It may take the system up to 30 seconds to bring the standby LAN back in service
(INS).
7. Enter the swap_device command to swap the active LAN back to standby and
the replacement LAN to active.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Nonredundant LANX replacement GSM-100-523
Nonredundant LANX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing nonredundant local area network
extender (LANX) cards.
The LANA device is controlled by the local area network extender module (LANX)
module in upper slot 20 of the digital module shelf. The LANB device is controlled by
the LANX module in upper slot 19 of the digital module shelf.
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a nonredundant LANX module.
CAUTION
Module replacement will cause system down time.
1. Disconnect all fibre optic cables from the faulty LANX.

2. Remove the faulty LANX.
454 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 MSI replacement
MSI replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) module.
Nonredundant
systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing MSI boards in nonredundant systems.
If the MSI being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channel capacity for all 2.048 Mbit/s links is lost during
traffic MSI replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic no other ill effects will be noticed
Redundant
systems
MSI replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system.
Illustration
Figure 4-10 shows a typical MSI board.
Backplane
connector
Alarm (red) LED

(Normally off)

(Normally on)
Middle = normal operation
Down = Disable
Figure 4-10 Multiple serial interface (MSI) module

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
MSI replacement GSM-100-523
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace an MSI board.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC.
instructions.
GPROC.
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands.
2. Enter the lock_device command to take the MSI out of service (OOS).
3. Disable the MSI board with the RESET/DISABLE switch:
Set the switch up to the RESET position.
Then set the switch down to the DISABLE position.
The switch locks in the DISABLE (down) position.
4. Remove the faulty MSI.
5. Install the replacement MSI in the slot from which the faulty MSI was removed in
the previous step.
6. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the MSI back in
service (INS).
456 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 PIX replacement
PIX replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a parallel interface extender (PIX) board in
an external alarm system.
Illustration
Figure 4-11 shows a PIX board.
Backplane connector
Alarm (green) LED
(On = no alarms)
(Off = customer alarm detected)
Connector is cabled to top of

cabinet for interconnect to
customer site equipment
Figure 4-11 PIX board
Replacing the
PIX
Follow these steps to replace a PIX board.
CAUTION
Replacing this module may trigger false customer alarms.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) at the TTY port of a GPROC/GPROC2.

instructions.
NOTE
2. Enter the lock_device command to take the PIX out-of-service (OOS).

3. Disconnect the cable from the PIX.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
PIX replacement GSM-100-523
4. Remove the faulty PIX.

5. Install the replacement PIX in the slot from which the faulty PIX was removed in
the previous step.
6. Reconnect the cable to the PIX.
7. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the PIX back in-service (INS).
458 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Power supply module replacement
Power supply module replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing power supply modules.
These are two sets of instructions:
Replacing a non-redundant power supply module
Replacing a redundant power supply module
Applications
This procedure applies to all of the various power supply modules used in Motorola BTS,
including:
DPSMs,
EPSMs,
IPSMs,
Illustration
Figure 4-12 shows the DPSM:

!

!
!
!
Figure 4-12 DPSM
The other power supply modules are very similar in outward appearance. LED position
and overall size may differ.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Power supply module replacement GSM-100-523
Replacing a
nonredundant
power supply
module
Follow these steps to replace a non-redundant power supply module
NOTE
If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational,
module replacement should be transparent to the system.
CAUTION
Do not mix power supply modules; for example, if a cabinet is equipped with
DPSMs, do not try to insert any other type of power supply module. Always
replace a power supply module with the same type of module!
1. Remove the air baffle from the unused slot.

2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot.
3. Remove the faulty power supply module.
4. Re-install the air baffle in the slot from which the faulty power supply module was
removed.
Replacing a
redundant power
supply module
Follow these steps to replace a redundant power supply module:
NOTE
If the shelf served by the faulty power supply module is still operational,
module replacement should be transparent to the system.
1. Remove the faulty power supply module.

2. Install the replacement power supply module in the empty slot from which the fault
DPSM was removed in the previous step.
460 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 XCDR replacement
XCDR replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a transcoder module (XCDR).
Nonredundant
Systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing XCDR boards in nonredundant
systems.
If the XCDR being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channel capacity for all E1/T links is lost during MSI
traffic... replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed
Redundant
Systems
XCDR replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system.
Illustration
Figure 4-13 shows a typical transcoder module.
Backplane connector
Alarm (red) LED

(Normally off)
Active (green) LED

(Normally on)
RESET/DISABLE switch
Down = Disable
Figure 4-13 XCDR module

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
XCDR replacement GSM-100-523
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a transcoder board.
instructions.
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must invoke all MMI commands.
2. Enter the lock_device command to take the XCDR out of service (OOS).
3. Set the front panel switch up to the RESET position and then down to the
DISABLE position to disable the faulty XCDR.
4. Remove the faulty XCDR.
5. Install the replacement XCDR in the slot from which the faulty XCDR was removed
6. In a TTY window, enter the unlock_device command to bring the XCDR back in
service (INS).
462 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 GDP replacement
GDP replacement
Overview
This section contains instructions for replacing a Generic DSP Processor (GDP) module
when used as an XCDR.
Non-redundant
Systems
The following table shows the effects of replacing GDP boards in non-redundant
systems.
If the GDP being replaced... Then...

can still carry some channel capacity for all E1/T1 links is lost during GDP
traffic... replacement.
cannot carry any channel traffic... no other ill effects will be noticed
Redundant
Systems
GDP replacement should be transparent to the system in a redundant system, as long as
all traffic has been routed away from the board to be replaced.
Illustration
Backplane connector
Alarm (red) LED

(Normally off)
Active (green) LED

(Normally on)
RESET/DISABLE switch
Down = Disable
Figure 4-14 shows a typical transcoder module.
Figure 4-14 GDP module

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GDP replacement GSM-100-523
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace a GDP transcoder module.
1. Set up a local maintenance terminal (LMT) and connect it to the TTY port of a
GPROC.
instructions.
GPROC.
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC-R must invoke all MMI commands.
2. In a TTY window, enter the lock_device command to take the GDP card out of
service (OOS).
3. Set the front panel switch down to the DISABLE position to disable the faulty GDP
card.
4. Remove the faulty GDP card.
5. Install the replacement GDP card in the slot from which the faulty GDP card was
removed.
6. Set the front panel switch to the NORMAL OPERATION (middle) position.
GDP card in-service (INS).
NOTE
If replacing an XCDR module with a GDP module, as an upgrade, the OMC
requires command changes to recognize and use the different module.
Ensure the OMC has made these changes before upgrading an XCDR module
with a GDP module.
464 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC)
Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC)
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and installing a Remotely Tunable
Channel Combiner (RTC)
Locating the
RTC
Follow these steps to:
Locate the RTC,
Prepare the cabinet for RTC removal.
The transmit combiner shelf is located above the radio unit shelf assembly
between the radio unit fans and the RFE shelf.
Figure 4-15 shows the upper portion of a BTS cabinet and identifies the transmit
combiner shelf.
DAB
RFE
SHELF
TRANSMIT
COMBINER
SHELF
(D)RCU 3
(D)RCU 4
(D)RCU 5 (D)RCU 0
(D)RCU 1
(D)RCU 2
Figure 4-15 BTS cabinet

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC) GSM-100-523
2. Locate the RTC.

The RTC is mounted on the top of the transmit combiner shelf. Figure 4-16 shows
a front view of a sample RTC.
ON
FEED
Figure 4-16 Remotely tunable combiner front view
A removable plate may cover the toggle switches on the left side of the RTC.
Remove this plate by loosening the two screws which secure it in place.
instructions.
any available GPROC.
4. Enter the lock_device command to take the DRIMs/DRIX/radio units associated
with the faulty RTC out of service (OOS).
CAUTION
The radio unit cannot be transmitting at the moment the RTC is replaced.
466 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a remotely tunable combiner (RTC)
Removing the
RTC
Follow these steps to remove the RTC from the cabinet.
1. Disconnect the dc power cable (Amp MatenLok) connector located on the right
hand side of the combiner front panel by squeezing on the connector and pulling it
free.
2. Note which coaxial cables are connected to the input ports of the RTC and the
routing of the cables.
This information is necessary for reconnecting the cables to the new RTC.
3. Disconnect all the coaxial cables.
4. Disconnect the Tx Bandpass Filter (Tx BPF) cables from the combiner.
5. Remove the three combiner module hold down screws from the bottom front edge
of the transmit combiner shelf.
WARNING
The remotely tunable combiner is heavy. Take care when lifting it.
6. Lift the front of the combiner module up and pull it toward the front of the cabinet
until the rear bracket tabs disengage from the shelf slots.
7. Lift the RTC free.
Installing a RTC
Follow these steps to install an RTC.
WARNING
The remotely tunable combiner is heavy. Take care when lifting it.
1. Lift the RTC and onto the transmit combiner shelf.

2. Lift the front of the RTC up and push the module toward the back of the cabinet
until the rear bracket tabs engage the shelf slots.
3. Tighten the three combiner module hold down screws into the bottom front edge of
the transmit combiner shelf.
4. Connect the Tx BPF cables to the combiner
5. Connect the radio unit cables to the combiner.
6. Connect the dc power cable (Amp MatenLok) connector located on the right
hand side of the combiner front panel by pressing the connector into the jack until
it clicks into place.
7. Enter the unlock_device to bring the DRI/DRIX/radio unit associated with the
RTC back in service (INS).

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a single cavity in an RTC GSM-100-523
Replacing a single cavity in an RTC
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and installing a single cavity filter in a
remotely tunable combiner (RTC).
Procedure
criteria
Motorola does not manufacture the RTC. If something goes wrong with an RTC, it is
best to replace the entire RTC unit and return the faulty one to Motorola. Motorola, in
turn, will return it to the original supplier.
However, there are rare occasions when replacing a single cavity may be necessary.
Such replacement should be authorized by Motorola BEFORE the replacement takes
place.
Contact the local Motorola office for further information and authorization BEFORE
replacing a single cavity filter.
Removing the
cavity filter
Follow these steps to replace a single cavity in an RTC.
NOTE
2. Enter the lock_device command for the two COMB devices.

This disables all the DRIMs and radio units connected to the RTC.
3. Disconnect the RF connectors from the front panel of the cavity filter to be
replaced.
4. Unscrew the eight M3 crosshead screws that secure the appropriate RF bridge(s)
and lift the bridge(s) free.
5. Unscrew the four M2.5 captive screws that secure the cavity filter front panel and
gently pull the cavity filter free of the RTC chassis.
468 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a single cavity in an RTC
Installing the
cavity filter
Follow these steps to install the cavity filter:
1. Push the cavity filter into the RTC chassis.
2. Screw in the four M2.5 captive screws to secure the cavity filter front panel.
Torque the four screws to 5 Nm.
3. Replace the RF bridges.
4. Screw in the eight M3 crosshead screws to secure the appropriate RF bridge(s).
Torque the eight screws to 5 Nm.
5. Connect the RF connectors to the front panel of the cavity filter being replaced.
6. Enter the unlock_device command on both COMB devices to bring the COMBS
and DRIMs back in service (INS).

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing the RTC control processor GSM-100-523
Replacing the RTC control processor
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and installing a new processor board in a
Remotely Tunable Combiner (RTC).
Procedure
criteria
Motorola does not manufacture RTCs. If something goes wrong with an RTC, it is best
to replace the entire unit and return the faulty one to Motorola. Motorola, in turn, will
return it to the original supplier.
However, there are rare occasions when replacing the RTC control processor may be
necessary. Such replacement should be authorized by Motorola BEFORE the
replacement takes place.
Contact the local Motorola office for further information and authorization BEFORE
replacing a control processor.
Removing the
control
processor board
Follow these steps to replace the RTC control processor board.
NOTE
2. Enter the shutdown_device command to take the DRI/DRIX/radio unit

associated with the faulty RTC out of service (OOS).
3. Locate the control processor board.
The board is located in the small cavity on the left side of the RTC.
Figure 4-17 shows a sample RTC and identifies the processor board location.
Figure 4-18 shows the processor board in more detail.
The processor board may be covered by a small plate that is secured by two
screws. Loosen the screws to remove the plate and expose the board.
470 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing the RTC control processor
Processor board location

(See Figure 4-18
for more detail)
ON
FEED
Figure 4-17 Remotely tunable combiner front view
PARTIAL/
FULL
RESET
switch
Pull tab
ENABLE RESET
Red LED switch
Figure 4-18 RTC processor board detail

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing the RTC control processor GSM-100-523
4. Grasp the pull tab and pull the processor out from the RTC.
The tab slides on its mounting screws.
The board fits snugly; pull gently but firmly.
5. Set the RTC address on the new processor card to match that of the old processor
card.
Set the address by covering up the pins on the long connector.
6. Insert the new card into the rails that are molded into the card supports.
7. Press the pull tab to press the card into the RTC.
Press until the card is firmly seated into the backplane of the RTC.
CAUTION
The card is fragile. Do not force it into the cavity!The card will fit snugly, but
can be pushed into the RTC without excessive effort. If the card does not
slide easily into place, remove it and make sure it is seated in the rails
properly.
8. Use the unlock_device command to bring the DRI/DRIX/radio unit associated

with the faulty RTC back in service (INS).
472 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a cavity combining block
Replacing a cavity combining block
Overview
This section contains instructions for removing and refitting a cavity combining block
(CCB).
Safety
Removing a cavity combining block requires the removal of RF transmitter power, it is
therefore advisable to perform this procedure during periods of low traffic.
Notify the OMC of imminent installation activity.
WARNING
Potentially lethal voltages and other high energy sources are present within
the cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch is set to the ON position and/or
batteries are connected.
Before disconnecting any RF cables, ensure the RF power is OFF. If RF

power is on when cables are disconnected, severe burns may result.
Preparation for
CCB removal
The following steps are required prior to removing a CCB:
instructions.
any available GPROC.
2. Enter the lock_device command to take the DRIMs/DRIX/transceivers
associated with the faulty CCB out of service (OOS).
3. All dc, Tx and control cables associated with the faulty CCB should be marked at
this stage to ensure they are correctly assembled during the refitting procedure.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a cavity combining block GSM-100-523
Removing a CCB
The following steps are required to remove a CCB:
WARNING
A CCB with filter weighs 11.5 kg. Lift the CCB carefully, to avoid physical
injury. Set the CCB down carefully, to avoid further damage to the CCB or
damage to the site.
The RF output cable is fitted to the rear of the filter. For a cabinet containing
two CCBs an additional person will be required to hold the CCB clear of the
RF shelf to allow this cable to be disconnected.
1. Disconnect all dc, Tx and control cables from the front and top of the CCB.
2. Unscrew the two M4 x 8 screws that secure the CCB bracket to the RF shelf.
3. Pull the CCB forward and, if a filter is attached, disconnect the RF output cable
connected to the filter.
4. Lift the CCB free.
Refitting a CCB
The following steps are required to refit a CCB:
WARNING
A CCB with filter weighs 11.5 kg. Lift the CCB carefully, to avoid physical
injury. Set the CCB down carefully, to avoid further damage to the CCB or
damage to the site.
The RF output cable is fitted to the rear of the filter. For a cabinet containing
two CCBs an additional person will be required to hold the CCB clear of the
RF shelf to allow this cable to be disconnected.
1. Lift the CCB onto the RF shelf.

2. If a filter is attached to the CCB, connect the RF output cable to the filter.
3. Slide The CCB into the two retaining fixtures at the rear of the cabinet and secure
the CCB bracket using two M4 x 8 screws, torqued to 2.2 Nm.
4. Refit the dc, TX and control cables to the front and top of the CCB.
5. Enter the unlock_device command to bring the DRIMs/DRIX/transceivers
associated with the CCB back in service (INS).
6. The replacement is now complete, inform the OMC and log completion of the
repair/replacement activity.
474 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Removing and replacing a receiver matrix
Removing and replacing a receiver matrix

Overview
This section contains instructions for removing a receiver matrix.
See Chapter 4 for instructions for:
Removing the receiver matrix Radio Front End (RFE) module.
Replacing a receiver matrix
Installing a receiver matrix RFE.
WARNING
Turn the transmit power OFF before disconnecting cables. Severe burns may
result if RF power is ON and cables are disconnected.
Before beginning
Determine whether a PC is available in the repair kit.
Although Motorola recommends including a PC in the standard testing equipment, one
may not be available.
If a PC is... Then...
available... Connect a local maintenance terminal (LMT) to the
TTY port of the master GPROC/GPROC2.
Refer to Connecting a local maintenance
terminal (LMT), in Chapter 2 for instructions.
Motorola recommends connecting the LMT to the
TTY port of the master GPROC/GPROC2.
However, if the master is unavailable, an LMT can
connect to any available GPROC/GPROC2.
unavailable... the OMC must enter all MMI commands.
Removing a
receiver matrix
Follow these steps to remove a receiver matrix.
1. Open the cabinet door and locate the preselector shelf (RFE).
2. Locate the receiver matrix to be removed.
3. Note the order that the cables are connected to the output ports on the front of the
receiver matrix.
NOTE
Up to five coaxial cables may be connected to one receiver matrix.
4. Check the LEDs on the radio unit associated with the receiver matrix being
replaced to verify the radio unit does not have any traffic on it.
CAUTION
The radio unit cannot have any traffic at the moment the receiver matrix is
replaced.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Removing and replacing a receiver matrix GSM-100-523
5. If the radio unit has not channel traffic, in a TTY window, enter the lock_device
command to take the DRIM/DRIX/radio unit out of service (OOS)
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter this command.
6. Disconnect all coaxial cables from the receiver matrix output ports.
7. Determine the type of BTS you are working on:
If this is a: Then...
BTS4 cabinet Release the module retaining spring. The spring release
points are on the RFE shelf at the front corners of the
matrix and continue on to step 8.
BTS5 cabinet Release the quarter-turn fasteners and continue on to
step 8.
8. Disconnect the coaxial cables from the RF input port on the front of each
preselector module the receiver matrix is connected to.
9. Slide the receiver matrix out toward the front of the cabinet.
Installing a
receiver matrix
Follow these steps to install a receiver matrix.
1. Install the receiver matrix module into the front of the cabinet.
2. Determine the type of BTS you are working on:
If this is a: Then...
BTS4 cabinet... i. Engage the module retaining spring. The
spring engage points are on the RFE shelf
at the front corners of the matrix.
BTS5 cabinet... i. Fasten the quarter-turn fasteners.
3. Connect all the coaxial cables to the receiver matrix output ports.
476 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Removing and replacing a receiver matrix

DRIM/DRIX/radio unit modules back inservice (INS).
NOTE
If an LMT is unavailable the OMC must enter this command.
5. After installing this module, it may be necessary to reinitialize the site.

Refer to the procedure, Resetting the Site, in Chapter 2 for more information.
The procedure is complete
See Chapter 4 for instructions to install a receiver matrix RFE.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a power converter GSM-100-523
Replacing a power converter
Overview
This section contains instructions for:
Removing a power converter (PC),
Installing a power converter.
Removing a
power converter
Follow these steps to remove a PC:
1. Open the BTS cabinet door.
2. Locate the PCU.
The PCU is mounted on the left side of the transceiver shelf assembly.
3. Locate the faulty PC within the Power Converter Unit (PCU).
Figure 4-19 shows a sample PCU and a PC.
power converter module
Power converter unit
Figure 4-19 PCU with removed PC module
478 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a power converter
4. Set the following circuit breakers to OFF:

CB5 for PC1
CB6 for PC2
CB7 for PC3
CB8 for PC4
5. Pull the PC front panel handle outward, away from the cabinet until the PC
connectors are disengaged from the PCU backplane connectors.
Installing a
power converter
Follow these steps to install a PC:
1. Position the new PC within the PCU
2. Push the new PC into the cabinet until the PC connectors engage the PCU
backplane connectors.
3. Set the following circuit breakers to ON:
CB5 for PC1
CB6 for PC2
CB7 for PC3
CB8 for PC4

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a power converter GSM-100-523
480 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Chapter 5
Miscellaneous repair

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
ii 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
Chapter 5
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Procedure 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Procedure 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Procedure 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Alarm level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
OMC actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523
iv 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Miscellaneous repair procedures
Miscellaneous repair procedures
Introduction
This chapter contains instructions for removing and replacing various components,
including:
Circuit breakers.
Bus terminator cards.
RFI finger gaskets
Failure of these items is unusual. Usually, replacement of any of these items is first
recommended by Motorola, through its local offices, and may recommend these
procedures. They also may require parts or supplies that are not part of the normal
repair equipment.
Obtaining
replacement
authorization
Several of these replacement procedures require authorization or special parts from
Motorola. The replaceable modules are not part of standard replacement kit.
Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace these modules.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Removing and replacing a circuit breaker GSM-100-523
Removing and replacing a circuit breaker
Overview
This section contains instructions for:
Removing a circuit breaker.
Replacing a circuit breaker.
Indications
Circuit breakers are durable pieces of equipment. If a circuit breaker trips to the OFF
position, it can usually be reset by setting it up to the ON position.
However, sometimes a circuit breaker may not be able to be reset. That is, the circuit
breaker switch will not click into the ON position, or will not engage. In these cases the
circuit breaker is broken. The broken circuit breaker must be removed and a new one
installed in its place.
Removing a
circuit breaker
Follow these steps to remove a circuit breaker.
1. Reroute all traffic to an unaffected cabinet.
2. Switch off all dc power supplies to the cabinet before removing and replacing
circuit breakers.
WARNING
The external dc power supplies must be OFF during circuit breaker removal or
installation.
3. Open the cabinet door and locate the Power Distribution Unit (PDU) at the top of
the cabinet.
4. Open the PDU cover to expose the circuit breakers and the Distribution Alarm
Board (DAB).
NOTE
The DAB is located on the right side of the PDU.
5. Remove all four M4 x 8 screws, and remove the circuit breaker cover.
6. Grasp the faulty circuit breaker and pull it outward, away from the cabinet until the
circuit breaker disengages from the mounting buses.
52 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Removing and replacing a circuit breaker
Installing a
circuit breaker
Follow these steps to install a circuit breaker.
1. Check the circuit breaker to make sure it is the correct type and rating.
2. Install the circuit breaker.
3. Verify the breaker engages the mounting buses correctly and push the circuit
breaker firmly into place.
4. Replace the circuit breaker cover.
Step Action
a. Install the four M4 x 8 screws that secure the circuit breaker
cover.
b. Torque the hex standoffs to 2.2 Nm.
5. Close the PDU cover.

7. Reconnect dc power to the cabinet if necessary.
8. Switch on all dc power supplies to the cabinet.
It may be necessary to re-initialize the site after installing new circuit breakers and
re-applying power to the cabinet. Refer to Resetting and re-initializing a site in
Chapter 2 for more information.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) GSM-100-523
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)
Overview
There are only two bus terminator cards (BTC) fitted in a shelf. There cannot be any
redundant BTCs to come into service when a BTC is removed. However, under some
circumstances a KSW (TSW) module can terminate the TDM bus; consequently the BTC
replacement procedures are split into two groups: non-redundant KSWs/TSWs and
redundant KSWs/TSWs.
Within these groups there are several variants of the procedures which depend upon the
conditions listed at the beginning of each procedure.
Conditions
There are 6 sets of conditions which produce several variants of the this procedure.
Follow the appropriate procedure relating to your situation and conditions.
If these conditions apply: Follow the steps in:

Replacing BTC 0 (left side). Procedure 1.
KSW A/TSW A is in the shelf.
Spare KSW/TSW and BTC are available
Replacing BTC 0 (left side). Procedure 2.
KSW B/TSW B is in the shelf.
A spare BTC is available.
Replacing BTC 1 (right side). Procedure 3.
KSW B/TSW B is in the shelf.
Spare KSW/TSW and BTC are available.
Obtaining
replacement
authorization
This procedure requires authorization or special parts from Motorola. The replaceable
modules are not part of standard replacement kit.
Contact the local Motorola office BEFORE attempting to replace this module.
54 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC)
Procedure 1
Follow these steps to replace BTC 0 when:
KSW A / TSW A is in the shelf.
A spare KSW/ TSW and BTC are available.
This Procedure contains two sub-procedures:
Preparing the cabinet
Replacing the BTC
NOTE
Module replacement should be transparent to the system. The system retains
as much system functionality as possible.

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for BTC replacement.
1. Insert a spare KSW/TSW into the empty slot 1 (KSW B/TSW B).
2. Connect an LMT, if one is not already available.
instructions.
3. Open a TTY window.
Replacing the BTC

Follow these steps to replace the BTC.
1. Enter the swap_device command to inform the software to switch to KSW
B/TSW B.
2. Disable KSW A/TSW A in slot 27 using its front panel switch and remove KSW
A/TSW A.
3. Insert the spare BTC into slot 27.
4. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 in
slot 28 and remove BTC 0.
5. Insert the replacement BTC into slot 28 (BTC 0) and refit the extractor tabs.
6. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.
7. If desired, re-insert KSW A/ TSW A into slot 27.
8. In a TTY window, enter the swap_device command to inform the software to
switch back to KSW A/TSW A.
9. Remove the spare KSW B/TSW B from slot 1.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a bus terminator card (BTC) GSM-100-523
Procedure 2
KSW B / TSW B is in the shelf.
A spare BTC is available.
NOTE
1. Insert a spare BTC into the empty slot 27 (KSW A/TSW A).
2. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs located on the front of BTC 0 in
slot 28 and remove BTC 0.
4. Remove the spare BTC from slot 27.
Procedure 3
KSW B / TSW B is in the shelf.
A spare KSW/TSW and BTC are available.
NOTE
1. Insert a spare KSW/TSW into the empty slot 27 (KSW A/TSW A).
switch to KSW A/TSW A.
3. Disable KSW B/TSW B in slot 1 using its front panel switch and remove KSW
B/TSW B.
4. Insert the spare BTC into slot 1.
5. Remove the covers from the module extractor tabs on the front of BTC 1 in slot 0
and remove BTC 1.
7. Remove the BTC from slot.
8. If desired, re-insert KSW B/TSW B into slot 1.
switch to KSW B/TSW B.
56 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)
Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)
Introduction
This section explains how to remove a distribution alarm board (DAB).
Background
Under some extraordinary circumstances, the DAB may fail in a cabinet. In these
circumstances it is necessary to replace the DAB.
Although a DAB can be replaced in the field, they are not considered field replaceable
boards, like the digital modules.
Replacing a DAB is an extraordinary action which requires consultation and
authorization from the local Motorola office and the MCSC.
Contact the local Motorola office before attempting to replace a DAB!
Precautions
Follow these precautions when removing or replacing the DAB and PAB:
Switch off all power to the cabinet. If possible, disconnect the power cables from
the top of the cabinet.
WARNING
Do not perform this procedure until all power has been removed from the
cabinet!
Contact the local Motorola office for advice and authorization BEFORE attempting
this procedure.
Do not cross or mix up input cables.
Some of the cable links use similar connectors. It is possible to cross the cables
when reconnecting the cables. Label the cables, if necessary, to prevent mistakes
in connecting cables.
Use care when connecting and disconnecting cables.
Some of the connectors are fragile. Note how the connectors fit, and pull or push
them gently.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB) GSM-100-523
Removing the
board
Follow these steps to remove a DAB or PAB:
1. Switch off the power to the cabinet.
WARNING
Do not continue with this procedure until the cabinet power is off!
2. Disconnect the various connectors from the board.

There are several different types of cable connectors.
Figure 5-1 shows a DAB.
Table 5-1 describes the various types of connectors.

!

#

"

!

SCREWS SCREWS
DIP SWITCHES
Figure 5-1 Distribution alarm board
58 1st Jun 01
68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB)
Table 5-1 DAB connector descriptions and disconnection tips

Connector: Description
Internal Functions These are large, reddish brown plastic connectors.
There are clips molded into the top and bottom of the
connector that snap into similar molded clips on the
External Functions b d
board.
To disconnect, squeeze the connector at the top and
bottom, and pull straight out from the board.
DRAM Battery Backup These are small, black clips which connect
PC4 ribbon-cable to the board.
PC 7 To disconnect, pull straight out from the board
Lower Shelf AI0 These ribbon-cable connectors have clips that lock
PC2 them into the board.
To disconnect, flip the clips back from the top and
bottom of the connector, and pullull straight out.
Lower Shelf AI1
PC3 NOTE
Do not cross these cables. Take notice of the position
of the cables, and label if necessary.
3. Loosen the screws that secure the board.

The DAB is held in place by four black Phillips head captive screws (screws
which do not come out of the board).
4. Pull the board GENTLY away from the cabinet.
The board may be firmly anchored to the cabinet. Make sure all the screws have
been loosened or removed.
CAUTION
Be careful when pulling on the DAB. It may break. Try to pull from both ends,
rather than from the middle of the board. If possible, try to rock the board free.
5. Set the board aside.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing a distribution alarm board (DAB) GSM-100-523
Installing a new
board
Follow these steps to install the new DAB:
1. Compare the DIP switches on the new board to the DIP switches on the old board.
Reset the DIP switches on the new board as necessary.
2. Line up the 0 V and +27 V posts on the new board with the input ports in the
cabinet.
3. Make sure the various cables are not positioned behind the board or obstructing
the board.
4. Press the board into the cabinet until it seats firmly into the 0 V and +27 V ports.
5. Tighten the screws until they are firm, to secure the board in the cabinet.
6. Connect the various cables.
There are several different types of cable connectors.
Refer to Figure 5-1 for locations of the connectors.
Refer to Table 5-2 for descriptions of the connectors
Table 5-2 DAB connector descriptions and connection tips

Connector: Description
Internal Functions These are large, reddish brown plastic connectors,
with clips that snap into similar molded clips on the
b d
board.
External Functions
To connect, push the connector straight into the jack.
DRAM Battery Backup These are small, black clips which connect
PC4 ribbon-cable to the board.
PC 7 To connect, push the connector straight into the jack.
Lower Shelf AI0 These ribbon-cable connectors have clips that lock
PC2 them into the board.
To connect, press the connectors straight into the
jacks. The connectors will fold u
up and over the
Lower Shelf AI1 connectors to hold them in place.
PC3
* CAUTION
Do not cross the PC2 and PC3 ribbon cables.
7. Restore power to the cabinet.
510 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 Replacing the BSU digital cage
Replacing the BSU digital cage
Introduction
Under certain extraordinary circumstances, it may be necessary to replace the entire

cage/backplane assembly within a cabinet. This procedure explains how to replace the
digital cage.
This procedure takes the cabinet out of service for about four hours. Motorola
recommends performing this procedure during hours of low traffic if possible.
Prerequisites
NOTE
Contact Motorola with any questions about this procedure.
Replacing a cage is an extraordinary action. Therefore, these instructions assume the

person(s) performing this procedure are experienced in all aspects of Site maintenance.
Motorola recommends reading through the entire procedure, including the various related
texts and references, before attempting to perform it.
Tools and
equipment
The following tools and equipment are necessary to remove and replace the backplane:
Torx drivers.
Anti-static mat.
Anti-static bags, or other containers suitable for storing digital boards, in quantities
sufficient to store all the boards in the cages(s).
An approved earth strap.
Labels and marking pens.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Replacing the BSU digital cage GSM-100-523
Obtaining
replacement
authorization
The digital cage is very reliable. Replacement is only necessary in certain limited
circumstances.
Therefore, the Customer Network Resolution Centre (CNRC) Swindon must issue a
Problem Identity Number (PIN) before Motorola will accept a cage or backplane for
return. The PIN shows that CNRC agreed to the backplane replacement.
NOTE
Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such
action.
Procedure
Follow these steps to obtain a PIN number:
1. Call the CNRC at +44 (0) 1793 565444.
This is a British telephone number (44 is the country code for the United Kingdom).
Prefix this number with the international access code if you are calling from outside
the United Kingdom.
2. Describe the problem to the CNRC representative, and explain why cage
replacement is indicated.
Be prepared to describe:
What alarms/events/SWFMs accompanied the problem.
What diagnostic actions , if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.
What repair actions, if any, were taken, and the result of those actions.
CNRC review
The CNRC will review the problem and the steps taken so far. Depending on this review,
the CNRC may either:
Suggest further tests or procedures before authorizing the cage replacement.
Authorize replacing the cage, and issue a PIN number.
NOTE
Do not attempt to remove or replace a cage until CNRC authorizes such
action.
If CNRC issues a PIN number authorizing the cage replacement:

Write the number down.
Quote the PIN number, in addition to the normal returns number, in any
communications with Motorola.
NOTE
Motorola will not accept returned digital cages without an CNRC authorization.
512 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Removing the
cage
Overview
This section contains three separate procedures:
Preparing the cabinet explains how to set up the cabinet so that it is safe to work
on the digital cage.
Disassembling the cage explains how to take the digital cage apart.
Removing the cage explains how to take the cage out of the cabinet.
Perform these procedures in order, beginning with Preparing the cabinet.

Follow these steps to prepare the cabinet for cage replacement.
1. Determine which cage(s) need replacing.
It is probable that only one cage has a faulty backplane. Use the following table to
determine the appropriate actions.
If the faulty cage... Then:

does not contain the continue with step 2.
BSP...
i. Reset the BSC, according to

Resetting and
re-initializing a site

contains the BSP... * CAUTION

Resetting the site stops call processing.
Determine whether call processing is occurring
before deciding to reset the site. Disable call
processing at the site before continuing with this
procedure.
ii. Continue with step 2.
2. Use the circuit breakers to disconnect power to the cage(s).
WARNING
Be careful while working on the cabinet! There is danger of electric burns and
shock!
Follow the procedures in Removing and replacing a circuit breaker, in this

chapter.
If both cages in a cabinet require replacement, disconnect the power to the
cabinet.
If only one cage of a cabinet requires backplane replacement, leave the
power connected to the other cage.
Disabling one cage lets call processing continue, providing the second cage
is independent of the first. However, it also means 48 V power is still
present in the cabinet.
3. Remove the power supply to the cabinet.
The cage is ready for disassembly.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Disassembling the cage

Follow these steps to disassemble the cage.
CAUTION
Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital modules.
1. Remove all the power supply modules in the cage.

Follow the procedure in Power supply module replacement in Chapter 4.
2. Remove all digital full and half size modules from the cage.
CAUTION
Wear an approved earth strap when handling digital modules. Use the
antistatic mat and antistatic containers to store the digital modules.
Put the digital modules into suitable anti-static packaging or storage containers.
These modules will go back into the new backplane.
3. Disconnect the dc supply to the fan assembly that corresponds to the cage being
replaced.
Follow the procedure beginning in Chapter 4.
4. Disconnect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage.

5. Disconnect the MSI and DAB cables, and label the cables so they can be
reconnected properly.
The cables are at the top of the BSU cage.
CAUTION
Do not drop any of the nuts or washers into the lower BSU cage. Loose nuts
or washers can damage the cage and the components if the cage is still
powered up.
6. Note their respective positions and disconnect any fibre optic cables fitted to the
cages.
The cage is ready for removal.
Removing the cage
WARNING
The cage is heavy! Lift the cage carefully, to avoid physical injury. Set the
cage down carefully, to avoid further damage to the cage, or any damage to
the site.
Follow these steps to remove the cage.
1. Remove the eight front screws which attach the cage to the cabinet.
2. Lift the BSU cage out and set it aside.
514 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Installing the
cage
Replacing the cage
WARNING
The cage is heavy! Lift the cage carefully, to avoid physical injury. Set the
cage down carefully, to avoid further damage to the cage, or any damage to
the site.
Follow these steps to replace the cage.

1. Lift the new cage / backplane assembly into the cabinet.
2. Secure the cage in place with the eight front screws
Equipping the cage

Follow these steps to equip the new cage with power and digital modules.
1. Connect the MSI and DAB cables.
The cables are at the top of the BSU cage.
2. Reconnect any fibre optic cables if the cage is extended or expanded to to other
cages
3. Connect the dc supply at the bottom of the BSU cage.
4. Insert the fan assembly, and secure it to the cabinet with the front four screws.
5. Connect the dc supply to the fan assembly.
6. Choose an action from the following table:
If... Then...
The upper cage is being secure the front cover plate below the
replaced... fan assembly, and continue with step 7.
The lower cage is being continue with step 7.
replaced...
7. Insert all the digital full size and half size modules.
8. Insert the power supply modules.
Restoring power
Follow these steps to restore dc power to the cabinet.
1. Connect the power supply to the top of the cabinet.
2. Connect the circuit breakers.
Follow the procedure in Installing a circuit breaker, in this chapter.
3. Observe the LEDs on all the power supply modules, and choose an action from
the following table.
Valid Input Default
the green LED is lit on all the power continue with step 4.
supply modules...
the red LED is lit on all the power use Power supply module
supply modules... replacement in Chapter 4 to diagnose
and correct the problem.
the red LED is lit on any power Continue with step 4 when all the green
supply module... LEDs are lit.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
4. Hard reset all the digital cards.
Step Action: Result:

a. Flip the switch on each digital The board is taken out of service
card up to the RESET position. (OOS).
b. Release the switch. The card resets automatically.
IMPORTANT/GPROC2
Reset the GPROC/GPROC2s last.
Reset the GPROC/GPROC2 in slot 20 last of all.
Checking connections
Follow these steps to check the connections between the new backplane and the rest of
the system.
1. Connect a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) to the TTY port on the master
GPROC.
2. Verify the connection.
If the cabinet is a BSS site, verify the connection to the OMC.
If the cabinet is a BTS site, verify the connection to the BSC.
The site will take about one hour to code load and initialize.
3. Verify that all site Message Transfer Links (MTLs) and Operations and
Maintenance Links (OMLs) are operational.
To verify the MTLs, type:
state 0 MTL x 0 0,
where x is the MTL identifier.
To verify the OML, type:
state 0 OML x y 0,
where x and y are the OML identifiers.
The status for the MTL and the OML should be <busy, unlocked>. If it is not,
further diagnosis is necessary.
516 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 DRAM battery backup fuse failure alarm
DRAM battery backup fuse failure alarm
Devices
This procedure applies to:
DRIMs.
KSWs (TSWs).
Alarm level
The alarm level is WARNING.
OMC actions
The OMC must determine the following:
Site number.
Device ID.
Cage number.
Slot number.
Procedure
Follow these steps to diagnose the failed device:
1. Determine if the battery backup is connected.
If the battery And... Then...

backup is...
the battery backup connect the battery backup to the
option is cabinet.
not connected ... implemented...
the battery backup the alarm is expected. No further
option is not action is required.
implemented...
connected to the this is a BTS cabinet... i. Locate and replace
cabinet... the appropriate fuse
on the DAB.
2. Determine the frequency of the alarm occurrence.
If the alarm is ... Then...

not frequent... No further action is required.
frequent... i. Power down the appropriate device.
ii. Replace the device with a new one.
iii. Power up the new device.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
RFI finger gasket replacement procedure GSM-100-523
RFI finger gasket replacement procedure
Purpose
Follow this procedure to replace the finger gaskets around the door of the BTS cabinet.
Tools and
equipment
This procedure requires the following tools and equipment:
A sharp knife, such as a Model makers knife or a utility knife.
Scissors.
A plastic scraper.
A plastic scraper will not damage the cabinet. Do not use a metal scraper.
A suitable cleaning agent.
Paper towels or rags.
A new RFI gasket.
Removing the
old gasket
Follow these steps to remove the old gasket from the cabinet:
1. Insert the knife blade through one of the slots in the gasket.
2. Cut the gasket base material down to the cabinet base.
3. Peel the gasket off from the cabinet, beginning at the cut.
Use the plastic scraper or knife blade to raise the gasket away from the cabinet.
As the gasket pulls away, some gasket adhesive may remain on the cabinet.
4. Wet a paper towel or rag with the cleaning solution, and wipe it over any remaining
gasket adhesive.
The cleaner will soften the old gasket adhesive.
5. Use the plastic scraper to scrape away the old adhesive.
6. Clean the gasket area with more cleaning solution, and allow to dry.
Once the gasket and its old adhesive have been removed, the new gasket can be
installed.
518 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
GSM-100-523 RFI finger gasket replacement procedure
Installing the
new gasket
Follow these steps to install the new gasket:
1. Measure the new gasket material
The gasket material comes in 600 mm lengths.
2. Cut the gaskets to length with the knife or scissors
Short lengths of gasket can be replaced. Motorola recommends a minimum length
of three fingers per strip.
NOTE
The gasket cannot be bent into or around a corner. Use separate strips of
gasket for the top, bottom, and sides of cabinets and doors. Cut the gasket to
the nearest whole gasket-finger length. Maximum gaps between gasket strips
of 10 mm (one gasket-finger width) are permissible.
3. Peel about 50 mm of the backing paper from the gasket strip. Do not cut the
paper from the gasket.
4. Align the gasket with the edge of the cabinet, and press the gasket into place.
Lift the gasket fingers carefully and press the base of the gasket to affix the gasket
to the cabinet.
CAUTION
Do not put pressure on the tops of the gasket fingers.
5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 for all the gasket strips.

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Fan replacement procedure GSM-100-523
Fan replacement procedure
Purpose
This section explains how to replace the older type fans (5901694E01) with the new
(5902872w01) type fans. The old type fans are not available as replacement parts.
This procedure should only be used to replace an old style fan with the new style fan.
Old fan assemblies can be identified as they have grey painted aluminium grills and four
(4) nickel plated captive screws fitted in the corners of the grill.
New fan assemblies have plastic grilles and four black plastic quarterturn fixings.
The new fan assembly consists of:
Fan guard front 1off 1502392W01
Fan and rear guard 1 off 5902872W01
Screw 4 off 0310907C72
Tools and
equipment
This procedure requires the following tools and equipment:
A T20 torx driver.
Procedure
Follow these steps to replace the fan:
1. Locate the faulty fan.
2. Identify and remove the correct fuse for the faulty fan (a chart on the inside of the
DAB door identifies the fuses).
3. Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the four quarter turn fasteners that secure
4. Grasp the fan and pull it outward away from the cabinet.
5. Disconnect the fan power cable and remove the fan from the cabinet.
6. Unscrew and remove the two (2) M4 star head screws securing the grill onto the
fan (a T20 torx driver is required) and discard the old fan.
7. Repeat step 6 for the new fan.
8. Retain the fan, but discard the plastic grill and the fixing screws.
9. Fit the metal grill to the new fan using the original screws.
10. Connect the power cable to the new fan.
11. Install the new fan in the cabinet.
12. Using a flat blade screwdriver, tighten the four quarter turn fasteners that secure
13. Insert the fuse removed in step 2 and check the fan works correctly.
14. Advise the OMC that the repair is complete and check that fuse and fan alarms at
the OMC are cleared.
520 1st Jun 01

68P02901W05-A
GMR-01
Index
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A I1
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
Service Manual: BTS

I2 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
A BTS5
cabling diagrams, +27 V version: 323, 156
air deflector differences from BTS6: 323, 155
installing in BSSC, BTS4 and BTS5: 423, 27 interconnect panel: 323, 435
installing in BSSC2 and BTS6: 423, 27 BTS6
air filter base station unit shelf: 323, 12
cleaning procedure: 523, 33 cabinet
replacement procedure: 523, 32, 45 dimensions: 121, 13
internal view: 121, 12
alarm interface board (AIB): 323, 429 cabling diagrams
Alarms, internal alarm system, replacing a power +27 V version: 323, 121
converter: 523, 478 48/60 V version: 323, 110
fan cooling system: 323, 17
arriving at a site: 423, 111 interconnect panel: 323, 18, 436
internal units: 121, 13
power distribution unit: 323, 16
B bus terminator card (BTC): 323, 37
backplane, replacement procedure: 523, 511
installing the cage: 523, 515
obtaining authorization: 523, 512
C
removing the cage: 523, 513 cabinet dimemsions: 121, 21
tools and equipment: 523, 511 cabinets
backplane connections BSSC2, fan cooling system: 323, 432
BIB: 423, 274 BTS4
T43: 423, 269 cabling diagrams (+27 V): 323, 144
cabling diagrams (48/60 version): 323, 133
backup power, consumption: 423, 17 differences from BTS6: 323, 132
balanced line interconnect board (BIB): 323, 439 interconnect panel: 323, 433
BTS5
base station unit shelf
cabling diagrams (+27 V version): 323, 156
BTS6: 323, 12
differences from BTS6: 323, 155
slot assignment: 323, 32 interconnect panel: 323, 435
battery backup board (BBBX): 323, 363 BTS6
cabling diagrams (+27 V version): 323, 121
BBBX, installing: 423, 257
cabling diagrams (48/60 V ): 323, 110
before visiting a site: 423, 111 dimensions: 121, 13
fan cooling system: 323, 17, 432
bend radius, optical fibres: 423, 110
interconnect panel: 323, 18, 436
BIB, backplane connections: 423, 274 internal units: 121, 13
internal view: 121, 12
BSU, module plan: 423, 259
power distribution unit: 323, 16
BTC, replacement procedures, nonredundant cards: delivery: 423, 21
523, 54 dimensions: 423, 15
BTS environmental limitations: 423, 15
See also BTS4; BTS5; BTS6 labelling
decommissioning: 423, 32 BTS4: 423, 114
BTS5: 423, 116
receiver equipment, overview: 323, 22
BTS6: 423, 118
transmitter equipment, overview: 323, 24
lifting: 423, 22, 31
BTS4 overcurrent protection: 423, 18
cabling diagrams packaging: 423, 22
+27 V version: 323, 144 power requirements: 323, 42
48/60 V version: 323, 133 torque values: 423, 11, 23
differences from BTS6: 323, 132 types covered: 423, 21
interconnect panel: 323, 433 weights: 423, 22
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A I3
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
cables decommissioning
BBBX: 423, 257 BTS: 423, 32
control signal: 423, 266 checklist: 423, 35
earth: 423, 217 prerequisite: 423, 31
power: 423, 217
RF: 423, 223 digital cage
replacement, authorization procedure: 523, 512
cabling diagrams replacement procedure: 523, 511
BTS4 installing the cage: 523, 515
+27 V version: 323, 144 removing the cage: 523, 513
48/60 V version: 323, 133 tools and equipment: 523, 511
BTS5, +27 V version: 323, 156
BTS6 digital modules
+27 V version: 323, 121 BSU shelf slot assignments: 323, 32
48/60 V version: 323, 110 drix compatibility: 323, 367
factory installed: 423, 256
catering, on site: 423, 111 front panels: 323, 35
full size
cavity combining block, installing: 423, 249
BTC: 323, 37
CCB 900/1800, description: 323, 229 DRIM: 323, 38
GCLK: 323, 313
circuit breakers: 323, 431 GDP: 323, 356
removing and replacing: 523, 52 GPROC: 323, 317
cleaning, optical fibres: 423, 19; 523, 34 GPROC2: 323, 323
KSW: 323, 328
cleaning procedure, air filters: 523, 33 MSI: 323, 335
clock extender (CLKX): 323, 364 MSI2: 323, 340
overview: 323, 36
common antenna, connecting: 423, 224 TSW: 323, 346
XCDR: 323, 352
connecting
half size
common antenna: 423, 224
BBBX: 323, 363
power cables
CLKX: 323, 364
negative earth cabinets: 423, 219
DRIX3: 323, 366
positive earth cabinets: 423, 220
KSWX: 323, 369
RF cables: 423, 223
LANX: 323, 372
for external combining and filtering: 423, 255
overview: 323, 362
separate receive antenna: 423, 224
PIX: 323, 377
separate transmit antenna: 423, 223
installing: 423, 256
connecting a LMT installing BBBXs: 423, 257
connecting to a GPROC: 523, 210 installing DRIX3s: 423, 257
general maintenance procedures: 523, 210 RXU shelf slot assignments: 323, 33
connecting a local maintenance terminal digital radio interface (DRIM): 323, 38
connecting to a GPROC: 523, 210
digital radio interface extender (DRIX3): 323, 366
general maintenance procedures: 523, 210
distribution alarm board (DAB): 323, 418
connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT),
security level changes: 523, 211 diversity receive extender, installing: 423, 240
control signal cabling, installing: 423, 266 DPSM
replacement procedure: 523, 459
nonredundant modules: 523, 460
D redundant modules: 523, 460
DAB, replacement procedure: 523, 57 DRAM battery backup: 121, 22
Service Manual: BTS

I4 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
DRCU, installing: 423, 225 external equipment rack

(D)RCU shelf duplexer: 323, 292
DRCU: 323, 232 overview: 323, 291
DRCUII: 323, 242 quadraplexer: 323, 293
DRCU3: 323, 252 eyebolts, inserting: 423, 22, 31
SCU900: 323, 262
SCU1800: 323, 262
DRCU shelf, overview: 323, 231 F
DRCU term, definition: 423, 11 fan cooling system
DRCU: 323, 232 BTS6: 323, 17
DRCUII: 323, 242 FPCU: 323, 432
installing: 423, 225 overview: 323, 432
DRCU3: 323, 252 fan power converter unit (FPCU): 323, 432
installing: 423, 227 Fan replacement procedure: 523, 520
DRIX3, installing: 423, 257 faults, locating faulty devices: 523, 212
dual path preselector faulty devices
installing: 423, 238 checking the status: 523, 212
replacement procedure: 523, 414 locating: 523, 212
duplexer: 323, 292 five cavity RTC, diagram: 423, 246
four cavity RTC, diagram: 423, 247
E frequency, bands, PGSM900: 121, 22
earthing full size digital modules
cable sizes: 423, 217 BTC: 323, 37
site: 423, 23 DRIM: 323, 38
GCLK: 323, 313
enhanced power supply module (EPSM): 323, 46 GDP: 323, 356
environment: 121, 21 GPROC: 323, 317
GPROC2: 323, 323
EPSM
KSW: 323, 328
MSI: 323, 335
replacement procedure: 523, 459
MSI2: 323, 340
redundant modules: 523, 460 overview: 323, 36
TSW: 323, 346
equipment safety: 523, 212 XCDR: 323, 352
external equipment
power cabling
to DRAM backup battery: 423, 215 G
to external multicoupler: 423, 215
to external RTC: 423, 215 GDP
RF cabling, for external combining and filtering: replacement procedure: 523, 463
423, 255 technical description: 323, 356
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A I5
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
general maintenance procedures I

connecting a LMT: 523, 210
connecting to a GPROC: 523, 210 IAS alarms, replacing a power converter: 523, 478
setting up the man machine interface: 523,
211 installing
setting up the MMI: 523, 211 air deflector
connecting a local maintenance terminal: 523, in BSSC, BTS4 and BTS5: 423, 27
210 in BSSC2 and BTS6: 423, 27
connecting to a GPROC: 523, 210 cavity combining block: 423, 249
setting up the man machine interface: 523, control signal cabling
211 for E1/T1 line connections: 423, 266
setting up the MMI: 523, 211 for end user I/O devices: 423, 267
equipment safety: 523, 212 for inter cabinet fibre optics: 423, 266
general repair procedures: 523, 25 digital modules: 423, 256
identifying faulty devices: 523, 212 diversity receive extender: 423, 240
checking device status: 523, 212 DPSM: 423, 222
introduction to: 523, 21 DRCU: 423, 225
locating faulty cabinets: 523, 27 DRCUII: 423, 225
man machine interface: 523, 26 DRCU3: 423, 227
MMI: 523, 26 dual path preselector: 423, 238
EPSM: 423, 222
resetting and reinitializing a site: 523, 214
eyebolts: 423, 22
test and repair equipment lists: 523, 22
glass optical fibres: 423, 264
general repair procedures, general maintenance hybrid combiner and power load: 423, 242
procedures: 523, 25 IPSM: 423, 222
optical fibres: 423, 261
generic clock (GCLK): 323, 313 passive splitter: 423, 239
generic processor (GPROC): 323, 317 PIX: 423, 267
polymer optical fibres: 423, 261
generic processor2 (GPROC2): 323, 323 preselector
with 6 way splitter: 423, 235
glass optical fibres
with receiver matrix: 423, 236
RTC: 423, 244
replacement procedures: 523, 426
SCU900: 423, 229
GPROC SCU1800: 423, 229
connecting a LMT: 523, 210 spacer: 423, 227, 229
connecting a local maintenance terminal: 523, tool kits for: 423, 12
210 transmit bandpass filter: 423, 254
GPROC/GPROC2, replacement: 523, 439 installing TCU modules: 423, 231

integrated power supply module (IPSM): 323, 49
interconnect panel
H BIB: 323, 439
BTS4: 323, 433; 423, 213
BTS5: 323, 435; 423, 212
half size digital modules
BTS6: 323, 18, 436; 423, 211
BBBX: 323, 363
overview: 323, 433
CLKX: 323, 364
T43: 323, 437
DRIX3: 323, 366
KSWX: 323, 369 internal alarm system alarms, replacing a power
LANX: 323, 372 converter: 523, 478
overview: 323, 362 IPSM
PIX: 323, 377 installing: 423, 222
hybrid combiner: 323, 220 replacement procedure: 523, 459
hybrid combiner and power load, installing: 423, 242 redundant modules: 523, 460
Service Manual: BTS

I6 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
K O
kiloport switch extender (KSWX): 323, 369 obtaining authorization: 523, 512
kiloport switch (KSW): 323, 328 MCSC review: 523, 512
optical fibres
KSW, replacement procedure
nonredundant modules: 523, 446 bend radius: 423, 110
redundant modules: 523, 444 cleaning: 423, 19; 523, 34
connection: 423, 19
KSWX, replacement procedure handling: 423, 19
nonredundant modules: 523, 451 installing: 423, 261
redundant modules: 523, 448 protection: 423, 19
L P
labelling parallel interface extender (PIX): 323, 377
BTS4: 423, 114
BTS5: 423, 116 passive splitter: 323, 213
BTS6: 423, 118 installing: 423, 239
LANX, replacement procedure periodic maintenance, air filters: 523, 32, 45

nonredundant modules: 523, 454 PGSM900, frequency band: 121, 22
redundant modules: 523, 452
PIX
leaving a site: 423, 112 connector: 423, 267
LMT definition: 523, 457
changing the security level: 523, 211 installing: 423, 267
setting up the MMI: 523, 211 replacement procedure: 523, 457
local area network extender (LANX): 323, 372 polymer optical fibres
local maintenance terminal replacement procedures: 523, 424
security level changes: 523, 211
setting up the MMI: 523, 211 power
BBBX connections: 423, 257
locating faulty cabinets, general maintenance BTS4 connections: 423, 213
procedures: 523, 27 BTS5 connections: 423, 212
BTS6 connections: 423, 211
cable sizes: 423, 217
M connecting external equipment: 423, 215
connecting to cabinet: 423, 217
man machine interface connecting to main source: 423, 221
general maintenance procedures: 523, 26 consumption
setting up: 523, 211 backup: 423, 17
miscellaneous repair procedures: 523, 51 negative earth BTS: 423, 17
positive earth BTS: 423, 17
MMI DAB setup: 423, 210
general maintenance procedures: 523, 26 input limits: 423, 29
setting up: 523, 211 PAB setup: 423, 29
Security level changes at an LMT: 523, 211 preparing to connect: 423, 29
supply modules, installing: 423, 222
module plan
terminal sizes: 423, 29
BSU: 423, 259
RXU: 423, 260 power alarm board, PAB: 323, 422
MSI, replacement procedure: 523, 455 power converter, replacement procedure: 523, 478
multiple serial interface (MSI): 323, 335 power converter unit (PCU): 323, 412
multiple serial interface (MSI2): 323, 340 power distribution board (PDB): 323, 429
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A I7
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
power distribution unit replacement procedure

AIB: 323, 429 GCLK, redundant: 523, 435
BTS6: 323, 16 redundant GCLK: 523, 435
circuit breakers: 323, 431 replacement procedures: 523, 41
DAB: 323, 418 (D)RCUs: 523, 418
overview: 323, 417 air filters: 523, 32, 45
PAB: 323, 422 backplane replacement: 523, 511
PDB: 323, 429 installing the cage: 523, 515
removing the cage: 523, 513
Power Requirements: 121, 21
tools and equipment: 523, 511
power requirements: 323, 42 circuit breakers: 523, 52
digital cage, obtaining authorization: 523, 512
power supply module, replacement procedure: 523, digital cage replacement: 523, 511
459 installing the cage: 523, 515
nonredundant modules: 523, 460 removing the cage: 523, 513
redundant modules: 523, 460 tools and equipment: 523, 511
power supply modules DRIM: 523, 422
EPSM: 323, 46 DRIX: 523, 423
IPSM: 323, 49 dual path preselector (DPP): 523, 414
overview: 323, 42 duplexer: 523, 432
PCU: 323, 412 fans: 523, 434
GCLK
preselector: 323, 216 multishelf configuration: 523, 438
nonredundant: 523, 436
protecting, optical fibres: 423, 19
single shelf configuration: 523, 437
GDP: 523, 463
glass optical fibres: 523, 426
Q GPROC/GPROC2: 523, 439
hybrid combiner: 523, 442
quadraplexer: 323, 293 interface boards: 523, 47
MSI: 523, 455
nonredundant BTC: 523, 54
nonredundant CLKX: 523, 413
R nonredundant GCLK: 523, 436
multishelf configuration: 523, 438
reinitializing a site: 523, 214 single shelf configuration: 523, 437
nonredundant KSW: 523, 446
receiver equipment overview: 323, 22 nonredundant KSWX: 523, 451
receiver front end modules nonredundant LANX: 523, 454
passive splitter: 323, 213 nonredundant TSW: 523, 446
preselector: 323, 216 PIX: 523, 457
receiver matrix: 323, 217 polymer optical fibres: 523, 424
6 way splitter: 323, 213 quadraplexer: 523, 432
radio units: 523, 418
receiver matrix: 323, 217 RCUs: 523, 418
installing: 423, 236 redudnant TSW: 523, 444
removing and replacing: 523, 475 redundant CLKX: 523, 411
redundant KSW: 523, 444
remote transcoder unit shelf, slot assignments: 323,
redundant KSWX: 523, 448
33
redundant LANX: 523, 452
remotely tunable combiner replacing an DAB: 523, 57
replacement: 523, 465 SCUs: 523, 418
single cavity replacement: 523, 468 transmit bandpass filter: 523, 49
Tx BPF: 523, 49
remotely tuneable combiner (RTC): 323, 226 XCDR: 523, 461
removal and replacement procedures, receiver replacing digital cages, authorization procedure: 523,
matrix: 523, 475 512
Service Manual: BTS

I8 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
resetting a site: 523, 214 separate transmit antenna, connecting: 423, 223
RF cables, connecting: 423, 223 site requirements
for external combining and filtering: 423, 255 dimensions: 423, 15
environmental: 423, 15
RF modules
structural: 423, 15
(D)RCU shelf
DRCU: 323, 232 6 way splitter: 323, 213
DRCUII: 323, 242 installing: 423, 235
DRCU3: 323, 252 spacer, installing: 423, 227, 229
SCU900: 323, 262
SCU1800: 323, 262 status checking, identifying faulty devices: 523, 212
DRCU shelf, overview: 323, 231 swapping a device: 523, 43
external equipment rack
systems covered: 423, 11
duplexer: 323, 292
overview: 323, 291
quadraplexer: 323, 293
overview: 323, 21 T
receiver front end T43, backplane connections: 423, 269
passive splitter: 323, 213
preselector: 323, 216 T43 interconnect board: 323, 437
receiver matrix: 323, 217 taking a device OOS: 523, 42
6 way splitter: 323, 213
transmit combiner shelf TCUs, installation: 423, 231
CCB 900/1800: 323, 229 test and repair equipment lists, general maintenance
hybrid combiner: 323, 220 procedures: 523, 22
overview: 323, 219 timeslot switch (TSW): 323, 346
RTC: 323, 226
Tx BPF: 323, 225 tool kits, installation
one: 423, 12
RFE shelf, modules in: 423, 233 two: 423, 14
RTC, installing: 423, 244 torque values: 423, 11, 23
rubbish, disposal on site: 423, 112 transceiver control unit
rural sites, visiting: 423, 112 frequency bands: 323, 272
technical description: 323, 272
RXU, module plan: 423, 260 alarm reporting: 323, 274
control driver board: 323, 289
data link details: 323, 281
S digital processing and control board: 323, 280
downlink (Tx) digital processing: 323, 281
safety DPC firmware tasks: 323, 282
cabinet weights: 423, 22 front panel diagram: 323, 275
connecting mains power: 423, 221 front panel switches: 323, 274
delivery: 423, 21 LEDs: 323, 274
earth cable sizes: 423, 217 maintenance details: 323, 273
on site: 423, 113 power amplifier board: 323, 289
overcurrent protection: 423, 18 processing and control: 323, 283
power cable sizes: 423, 217 receiver board detail: 323, 277
site earthing: 423, 23 TCU circuitry: 323, 273
transient and lightning protection: 423, 23 TCU input/output diagram: 323, 276
SCU900, installing: 423, 229 TMS functions: 323, 284
traffic and control channel output: 323, 278
slim channel unit 900 (SCU900): 323, 262 transceiver station manager board: 323, 283
SCU1800, installing: 423, 229 transmitter board details: 323, 287
transmitter details: 323, 287
slim channel unit 1800 (SCU1800): 323, 262
Uplink (Rx) digital processing: 323, 282
separate receive antenna, connecting: 423, 224 view: 323, 273
Service Manual: BTS

1st Jun 01 68P02901W37-A I9
GMR-01
GSM-100-020
transcoder (GDP): 323, 356 U

transcoder (XCDR): 323, 352
unlocking a device: 523, 43
transient and lightning protection: 423, 23 unpacking, cabinets: 423, 25
transmit bandpass filter
replacement procedure: 523, 49 V
transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF): 323, 225 visiting sites
arriving: 423, 111
transmit combiner shelf before: 423, 111
hybrid combiner: 323, 220 catering facilities: 423, 111
modules in: 423, 241 leaving: 423, 112
overview: 323, 219 rubbish: 423, 112
RTC: 323, 226 rural sites: 423, 112
Tx BPF: 323, 225 safety: 423, 113
transmitter equipment overview: 323, 24
transportation panel fillers, removing: 423, 222 X
TSW, replacement procedure XCDR
nonredundant modules: 523, 446 replacement procedure: 523, 461
redundant modules: 523, 444 technical desription: 323, 352
Service Manual: BTS

I10 68P02901W37-A 1st Jun 01
GMR-01

68P02901W37

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

68P02901W37

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

For:cll

Printed on:Mon, Jun 24, 2002 07:41:32

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

BTS4 differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

CCB 900/1800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Transceiver control unit (TCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Service Manual: BTS

BSU and RXU shelf diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Fan cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Service Manual: BTS

Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Service Manual: BTS

Connecting dc power cables between cabinets and external equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Service Manual: BTS

Installing the hybrid combiner and power load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Service Manual: BTS

BIB to backplane connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Service Manual: BTS

Connecting a local maintenance terminal (LMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Service Manual: BTS

Transmit bandpass filter (Tx BPF) replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Service Manual: BTS

Replacing a duplexer/quadraplexer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432

Service Manual: BTS

Nonredundant KSWX module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Service Manual: BTS

Replacing the RTC control processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Service Manual: BTS

DRAM battery backup fuse failure alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Issue status of this manual

Manual Date of Remarks

Service GMR Remarks

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS

Special key sequences

CTRL-c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

Service Manual: BTS

First aid in case of electric shock

Service Manual: BTS

Reporting safety issues

Service Manual: BTS

Warnings and cautions

Example and format

Example and format

Service Manual: BTS

Service Manual: BTS